Part+B+Civil+Component+Page+1 462 (1)

NameofWork:C/oCommonCentralSecretariat-13 on plot 138, Mansingh Road,
New Delhi including Operation & Maintenance for 5 years.
PART-B
SPECIAL CONDITIONS
(CIVIL WORKS)
Part-B
Page 1
Special Conditions
1. Engagement of Associates for Specialized works other than Furniture:
1.1. The main contractor has to associate agencies for specialized component(s)
conforming to eligibility criteria as defined below and has to submit detail of
such agency(s) to Engineer-in-Charge of relevant component(s) within
prescribed time. Name of the agency(s) to be associated shall be approved
by Engineer-in-Charge of relevant component(s). The associated specialised
agency should satisfy following experience criteria during the last seven years
ending last day of month previous to date of award of the work:
(a) Three works each costing not less than 40% of tendered cost for proposed
similar specialised work concerned.
Or
(b) Two works each costing not less than 60% of tendered cost for proposed
similar specialised work concerned.
Or
(c) One work costing not less than 80% of tendered cost for proposed similar
specialised work concerned.
The value of executed works shall be brought to current costing level by

enhancing the actual value of work at simple rate of 7% per annum;
calculated from the date of completion to previous day of last day of month
previous to date of award of the work.
1.2. The Contractor shall submit documents in support of experience of proposed

specialised agency, issued by competent authority for approval of the
Engineer-in-Charge of the respective discipline. The contractor shall submit
all required relevant documentary evidences to the satisfaction of Engineer
in charge for ascertaining credentials of specialized agencies as may be
demanded by Engineer in charge like certified copy of work order/contract
with BOQ, income tax TDS certificates/Form-26AS in support of amount paid,
satisfactory completion certificate etc. including inspection of such works.
1.3. In case Engineer-in-charge is satisfied that the Specialized Agencies with

above credentials are not available, then multiple agencies may be approved
Part-B
Page 2
or the above criteria may be relaxed with the approval of NIT approving
authority. The decision of Engineer-in-charge shall be final and binding on
the contractor.
1.4. The main contractor may have to choose more than one specialized agency,
limited to maximum 3, for a specific specialized work, depending on
requirement of target progress and to be in conformity with the above
specified eligibility criteria for quantum of work proposed.
1.5. In case main contractor himself has satisfactorily completed similar work of
required magnitude as mentioned above, he may also be allowed to carry out
specialized work. However, in such cases, contractor has to certify that such
similar work was not executed by him through any other specialised agency.
1.6. In case the main contractor intends to change any of the above
agency/agencies during the operation of the contract, he shall obtain prior
approval of Engineer-in-Charge of relevant specialized component(s). The
new agency/agencies shall also have to satisfy the laid down eligibility
criteria. In case Engineer-in-Charge is not satisfied with the performance of
any agency, he can direct the contractor to change the agency executing such
items of work and this shall be binding on the contractor.
1.7. The main contractor has to enter into MoU with agency(s) associated by him.
Copy of such MoU shall be submitted to EE/ DDH in charge of each relevant
component as well as to EE-in-charge of major component. In case of change
of associate contractor, the main agency(s) has to enter into MoU/agreement
with the new contractor associated by him.
1.8. Specialized Items of Work (Civil): Various specialized items of works

under this agreement in respect of civil construction are as below:
(a) Diaphragm Wall

(b) Stone Cladding work
(c) Structural glazing work/ Curtain Wall
(d) Stone/Aluminium Jali work
(e) Dry wall Partitions & Toilet cubicles
(f) Precast RCC / Prefabricated toilet units (Toilet Pods)
(g) Aluminium work
(h) Carpet
Part-B
Page 3
(i) Custom made furniture
(j) Signage
(k) Irrigation
(l) Brass fabrication Works
1.9. Some of the specialized items of work such as the ones listed below, shall be
executed by the contractor through the Manufacturer of the items or through
their authorized applicators/installers only
(a) Water proofing treatment

(b) Anti-termite chemical treatment
(c) Mechanised spray plaster
(d) False Ceiling
(e) Fire Resistant Doors
(f) Acoustic treatment
(g) Modular Railing
(h) Modular System Windows and partitions
(i) Furniture
(j) Expansion/seismic joint system
2. Additional Security Deposit: Additional security @5% of value of work done and
paid for water proofing subhead (all items), furniture work subhead (all items),
stone cladding work (all items including back framing), structural glazing works
(all items including glass), anti-termite treatment items and fire doors (all items
including glass and fittings) shall be deducted from bills. This additional security
can also be deposited in the form of bank guarantee issued by the scheduled bank.
Such bank guarantee bond shall be valid for the period of 10 years from date of
completion of whole construction work, recorded by the Engineer-in-charge. The
Performa for the BG shall be as given in the tender document. The 50% of such
additional security amount can be released after of half of the total guarantee
period on satisfactory performance of the item.
3. Guarantee bond: The contractor shall submit Guarantee bond for various items
of work as stipulated in the contract document. Performa for Guarantee bond shall
be as given in the tender document.
Part-B
Page 4
4. Setting Out
4.1. It shall be responsibility of the Contractor to ensure correct setting out of

alignment. Total station survey instruments only shall be used for layout,
fixing boundaries, centre lines, etc., Nothing extra shall be payable on this
account.
4.2. Permanent Benchmarks: Contractor shall provide permanent bench marks,

flat tops and other reference points for the proper execution of work and
these shall be preserved till the end of the work. Contractor to submit
drawings showing location of permanent bench marks, flat tops and other
reference points to Engineer in charge for records. All such reference points
shall be in relation to the levels and locations given in the drawings
4.3. Through the site levels are indicated in the drawings the Contractor shall
ascertain and confirm the site levels with respect to benchmark from the
concerned authorities. These benchmarks shall be got checked by the
Engineer-in-Charge or his authorized representatives. The work at different
stages shall be checked with reference to bench marks maintained for the
said purpose. Nothing extra shall be payable on this account.
4.4. The contractor shall be entirely and exclusively responsible for the horizontal,
vertical and other alignments, the level and correctness of every part of the
work and shall rectify effectively any errors or imperfections therein.
4.5. The contractor shall correlate all the relevant drawings and specifications etc.
and satisfy himself that the information available is complete and
unambiguous. The contractor shall be responsible for any loss or damage
occurring by the commencement of work based on any erroneous and or
incomplete information.
5. Scaffolding/ Shuttering
5.1. For the execution of work, all the scaffolding shall be provided and suitably
fixed, by the Contractor. It shall be provided strictly with steel double
scaffolding system, suitably braced for stability, with all the accessories,
gangways, etc. with adjustable suitable working platforms to access the areas
with ease for working and inspection. Contractor shall design all scaffolding
and formwork/shuttering for all anticipated design loads as well as all
Part-B
Page 5
incidental loads. It should cater to the safety features for workmen. It shall
be ensured that no damage is caused to any structure due to the scaffolding.
Approval of scaffolding and shuttering work by Engineer-in-charge will not
relieve the contractor of owning complete responsibility for its safe design,
storage, erection, operations and dismantling.
5.2. At the request of contractor, the use of Marine Ply shuttering may be
permitted by Engineer-in-Charge. Nothing extra shall be payable on this
account.
5.3. Foam Sheet/ Jointing tape/stoppers shall be used in the joints of shuttering
to ensure no leakage of cement slurry. Nothing extra shall be payable on this
account.
5.4. Specification for formwork as given in the CPWD specification volume I - 2019
shall be followed in general. Special forms or systems with the approved
materials, to achieve required shape, height or finish based on the
methodology submitted by the agency.
5.5. For self-compacting concrete, contractor shall provide shuttering system

capable to sustain high lateral pressure. All joints shall be sufficiently tight to
prevent leakage of cement including (SCC) self-compacting concrete. All
faulty joints shall be adequately caulked. Approved system of sealing the
joints may be adopted.
5.6. Water stop tie rods should be used.
5.7. Contractor should adopt modern scaffolding and shuttering system for speedy
and safe execution of construction work.
5.8. Modern steel scaffolding systems like cuplock system, H frame etc must be
adopted by the contractor.
5.9. Modern steel shuttering and formwork systems must be adopted by the
contractor.
5.10. Specialised formwork systems like aluminium form work, doka formwork
system, push-pull props, steel waler beams, steel clamps, etc. should be
adopted. Nothing extra shall be paid on this account.
Part-B
Page 6
6. Land for Storage/Labour Camps/RMC:
6.1. Contractor shall make his own arrangements of land/building for establishing
labour camp, batching plant, storage yards etc. within Delhi/NCR area and
also, transportation of labour and materials from such yards/camps to the
intended location at construction site, for all times, as per requirement of
work, at his own cost. All necessary License/Lease charges/rent, if any, for
such land/buildings shall be borne by the Contractor only. Further he should
arrange electricity, water and other facilities etc. on his own and bear all
charges complete. CPWD will issue the recommendation letter and provide
assistance for getting the land/ building allotment, for execution of this Govt.
work. The Contractor shall abide by the terms and conditions of the
land/building allotment. No hindrance on account of the delay in allotment of
the land/building to the contractor will be entertained.
6.2. Contractor shall make his own arrangement for transportation of Batch Mix
Concrete and other materials from/to Batching Plant/yard at his own cost.
6.3. Contractor shall be allowed to temporarily use any available space within
construction site(s) for establishing his office, labour camp, batching plant,
storage yards etc. at his own cost, with prior approval of Engineer-in-charge.
He will arrange electricity, water and other facilities etc. on his own and bear
all charges complete. Provided, such establishment should not hinder or slow
down the execution of planned construction work. Contractor shall submit
layout drawings of his proposed temporary establishment at construction site
for approval of Engineer-in-charge, prior to such establishment. Contractor
may be required to remove his establishment at site by Engineer-in-charge
at any time during execution of work and nothing extra shall be paid to the
contractor for such removal and shifting of his establishment. No lease/rental
charges shall be levied on contractor for space within construction site utilized
by contractor to make his temporary establishments with prior approval of
engineer-in-charge.
7. Site Office for CPWD
7.1. In order to carry out efficient and timely monitoring and supervision of work
under execution at site, by the CPWD team and its associates, contractor
Part-B
Page 7
shall establish one fully furnished and functional site office for the
department. For this purpose, the contractor shall construct a fully furnished
semi-permanent site office of about 250 sqm built-up area at the location
approved by the engineer in charge. Site office shall have office rooms, one
mini conference room, toilets, pantry etc. having all facilities viz furniture, E
& M facilities, drinking water, split ACs, fans, internet connection,
conferencing facility (in conference rooms), one medium size refrigerator,
one gas connection etc. all complete. Area around the site office shall be
paved with CC paver blocks as directed by Engineer-in-charge.
7.2. The contractor shall also provide 4 numbers of standalone desktops/laptops

with necessary licensed software such as latest version of WINDOWS, MS
Office in all four computers and AutoCAD software and Primavera or any other
approved PM software in one computer. Contractor shall also provide one
wi-fi enabled all-in-one colour photocopier cum printer cum scanner for
minimum A-3 size paper. All office equipment shall be of suitable
configuration/specification for facilitate smooth functioning of the site office.
7.3. Services of 2nos. MTS and 2nos data entry operators for this site office, shall
also be provided by the contractor from date of start of work till stipulated
date of completion of construction work + 6months.
7.4. Maintenance of site office as well as all AMC charges, electricity bill, water
supply bills, drinking water bills etc. shall be done/borne by the contractor at
his own cost till stipulated date of completion of construction work or
dismantling of site office whichever is earlier.
7.5. The drawing and layout plan of site office and specifications/make of all
finishes, fittings, office equipment and furniture, to be provided in the site
office by the contractor, shall be with prior approval of the engineer in charge.
The site office shall be constructed and made functional by the contractor
within 60 days of start of the work.
7.6. The site office building shall be dismantled and dismantled material shall be
disposed off by the contractor as per directions of engineer-in- charge. Such
dismantled material shall be property of the contractor. However, the
furniture, computers & softwares, printer, AC, refrigerator and conferencing
equipment shall remain property of department.
Part-B
Page 8
7.7. The cost of providing/establishing, operations, maintenance and dismantling
of site office for the department, as per above stipulated provisions shall be
borne by the contractor and nothing extra shall be paid for the same.
However, the items of furniture i.e. desks, chairs, almirahs, sofas and
conference table shall be paid under relevant BOQ items of this contract
agreement.
7.8. If contractor fails to provide the site office along with all facilities as per above
stipulated provisions, same shall be arranged by the department at the risk
and cost of the contractor and incurred expenditure shall be recovered from
the bills payable to the contractor.
7.9. Contractor shall provide services of inspection vehicles as per relevant BOQ
item, for use by CPWD team. The vehicles should not be more than 3 years
old.
8. Barricading of Construction site & Maintenance of adjoining areas:
8.1. Barricading of 15-meter height all along the periphery of the construction site
shall be provided by the Contractor with Galvalume profiled sheet and
structural steel framework, for full length of the periphery of construction
site(s). The structural design and drawings for the barricading and its
foundation shall be prepared by the contractor. Contractor shall ensure safe
and stable design and construction of barricading to avoid any mishap at site.
8.2. The structural dimension of the barricade, material and composition, colour
scheme, CPWD logo and other details shall be in accordance to the direction
of Engineer-in-charge, for which nothing extra will be paid to the Contractor.
8.3. The barricading shall be aesthetically maintained by regular cleaning and

painting by the contractor as directed by the Engineer-in-charge. Cleaning of
barricading shall be done every fifteen days with water and detergent to clean
dirt and splashes on the barricading. The dust accumulated along the
barricades on the carriageway shall be removed at regular interval.
8.4. All barricades shall be conspicuously visible in the dark/night time by the road
users so that no vehicle hits the barricade. Visibility shall be ensured by
affixing retro reflective stripes of required size and shape at appropriate angle
at the bottom and middle portion of the barricade at suitable gap. In addition,
red light or red-light blinker should be placed at the top of barricade at regular
Part-B
Page 9
intervals.
8.5. The barricading shall be provided continuously during the execution of the
entire construction work till completion and shall not be removed at any stage
without prior approval of the Engineer-in-Charge.
8.6. The barricading of site shall include the following items and activities also,
without any extra payment to the contractor:
(a) Providing traffic signals, reflective signs, direction boards, marking, glow
lamps, marking, caution tape, traffic signage, flags, traffic marshals etc.
as directed by the Engineer-in-Charge. However, traffic police signals
shall not be the responsibility of the Contractor.
(b) Installation of temporary warning signs/lamps on all barricades during
the hours of darkness and kept it lit there at all times during these hours.
(c) Fixing of Lit and Non-lit boards on the barricades, of various sizes and
design as per the direction of Engineer-in-charge and to keep the boards
lit during hours of darkness.
(d) Providing traffic cones of 500mm, 750mm and 1000mm height and
300mm to 500mm in diameter or in square shape at base, made of
plastic or rubber, with retro-reflective red and white band, wherever
required.
(e) Drums about 800mm to 1000mm height and 300mm in diameter with
retro-reflective tapes can be used either as channelizing or warning
devices.
(f) Shifting and re-fixing of barricades as per the direction of Engineer-in-
Charge and all incidentals to execute the job as many times as directed
by Engineer-in-Charge.
(g) Repainting of the barricading at regular intervals as directed by
Engineer-in-Charge.
(h) Proper maintenance of the barricading till completion of the construction
work by repairing/replacing the damaged barricade. Barricades shall be
maintained in proper line and level.
(i) Barricading is also required to be erected by the contractor at his own
cost for local segregation of work areas and deep excavation areas from
the movement of man and machinery. This type of barricading shall be
arranged by the contractor at his own cost.
Part-B
Page 10
(j) The contractor shall ensure cleanliness of all the roads and footpaths
abutting the construction site and yards which he uses for transportation
/ carriage of materials. The Contractor shall deploy manpower for
cleaning and ensure proper brooming, washing of roads and footpaths,
disposal of swept material etc. till the completion of construction work.
9. Quality Assurance
9.1. Quality Assurance Plan: Guide lines and provisions specified in the “Hand
book on Total quality management 2019” available on the official web site of
CPWD i.e. www. cpwd.gov.in shall be followed by the contractor, in general.
The contractor shall submit a “Quality Assurance” plan for the work, within
30 days after award of work.
9.2. Method Statement:
(a) Contractor shall submit detailed method statement for all major
activities/items of the work. The method statement should contain all
the required details like
 Description of Item,
 Step-wise elaborate procedure to implement the same,
 Pre-construction, during construction and post-construction
checklist,
 Details of tools, equipment and machinery to be used,
 Make and specifications of materials to be used,
 Role and responsibilities of Managers/Engineers/ Supervisors
involved in the activity.
 Tests to be conducted, frequency of testing, relevant testing
standards
 Precautions, Safety aspects for execution of work.
 Mode of Measurement, among others
(b) Engineer-in-charge shall reserve the right to seek
corrections/amendment in the submitted method statement. The
contractor shall submit the corrected / amended method statement as
directed by Engineer in charge. Contractor shall execute an activity only
after the approval of method statement by the Engineer-in-charge.
(c) For each and every activity before start of same in particular area,
checklist shall be filled and signed by the contractor’s site in-
Part-B
Page 11
charge/engineer, supervising that area (Civil as well as E&M) as well as
Assistant Engineer /Assistant Executive Engineer of department, in-
charge of respective work. Contractor shall ensure
examination/inspection of work by the Engineer in charge or his
authorized representatives at various stages of the activity and get his
signature on checklist for the activity as per the method statement.
(d) No compensation or hindrance for EOT of work will be granted to the
contractor for delay caused in execution of work owing to delay in
submission of method statement or modified method statement and
approval of same by Engineer-in-charge.
9.3. Approval of Materials:
(a) Samples of all materials and fittings to be used in the work shall be got
approved from the Engineer-in-Charge, well in advance of actual
execution of corresponding item/work at site. Contractor shall be
required to submit minimum 2 different samples of
material/fittings/items for selection and approval of Engineer-in-charge
unless otherwise directed by the Engineer-in-charge. If none of the
samples submitted by contractor are approved by Engineer-in-charge,
contractor shall submit new samples of materials/items, in conformity
of specifications and requirements stipulated in the contract, for
approval of Engineer-in-charge.
(b) Contractor shall submit samples of an item/material from preferred
make list and makes/models/manufacturers specified in the contract
document, for approval by Engineer-in-charge. Before proposing any
material/item, contractor shall ensure that the product conforms to the
specifications/parameters mentioned in BOQ item, technical
specifications, CPWD specifications and other applicable relevant
codes. Items which satisfy these parameters shall only be approved and
the decision of Engineer- in-charge shall be final and binding.
(c) Materials /items for which preferred make/models are not specified in
the contract document, ISI marked materials/items shall be used with
prior approval of Engineer-in-Charge, However, if ISI marked material /
items are not available, the contractor shall submit manufacturer
details, specifications, test certificates and samples of materials / items
Part-B
Page 12
for prior approval of Engineer-in-charge. Contractor must procure
material/ items manufactured by reputed manufacturers.
(d) The approved samples shall be preserved safely at site by the
contractor, till completion of work. Contractor shall make a yard room
for storing approved samples. The samples, kept in this room, shall be
labeled and stored in an orderly manner to enable easy access at any
time during the entire period of execution of work.
(e) The contractor shall submit details of source of materials, whose
manufacturer / supplier is not specified in the contract document, for
prior approval of the Engineer-in-Charge. The contractor shall procure
material from approved source only. Any change of source shall be done
with the prior approval of the Engineer-in-Charge.
(f) Materials used on work without prior approval of the Engineer-in-Charge
and inspection and testing (where testing is necessary) shall be liable to
be considered unauthorized, defective and not acceptable.
(g) The Engineer-in-Charge shall have full powers to order the contractor to
remove of any material brought to site which are not in accordance with
the contract specifications or do not conform to the samples approved
by the Engineer-in-Charge. In case the contractor fails to remove the
rejected materials, the Engineer-in-Charge shall get it removed at the
risk and cost of the contractor
(h) The contractor shall produce / procure all the materials in advance so
that there is sufficient time for testing and approving of the material and
clearance of the same before use in work.
9.4. Sample Preparation and Mock up units at site:
(a) The contractor shall invariably prepare the samples at site of finishing
items of work such as flooring of different types, Stone cladding,
Structural Glazing, Painting, Tiles/stones work, false ceiling, doors,
windows, dry wall paneling/partitions, flooring in staircase, modular
railings, water supply & sanitary fittings, furniture, furnishing and any
other item as per direction of Engineer-in-charge. The size of samples
and items for which samples are to be prepared by contractor shall be
decided by Engineer-in-charge and contractor shall abide by the same.
Part-B
Page 13
Samples shall be required to facilitate Engineer-in-charge assess the
standard of material quality, workmanship, aesthetics and potential
problems and conflicts in execution of work. The contractor shall execute
finishing items only after getting the samples of these items approved
from Engineer-in-charge. Samples of items shall not be measured and
quoted rates of items shall deem to cover the cost of samples and
nothing extra shall be payable to the contractor for preparation of
samples of finishing items. The samples shall be preserved, for the
purpose of reference, till completion of the item represented by the
sample and thereafter, it shall be removed from site by the contractor
at his own cost. The contractor shall dismantle and remove the rejected
sample from the site of work at his own cost, as per directions of
Engineer-in-charge.
(b) The contractor shall prepare at site a full-scale mock-up/prototype of
one common Toilet, one work hall, one conference hall, one office cabin
including attached toilet and one typical corridor for examination and
approval of Engineer-in-Charge. Mock up units shall be prepared as per
relevant drawings and directions of Engineer-in-charge. The mock-up
units shall incorporate all items, finishings, furniture and furnishing
items of Civil, E&M works and horticulture works as per approved
drawings for the respective unit.
(c) The main objective of samples and mock ups shall be to address
following aspects:
 To determine whether the Contractor and his associate agencies
possesses required skills necessary to execute the work, assemblies
or systems such that the built construction will satisfy specified
requirements
 To understand the sequence of operations and discuss alternative
sequencing options, if any
 To assess the standard of workmanship and aesthetics that are to
be replicated throughout the project
 To recognize and resolve potential areas of conflict prior to the
commencement of construction of said work on full scale.
(d) If the quality of the workmanship and material in the full-scale mock-
ups is as per the required standards and approved by the Engineer-in-
Part-B
Page 14
Charge, the mock up unit shall be allowed as part of the work and
measured for payment. Otherwise, it shall be dismantled by the
contractor as directed by the Engineer-in-Charge and taken away from
the site of the work at his own cost.
(e) Moreover, if situation warrants for preparation of mock-up/prototype
units outside the actual site of work and as directed by Engineer-in-
charge, the same shall also be paid one time @ 75% of rate of relevant
items of contract. Any changes suggested in mock up unit(s) at a later
date shall not be paid again. Contractor shall dismantle and remove the
such mock-up unit at his own cost, as per directions of Engineer-in-
charge.
(f) Contractor to make mock-up as per timelines/milestones specified in the
contract agreement and directions of Engineer-in-charge.
(g) Approval of the samples of items and mock-up units by the Engineer-in-
charge shall not absolve the Contractor from the responsibility of
replacing defective material brought at site or materials used in the work
but found defective at a later date. The Contractor shall have no claim
to any payment or compensation whatsoever on account of any such
materials being rejected by the Engineer-in-charge.
(h) Contractor shall remain fully responsible for quality of actual work
executed at site as per terms of contract, irrespective of approval of
samples and mock-up of items.
9.5. Testing of Materials:
(a) The contractor shall provide at site, a site testing laboratory equipped
with testing equipment and materials for conducting routine field tests
as specified in contract documents and CPWD Specifications. All tests in
the on-site laboratory shall be carried out by the quality control
engineers deployed by the contractor. These tests shall be witnessed by
Engineer-in-charge and/or his authorized representatives and also
TPQA. The contractor shall notify the Engineer-in-charge or his
authorized representative, the date and time for tests to be conducted
in on-site laboratory / site of work, for his presence and witnessing the
test.
Part-B
Page 15
(b) The type of tests and frequency of tests shall be as mentioned in CPWD
Specification 2019 unless otherwise mentioned elsewhere in the
contract document. Relevant IS Code shall be referred for tests if same
is not mentioned in CPWD speciation.
(c) Some of the routine mandatory tests to be performed in field laboratory
shall also be sent for testing to external approved testing laboratory.
The frequency of such outside testing shall be 10% of the total number
of tests to be conducted in onsite laboratory or as decided by the
Engineer-in-Charge, unless otherwise mentioned elsewhere in the
document.
(d) Routine field tests, for which facilities are not available in field
laboratory, shall be got tested from external test laboratories, approved
by Engineer-in-Charge.
(e) Tests and frequency of testing to be performed in external laboratory
shall be as specified in CPWD specifications and as decided by Engineer-
in-charge.
(f) External test laboratories shall be laboratories of Government
Institutes/IITs/NITs/Central and State Research Centres/Centrally and
State Funded Laboratories etc. or any lab approved by Engineer-in-
charge.
(g) All expenditure on testing of samples in on-site laboratory and external
approved laboratory such as cost of sample, packing and sealing,
transportation, loading, unloading, testing charges etc. shall be borne
by the contractor unless otherwise mentioned elsewhere in the
document.
(h) The Design Mix of concrete shall be got done from IIT Delhi, Delhi
Technological University (DTU) Delhi, NCCBM Faridabad or any other
lab/institute approved by Engineer-in-Charge. If approved by Engineer-
in-charge, Design mix of concrete can also be done in on-site laboratory,
provided engineering expertise and equipment for design mix of
concrete are available at site with the contractor.
(i) All costs incurred for Design Mix of Concrete such as cost of material
samples, packing and sealing, transportation, loading, unloading,
testing charges, design mix charges etc shall be borne by the contractor.
Part-B
Page 16
(j) The contractor shall submit proposed design mix for approval of
Engineer-in-charge. If Engineer-in-charge is not satisfied by the
proposed design mix of concrete, subsequent to its field trails or the
design mix is not in accordance to contract requirements and
specifications, contractor shall carry out new design mixes for concrete
for approval by Engineer-in-charge. Contractor shall remain fully
responsible for quality of concrete and its conformity to relevant
speciation even after the approval of design mix by the Engineer-in-
charge.
(k) All test samples will be collected/selected by the Engineer-in-charge or
his authorized representative. The contractor or his authorized
representative shall associate in collection, preparation,
forwarding/submission of test samples. If contractor or his authorized
representative does not associate in this process, the test results of
samples collected by Engineer-in-charge or his authorized
representative and consequences thereof, shall be binding on the
contractor.
(l) If any load testing or special testing is to be done for any sample of work
or item, whose strength/performance is doubtful, the cost of such tests
shall also be borne by the contractor.
(m) As per test reports, if any material/work fails to meet the acceptance
criteria, it shall be removed from the site by the contractor at his own
cost. New material shall be procured by the contractor and/or work shall
be redone/rectified by the contractor at his own cost. Nothing extra shall
be paid to contractor for procurement of new material and/or
redoing/rectifying the work which failed to meet the acceptance criteria.
In the absence of any specified test/acceptance criteria, the decision of
the Engineer-in-charge shall be final and binding as to whether the said
defective material/work be removed and substituted with other suitable
material or rectifications to be done. The contractor shall bear all the
expenses for any further tests considered necessary.
(n) The contractor shall produce, on demand from Engineer-in-charge, the
manufacturers’ certificates for materials brought to site.
(o) If Engineer-in-charge feels that the material supplied is not as per
required specifications even if it is ISI approved and have manufacturers
Part-B
Page 17
certificate, he can send the sample of such material also for testing in
approved lab.
(p) The Engineer-in-charge or his authorized representative shall be free to
visit the manufacturer unit/facilities, at all reasonable times, to witness
and inspect the testing of an item/material to be used in work. The
Contractor has to arrange facilities for inspection of equipment
/materials including conducting the required tests in the manufacturing
unit within India. However, the travelling, lodging and boarding and
related expenditure on visit of Engineer-in-charge or his authorized
representative shall be borne by the department as per applicable rules.
(q) It shall be duty of contractor to ensure that all manufactured items and
materials procured at site for the work are as per relevant specifications
and contract requirements.
(r) Performance test: The contractor shall conduct performance test of
hidden items/services such as water supply and sanitary lines, drainage
pipes, conduits, sewers, water proofing in toilets /terrace etc. as per the
specifications, in the presence of the Engineer-in-charge or his
authorized representative, before covering these services/items.
9.6. Maintenance of Tests and Material Procurement Records:
(a) Maintenance of Register of Tests- All tests carried out at

construction site, in house laboratory or outside laboratories shall be
recorded in the test registers by the contractor’s engineer and reviewed
by Engineer-in-charge and/or his authorised staff. Contractor shall
procure printed registers, at his own cost, as per format approved by
the Engineer in charge. All such registers, procured by the contractor
shall be duly issued by Engineer-in-Charge for use of the lab/field staffs.
Contractor shall keep all the registers updated with latest valid entries
and produce for inspection on the direction of engineer in charge or his
authorised representatives. Safe custody of all test records shall be
responsibility of contractor till the completion of work. On completion of
work, all test records shall be handed over to Engineer-in-charge by the
contractor. Scanned copy of test records shall be submitted by the
contractor to the Engineer-in-charge every quarter.
Part-B
Page 18
(b) Maintenance of Material at Site (MAS) Register- Contractor shall
duly record all receipts and issues of Cement, Reinf. steel, structural
steel, paints, other materials etc. in the MAS, Cement and paint registers
etc. and to be reviewed by Engineer-in-charge and/or his authorised
staff. Contractor shall procure printed registers, at his own cost, as per
format approved by the Engineer in charge. All such registers, procured
by the contractor shall be duly issued by Engineer-in-Charge for use of
the lab/field staffs. Contractor shall be responsible for safe custody of
all records i.e MAS, cement, paint, steel registers and other materials,
till the completion of work. On completion of work, all records shall be
handed over to Engineer-in-charge by the contractor. Scanned copy of
above records shall be submitted by the contractor to the Engineer-in-
charge every quarter.
(c) These records shall be inspected by Engineer-in-charge or his/her
authorized representative regularly. The records shall be available to
the Engineer-in-Charge or his authorized representative whenever
required.
(d) All the entries in the material procurement registers (MAS registers) and
test registers will be done by the designated engineering staff of the
Contractor. All entries in records shall be done on daily basis, as soon
as the procurement and test of material is carried out at site.
(e) MTC, bills / invoice of procured materials, test reports of materials tested
in external laboratories etc. shall be maintained at site by the
contractor’s engineers.
(f) The contractor shall provide access to all records to Third Party Quality
Assurance Agency (TPQAA) engaged by Engineer-in-charge for their
inputs in quality assurance in the work.
9.7. Shop Drawings:
(a) Contractor shall prepare shop drawings based on the intent drawings
and wherever specified in the contract document. Contractor shall
prepare and submit shop drawings for items of contract in which
preparation of shop drawings by contractor and or his
Part-B
Page 19
vendors/manufacturers is specified. Beside this, items involving design
and detailing under the scope of contractor/vendor/manufacturer, shall
also require preparation and submission of shop drawings by the
contractor.
(b) The contractor shall prepare shop drawings with clash free layout of all
services and building elements, on BIM model, proposed to be finally
executed at work by him / his vendors and submit it to Engineer-in-
charge.
(c) The contractor shall prepare and submit shop drawings compatible with
BIM model as well as AutoCAD software.
(d) The Contractor shall prepare and submit a detailed program for the
preparation and submission of the shop drawings which should be
compatible to the integrated program chart for the whole construction
work.
(e) Contractor shall be responsible to ensure the shop drawings are in
compliance of BOQ items, GFC drawings, design intents, stipulated
specification and condition of contract agreement.
(f) Contractor shall be required to make modifications, if required by the
Engineer in charge, in the submitted shop drawings and shall resubmit
modified shop drawings. When a shop drawing is revised, the particulars
of the current revision shall be clearly marked or circled to facilitate
checking. All prior revision numbers and references of drawings possibly
superseded by the current issue shall also be clearly shown.
(g) After finalisation of shop drawings, sampling and mock-up of item shall
be carried out at site. Thereafter, the item shall be taken up for full-
fledged execution at site.
(h) The contractor shall prepare all the needed shop drawings well in
advance and submit to Engineer-in-charge for his inputs, if any, before
placing the order and execution of the item. Shop drawings shall be
submitted to Engineer-in-charge, at least four weeks in advance of
planned production, delivery and installation of any material to allow the
Engineer-in-Charge ample time for scrutiny and give comments if any.
(i) Contractor shall be fully responsible for any delay caused, on account of
delay in finalisation of shop drawings or modified shop drawings. No
claims for extension of time shall be entertained because of any delay
Part-B
Page 20
in the work due to his failure to produce shop drawings at the right time,
in accordance with the approved program.
(j) Cost of all shop drawings and form work drawings to be furnished by the
Contractor shall deem to be included in his tendered rates/quote for the
work.
9.8. Workmanship:
(a) All work shall be executed with high quality of material and
workmanship. Stringent quality control shall be ensured by the
contractor of all the activities.
(b) Quality of work is of paramount importance. Contractor will be required
to engage well-experienced supervisors, engineers, skilled labour and
deploy modern T&P and other equipment to execute the work in a time
bound manner.
9.9. Third Party Quality Assurance (TPQA): In order to achieve high standards
of materials, workmanship and overall quality of the execution, an agency
shall be engaged by Engineer-in-charge or client to carry out ‘Third Party
Quality Assurance’. The quality assurance may also be got done by an
independent team of CPWD or any other agency Govt. of India. QA agency
will carry out the checks of the quality assurance procedures followed at site,
take samples of the materials for independent testing and check the
workmanship of the works carried out. The contractor shall extend full
cooperation to the TPQA agency in facilitating the inspections and collection
of samples during execution of work. Reports and recommendation by QA
agencies shall be strictly adhered to/complied by the contractor. The
contractor shall be required to co-operate with agency in carrying out various
activities including documentation at no extra time and cost to the
department. In case of any adverse findings by the TPQA agency, the
contractor shall do the needful rectifications to the entire satisfaction of the
TPQA agency and Engineer-in-Charge. If contractor fails to rectify the defects
of the serious nature within a reasonable time frame, Engineer-in-charge
shall be right to hold any further payment. If work is stopped due to non-
rectification of defects and delay occurs on this account, no relief in
completion of mile stone by way of grant of EOT or any other relaxation shall
be given. TPQA will conduct the Quality Control Test as per CPWD QA manual,
Part-B
Page 21
relevant standards and manufacturer’s specifications. The samples shall be
collected in presence of representatives of contractor and Engineer-in-
charge.
10. Measurement of existing features or ground levels:
10.1. Where the determination of quantity of an Item of work depends upon the
measurement of existing features or ground level and the like, then prior to
commencement of such activity, the Contractor shall first take such levels
and measurement and get it approved from Engineer in charge or his
authorized representative. Such initial levels/measurements of the item shall
be certified as agreed by both i.e. Contractor and the Engineer-in-charge. In
case the Contractor fails to observe the above procedure, the Engineer in
charge shall determine the quantity to be assumed for payment purposes
using the best information available to him, and his decision in the matter
shall be final and binding on contractor.
11. Soil stabilization/protection:
11.1. Contractor shall take appropriate precautions to avoid sliding/collapsing of

the sides of excavated pits/trenches during and after soil excavation. He shall
use any suitable soil stabilization methods (if required) to prevent sliding /
collapse of the sides at his own cost. Contractor will not be paid anything
extra for the same.
12. Excavation around Heritage Structures:
12.1. Contractor shall adopt manual or any other appropriate excavation method
while exposing original plinths of heritage elements, walls and structures.
Excavation shall be done in two parts: (i) for ascertaining the levels and (ii)
after finalizing levels. Extra protection to be taken for protection of these
elements and walls. Contractor shall submit detailed methodology for
approval before commencement of execution work.
12.2. Contractor shall maintain documentation and photographs of condition of

heritage structure before and after the execution of work and submit the
same to Engineer in charge
12.3. Nothing extra shall be payable and no extra claim shall be entertained to
the contractor for execution of work as per provision of this clause.
Part-B
Page 22
13. Construction Joints:
13.1. Since the water table is at shallow depth, the construction joints in raft and
retaining walls to the extent possible shall be avoided. However, as per the
methodology proposed by the agency, if the construction joints are
proposed in the raft and retaining, it shall be done preferably by providing
sacrificial materials such as Hy-Rib expanded metal sheets or equivalent of
required thickness including making holes for accommodating reinforcement
etc. Nothing extra shall be payable on this account.
13.2. Contractor shall ensure water tightness of joints. In case of any seepage,
the contractor shall be fully responsible for the same and he will take
appropriate measures at his own cost to stop leakages and seepages
through joints. The methodology to stop seepage through construction
joints shall be adopted by the contractor with prior approval of Engineer-in-
charge.
13.3. The construction joints in the structure shall the provided at predetermined
locations only as approved by Engineer in charge. The cost of materials,
manpower and machinery for providing the construction joints shall be
included in item of work and nothing extra shall be payable on this account
to the contractor.
14. Dewatering:
14.1. The underground/subsoil water level indicated in Geotechnical report is

indicative only. Contractor shall conduct Geotechnical investigation, at his
own cost, to determine water table at construction site during different
seasons and stages of construction.
14.2. Contractor shall design, install and operate an appropriate dewatering

system(s) at site at his own cost, so as to ensure dry and safe working
conditions at all locations and all stages of execution of work at site. During
the entire duration of construction work, an efficient dewatering and
drainage system shall be maintained at site, round the clock, by the
Contractor. No water and slushy condition shall be permitted during the
laying of PCC and RCC for foundation.
14.3. The dewatering system shall be modified / augmented as the work proceeds
Part-B
Page 23
based on evidences, data and information discovered and observed during
the progress of work at site.
14.4. De-watering, as per requirement, shall be done conforming to BIS Code IS:
9759 (Guidelines for de-watering during construction) and / or as per the
specifications approved by the Engineer-in-Charge.
14.5. Contractor shall provide mild steel casing pipes for boreholes for dewatering
at the site. The backfilling and sealing the boreholes with suitable material
after the completion of requirement of dewatering shall also be done by the
contractor, he will ensure that there is no seepage or leakage of water
through such dewatering boreholes in future. The mild steel casing pipes of
boreholes can be used by the contractor for earthing of electrical current
also, if so required. Nothing extra shall be payable to the contractor for
providing MS casing pipes and using it for earthing and any other use in the
work besides dewatering.
14.6. The Contractor shall also ensure that there is no danger to the nearby
properties and installations on account of lowering of water table while
dewatering at site. If needed, suitable precautionary measures shall be
taken by the Contractor.
14.7. The dewatering system shall have adequate stand-by machinery and system
to attend to repair of pumps, disruption of power / fuel supply or any other
fault.
14.8. Contractor shall arrange for disposal of water, discharged by dewatering

system, through leak proof pipe line to safe discharge points / locations
away from the site.
14.9. In trenches where surface water is likely ingress during rains, a ring bund
of puddle clay or by any other means shall be formed outside, to the
required height, and maintained by the Contractor. Also, suitable steps shall
be taken by the Contractor to prevent back flow of pumped water into the
trench.
14.10. If contractor has to execute any work/activity in or under water and/or

liquid mud nothing extra shall be paid for the same. Quoted rates of BOQ
items shall also include carrying out work in or under water and/or liquid
mud.
Part-B
Page 24
14.11. Rate quoted for various items in BOQ of the contract, shall include cost of
dewatering and drainage of water, by any means and at all stages of work,
which may be from underground/subsoil, rains, surface or any other
sources. Nothing extra shall be paid to the contractor for design,
installation, operation and maintenance of dewatering and drainage system
at site during entire duration of construction work.
15. Recesses, Holes, Openings:
15.1. The contractor shall leave such recesses, holes, openings, etc. as may be
required for the electric, air-conditioning and other related works for which
inserts, sleeves, brackets, conduits, base plates, clamps etc. shall fix the
same at the time of casting of concrete, stone work and masonry work or
at any similar location if required, and nothing extra shall be payable on this
account. Alternatively, he will cut recesses in RCC/ Masonry with specialized
cutting tools as per requirement of work. All Recesses, holes and openings
shall be watertight sealed with appropriate epoxy grouts / chemicals after
or during installation of inserts in the same. Nothing extra shall be payable
for these operations to the contractor. However, recess, holes, openings to
be cut in RCC/ Masonry/Dry walls, as per specific directions of Engineer-in-
charge for specific requirements other than installation of service lines shall
be measured under relevant BOQ items.
15.2. Inserts, sleeves, brackets, conduits, base plates, clamps etc. to be fixed in
such recesses/holes shall be payable separately under relevant BOQ items
of contract unless otherwise specifically specified.
15.3. The work of various services will be executed simultaneously. The contractor
shall minimize the scope of making recesses, holes, opening etc. by proper
planning and necessary openings shall be provided in shuttering of RCC,
where ever required.
16. Special Condition for Cement
16.1. The contractor shall procure PPC confirming to IS: 1489(Part-I) / OPC
confirming to IS: 8112 as per makes mentioned in List of Preferred Makes
for Civil Works. CE may approve change in make of cement depending upon
availability in local market from any other reputed cement manufacturer
having a production capacity not less than one million tons per annum
Part-B
Page 25
conforming to same grade and only with ISI mark, if warranted and
requested by the contractor to Engineer-in-charge.
16.2. The cement shall be brought at site in bulk supply of approximately 50 tons
or as decided by the Engineer-in-Charge.
16.3. One cement godown for each type of cement to be used in construction,
each of the capacity to store a minimum of 5000 bags of cement or of
equivalent capacity silos shall be constructed by the contractor at batching
plant yard for which no extra payment shall be made. Additionally, cement
godown of the capacity to store a minimum of 2000 bags of cement or as
decided Engineer-in-charge, in case less than 100 MT cement is required for
the work, shall be constructed by the contractor at site of work for which no
extra payment shall be made. Cement Godown/Silo shall have provision to
prevent ingress of moisture and rain water from any sides.
16.4. The contractor shall be responsible for the watch and ward and safety of the
cement godown. The contractor shall facilitate the inspection of the cement
godown by the Engineer-in-Charge or his authorized representatives at any
time.
16.5. The cement shall be got tested by the Engineer-in-Charge and shall be used
on the work only after satisfactory test results have been received. The
contractor shall supply free of charge the cement required for testing
including its transportation cost to testing laboratories. The cost of tests
shall be borne by the contractor.
16.6. The contractor shall comply the provisions of clause 10 of GCC, as stated in
schedule F of contract agreement. The issue and consumption of cement in
work shall be regulated and proper accounts shall be maintained by the
contractor.
16.7. The theoretical consumption of cement shall be worked out as per procedure
prescribed in clause 38 of GCC, as stated in schedule F of contract
agreement and shall be governed by the conditions laid therein. In case the
cement consumption is less than theoretical consumption including
permissible variation, recovery at rate so prescribed shall be made after
ensuring structural soundness and stability on the basis of testing. In case
of excess consumption, no adjustment and extra payment shall be made to
Part-B
Page 26
the contractor.
16.8. Cement brought to site and cement remaining unused after completion of
work shall not be removed from site without written permission of the
Engineer-in-charge.
16.9. The damaged cement shall be removed from the site immediately by the
contractor on receipt of a notice in writing from the Engineer-in-charge. If
he does not do so within 3 days of receipt of such notice, the Engineer-in-
charge shall get it removed at the cost of the contractor.
16.10. The cement bags shall be stacked on proper floors consisting of two layers
of dry bricks laid on well consolidated earth at a level of at least one-foot
above ground. The stacks shall be in rows of 2 and 10 bags high with
minimum of 0.6m clear gap between rows. Bags should be placed
horizontally continuous in each line. Actual size / shape of godown shall be
as per site requirement and nothing extra shall be paid on this account. The
decision of Engineer-in-charge regarding capacity shall be final.
17. Special Condition for Reinforcement Steel
17.1. For reinforced cement concrete or pre-stressed concrete works, the

reinforcement bars shall consist of following grades confirming to IS 1786:
2008(Indian Standard specification for high strength deformed steel bars
and wires for concrete reinforcement) Fe 415, Fe 415D, Fe 500D, Fe 500S
and Fe 550D as per item in BOQ. Only corrosion resistant steel bars shall be
used. Reinforcement steel shall be procured by the contractor directly from
manufacturer or his authorized distributor, dealer and channel partner only.
17.2. The steel reinforcement bars shall be stored by the contractor at site of work
in such a way as to prevent their distortion and corrosion. Bars of different
sizes and lengths shall be stored separately to facilitate easy counting and
checking.
17.3. The contractor shall obtain manufacturer’s certificate stating the process of
manufacture, chemical composition and test sheet giving result of each
mechanical test applicable to the material purchased and submit it to the
Engineer-in-charge. Each test certificate shall indicate the number of the
cast to which it applies, corresponding to the number or identification mark
to be found on the material.
Part-B
Page 27
17.4. Engineer-in-charge shall get each consignment tested for both chemical
composition and physical properties (including bend and re-bend test) as
specified in IS: 1786 from approved NABL accredited laboratory or any
Government laboratory.
17.5. For checking nominal mass, tensile strength, bend test, re-bend test etc.,
specimens of sufficient length shall be cut from each lot for each size of the
bar at random.
17.6. The contractor shall supply free of charge the steel required for testing
including its transportation to testing laboratories. The cost of tests shall be
borne by the contractor.
17.7. The contractor shall comply the provisions of clause 10 of GCC, as stated in
schedule F of contract agreement. The procurement and consumption of
steel in work shall be regulated and proper accounts maintained by the
contractor.
17.8. The theoretical consumption of steel shall be worked out as per provisions
of clause 38 of GCC, as stated in schedule F of contract agreement and shall
be governed by conditions laid therein.
17.9. The steel brought to site and steel remaining unused shall not be removed
from site without the written permission of the Engineer-in-Charge.
17.10. The steel reinforcement bars shall be brought to the site in bulk supply of
1000 tons or more, or as decided by the Engineer-in-Charge.
17.11. The standard sectional weights referred to shall be as given in Table 5.4 in
Para 5.3.4 in CPWD Specification 2019 Vol.-I and will be considered for
conversion of length of various sizes of TMT Bars in to standard weight.
Record of actual sectional weights shall also be kept dia. and lot wise. The
average sectional weight for each diameter shall be arrived at from samples
from each lot of steel received at site. The decision of the Engineer-in-
Charge shall be final for the procedure to be followed for determining the
average sectional weight of each lot. Quantity of each diameter of steel
received at site of work will constitute one single lot for the purpose. The
weight of steel by conversion of length of various sizes of bars based on the
actual weighted average sectional weight shall be terms as Derived Actual
Weight.
Part-B
Page 28
17.12. If the derived weight is less than the standard weight, then the Derived
Actual Weight shall be accepted if it is within the following tolerances
specified in IS:1786- 2008, otherwise whole lot will be rejected. However,
deductions shall be made for the difference in derived actual weight and
standard weight at prevailing market rate of the relevant items of
reinforcement steel.
Tolerances on Nominal Mass:
S.No. Nominal size in mm Tolerance on the Nominal Mass,

(Percent)
Batch Individual Individual

Sample* Sample for
Coils only**
1 2 3 4 5
i) upto and including 10 ±7 -8 ±8
ii) Over 10 up to and ±5 -6 ±6

including 16
iii) Over 16 ±3 -4 ±6
* For individual sample plus tolerance is not specified.
** For coils batch tolerance is not specified
(a) If the derived actual weight is found more than the standard weight,
then nothing shall be paid extra for the difference in derived actual
weight and standard weight.
17.13. The contractor shall submit original invoices, vouchers and MTC for the
total quantity of steel supplied under each consignment to be used in the
work. All consignment received at the work site along with the relevant
documents shall be inspected by the CPWD site staff before acceptance.
The contractor shall obtain Original Vouchers and Test Certificates and
furnish the same to the Engineer- in-Charge in respect of all the lots of
steel brought by him. The original vouchers and test certificates shall be
Part-B
Page 29
kept on record in the site office/QC lab and shall be produced for inspection
as per direction of engineer in charge.
18. Reinforcement coupler/Mechanical splice: - Reinforcement couplers that shall

be supplied for this work shall confirm to Class ‘L’ of Indian Standard IS 16172-
2014: Reinforcement Couplers for Mechanical Splices of Bars in Concrete –
Specification. The nominal sizes of reinforcement couplers based on their internal
diameter shall correspond to the nominal sizes of bars covered under IS 1786.
18.1. Mechanical Splicing System shall be based on the following:
(a) Mechanical splicing system with Parallel threaded couplers

(b) Reinforcement couplers shall have adequate strength, length and
internal threads as per manufacturer’s design to be able to meet the
performance requirements as mentioned in IS 16172-2014. All
reinforcement couplers shall be finished smooth and shall be free from
burrs, cracks and other manufacturing defects. The threads shall be
cleanly formed and shall be free from imperfections.
(c) Testing of Mechanical Splicing System: The reinforcement couplers
shall meet the performance requirements as prescribed in the Indian
Standard IS 16172-2014 namely:
 Static Tensile Test
 Slip Test
 Cyclic Tensile Test
 Low-Cycle Fatigue Test
The test results shall be submitted to the Engineer-in-Charge for acceptance

and use of couplers before execution of work. The number of samples for each
test, sampling and criteria for conformity shall be as per IS 16172-2014.
GUARANTEE BOND TO BE EXECUTED BY THE CONTRACTOR FOR REMOVAL OF

DEFECTS AFTER COMPLETION IN RESPECT OF
WATER-PROOFING WORKS
The Agreement made this ....................... day of ....................... two thousand

and ....................... between ....................... son of ....................... of
....................... (hereinafter called the Guarantor of the one part) and the PRESIDENT
Part-B
Page 30
OF INDIA represented by Executive Engineer, …… (Division)……, CPWD or his successor
(hereinafter called Government of the other part).
WHEREAS this agreement is supplementary to a contract (hereinafter called the
Contract) dated ............. and made between the GUARANTOR of the one part and the
Government of the other part, whereby the Contractor, inter alia, undertook to render
the buildings and structures in the said contract recited completely water and leak-
proof.
AND WHEREAS GUARANTOR agreed to give a guarantee to the effect that the
said structures will remain water and leak-proof for ten years from the date of
completion of the construction work under the contract, as recorded by Engineer-in-
charge for the work.
NOW THE GUARANTOR hereby guarantees that water proofing treatment given
by him will render the structures completely leak-proof and the minimum life of such
water proofing treatment shall be for ten years from the date of completion of the
construction work under the contract, as recorded by Engineer-in-charge for the work.
Provided that the guarantor will not be responsible for leakage caused by
earthquake or structural defects or misuse of roof or alteration and for such purpose:
(a) Misuse of roof shall mean any operation which will damage proofing treatment,
like chopping of firewood and things of the same nature which might cause
damage to the roof
(b) Alteration shall mean construction of an additional storey or a part of the roof or
construction adjoining to existing roof whereby proofing treatment is removed in
parts;
(c) The decision of “The Government” with regard to cause of leakage shall be final.
During this period of guarantee the guarantor shall make good all defects and in
case of any defect being found, render the building water-proof to the satisfaction of
“The Government” at his cost, and shall commence the work for such rectification within
seven days from the date of issue of the notice from “The Government” calling upon
him to rectify the defects, failing which the work shall be got done by the Department
by some other contractor at the GUARANTOR'S cost and risk. The decision of “The
Government” as to the cost, payable by the Guarantor shall be final and binding.
That if GUARANTOR fails to execute the water proofing or commits breach

thereunder then the GUARANTOR will indemnify the Principal and his successors against
all loss, damage, cost, expense or otherwise which may be incurred by him by reason
Part-B
Page 31
of any default on the part of the GUARANTOR in performance and observance of this
supplementary agreement. As to the amount of loss and/or damage and/or cost
incurred by the Government, the decision of “The Government” will be final and binding
on the parties
IN WITNESS WHEREOF these presents have been executed by the Obligor ......
(Name of Contractor) .........and by .......(Executive Engineer) ....... and for and on
behalf of the PRESIDENT OF INDIA on the day, month and year first above written.
………………………………..
(Signed, sealed and delivered by OBLIGOR)
in the presence of
1. ………… (Sign, Name & Address of Witness)
…………………………………..
(Signed & Seal for and on behalf of THE PRESIDENT OF INDIA)
in the presence of
Part-B
Page 32
GUARANTEE BOND TO BE EXECUTED BY THE CONTRACTOR FOR REMOVAL DEFECTS
AFTER COMPLETION IN RESPECT OF
STONE WORK/ STRUCTURAL GLAZING-CURTAIN WALL/ MODULAR SYSTEM

ALUMINIUM WINDOWS/ MODULAR ALUMINIUM PARTITION/FALSE CEILING

the work under said contract structurally stable to fulfill its intended purpose, sound,
free from workmanship defects and use of only specified, certified material.
said work will remain structurally stable to fulfil its intended purpose, sound, and
guarantee for quality workmanship, material and finishing for ten years from the date
of completion of the construction work under the contract, as recorded by Engineer-in-
NOW THE GUARANTOR hereby guarantees that work executed by him will remain
structurally stable to fulfil its intended purpose, sound, and guarantee for quality
workmanship, material and finishing for ten years from the date of completion of the
The decision of “The Government” with regard to nature and cause of defect shall
be final and binding on Guarantor.
During this period of guarantee, the guarantor shall make good all defects within the
notice period, to the satisfaction of “The Government” calling upon him to rectify the
defects, failing which the work shall be got done by the Department by some other
contractor at the GUARANTOR'S cost and risk. The decision of “The Government” as to
the cost, payable by the Guarantor shall be final and binding.
That if GUARANTOR fails to rectify the defects and commits breach thereunder then
the GUARANTOR will indemnify the Principal and his successors against all loss,
damage, cost, expense or otherwise which may be incurred by him by reason of any
Part-B
Page 33
default on the part of the GUARANTOR in performance and observance of this
on the parties
………………………………..
in the presence of
…………………………………..
in the presence of
Part-B
Page 34
GUARANTEE BOND TO BE EXECUTED BY THE CONTRACTOR FOR REMOVAL DEFECTS
AFTER COMPLETION IN RESPECT OF
FIRE CHECK DOORS ASSEMBLY

the work of fire check door assembly under said contract structurally stable to fulfill its
intended purpose, sound, free from workmanship defects and use of only specified,
certified material.
said work will remain structurally stable to fulfil its intended purpose, sound, and
guarantee for quality workmanship, material and finishing for ten years from the date
of completion of the construction work under the contract, as recorded by Engineer-in-
structurally stable to fulfil its intended purpose, sound, and guarantee for quality
workmanship, material and finishing for ten years from the date of completion of the
During this period of guarantee, the guarantor shall make good all defects within
the notice period, to the satisfaction of “The Government” calling upon him to rectify
the defects, failing which the work shall be got done by the Department by some other
Part-B
Page 35
on the parties
………………………………..
in the presence of
…………………………………..
in the presence of
Part-B
Page 36
GUARANTEE BOND TO BE EXECUTED BY THE CONTRACTOR FOR REMOVAL OF
DEFECTS AFTER COMPLETION IN RESPECT OF
FURNITURE WORK


the furniture work under said contract structurally stable to fulfil its intended purpose,
free from workmanship defects, warping, moisture effect, termite/borer proof, rust free,
durable, strong and operational easiness and use of only specified, certified material.
AND WHEREAS GUARANTOR agreed to give a guarantee to the effect that said
work will remain structurally stable to fulfil its intended purpose, free from workmanship
defects, warping, moisture effect, termite/borer proof, rust free, durable, strong and
operational easiness and use of only specified, certified material for the minimum life
of ten years from the date of completion of the construction work under the contract,
as recorded by Engineer-in-charge for the work.
structurally stable to fulfil its intended purpose, free from workmanship defects,
warping, moisture effect, termite/borer proof, rust free, durable, strong and operational
easiness and use of only specified, certified material, for the minimum life of ten years
from the date of completion of the construction work under the contract, as recorded
by Engineer-in-charge for the work.
During this period of guarantee, the guarantor shall make good all defects within
the notice period, to the satisfaction of “The Government” calling upon him to rectify
the defects, failing which the work shall be got done by the Department by some other
Part-B
Page 37
on the parties
………………………………..
in the presence of
…………………………………..
in the presence of
Part-B
Page 38
Name of Work: C/o Common Central Secretariat-13 on plot 138,
Mansingh Road, New Delhi including Operation & Maintenance for 5 years.
PART-B
PARTICULAR SPECIFICATIONS
(CIVIL WORKS)
Part-B
Page 39
1. General
Work shall be executed as per BOQ item and notes and applicable CPWD
specifications. Manufacturer prescribed method of application, as approved by
Engineer-in-charge, shall be adopted where CPWD specifications or BIS
standards/guidelines are not available.
If for any BOQ item of work, exact specification is not available in CPWD
specifications, then CPWD specifications of nearest similar item in terms of
material and/or application shall be referred as directed by Engineer-in-charge.
2. Earth work
2.1 Contractor shall evaluate the requirement of earth for back filling within site
like in basement, sides of foundations, space between retaining walls and
diaphragm wall, landscaped and open spaces of site and periphery of site
compound walls, excavated Tenches for service lines etc. Contractor shall
submit detailed scheme for proper stocking earth at site and stacking yards
and transporting it back to site, as required for backfilling of earth at site
during various stages of work execution, till its completion.
2.2 Contractor shall give priority to stacking of earth properly and safely for
reuse at site so that adequate soil is available for backfilling at site.
2.3 Contractor shall comply all GRIHA /Green building norms for storage of
excavated Top Soil to be used for backfilling for landscaping purpose at site.
Only soil suitable for reuse for landscaping shall be approved for this
purpose.
2.4 Contractor shall take adequate measures to prevent theft, erosion, dust
pollution and loss of stored earth at site and stock yard.
2.5 Contractor shall note that surplus earth disposed off to NTPC eco park at
Faridabad cannot be taken back for reuse. Hence only surplus earth should
be disposed off to NTPC Eco park at Faridabad,
2.6 For all BOQ items, lead distance, if measurable and payable, shall be counted
only from and to the entry/exit of site/stock yard/disposal site. Leads and
lifts within site/stockyard/disposal yard shall not be measured and paid
unless otherwise mentioned in BOQ item.
2.7 All items of work shall be for all lifts, depths and heights unless otherwise
Part-B
Page 40
mentioned in BOQ item.
2.8 Contractor shall submit to Engineer-in-charge for approval, a detailed plan
for excavation of earth, its storage at site and storage yard and disposal of
surplus earth and also plans for transporting back and backfilling of stored
earth. Contractor shall execute earth work according to approved plan only.
2.9 Contractor shall ensure safe and secure earth excavation, backfilling,
transportation and stacking at all times. He will take all necessary actions to
prevent sudden collapse of soil, damage to buildings, service lines, trees and
other adjoining structures and harm to man and machinery at site/ yard
during the execution of earth excavation, backfilling, storage, and
transportation.
2.10 Contractor shall be responsible for stocking/disposal, levelling and dressing of
earth to required levels at site, storage yards and disposal sites.
2.11 For backfilling of earth, contractor shall execute the work in layers including
watering and compaction to desired level of consolidation.
2.12 Contractor shall ensure that different types of excavated materials like earth,
rock/boulders, rubbish, malba etc. are not mixed during excavation,
stacking, transportation and disposal. He must segregate and dispose
different types of excavated material separately.
2.13 Contractor shall ensure the excavated material is disposed off only to
locations/sites approved by Engineer-in-charge.
2.14 Any charges payable for disposal of malba /rubbish to approved disposal
sites shall be borne by the contractor only, unless otherwise specified in BOQ
item or contractor item. However, processing charges for disposal of
construction and demolition (C & D) waste generated by dismantling of
existing building and structures at site, shall be reimbursed to the contractor
as per the provisions for disposal of C & D waste as mentioned elsewhere in
the contract.
2.15 Contractor shall execute earth work by mechanical means and manual means
wherever so required.
2.16 Contractor shall be responsible for bailing out water (pumping out water and
removing mud/slush) during any earth work activity in under water condition
or during rain or due to any other reason.
2.17 Any valuable and precious item(s), structure /item of historical importance
found during excavation work shall be reported to Engineer-in-charge and
Part-B
Page 41
such item(s) shall be property of the department.
3. Anti-termite treatment
3.1 Stage of treatment may vary as per site condition and approved by
Engineer-in-charge before execution.
3.2 The treatment against termite infection shall remain effective for a period not
less than 10 years, from date of issue of the final certificate of completion of
construction work. During this 10 years period, any defects in treatment are
revealed or any evidence of infection in any part of the building or structure
is noticed, the Contractor shall rectify the concerned defects within 15 days
on receipt of notice from Engineer-in-charge. On Contractor's failure to do so
the Engineer-in-charge may get the same rectified through any other agency
at the Contractor's risk and cost, and the decision of Engineer-in-charge as
to the cost payable by the Contractor for the same shall be final and binding
to the Contractor.
3.3 Unless otherwise specified anti-termite treatment shall be executed through
approved specialized anti termite agency. The contractor shall furnish a
guarantee of 10 years on stamp paper to the Engineer-in-charge, which is
also to be signed by the specialized agency. However, sole responsibility
shall be of main contractor for any lapse/ termite.
3.4 Copy of work order issued to the specialized agency by the contractor shall
be attached with guaranteed bond.
3.5 Guarantee bond on appropriate stamp paper shall be given by the contractor
to the client in the form prescribed below:
"I/ We .(Contractor) hereby guarantee that work will remain unaffected and
will not be in any way damaged by termite or any other germs of similar
types, for a period of 10 years after final completion of the construction work
, as per the terms and conditions of the contract and the Contractor hereby
indemnifies and agrees to save the Client from any loss and/or damage that
might be caused on account of termite and or other similar type of germs and
hereby guarantees to make good any loss or damages suffered by the Client
and further guarantees to redo the affected work without claiming any extra
cost” This guarantee shall remain in force for a period of 10 years from the
completion of the work under the contract and it shall remain binding to the
Part-B
Page 42
Contractor for period of 10 years.
Provision for additional security shall be as mentioned elsewhere in the
contract document.
4. Controlled Low Strength Material (CLSM)

4.1 CLSM shall comply provisions of IRC SP 63: 2018 Annexure II.
4.2 CLSM shall be mix of cement, coarse sand, fly ash, water, air entrainment
admixture. It should be flowable, pumpable homogenous mix. It shall be
used for backfilling in basement and sides of foundations and retaining walls
etc. as directed by engineer-in-charge. After setting and consolidations,
CLSM should have minimum strength of 2.5 MPa.
5. R.C.C. WORK:
5.1 Design mix concrete shall be used in the work for all structural members. For
design mix concrete, relevant CPWD Specifications and IS codes shall be
followed in general. Design mix for RCC shall be done considering Severe
condition for RCC below ground and Moderate conditions above ground.
Design mixes for different types of concrete shall be done as per grade of
concrete required for different structural members and provisions of BOQ
items. Type of cement and minimum cement content for design mix of
concrete shall be as per BOQ item. Other ingredients and parameters for
design mix concrete shall be as per CPWD specifications and IS codes.
5.2 The term machine batched, machine mixed, and machine vibrated used for
cement concrete in the bid document shall mean the concrete produced in
fully automatic concrete batching & mixing plant, placed in position by the
concrete pump and vibrated by surface vibrator/ needle vibrator/ plate
vibrator, as the case may be to achieve the required strength and durability.
5.3 The sources of coarse aggregate, fine aggregate, water, admixture & cement
to be used in concrete work shall be identified by the contractor & he will
satisfy himself regarding their conforming to the relevant specifications &
their availability before getting the same approved from the Engineer-in-
charge.
5.4 Generally, the entire concreting is proposed to be batched and mixed at the
batching plant, of specified capacity mentioned elsewhere in these tender
Part-B
Page 43
documents, to be commissioned at an approved place as near to site as
possible by the contractor.
5.5 The contractor shall submit the report on design mix from approved
laboratories for approval of Engineer-in-charge within 30 days from the date
of issue of letter of acceptance of the tender. No concreting shall be done
until the design mix is approved.
5.6 In case of change of source or characteristic properties of the ingredients
used in the concrete mix design during the work, the contractor as per the
directions of the Engineer-in-charge shall submit a revised concrete mix
design report conducted at laboratory established at site. Nothing extra shall
be paid on this account.
5.7 All cost of mix designing and testing, connected therewith, including charges
payable to the laboratory shall be borne by the Contractor including
redesigning of the concrete mix whenever required & as directed by
Engineer-in-charge.
5.8 Establishment of Batching Plant at the approved site: The contractor
is required to establish batching plant at the site. If it is not possible to
establish it captive in site, it may be established as near to site as possible.
However, the contractor is required to obtain permission to establish
batching plants from the concerned local bodies and from the pollution
control Board as well. Moreover, as the project is planned to achieve Griha
4-star rating/equivalent rating, the contractor is required to strictly adhere
to operational and quality parameters accordingly. Following parameters
must be strictly adhered at batching plant by the contractor:
(a) Water Quality:
 Potential pollutants in batching plant wastewater include cement,
sand, aggregates, and petroleum products can increase the pH of
the soil and water.
 Many of the problems with wastewater management at batching
plants have been caused by failure to recycle stored wastewater as
quickly as possible. Uses for recycling tank water include concrete
batching, spraying over stockpiles for dust control and washing out
agitators.
 The main sources of wastewater at concrete batching plants are:
• Contaminated storm water runoff.
Part-B
Page 44
• Dust control sprinklers.
• The agitator washout station.
• The agitator charging station.
• The slumping stations.
• Cleaning and washing.
(b) Air Quality:
 Dust from cement, sand and aggregate is a pollutant. Fine dust
particles can enter neighboring premises and adversely affect
amenity. Dust must be controlled so there are no significant
emissions from the plant.
 Potential sources of dust pollution include:
• Delivery of raw materials in trucks, trailers, and tankers.
• Storage of raw materials in bunkers and stockpiles.
• Transfer of raw materials by front end loaders, conveyors,
hoppers, and agitators.
• Leakage or spillage of raw materials from silos, inspection covers
and duct work.
 The following are some of the prevention measures to be taken by
the Contractor/ Builder during the operation to reduce concrete
batching plant pollution so the people living around the batching
plant areas are not affected by any negligence that might turn to be
environmental hazard:
(c) Maintenance of the general site operations:
 Maintain all the equipment including dust collection equipment to
prevent any leaks.
 Identify a buffer zone that surrounds your operations in which you
are planning to contain dust generating activities.
 Provide safety, quality and environments management system for
the site and plant operations, as well as the delivery system.
(d) The storage silos:
 Check for fabric (FFDC) leaks, cartridge filter system, suctions, and
shrouds regularly.
 Installation of audible high-level arms on the storage silos to avoid
over spilling which might damage the filters.
Part-B
Page 45
 Store all the dust generating materials inside the silos e.g.,
cement, fly ash, ground slag, Micro silica etc.
(e) Fabric Filter Dust Collector (FFDC):
 The FFDC should be sized so that the dust collector bags are not
subject to clogging. Install an appropriately sized multi bag pulse
jet filter in the silo, which is fitted and used in accordance with the
manufacturer’s recommendations.
 The FFDC should be completely protected from the weather.
 The FFDC needs to be made of a material which can withstand
continuous exposure to cement –such as polyester and
polypropylene.
 The filter elements should be cleaned automatically at the end of
the silo filling cycle.
 The FFDC should be able to withstand the maximum pressure
differential which may be encountered. A differential pressure
indicator should be fitted to an alarm to indicate bag filter pressure
in excess of 1.0 kPa.
 Silos should be protected against internal pressures exceeding the
design pressure. Positive type relief valves set at appropriate
pressures should be installed. The relief valve should be ducted to
a container on the ground, able to collect dust particles.
 The exhaust air from the silo filters should be ducted to a dust
collection container on the ground. Confirm the exhaust discharge
points are visible and monitored by the driver during silo filling
operations. If dust is discharged from the duct work, the driver
must immediately stop filling the silo.
 Burst bag detectors should be installed in all batching plants. The
burst bag detector should be connected to the automatic silo
overfill protection circuit to stop the flow of cement if a filter bag
bursts.
 The FFDC should be inspected at least once a week and any
necessary repairs carried out immediately.
(f) Raw materials:
 Avoid using chemical concrete additives since they are more toxic.
Instead, use sugar or wood-based admixtures.
Part-B
Page 46
 Avoid using coal fired boiler, bottom ash, and cinder for concrete
block building and instead, use aggregates.
 Use dust suppression system to reduce suspended particulate
matter in the air to a minimum.
 Wherever possible, keep the sand and aggregates under cover so
that is not blown away by wind.
(g) Mixer feed operations:
 Use the enclosed batch mixer feed as dust prevention and visible
emissions.
 Use the spray device to prevent dust emissions.
 Conduct all the mixing operations from an enclosed building to
help prevent emission of dust.
(h) Material handling and storage:
 Aggregates less than 5mm or less should be used in open areas.
They should be stored in totally enclosed structures such as
storage bins.
 The stockpile entrance sides should be covered with a flexible
curtain.
 The opening between the storage bins and the materials weighing
scale should be totally closed.
 Sand and aggregates should be delivered in a dampened state,
using covered trucks. If the materials have dried out during
transit, they should be re-wetted before being dumped into the
storage bunker.
(i) Conveyors:
 To prevent dust emissions, the belt conveyors should be enclosed
with metal board on top and on the two sides.
 Fitting the flexible seals to prevent dust should enclose all
conveyor transfer points.
 The turning point of all the conveyors should be provided with
scrappers to prevent dust collection on the surface belt.
(j) Mixing and loading operations:
 Loading concrete trucks should be in such a way that minimizes
dust emissions.
Part-B
Page 47
 All the air borne dust emission generated by material loading and
mixing operations should be vented to fabric filtering system.
 The concrete mixers and other vehicles should be cleaned off after
the loading and mixing operations to wash off the mud, dust
deposited on the wheels and body.
(k) Fugitive dust:
 Use water sprays or dust suppression agents to reduce dust.
 An air extraction and filtration system for collecting the generated
dust should be installed.
 The roof should be extended at least 6 feet beyond the load areas.
(l) Waste concrete:
 Collect the waste concrete in suitable washout pits where it
becomes gravel, sludge and sand that can later be reused.
 The blocks and bricks leftovers can be used for ground covers,
tracks, walkways, block walls or even curbs.
(m) Wastewater:
 Waste and contaminated water should be directed to onsite
settling ponds, and it can be reused later in for dust control,
rinsing trucks exteriors.
 In any circumstance Wastewater should not be allowed to go in
contact with any fresh water bodies.
5.9 Under any circumstances, if RMC is to be allowed from Ready Mix plants, the
contractor shall bring Ready Mix Concrete from approved RMC plants as
mentioned in the preferred make list of the contract document. Following
special conditions shall govern for concrete procured form RMC plants:
(a) Notwithstanding the approval granted by Engineer-in-charge, the
contractor shall be fully responsible for quality of concrete including
input control, transportation, and placement etc.
(b) The Engineer-in-charge will reserve the right to inspect at any such
stage and reject the concrete if he is not satisfied with the quality of
product. The contractor should therefore draw MOU / agreement with
RMC owner / company very carefully in accordance to all terms and
conditions / specifications of this contract document
(c) The Engineer-in-charge reserves the right to exercise control over the
ingredients, water and admixtures purchased, stored and to be used
Part-B
Page 48
in the concrete including conducting of tests for checking quality of
materials, recordings of test results and declaring the materials fit or
unfit for use in production of mix. Also Engineer-in-charge shall
exercise control over:
 Calibration check of the RMC plant weighing mechanism & testing
equipment.
 Weight and quantity check on the ingredients, water and
admixtures added for batch mixing.
 Time of mixing of concrete.
 Testing of fresh concrete, recordings of results and declaring the
mix fit or unfit for use. This will include continuous control on the
workability during production and taking corrective action.
(d) For exercising such control, the Engineer-in-charge shall periodically
depute his authorized representative at the RMC plant. It shall be
responsibility of the contractor to ensure that all necessary equipment,
manpower & facilities are made available to E-in-C and/ or his
authorized representative at RMC plant.
(e) Ingredients, admixtures & water declared unfit for use in production of
mix shall not be used. A batch mix found unfit for use shall not be
loaded into the truck for transportation.
(f) All required relevant records of RMC shall be made available to the
Engineer-in-charge or his authorized representative. The Engineer-in-
charge shall, as required, specify guidelines & additional procedures
for quality control & other parameters in respect of materials and
production & transportation of concrete mix, which shall be binding on
the contractor & the RMC plant.
(g) The amount of admixture added to a mix shall be recorded in the
production record. Redosing of admixtures is not normally permitted.
In special circumstances, if necessary, additional dose of admixture
may be added at a project site and mixed adequately in mixer itself to
regain the workability of concrete with the approval of Engineer-in-
charge. However, the producer/ supplier shall assure the ultimate
quality of concrete supplied by him and maintain record of quantity
and time of addition. amount of admixture added to a mix shall be
recorded in the production record.
Part-B
Page 49
(h) The various ingredients for mix design / laboratory tests shall be sent
to the lab/ test houses through the Engineer-in-charge and the
samples of such aggregates sent shall be preserved at site by the
department. Nothing extra shall be paid on this account.
5.10 Ultrasonic Pulse Velocity Method of Test for RCC
(a) 5% of RCC members in each category i.e., column, beam, slab and
footing may be tested by UPV test method for establishing quality of
concrete. The cost of testing shall be borne by the contractor.
(b) In addition, doubtful areas such as honeycombed locations, locations

where continuous seepage is observed, construction joints and visible
loose pockets will also be tested.
(c) The quality of concrete based on UPV tests shall be assessed as per IS
13311 (part 1): 1992 which stipulates following criterion:
Sl. Pulse velocity by Cross Probing Concrete Quality

No. (km/ sec) Grading
1 Above 4.5 Excellent
2 4.5 to 3.5 Good
3 3.5 to 3.0 Medium
4 Below 3.0 Doubtful
Note: In case of “Doubtful” quality, it may be necessary to conduct

further tests.
(d) Wherever concrete is found with less than “Good” quality, repairs to
concrete will be made.
(e) Honeycombed areas and loose pockets will be repaired by grouting
using Portland Cement Mortar/ Polymer Modifies Cement Mortar /
Epoxy Mortar, etc. after chipping loose concrete in appropriate
manner.
(f) In areas where concrete is found below acceptance criteria and defects
are not apparently visible on surface, injecting approved grout in
appropriate proportion using epoxy grout / acrylic Polymer modified
cements slurry made with shrinkage compensating cement / plain
Part-B
Page 50
cement slurry etc. will be resorted to for repairs. Repairs to concrete
will be done by the contractor at his own cost till satisfactory results
are obtained as per the acceptance criteria by retesting of the repaired
area and assessment of structural stability of structure by the
Engineer-in-charge or his authorized representative. If satisfactory
results are not obtained, action shall be taken as per CPWD
specifications for acceptance/rejection of RCC/Concrete work. Decision
of Engineer-in-charge shall be final and binding on the contractor.
5.11 COVER BLOCKS
(a) Contractor shall use factory made precast CC cover blocks of approved
shape and strength for all RCC works to avoid displacement of bars in
any direction and to ensure proper cover. Alternatively, the contractor
may manufacture the cover blocks as per approved methodology by
Engineer-in-charge. The grade of concrete shall be same or higher
grade as of concrete in which they will be used. The concrete in cover
blocks shall be fibre reinforced concrete with 6mm downgraded
aggregate. Shape & size shall be as decided by Engineer-in-charge.
For horizontal surfaces CC cover blocks may be used, and vertical
surfaces CC or high strength plastic circular spacers may be used, as
approved by engineer-in- charge.
(b) Below are guidelines for recommended quantities for spacers based on
rebar size and application. For slabs of all dia rebars, spacing may be
kept at 70 cm with two minimum number of spacers per sqm of area.
 Slabs:
Rebar Diameter Maximum Distance Spacers required (per sq-m)
All 70 CM 2
 Beams & Columns: Spacer Distance in the longitudinal direction:
Rebar Diameter Columns Beams
Up to 10 mm 50 CM 25 CM
10 to 20 mm 100 CM 50 CM
Over 20 mm 125 CM 75 CM
Part-B
Page 51
 Beams & Columns: Number of spacers required in transverse
direction:
Width/ Height of Beam/ Column Columns Beams
Up to 100 CM 2 2
Over 100 CM 3 or more 3 or more
(c) However, these spacing requirements are indicative only and subject
to approval of the Engineer-in-charge.
5.12 Binding of Reinforcement bars: Contractor shall adopt machine-based
binding of reinforcement bars i.e. rebar tying machine, unless otherwise
approved by engineer-in-charge for specific locations. Contractor shall use
specialised binding wire required for machine binding of reinforcement bars,
as approved by Engineer-in-charge. Nothing extra shall be payable or
deducted, over the quoted rate of BOQ items for reinforcement, on this
account.
5.13 Curing of RCC: For vertical surfaces of RCC members, contractor shall
adopt curing of concrete using chemical compounds, in accordance to CPWD
specifications and as approved by Engineer-in-charge. Nothing extra shall
be payable for the contractor on this account. For horizontal surfaces of
members, various curing techniques, conforming to CPWD specifications
shall be adopted by contractor.
5.14 Debonding agents for Shuttering/Formwork: Contractor shall adopt
chemical compounds for shutter/formwork releasing which does not spoil
the surface finish and characteristics of concrete and also avoid deformation
of formwork/shutter during releasing. The contractor shall take prior
approval of Engineer-in-charge for shutter/formwork releasing chemical to
be used for the work.
6. STONE WORKS:
6.1 General: The items shall be executed as per BOQ item and notes, applicable
CPWD specifications. Contractor shall submit methodology statement with all
detail in illustrative sketch form and get approved from Engineer-in-charge
before start of work.
6.2 Following salient aspects in all stone work items shall be ensured by the
contractor:
Part-B
Page 52
(a) For any type of stonework, the contractor shall identify the quarries
from which the stone is intended to be brought, within 3 months of date
of start of work or as per the time schedule approved by the Engineer-
in-Charge. The contractor may have to choose more than one quarry, to
ensure quality of stone conforming to the specifications.
(b) The Contractor shall provide stones to match approved samples.
(c) All stones used on one face of the work/ one area shall be from the
same lot and shall be of uniform colour, quality, texture, grain and as
per approved sample.
(d) Any type of sandstone shall be hard, sound, durable and free from
weathering decay and defects like cavities, cracks, flaws, sand holes,
injurious veins, patches of loose or soft materials and other similar
defects that may adversely affect its strength and appearance.
(e) All stone shall be sorted for colour and grains before laying. The
matching of grains/ colour shall be carried out as approved by the
Engineer-in-charge.
(f) Feature stones shall be marked for identification with drawings.
(g) All work shall be executed as per design, detail, pattern, colours, sizes
and / dimensions given on the approved drawings. Any modifications
and variations at site shall be with prior approval of the Engineer-in-
charge.
(h) Before any work is to be taken up, the sizes and the pattern of stones
shall be laid out, together with the location of electrical. sanitary outlets
and any other services and approval shall be sought from the Engineer-
in-Charge.
(i) All joints, rebates, nosing, corners, edges shall have square, curved or
shaped moulding shall be as per the approved drawings
(j) Machine cutting shall be adopted instead of hand cutting for all
stonework unless otherwise approved Engineer-in-charge. The sides of
machine cut stones shall have perfect right angles and of uniform
texture. Stones with round / broken corners shall not be used unless
required specifically for the work.
(k) The mortises, sunk, perforations and notches for cramps/ dowels/corbel
plates/nibs shall be carefully formed, avoiding damage to the stone and
ensuring line and level of stone work, in accordance with approved
Part-B
Page 53
drawings.
(l) All holes, rebates, recesses etc. for fixing inserts shall be pre-drilled and
precise in location, shape and dimensions, avoiding damage to the
stone and ensuring line and level of stone work, in accordance with
approved drawings.
(m) Contractor shall ensure before commencement of any stone work that
the base structure/material is having required strength, finish, level and
alignment. If not, contractor shall do all needful works to achieve the
same.
(n) Contractor shall avoid / minimize unsightly cutting of stone and ensure
truly horizontal or vertical joint lines.
(o) Contractor shall ensure, before commencement of any stone work that
the base surface is free of loose particles, material splashes, vegetation
growth, fungus/algae growth, efflorescence, seepages/leakages,
grease/oil stains etc.
(p) Contractor shall ensure the impression of mortar/fixing material/grout
used to fixing stone does not tarnish the natural appearance of stone on
visible face.
(q) The contractor shall prepare sample of items of stone work for approval
of Engineer-in-charge. If the sample is not satisfactory and not
approved, contractor shall prepare new samples for the approval of
Engineer-in-charge. Approved sample shall be retained at site for
reference till the full period of execution of said item at work site.
(r) The Contractor shall also prepare sample of stone based
articles/elements like signages, stone bench, bollard, kerb stone,
planters and catch basin covers and other such elements for the
approval of the Engineer-in-charge.
(s) Any stones found to have variation with respect to the majority of the
stonework shall be removed and replaced before any further work is
taken up.
(t) Regardless of the acceptance of an item of work at intermediate stages
by the Engineer-in-charge, the final acceptance shall be accorded only
when the entire work of the item in one area is complete.
(u) The contractor shall protect the natural finish and appearance of stone
work by temporary protective measures, as approved by engineer-in-
Part-B
Page 54
charge, till the final handing over of the project.
(v) Contractor shall clean and wash the stone works to remove dust,
splashes of protective material, mortar or any such material etc., and
take necessary action to restore the natural finish and appearance of
stone as approved in the sample.
6.3 Testing of Stones:
(a) Test for compressive strength shall be carried out as laid down in IS
1121 (Part I).
(b) Test for water absorption shall be carried out as laid down in IS 1124.
(c) The frequency of testing of Stone shall be one test per every 100 Sqm
of Stone used.
(d) The following tests shall have to be carried out and the test results
shall have to be submitted to the client without fail.
 Density – average 2400 kg/ Cum (Variable subject to selection of
stone)
 Compressive strength – minimum 300 kg/ cm sq
 Water absorption - Not more than 2.5% by mass for sandstone
and as specified in IS 1123.
 Transverse strength - Not less than 7 N/ mm2 (70 Kgf/ cm2) for
sandstone and as specified in IS 1123.
6.4 Dry Stone Cladding Work
(a) Contractor shall ensure that the anchorage system and aluminium
framing for dry stone cladding is designed and guaranteed by
approved agencies i.e., Hilti, Fischer, Blick. However, contractor shall
remain responsible for overall structural stability of dry-stone cladding
work.
(b) All corners (corner, sill, jambs, lintel, ceiling, etc as per drawing) shall
be finished with angular stone of required angle, so joint line is not
visible at corner. All curvature shapes shall be finished with arch shape
stone. Angular shape corner (equal or unequal flange of any degree
having one or more angle in one piece) stone and arch shape shall be
cut from stone box with wire cutting machine of required thickness as
Part-B
Page 55
per design (thickness may be vary as per design). The stone shall be
3mm to 5mm chamfered at all sides on front face. All exposed edges
shall be finished same as front face of stone.
(c) Under Cut Anchor: The undercut anchor / fastener shall be of

approved make, adjustable type and required size as per design and
as approved by Engineer-in-charge. It shall be of SS 316 grade and of
good quality and strictly according to manufacturer specifications.
Reference Image of Under Cut Anchor –
Note: All figures shown are for indicative only. Actual system shall be
explained by contractor in shop drawings as per specifications.
(d) Structural Frame: Structural metal frame used for framework shall
be suitable for use to meet architectural designs to relevant works and
shall be subject to approval of the Engineer-in-charge for technical,
structural, functional, and visual considerations. The permissible
dimensional tolerances of the frame shall be such as not to impair the
proper and smooth functioning/ operation and appearance of facade.
Part-B
Page 56
Structural frame shall be of sizes, sections, and details as per the
approved shop drawings. The details shown in the drawings may be
varied slightly to suit the standards adopted by the manufacturers,
with the approval of Engineer-in-charge. Before proceeding with any
fabrication work, the contractor shall prepare and submit, complete
fabrication and installation shop drawings for cladding work for the
approval of the Engineer-in-charge. If the sections are varied, the
contractor shall obtain prior approval of Engineer-in-charge.
(e) Workmanship: Stone fixing system shall be with undercut anchors,

required structural framing, SS 316 mechanical fasteners, nuts, bolts
& washer etc. and any other required accessories as per direction of
Engineer-in-charge. Stone shall be as per approved sample. Contractor
shall prepare shop drawing base on concept drawing along with design
calculation of the supporting arrangement and its fixing to any type of
walls shall be vetted by approved agency of the Engineer-in-charge
before execution. Design to be with stand wind pressure as per IS 875
(part - 3) and as per category of seismic zone, all calculation reports
regarding system to be furnished with shop drawings. Shop drawing
shall be approved by Engineer in charge. Contractor shall prepare
mock-up as per approved shop drawing and with approved sample on
desired location (other than proposed area). Area of mock-up panel
shall be suggested by Engineer in charge. The installation, Testing and
the setting instructions shall be strictly followed as per approved
manufacturer guidelines and direction of Engineer-in-charge. The
Structural design of the supporting arrangement and its fixing to any
type of walls shall be vetted by approved agency of the Engineer-in-
charge before execution of this item.
Part-B
Page 57
(f) Procedure for installing undercut anchor shall be followed as below –
 Need to drill number of holes as per design in stone with special

tools, tackles, equipment and as per recommended process of
manufacturer with care.
 Validate the hole depth, diameter, height with measuring

specialized tools as per manufacturer guidelines.
 Install the undercut anchor in impact free manner as per

manufacturer guideline and as directed by Engineer-in-charge.
 Discard stone damaged due to undercutting operation.
 Fix the approved fixtures with undercut anchor as per approved

design.
 Marking of stone cladding pattern and framing lines for approval.

Marking shall be verified specifically at residues, junctions with
other adjoining finishing, corners etc. Ensure that anchor shall not
be located at joints, in case of block masonry.
 The framework shall be fixed to the wall with the help of approved,
appropriate & as per parent make SS 316 anchor fasteners
including drilling holes, cleaning, and metal scaffolding etc.
complete in the required pattern as per approved shop drawing
and as directed and approved by Engineer-in-charge.
 The stones shall be installed on aluminium structural framing with

the help of bracket and required SS 316 fastener, nut, bolt as per
approved pattern and as per the approved shop drawing.
 Installation of undercut anchors are shown in below illustrative

image –
Part-B
Page 58
 Indicative section of Dry Cladding System with Under Cut Anchor
(Framing shall be as per specification) –
Part-B
Page 59
Note: The above methodology is only for reference and final method
statement submitted by the contractor for approval by Engineer-in-
charge
6.5 Wet cladding with sand stone: Following aspects shall be adhered by the
contractor:
(a) Relevant specifications shall be followed as per CPWD vol-1, clause no-
8.6 of wet cladding work.
(b) The Contractor shall consider the development area while planning,
detailing etc. and not treat any face or part thereof in isolation.
(c) The stones shall be soaked in clean water for at least 30 minutes.
(d) The rendering shall be damped just sufficiently to prevent excessive
water absorption from stones.
(e) The bedding surfaces of small units shall be well wetted, and the units
stood on a full bed of mortar and tapped home.
(f) For very large or heavy units, a mortar bed shall be leveled upto
20mm from the face, before the stone is lowered into place. All joints
shall be as completely filled as possible.
(g) Sufficient mortar shall be spread to bed each stone.
(h) It shall be ensured that there are no hard lumps in the mortar that
could prevent even bedding.
(i) Spacer dabs of appropriate mortar can be used to achieve resistance
against inward movement of the stones. Mortar shall be of such
consistency and size that it remains in permanent contact with the
Part-B
Page 60
back of the cladding stone and the structure. It is essential to ensure
that such mortar dabs do not bridge the movement joints.
(j) It shall be ensured that stones are flat and true by means of a
straightedge. Adjustments necessary shall be made within 10 minutes
of fixing.
(k) Temporarily support, bracing, scaffolding shall be provided as per site
condition for all level
(l) The stone shall be fixed with consistent joint width by correct use of
spacer lugs to provide hairline (maximum 1 mm thick) joints. All joints
shall be filled solid with mortar as specified in item except for
projecting members of overhanging cornices which may be provided
with hollow bedding as approved by the Engineer-in-charge. Excess
mortar shall be cleaned off immediately so that no mortar is visible on
the face of stone cladding. The stone / cladding shall be properly cured
for at least 7 days.
(m) All stones shall be secured to the backing by means of stainless-steel
cramps, pins, anchors, fasteners and expansion bolts as shown on the
"Good for Construction" drawings and approved shop drawings and as
directed by the Engineer-in-charge. All cramps, dowels etc. shall be
fitted and grouted solid as the work proceeds. The fixings shall be
secured to concrete backings using expansion fasteners and bolts.
(n) No stone shall bridge the expansion/ separation gap provided in the
structure.
(o) The stone joints shall be grouted using mortar as specified in BOQ
item. Grout shall be mixed with an approved bonding agent in the
proportion as recommended by the manufacturer and as directed by
the Engineer-in-charge. Grouting shall be done after the stones are
firmly fixed but before any dirt or contamination can enter the gap
behind cladding stone. Grouting materials shall be mixed to correct
consistency and applied before hardening commences. The grout
should be filled in gaps between the stone and the backing until space
is completely filled. When the grout has set, the surplus material shall
be removed and the joints shall be tooled to required profile. After the
grout has hardened, the stones shall be washed with water and rubbed
with a gunny cloth. If any hollowness is detected by tapping the
Part-B
Page 61
stones, defective cladding shall be taken out and re-laid.
(p) The sectional size of a cramp shall not be less than 25mm x 6mm and
the pins used for securing adjacent stones shall not be less than
75mm long and 6mm diameter or as approved. The minimum
thickness of stone behind a cramp mortise shall be 37mm and the
minimum depth of slot for a corbel plate shall also be 37mm as
approved.
7. FLOORING WORK: The item shall be executed as per BOQ item and notes,
applicable CPWD specifications and manufacturer’s method of application as
approved by Engineer-in-charge. For avoiding of scratch marks or damage to the
vitrified / ceramic floor tile, the necessary arrangement of hessian cloth with a
coat of POP over it shall be provided. Nothing shall be paid extra on this account.
7.1 Vacuum Dewatering Concrete flooring:
(a) The item shall be executed as per BOQ item and notes, applicable
CPWD specifications or as approved by Engineer-in-charge. Contractor
shall submit methodology statement with all detail in illustrative sketch
form and get approved from Engineer-in-charge before start of work.
(b) Following salient aspects of application shall be ensured by the
contractor:
 Immediately following placement, the concrete shall be levelled
with a vibrating screeding running on a true surface, set at the
proper elevation required to provide the specified finished
elevation.
 Immediately after levelling, the concrete shall be vacuum
dewatered in accordance with the recommendation of the
manufacturer.
 The trowelling operation shall not be done before the concrete has
hardened enough to carry the machine i.e. the trowelling blades will
not leave any marks on the concrete. Repeated trowelling shall be
done, with intervals between the passes, to improve the surface
finish.
 Cutting of joints shall be done within 24 hours of laying of concrete
as per the width & depth of joints and panel size approved by
Engineer-in-charge.
Part-B
Page 62
 The joints shall be filled with polysulphide sealant within one month
of laying of concrete after proper cleaning of joints and fixing backer
rod.
8. PLASTERING WORKS: The item shall be executed as per BOQ item and notes,
applicable CPWD specifications and manufacturer’s method of application as
approved by Engineer-in-charge.
8.1 Plastering shall be done using spray application except portions where spray
application is not feasible, as approved by Engineer-in-charge. Ready mix
polymer modified cement plaster suitable for spray application shall only be
used for spray application.
8.2 Gypsum plaster shall also be done with spray gun. Gypsum suitable for spray
application shall only be used.
8.3 Sand shall not be mixed in Ready mix polymer modified cement plaster and
mortar, except with prior approval of Engineer-in-charge for specific
requirement.
9. WATER PROOFING WORK

9.1 HDPE based waterproofing:
CPWD specifications and manufacturer’s method of application as
approved by Engineer-in-charge. Contractor shall submit methodology
statement with all detail in illustrative sketch form and get approved
from Engineer-in-charge before start of work.
contractor:
 The membrane must be applied to smooth, prepared substrate. The
substrate shall be free from loose aggregate or other sharp
protrusions. Standing water must be removed to prevent
contamination of overlaps and subsequent compromise of
waterproof properties.
 Cleaning of PCC surface to remove dust, loose particles, etc. with

compressed air or any other suitable technique depending on site
conditions, grinding any sharp edges, etc.
Part-B
Page 63
 Fully bonded HDPE membrane will overlap and secure adjacent
sheets and continued over the side of raft, vertical portion of
retaining wall and over the kicker joint/starter, and terminated over
the kicker joint, into a saw cut groove provided at an angle of 45
degrees to the vertical, to tuck in the HDPE membrane and sealed
off with a PU sealant.
 While tying the reinforcement, take proper care so membrane shall

not be punctured. Before pouring concrete, checking shall be carried
out to find out any damage. If any puncture/ damage is found,
same shall be repaired before pouring of concrete.
(c) The rate includes cost of all materials and labour involved in all the
operations required to carry the works as per BOQ and specifications
including surface preparation, repairing, grouting saw cutting making
fillets at corners etc. complete.
9.2 Waterproofing with Polyurea treatment:

contractor:
 All surfaces must be clean and free from debris, loose or flaking
material, standing water, oil, grease and organic growth. Concrete
surfaces must be free from laitance and any traces of shuttering,
release oils and curing compounds.
 Surface shall be proper grinded in very smooth manner.
 All joints in concrete to be cut in V-groove shape (approx. 10

mmx10 mm) using mechanical cutter and clean the same to remove
any loose dust, dirt etc. and same shall be filled with Polymer
Part-B
Page 64
Modified Mortar finish in level with existing concrete surface. Allow
the same to cure for 24 hrs.
 Bug holes shall be filled with epoxy putty.
 All cracks in concrete shall be chased to a 5mm x 5mm groove and

filled with epoxy putty.
 The tie rod holes shall be filled with polymer modified mortar/ non
shrink grout.
 Primer application, as required, shall carry out as per

manufacturer’s recommendation. Apply dry sand onto the wet
primer. Polyurea coating shall be applied only after proper drying of
primer.
 Polyurea coating shall be applied by spraying machine in two coats.

The coats shall be applied in perpendicular directions.
 Coating shall be overlapped by minimum 100 mm over HDPE

membrane/any other water proofing layer.
 Coating shall be applied minimum 150 mm above finished floor

level. It will terminate in a 6 mm x 6 mm groove prepared in
concrete surface.
 Protection board as per BOQ item shall be provided on polyurea

treatment to prevent the damage of membrane during backfilling.
The protection board is to be spot bonded on the applied
waterproofing membrane.
operations required to carry the works as per BOQ and specifications
including surface preparation, repairing, grouting, protection board etc.
complete.
9.3 Concrete screed
(a) The item shall be executed as per BOQ item and notes and applicable
Part-B
Page 65
CPWD specifications w.r.t concrete works. Contractor shall submit
methodology statement with all detail in illustrative sketch form and get
approved from Engineer-in-charge before start of work.
9.4 Waterproofing treatment with Integral crystalline admixture/

integral crystalline slurry
(a) The item shall be executed as per BOQ item and applicable CPWD
specifications. Contractor shall submit methodology statement with all
detail in illustrative sketch form and get approved from Engineer-in-
charge before start of work.
9.5 Water proofing system with elastomeric PU (Poly urethane):
contractor:
material, standing water, oil, grease, and organic growth. Concrete
 Before taking up the water proofing work the construction of

parapet walls, including finishing should be completed. Similarly,
the ancillary items like haunches, khurras, grooves to tack the fibre
cloth layer, fixing up of all down take pipes, water pipes and electric
conduits etc. should be completed and no such work should be
allowed on the area to be treated during the progress of water
proofing treatment or even later.
 There is no necessity of hacking the surface but the surface to be

treated shall be cleaned including removing the mortar dropping
from the surface. Surface shall be proper grinded in very smooth
Part-B
Page 66
manner.
 All joints and cracks to be cut in V-groove shape (approx. 10

mmx10 mm) using mechanical cutter and clean the same to remove
any loose dust, dirt etc. and same shall be filled with Polymer
Modified Mortar finish in level with existing concrete surface. Allow
the same to cure for 24 hrs.
 Pipes being fixed for plumbing shall be fixed in holes which are
mechanically core cut, more than the dia. of the pipes. Pipes shall
be fixed by grouting the annular space with non-shrink cementitious
grout of proprietary make. Before grouting the pipes shall be
wrapped with a two-way self-adhesive tape atleast 2 inches wide
and then grouted to fill in the grout, ensuring total watertight
plumbing fittings.
 Primer application, as required, shall carry out as per

manufacturer’s recommendation. PU coating shall be applied only
after proper drying of primer.
 PU coating shall be applied by spraying machine in two coats. The

coats shall be applied in perpendicular directions.
 The application of PU coating over the parapet, drainage spouts

including termination detailing shall be as per manufacturer’s
specifications.
operations required to carry the works as per the above specifications
including primer, geotextiles, surface preparation, making fillets at
corners etc. complete, but excluding the cost of concrete screed.
(d) Overlaps and tucking in a flashing groove shall not be measured. No
deductions shall be made for openings or recess or chimney stack, roof
lights or Khurras of area upto 0.40 sqm nor anything extra shall be paid
for forming such openings, recess etc. For area exceeding 0.40 sqm.
deduction will be made in the measurement for the full opening and
nothing extra shall be paid for making such opening
Part-B
Page 67
9.6 Waterproofing treatment with acrylic polymer modified cementitious
elastomeric coating

contractor:
 Cleaning the slab to remove loose dust, dirt, oil, debris (sunken
slab for toilet or balcony) with water jetting, saturating the slab
with water.
 Repairing of cracks (if any) using polymer modified mortar, carry

out cementitious injection grouting at leakage points with
Plasticized Expansive Grout Admixture as per manufacturer’s
specification.
 Making 50 mm thick cement mortar (1:3) vata/ fillet with Polymer

modified bonding agent at dosage as per manufacturer’s
specifications.
 Pipes being fixed for plumbing shall be fixed in holes which are
mechanically core cut, more than the dia. of the pipes. Pipes shall
be fixed by grouting the annular space with non-shrink
cementitious grout of proprietary make. Before grouting, the pipes
shall be wrapped with a two-way self-adhesive tape at least 2
inches wide and then grouted to fill in the grout, ensuring total
watertight plumbing fittings.
 Coating shall be applied over on to the vertical walls for a height of

1.2 m above the floor or as directed by Engineer-in-charge.
 The last coat when wet, shall be sprinkled with quartz sand, to
facilitate proper bonding the floor screed or plaster.
Part-B
Page 68
operations required to carry the works as per the specifications
including cleaning surface, repair of cracks/ joints, providing vata/ fillet,
bore/ hole packing treatment etc.
9.7 Water proofing with PU membrane and Insulation with PU foam on
terrace:

contractor:
 All surfaces must be clean and free from debris, lose or flaking
 Before taking up the water proofing work the construction of

parapet walls, including finishing should be completed. Similarly,
the ancillary items like haunches, khurras, grooves to tack the fibre
cloth layer, fixing up of all down take pipes, water pipes and electric
conduits etc. should be completed and no such work should be
allowed on the area to be treated during the progress of water
proofing treatment or even later.
 Repairing cracks on mother roof slab by cutting & making V grooves

in 25x25 mm, and filling with a polymer modified sand-cementitious
mortar, of 1:3 proportion and filling the groove with CM (1:3) as
recommended by manufacturer specification.
 Primer application shall be carried out as per manufacturer’s

recommendation. PU coating shall be applied only after proper
drying of primer.
Part-B
Page 69
 Making fillet and haunches with polymer modified mortar or as per
manufacturer of minimum size 50mm x 50mm
(c) The rate includes cost of all materials and labour required to carry the
works as per the above specifications including cleaning surface,
repairing of cracks/joints, providing vata/ fillet, geotextile, insulation
foam, only concrete protection screed (as per gradient) with
reinforcement (if any) and SRI coating shall be paid separately.
9.8 SRI Coating, Swellable water stop bar and Food grade epoxy coating:
approved by Engineer-in-charge.
9.9 Waterproofing treatment with Root-Resistant Polyurea

contractor:
 The Polyurea coating shall be applied over the mother slab, concrete
haunches on the periphery of the parapet wall, all around and well
above the height of the soil overburden to provide complete
protection.
 Providing & placing polypropylene dimpled board/ drain board with

filter medium, based on soil characteristics and height of soil
Part-B
Page 70
overburden.
 Supplying and applying protective geo textile fabric of 200 gsm over
the entire membrane with proper overlaps of 100 mm
 Concrete screed with saw cut and groove in desired slope, which
shall be paid relevant tender item.
(c) The rate includes the cost of all materials and labour in all the
operations required to carry the works as per the above specifications
including surface preparation, repairing, grouting, geotextile and drain
board etc. complete.
10. METAL WORKS:

10.1 All metal works shall be executed as per BOQ item and notes, applicable
CPWD specifications and manufacturer specification as approved by
Engineer-in-charge. Contractor shall submit methodology statement, if
required by Engineer-in-charge, with all detail in illustrative sketch form and
get approved from Engineer-in-charge before start of work.
10.2 Aluminium Frame Works:
(a) All aluminium works shall be executed as per BOQ item and notes,
applicable CPWD specifications and manufacturer specifications as
statement, if required by Engineer-in-charge, with all detail in
illustrative sketch form and get approved from Engineer-in-charge
before start of work.
(b) Contractor shall procure and install/erect the complete aluminium
framework including clamps and anchors for backup support frame to
stone cladding only from the specialized manufacturer for such systems,
asper preferred make list.
10.3 Brass casting work:
(a) Density of Brass casting, Brass Extrusion & Brass Sheet shall be 8.50g/
cm^3 (± 0.20 g/ cm^3). Only high-quality brass shall be used.
(b) Sizes of Emblem and Ashok Chakra shall be varying as per location
(internal or external) of fixing.
Part-B
Page 71
(c) Brass material for fabrication shall be of good quality, in line without
bending or any type of damage.
(d) Brass material for Architectural elements shall be approved by

Engineer-in-charge before starting the fabrication or any other type of
process i.e., carving, etching, embossing etc.
11. CEILING AND WALL PANELLING WORKS

11.1 All false ceiling and wall paneling items shall be executed as per BOQ item
and notes, applicable CPWD specifications and manufacturer’s method of
application as approved by Engineer-in-charge. Contractor shall submit
methodology statement with all detail in illustrative sketch form and get
approved from Engineer-in-charge before start of work.
11.2 The deflection loading of the false ceiling system shall be 12.5 kg/ m2. Main
support beam shall be tested as per ASTM C635. Deflection should be less
than L/ 360 with a deflection loading of 15kg/ m. All main beam to main
beam and cross tee to cross tee connection shall have a pull-out strength of
more than 100kg.
11.3 Following salient aspects of wall paneling shall be ensured by the contractor:
(a) Gypsum Boards/MDF boards/Plywood shall be stored in a dry place and
water should not come in contact with boards/ ply. If the boards/ply get
wet, they should not be used in work.
(b) The floor should be perfectly level before laying the first course/member
of paneling. All boards/ply must be properly aligned to the plumb.
(c) Paneling must be properly aligned vertically and horizontal, true to
desired line and levels.
(d) The recommended quantity of Gypsum Bonding Plaster must be used
for joints and filling the grooves made for conduits, pipelines, etc.
Excess Bonding Plaster must be scooped and removed, so that the
joints and the places where the grooves are filled in are flush and even.
(e) The Gypsum walls lining should be dry and sanding done properly
especially at joints.
(f) Use electrical saw or grooving tools for conduiting, chase cutting etc.
Hammer and chisel techniques to form chases must be avoided. For
concealed piping and conduit, the depth of groove should not exceed 50
Part-B
Page 72
mm.
(g) Provision of plyboards of suitable size shall be made in GI frame of dry
wall for anchorage of service conduits and fixtures.
(h) Back-to-back provision of switch boxes should be avoided for better fire
protection and sound insultation.
(i) Baffling of boards in the GI frame of dry walls shall be done behind
skiting and switch boxes location for better sound and fire insultation.
(j) In case of double layered dry wall, the joints of inner and outer boards
should be staggered for better stability and fire & sound insulation.
(k) Anchors/fasteners shall be of reputed makes and installed as per
manufacturer specifications. Anchors/fasteners must be of adequate
and required load carrying capacity as required for the member.
(l) Contractor shall prepare shop drawing based on concept drawing
including services and prepared mock-up of required area. As per
approved shop drawing and mock-up, contractor shall start the work.
12. HDPE Grass Pavers: Grass paver shall be laid on a well compacted surface in
proper gradient. Gap of grass/ grid paver shall be filled with mixture of garden
soil, manure, and sludge (in full depth) for lawn plantation and also including
supplying and planting specified carpet lawn as required and as per specification.
13. Precast Cement Concrete Paver Block: The sub-grade layer on which paver
block are provided, shall be well compacted surface with proper gradient.
14. Metal dustbin: Dustbin shall be fabricated from MS member as per drawing
with all arrangement. Each dustbin shall contain two containers for wet and dry
garbage as per below image
Part-B
Page 73
15. DIAPHRAGM WALL:
15.1 Diaphragm walls shall be executed as per Good for construction design &
drawings issued by Engineer-in-charge. Contractor shall check on-site soil
parameters, subsoil conditions and performance of diaphragm wall during
execution of work are similar to design parameters and any variation shall
be informed to Engineer-in-charge.
15.2 Relevant specification shall be followed as per relevant CPWD specification.
Concrete grade and composition, Reinforcement, HT strands shall be as
prescribed in BOQ item. Polymer slurry shall be used instead of bentonite.
Tremie concreting method shall be adopted.
15.3 A method statement for construction of diaphragm wall and soil anchorage
shall be submitted by the Contractor for approval of the Engineer-in-charge,
well in advance of the commencement of the activity at site. Method
statement shall include but not limited to:
(a) Size of diaphragm wall panels, if proposed to be different from GIC
drawings, for any specific and valid reason
(b) The sequence of the construction of the panels
(c) Details of plant and machinery to be used
(d) Details of guide walls to be constructed for trenches
(e) Formation of the joints between panels including sealing of the joints
(f) The type, source, chemical and physical properties of the polymer to
be used.
(g) The mixing, transporting, placing, flushing and recycling of polymer
slurry.
(h) Calculations to show that the density of the polymer and lowest head
of the slurry are sufficient to maintain the stability of the trench,
considering the ground conditions envisaged in the entire depth of
diaphragm wall.
(i) The method of monitoring and checking the stability of the diaphragm
wall trench
(j) The method of checking and ensuring the stability of properties, roads,
services, underground utilities / structures in the vicinity of site.
(k) The methods of monitoring and controlling the tolerances associated
with diaphragm wall panels.
Part-B
Page 74
(l) The method of disposal of contaminated polymer slurry and excavated
muck.
(m) The data sheet format for recording various activities and quality
parameters for the construction of the diaphragm wall.
15.4 The layout / alignment of the diaphragm wall shall be set out true to lines,
curves, grades, and sections as shown on the drawings and directions of
Engineer-in-charge. Dimensions, lines and levels shall be set out and
checked with respect to permanent reference lines and benchmark so that
the final product is in accordance with the drawings or as directed by the
Engineer.
15.5 The selection of machinery for execution of diaphragm wall work, like
rotary or percussion grabbing equipment, equipment for direct or inverse
mud circulation, etc. shall be made as per soil condition at site. Vibrations
and noise produced during construction should not have any damaging or
disturbing effect on the people and structures in the vicinity of site.
15.6 Stop ends, inserted prior to placing concrete in a diaphragm wall panel
shall be clean and have a smooth regular surface. They shall be
adequately restrained to prevent movement during concreting.
15.7 The contractor shall ensure that the all the activities of the construction of
the diaphragm wall shall comply with the requirements of the relevant
local authorities including pollution control requirements, governing the
discharge of the polymer and use of ground anchors.
15.8 Muck excavated and discharge of polymer slurry during construction of
diaphragm walls shall be properly and safely collected stacked at site and
satisfactory disposed of away from site, duly complying all regulatory
norms for pollution control and environment protection. Muck and slurry
should not create unhealthy condition at site and should not hinder other
activities at site.
15.9 The contractor shall ensure that the diaphragm wall panels provide a
watertight barrier to the basements. The contractor shall provide PVC
water stop of required size, between the panels. Any seepage of water
shall be rectified by the contractor at no additional cost. Relevant
specifications shall be followed as per CPWD specification Vol - 2 clause no
22.4 for PVC water stop for diaphragm wall construction.
Part-B
Page 75
15.10 The temporary anchors in diaphragm walls shall be removable types. All
anchors shall be properly removed/destressed after completion of all
works of retaining walls of basement, with prior approval of Engineer-in-
charge.
15.11 Inclinometer devices: For measuring deformation/displacement of
diaphragm walls, contractor shall install inclinometers at various locations,
close to the diaphragm walls. Inclinometer tubes shall be secured with the
reinforcement cages before the cage is lowered into the trench. The
bottom of the tube shall be sealed against intrusion of concrete or grout.
The tube shall be filled with water and the top end adequately covered
prior to tremie concreting of the wall panel. The read-out equipment shall
be provided to assist in recording any movement of inclinometer tubes
daily or at such intervals as may be required. Contractor shall regularly
monitor these inclinometers and any tilting or deformation observed shall
be immediately informed to Engineer-in-charge and remedial/preventive
actions shall be taken by the contractor to avoid damages
15.12 Nothing extra shall be payable to the contractor for cement content
beyond the minimum cement content stipulated for the item.
15.13 Contractor shall carry out chipping or dismantling of concrete or any
other protrusion in diaphragm wall protruding out of inner surface of
diaphragm wall and top of wall, if such protrusions hinder the execution of
further activities of construction work. Nothing extra shall be payable to
contractor for removal of unacceptable protrusions in diaphragm walls.
15.14 Contractor shall take all appropriate remedial measures to block cavities
/gaps in diaphragm walls if observed during excavation of earth for
basement. Nothing extra shall be payable to contractor for the same.
15.15 Contractor shall take all remedial measures to stop seepage of water
through diaphragm walls and joints of diaphragm wall panels. Nothing
extra shall be payable to contractor for the same.
15.16 If diaphragm wall concreting is terminated below the designed and
required top level, contractor shall take suitable measures to build
diaphragm wall up to required level. Payment for additional concrete shall
be done under relevant item of contract agreement provided such incident
is not due to fault on part of contractor. Decision of Engineer-in-charge
for payment shall be final and binding on the contractor.
Part-B
Page 76
15.17 Safety precautions shall be taken throughout the construction of the
diaphragm wall and excavation of the construction area, complying all
necessary measures and standard practice of deep open excavation. The
contractor shall take all necessary precautions to ensure the stability of
diaphragm walls and guide walls. He shall responsible to take necessary
measures and precautions for the safety of the personnel in the area of
the operation.
15.18 Records: The following records shall be kept for each panel of diaphragm
wall:
(a) Panel number
(b) Level of Top of guide wall
(c) Level of bottom of guide wall
(d) Top level of diaphragm wall casted
(e) Depth of base of panel from top of guide wall
(f) Date and time of start and finish of panel excavation
(g) Date and time of start and finish of panel concreting
(h) Length of panel
(i) Thickness of wall casted
(j) A log of soil type and water table encountered from start to finish of
excavation.
(k) Records of CC cubes taken
(l) Actual volume of the concrete used.
(m) A graph of theoretical and actual volume of concrete volumes at
different with depths of Diaphragm wall
(n) Date wise detail of quantity of slurry and soil muck removed from site.
(o) Date and time of completion of reinforcement cage placement
(p) Details of any obstruction encountered and time spent in clearing the
obstructions.
(q) Any other detail as directed by Engineer-in-charge.
16. SOIL ANCHOR FOR DIAPHRAGM WALL: Contractor shall adhere to the
following:
16.1 Materials & Equipment:
(a) HT Strands: The tendon shall comply with standard as IS 14268
(2017/latest revision). This steel shall be high tensile plain wires or
Part-B
Page 77
standard cables.
(b) Anchorage covers (for temporary anchors): Use exposed
anchorage covers fabricated from steel or ductile cast iron with a
minimum thickness of 2.5mm. Ensure that the cover is securely
attached to the anchorage device or bearing plate. If the cover is to be
grease filled, ensure the cover forms a permanent watertight enclosure
for the anchorage device.
(c) Anchorage Devices: Use anchorage devices capable of developing
95% of the minimum specified ultimate tensile strength of the
prestressing steel tendon. Use anchorage devices that meet the static
strength requirements of relevant codal provisions. Use couplers for
tendon sections capable of developing 95% of the minimum specified
ultimate tensile strength.
(d) Cement/Chemical Grout: Use grout for anchorage consisting of a
pump-able mixture of Type I, II, or III Portland cement meeting the
codal requirements, sand, water, and admixtures. The Contractor may
use admixtures which control bleeding, improve flow ability, reduce
water content, and retard set in the grout, subject to the approval of
the Engineer. The Contractor may only add expansive admixtures to
the grout used for filling sealed encapsulations, trumpets, and
anchorage covers. Do not use accelerators. Use admixtures compatible
with the prestressing steels and mixed in accordance with the
manufacturer's recommendations.
(e) Admixtures: The use of admixtures with pre-stressing steel shall be
approved by the Engineer in charge.
Normally the thickest possible grouting (0.5 water cement ratio) is
adopted for primary grouting (refer latest IS: 6066 ). For anchors, the
water/cement ratio of tendon bonding grouts should generally lie in
the range 0.35 to 0.60. For anchors installed in low-permeability
ground, e.g., rock or clay, the water/cement ratio should not exceed
0.45. The Engineer-in-charge may require grout cube testing if the
Contractor uses admixtures or irregularities occur in anchor testing.
(f) Bearing Plate: Use bearing plates fabricated from steel meeting the
requirements of relevant Indian Standards.
(g) Bond-breaker: Use bond-breaker fabricated from a smooth plastic
Part-B
Page 78
tube or pipe having the following properties:
 Resistant to chemical attack from aggressive environments, grout,
or grease
 Resistant to aging by ultra-violet light
 Fabricated from material non-detrimental to the tendon
 Capable of withstanding abrasion, impact, and bending during
handling and installation
 Enable the tendon to elongate during testing and stressing
 Allow the tendon to remain un-bonded after lock-off.
(h) Centralizers: Use centralizers fabricated from plastic, steel, or

material that is non-detrimental to the prestressing steel. Do not use
wood. Ensure that the centralizer is able to support the tendon in the
drill hole and position the tendon so a minimum of 12.5mm of grout
cover is provided over the tendon bond length. In addition, locate the
upper centralizer a maximum of 1.5m from the top of the tendon bond
length, and locate the lower centralizer a maximum of 300mm from
the bottom of the tendon bond length. Centralizers will not be required
for pressure injected tendons if the Contractor installs the anchor in
coarse grained soils using grouting pressures greater than 1050 kPa.
Centralizers will not be required if the Contractor installs the anchors
and grouts them through a hollow stem auger and maintains the hole
full of stiff grout (slump less than 225 mm) during extraction of the
auger.
(i) Sheath: Use a sheath as part of the corrosion protection system for
the un-bonded portion of the tendon. It should be fabricated as per
Indian standards.
(j) Spacers: Use spacers to separate elements of a multi-element tendon
and which permit grout to flow freely upto the end of drilled hole. Use
spacers fabricated from plastic, steel, or material which is non-
detrimental to the prestressing steel.
(k) Trumpet: Use a trumpet to provide a transition from the anchorage to
the un-bonded length corrosion protection fabricated from a steel pipe
or tube meeting the requirements of relevant Indian Standard for
tubing. Use a trumpet that has a minimum wall thickness of 3mm for
Part-B
Page 79
diameters up to 100mm and 5mm for larger diameters.
(l) Water: It shall conform to requirements laid down in IS: 456-2000 for
mixing grout.
(m) Grout Tube: Use a grout tube fabricated from a high-density
polyethylene tube or a PVC pipe or a steel pipe with a 12mm minimum
inside diameter.
16.2 Tendon Fabrication: Ensure that tendons are free of dirt, rust, or any
other deleterious substance. Degrease the bond length of tendon. Handle
and protect tendons, prior to installation, in a manner to avoid corrosion
and physical damage. Tendons with abrasion, kinks, welds and weld
splatters, cuts and nicks, which impair the proper performance of the
tendon, shall be rejected. Sheath the tendons in the stressing length to
prevent contact of the anchor tendon with the drill hole wall. The Contractor
may use sheathing that consists of tubes surrounding individual tendon
elements or a single tube surrounding the elements altogether. The
Contractor may use sheathing material of either steel, plastic, or any other
material which is non-detrimental to the high strength prestressing steel.
The Contractor may use tape to prevent grout from entering under the
sheath on individually sheathed elements.
16.3 Tendon Installation

(a) Drilling: Core drilling, rotary drilling, percussion drilling, auger
drilling, or driven casing may be used. At the ground surface, locate
the drill hole. Locate the drill hole so that the longitudinal axis of the
drill hole and the longitudinal axis of the tendon are parallel. In
particular, do not drill the pre-stressed soil anchor hole in a location
that requires the tendon to be bent in order to connect the bearing
plate to the supported structure.
(b) Tendon Insertion: Insert the tendon into the drill hole to the desired
depth. When the tendon cannot be completely inserted, remove the
tendon from the drill hole, and then clean or re-drill the hole to permit
insertion. Do not drive or force partially inserted tendons into the hole.
(c) Installation of Trumpet and Anchorage: When corrosion protection
is required, extend that portion of the corrosion protection surrounding
the un-bonded length of the tendon, beyond the bottom seal of the
Part-B
Page 80
trumpet or 300mm into the trumpet if no trumpet seal is provided. If
the protection does not extend beyond the seal or sufficiently far
enough into the trumpet, extend the corrosion protection, or lengthen
the trumpet.
Place the bearing plate and anchor head such that the axis of the
tendon is perpendicular to the bearing plate.
Completely fill the trumpet with corrosion inhibiting grease or grout.
Trumpet grease may be placed any time during construction. Place
trumpet grout after the pre-stressed soil anchor has been tested and
stressed. Demonstrate to the Engineer that the procedures selected
for placement of either grease or grout will produce a completely filled
trumpet.
(d) Anchor Grouting: Provide grouting equipment that produces a grout
free of lumps and un-dispersed cement. Use a positive displacement
grout pump equipped with a pressure gauge to monitor grout
pressures. Ensure that the pressure gauge is capable of measuring
pressures of at least 1050 kPa or twice the actual grout pressures
used, whichever is greater. Size the grouting equipment to enable the
grout to be pumped in one continuous operation. Ensure that the
mixer is capable of continuously agitating the grout. Inject the grout
from the lowest point of the drill hole. Grout may be pumped through
grout tubes, casing, hollow-stem-augers, or drill rods. The grout may
be placed before or after insertion of the tendon. Record the quantity
of the grout and the grout pressures. Control the grout pressures and
grout takes to prevent excessive heave or fracturing.
16.4 Testing of Pre-stressed Soil Anchor
(a) Performance test shall be conducted on first two soil anchors installed
on the project. Tests shall be conducted before grouting further soil
anchors. The purpose of these initial tests shall be to verify the
success of installation procedures and the performance of the bond
strength of anchors.
(b) Creep test shall be conducted on 5% of the pre-stressed soil anchors
or a minimum of three, whichever is greater.
(c) The Engineer-in-charge will select the pre-stressed soil anchors for
performance test and creep test. He may at his discretion, direct to
Part-B
Page 81
increase or decrease the number of these tests depending of results
obtained.
(d) Do not apply a load greater than 10% of the factored design load to
the pre-stressed soil anchor.
(e) The maximum test load should not exceed 90% of the minimum yield
strength of the tendon.
(f) The test load shall be applied uniformly and simultaneously on all
tendons of a soil anchor. Do not perform stressing of single tendon of
multi-element tendons.
(g) Proof tests shall be conducted on all pre-stressed soil anchors which
are not subjected to a performance test or a creep test.
(h) Test results shall be recorded in the Performa approved by the
Engineer-in-charge. Test results shall be submit the Engineer-in-
charge within one week of test.
16.5 Criteria for Performance Test and Proof Test: These tests shall be
conducted IS standards or international standards as approved by
Engineer-in-charge.
(a) Performance Test: Reference pressure gauge shall be placed in
series with the pressure gauge on soil anchor subjected to
performance test. If the load determined by the reference pressure
gauge and the pressure gauge differ by more than 10%, recalibration
shall be done for the jack, pressure gauge and reference pressure
gauge. Performance test shall be conducted by incremental loading
and unloading the pre-stressed soil anchor in accordance to loading
schedule approved by Engineer-in-charge. Plot curve for
displacement/movement of soil anchor versus load applied for each
load increment. Also, plot the residual movement of the tendon at
each applied load versus the highest previously applied load.
(b) Proof Test: Perform the proof test by incrementally loading the pre-
stressed soil anchor in accordance with the schedule approved by
Engineer-in-charge. Compare the proof test results to the performance
test results. If there is any significant variation from the performance
test results, perform a performance test on the next anchor. Plot the
pre-stressed soil anchor displacement/movement versus load for each
load increment in the proof test.
Part-B
Page 82
(c) Criteria for Performing a Creep Test: Perform the creep test by
incrementally loading and unloading the pre-stressed soil anchor in
accordance with the performance test schedule approved by Engineer-
in-charge. Plot the pre-stressed soil anchor movement and the residual
movement measured in a creep test as described for the performance
test above and plot the creep movement for each load as a function of
the logarithm of time.
(d) Lock-Off: Upon satisfactory completion of all testing, reduce the load
to the lock-off load, and transfer the load to the anchorage device. The
Contractor may completely unload the pre-stressed soil anchor prior to
lock-off. After transferring the load and prior to removing the jack,
take a lift-off reading. Use a lift-off reading that is within 10% of the
specified lock-off load. If the load is not within 10% of the specified
lock-off load, reset the anchorage, and take another lift-off reading.
Repeat this process until obtaining the desired lock-off load.
(e) Cutting of Tendon Protrusions: After an anchor has been accepted
by the Engineer, saw cut the portion of the anchor tendon extending
beyond the anchorage. Take care not to damage the tendon or the
tendon anchorage.
16.6 Pre-stressed Soil Anchor Load Test Acceptance Criteria: The
Engineer will accept a performance or proof-tested pre-stressed soil anchor
as per the standard acceptable criteria laid down in Indian or International
standards as approved by Engineer-in-charge
16.7 Corrosion Protection of tendons: Protect pre-stressed soil anchors
against corrosion using materials and procedures described herein. The
following materials may be used independently or in various combinations:
(a) Portland cement grout
(b) Plastic pipe or tubing
(c) Steel pipe or tubing
(d) Greases specially compounded for post-tensioning
(e) Bituminous
(f) Heat shrinkable polyethylene tubing
16.8 Use corrosion protection materials with properties that are not detrimental
to the prestressing steel and that prevent the intrusion of corrosive
environments. Use coating materials that also have the following
Part-B
Page 83
properties:
(a) Free from cracks and not brittle or fluid over the entire anticipated
range of temperature or sheathing
(b) Chemically stable
(c) Non-reactive with the surrounding materials such as concrete,
tendons.
(d) Corrosion-inhibiting
(e) Impervious to moisture
17. MORTAR FOR MASONRY WORK:

17.1 A high strength polymer modified cement based pre-mixed/ready mixed
cement mortar shall be used for masonry works and cement plasters. Ready
mix mortar shall be of approved make, used as per manufacturer’s
recommendation and as directed by Engineer-in-charge.
17.2 Technical Parameters of Mortar shall comply with IS 2250.
Density – Min 1500 Kg/ Cum
Water powder ratio – 17-19%
Compressive strength @ 28 days: Minimum 7.5 MPa.
18. GLAZED FAÇADE SYSTEM:

18.1 SCOPE OF WORKS: The scope of work shall include
(a) Complete design, engineering, fabrication, supply, installation
including testing of materials, quality control, transportation, storage,
protection, final cleaning, handover, guaranties & maintenance during
the defects liability period, for the all façade items/products.
(b) System design and drawing for façade elements in accordance to BOQ
items, GIC drawings and specification stipulated in contract
agreement. Submission of Design calculations, Structural FEM analysis
and shop drawings for all products and components to the satisfaction
of the approving authority.
(c) Proper site survey prior to grid module finalization and shop drawing
preparation.
(d) Submission of Installation methodology & detailed schedule for
material procurement and work execution.
(e) QA / QC procedures
Part-B
Page 84
(f) Bracket layout marking and fixing with use of TOTAL STATION & level
instruments by qualified surveyor.
(g) Cast in channel load test, Anchor bolt pull out test at site before
starting of bracket fixation.
(h) All Aluminum trims & flashing covers to inside and outside of the
building to seal the façade and the building structure.
(i) All stainless steel anchor bolts, fasteners and structural washers.
(j) Aluminum alloy brackets with serrations and serrated washers in
chromate finish or MS Hot dip Galvanized brackets
(k) Glazing materials, Silicon gaskets, EPDM gaskets, setting blocks,
backer rod, sealants, spacer tapes, and related other materials.
(l) Fire stop and smoke seal to all floor levels sealing with the building
interface.
(m) All metal separators in nylon and GI shims.
(n) Protection tapes of 70-80 microns for glass, ACP, Solid Aluminum,
Perforated Aluminum system till hand over stage.
(o) All access equipment including gondolas, floor cranes, scaffoldings,
hoisting and staging.
(p) All material testing and processing test reports.
(q) Material certification for Green Building rating.
(r) Fire rating certification
(s) Performance mock-up tests at laboratory condition and onsite tests.
(t) On site visual mock ups for architectural approval for all products.
(u) Completion of snag list to the satisfaction of Engineer-in-charge or his
representative.
(v) Complete water wash and cleaning of the façade before final hand over
(w) As built drawings.
(x) All process test reports, material test certificates and product
guaranties and warranties
(y) Operation and maintenance manuals.
(z) Design and performance guaranties.
(aa) Thermal performance calculation on overall Facade as per ECBC
norms.
18.2 STANDARDS: All design, material, workmanship and testing shall comply
with the relevant Indian standards and international codes as directed by
Part-B
Page 85
the Engineer in charge.
18.3 DESIGN & PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
(a) System shall transfer self-weight & other associated dead loads
to the main structure of the building.
(b) Deflection limits of Mullion / Transom supporting the glass under

wind load shall be = L / 175 or 19mm whichever less
(c) Deflection limits of Mullion / Transom (Windows or doors for residential

purpose) supporting the glass under wind loa shall be = L / 150 as
per AS 1288:2006
(d) Deflection limits of Transom supporting the glass under dead Load
shall be = L / 300 or 3mm whichever is less
(e) Deflection limits of monolithic glass under Wind Load shall be = L / 60

or 20mm whichever is less (L = Shorter span).
(f) Deflection limits of Insulated glass unit under Wind Load shall be = L /
90 or 20mm whichever is less. (L = Shorter span)
(g) For the purpose of glass selection, design wind pressure shall be
assumed to be of duration 3 second wind gust.
(h) The allowable Design stresses in the glass shall be as follows.
 Tempered Single Glass Panel: 50Mpa

 Tempered Double Glass Panel: 43Mpa
 Heat Strengthened Single glass panel: 22Mpa
 Heat Strengthened Double glass panel: 19Mpa
 Heat Strengthened laminated glass panel: 24Mpa
(i) The permanent deformation of Aluminum structural member shall not

exceed L/1000.
(j) No failure of glass, components or bracket displacement or bolt failure

at 1.5 times design wind load.
(k) The surface compression and edge compression stresses in glass:
Part-B
Page 86
 Heat strengthened glass shall have
 Surface compression of 24.14 MPa to 68.94 MPa
 Edge compression of 37.93 MPa to 66.87 MPa.
 Toughened glass shall have

 Surface compression not less than 68.94 MPa.
 Edge compression not less than 66.87 MPa.
(l) Supporting corbels, brackets and cast-in anchors shall be designed to
carry twice the self-weight of façade structure without causing
overstress or slipping of anchors.
(m) The total self-weight of façade structural system (un-factored) shall be
used in combination with wind load and live load in the design of all
members.
(n) In the design of building envelope systems, following loads shall be
considered in combination with full dead and wind loads:
 A downward point load (100mm x 100mm) of 1.15kN on all
horizontal surfaces including projecting features, sills and canopies
(indoor or outdoor).
 A line load of 0.70kN/m acting either downward or outward on all
window sills.
 A uniformly distributed minimum load of 0.75kPa on all roofs and
canopies.
 These live loads need not be superimposed with each other.
 Live loading for canopies shall be taken as 0.75kPa + allowance for
any BMU access loading.
18.4 WIND LOADS

(a) The building envelope shall be designed for wind loads as per
provisions laid in IS: 875 (Part 3) – 2014. The wind load requirements
therein shall be satisfied taking into account height effects.
(b) Following design parameters/ requirements shall serve as a minimum
for this project.
 Minimum basic wind speed of 50m/s.
 The system shall pass at 1.5 times the design pressure
without any failure of components.
Part-B
Page 87
 Corner condition to be considered from edge/corner of the building
to a distance of 20% of the dimension of the longest side of the
building, or 25% of the dimension of the shortest side of the
building, whichever is greater.
 The cladding pressures do not take account of loading to plan
areas and the loading with dominant openings, canopies and other
projecting features. To calculate wind loads on these areas, local
pressure factors according to BS 6399 and AS1170 (Part 2) shall
be applied to the wind loadings.
 The Contractor may increase these values as he may deem
appropriate.
 The Contractor shall be solely responsible for determining
appropriate load values.
18.5 BMU LOADS

Co-ordinate with BMU Supplier and obtain details of proposed equipment,
monorails, suspension points, sockets operation live loads and directions of
action. Install all required restraint fixings, brackets, supports and allowable
tolerances for the operation of the equipment. BMU loads are not required
to be superimposed with live loads. Verify all loads with BMU Supplier.
18.6 SEISMIC LOADS

(a) The building envelope shall be designed for seismic loads in
accordance with the requirements and standards as defined by the
applicable Indian Standards.
(b) The loading due to earthquake shall be assessed as per IS: 1893-
2016
(c) Seismic zone = IV (Delhi)
(d) R-Response reduction factor = 5.0
18.7 LOAD COMBINATIONS: The building envelope supporting structural

steel framework, brackets and cast-in anchors shall be designed to carry
the loads without causing overstress or slipping of anchors. The total self-
weight in combination with wind load and live load shall be considered in
the design of all members. Design shall be done for following load
Part-B
Page 88
combinations, in addition to load combinations specified in the relevant
design codes:
(a) (2.0 x Dead Load) + (1.5 x Wind Load) for brackets, embeds and
anchors.
(b) (1.2 x Dead Load) + (1.2 x Wind Load) for all elements.
(c) (1.5 x Dead Load) + (1.5 x Live Load) + (0.25 x Wind Load) for all
elements.
18.8 OTHER LOADS: Design the building envelope for additional loads applied
to it, as follows:
(a) Design Load Reduction for Cladding to Features, Canopies and
Blanked-off Walls: Single sealed panel systems to drained cavities with
solid backup walls shall not be designed to incorporate wind load
reduction principles based on (partial) pressure equalization.
(b) Temporary and Construction Loads: Design the building envelope
systems to allow for all handling and installation loads without causing
overstress, permanent deflection or warping. No permanent deforming
of panels, channel legs and the like during installation to enable panels
to fit into place will be accepted.
18.9 LOAD SHARING

(a) Where two sections of different materials touch each other, full load
sharing computations based on the relative stiffness of each section
shall be done.
(b) Composite Sections: Generally, use of composite sections shall not be
allowed. However, in situations where composite sections are required
and accepted by the Engineer in charge, the contractor shall submit
full computations based on applied loads as well as thermal expansion
induced stresses. In assessing stresses in the composite sections,
particular care shall be taken in determining end conditions.
18.10 THERMAL STRESSES

(a) Design Temperature Range: The Contractor shall design the building
envelope based on a surface material temperature range from 0 to
+75 degrees Celsius. Designer shall prepare and submit full analysis of
Part-B
Page 89
all components and/or assemblies and indicate all design movements
on the shop drawings.
(b) Movements within Building Envelope Systems due to Thermal Loads:
Designer shall provide for all thermal movement to take place freely in
the plane of the building envelope systems without causing harmful
buckling, failure of joint seals, undue stress on fasteners and glass or
other detrimental effects. No component or system shall be stressed
or subject to induced loading as a result of thermal movement. Full
allowances for movement including assembly and installation
tolerances shall be incorporated in all junction/components at each
expansion joint or assembly. Any deviation from the above stated
requirements for thermal design shall require analysis and
computations, duly accounting the following issues:
 Meteorological records indicating daily and seasonal maximum and
minimum temperatures, wind, and other relevant weather effects.
 Solar radiant heat loads and any effects of conduction and
convection.
 Shading, including shading from parts of this building and from
adjacent buildings.
 Reflection, including reflection from parts of this building and from
adjacent buildings.
 Orientation and colour
 Resultant "service" temperature of building envelope system
components.
18.11 BUILDING MOVEMENTS

(a) Designer shall design the building envelope systems to provide for
deflections, displacements and other movements within the building
envelope system and between the building envelope system and the
base building (including fire stop and smoke flashing connections).
Design shall include movements caused by ambient temperature
changes, wind loads, dead loads, live loads, seismic loads and
shrinkage. Design shall include provisions to accommodate all possible
movement requirements including manufacturing tolerances, site
tolerances, thermal movement, lateral movement, floor sag, beam
Part-B
Page 90
sag, live load deflection and column settlement. Allowance for
movement shall be in addition to allowance for building tolerances.
(b) Joints shall accommodate the worst possible combination of
movements to prevent loads of any kind being transferred from the
building into the building envelope system, excessive movements of
any joints or failure of weather seals.
(c) Designer shall prepare and submit full analysis and complete details of
proposed design movement allowances based on the base structure
information.
(d) Designer shall indicate movement limits and required clearances on
shop drawings.
(e) Designer shall ensure that movements remain with in permissible
allowances/tolerances and don’t cause failure/damage to the system
or any component, permanent deformation, reduction in performance,
visible movement at any joint or other detrimental effects like
application of stresses or induced loads to any component, structural
elements, fixtures, glass or face panels. Or failure of joint seals etc.
(f) Designer shall recommend sealant products to accommodate all
required expansion and contraction within joint movement tolerances,
duly considering movement limits of sealant recommended by the
sealant manufacturer under loaded and unloaded conditions
(g) Designer shall ensure that all movement allowances are consistent and
applied across all junctions and/or components for each expansion
joint system or assembly
(h) The contractor shall regularly assess and take into consideration the
effect of ongoing base building movements on building envelope set-
out.
18.12 BASE BUILDING MOVEMENTS DUE TO LATERAL DISPLACEMENT OF

BUILDINGS: Designer shall design the building envelope system so that
no structural element, joint or weather seal fails owing to lateral
movements between successive floors. Designer shall design building
envelope system for a minimum of +/-8mm of horizontal racking for every
4m of height.
18.13 LONG-TERM BUILDING MOVEMENTS
Part-B
Page 91
The base structure will continue to undergo displacement during the life of
the building due to variation in live load and creep of the concrete
structural elements. Therefore, designer shall design the building envelope
system to accommodate the absolute relative vertical deflections and
horizontal movements that may occur due to panel rotations owing to the
following possible displacements occurring between successive floors:
(a) Differential column and core shortening.
(b) Beam or slab edge displacement.
(c) Axial Shortening of edge beams.
(d) Floor-to-floor drift of the building.
(e) Make allowance for long term axial shortening of edge beams: 0.4 mm
per 1 metre length.
(f) Make allowance generally for differential live load deflection of edge
beams or slabs: +/- 16mm.
Movement Joint between Floors: The Unitized / Semi-unitized Curtain wall
is designed to accommodate differential floor movements and thermal
expansion without inducing any stresses in the curtain wall system or
creating any noise. This is to be achieved by either providing a stack joint
at the sill or by providing sliding joints and flexible seals to the cassette
frames and back pans at the split mullion.
18.14 Dimensional Stability

(a) All work carried out by the contractor shall have adequate dimensional
stability to function properly and prevent damage to adjacent or
applied work by other contractors.
(b) Design shall allow for the following:
 Expansion and contraction
 Building movement
 Dimensional changes due to weather change
18.15 Visual Requirements

(a) Profiles: The Contractor shall design building envelope components so
that sizes, profiles, dimensions and style satisfy the Performance
Specifications. The Drawings included in the contract are to be used as
a guideline. Indicate variations on the shop drawings. The Contractor
Part-B
Page 92
shall not commence production of extruded aluminum sections until all
profiles have been Accepted and Endorsed.
(b) Applied finishes: The design of the components, selection and
application of finishes and installation procedures shall ensure a high
standard of applied finish protection during construction. The
Contractor shall develop and implement procedures to eliminate
scratches, marks and blemishes to finished surfaces during
constructions.
(c) Flatness and alignment: The design of the components, fabrication and
installation procedures shall ensure a high standard of flatness, joint
and edge straightness, and alignment of mating surfaces of joinery.
Close attention shall be given to cutting and cut edge treatment
procedures, stiffening and the tightening of fixings and fastenings
which may cause distortion or warping.
(d) Exposed sealant: Indicate all sealants and gaskets on shop drawings.
Indicate the anticipated service life and method of replacement for all
sealant and gasket components. No exposed sealants of any type,
structural, weather smoke or otherwise shall be permitted in any of
the finished external works which will be exposed to public view unless
specifically indicated in the GFC drawings or subsequent Instructions
by the Engineer in charge. In the event that internal sealants are
required as a remedial measure to alleviate a leaking building
envelope, the contractor shall be held liable for compromising the
aesthetic integrity of the finished building envelope.
18.16 Maintenance Requirement

(a) Provide design of the building envelope systems to allow for all
BMU/cherry picker loads which may occur.
(b) Retaining pins for the BMU are to be provided by the BMU Contractor
to the curtain wall assembly factory and are to be fixed to the curtain
wall system by the Contractor.
(c) Damage: Horizontal or near horizontal surfaces, which form part of the
building envelope systems such as copings, beam encasements,
ledges, or the like, shall be designed to carry human live loads from
maintenance personnel.
Part-B
Page 93
(d) Self-cleaning: The design of all components for the contract works
shall be such that their configuration shall facilitate the self-cleaning of
the various systems. Inclined drainage surfaces and flashings, properly
designed drip grooves and self-cleaning joint design are examples of
this requirement.
(e) Panel replacement method: The Contractor shall design and install the
building envelope systems to allow for the future replacement of any
individual panel. The Contractor shall submit details and procedures
for replacing individual damaged items as part of the shop drawings.
18.17 Base Building Tolerances

(a) The building envelope shall be designed to accommodate the primary
structure construction tolerances.
(b) Unless otherwise noted elsewhere, the maximum construction
tolerances shall be taken as follows:
 Plan position of the building edge: +/- 25 mm
 Level of slab surface and slab soffit: +/- 25 mm
 Deviation in plan over 20M height < 50 mm
18.18 Fabrication Tolerances

(a) Tolerances at joints and junction details shall take precedence over
tolerances of panels and major components.
(b) Tolerances generally shall be:
 Joint width: +/- 1 mm.
 Length and width of major components: +/- 0.5 mm.
 Diagonals of major components: +/- 1 mm.
 Aluminum extrusions generally: 50% ADCA standards.
 Misalignment of mating surfaces: +/- 0.5 mm.
(c) Indicate extremes of allowable base building tolerances on shop
drawings.
(d) Aluminum tolerances regarding thickness, straightness, twisting and
flatness generally exceed 50% of ADCA Aluminum Standards and
Data-Wrought Products.
Part-B
Page 94
18.19 Installation Tolerances
(a) In addition to required fabrication tolerances, all parts of the building
envelope for the contract works, when completed, shall be within the
following tolerances:
 Position on plan, or vertical surface: +/- 3 mm.

 Deviation in alignment: Not more than 1 in 300
 Deviation in level (horizontal): Not more than 1 in 300
 Deviation in plumb (vertical): Not more than 1 in 800
 Offset in alignment of adjoining surfaces: +/- 0.5 mm.
 Offset in alignment of separated surfaces: +/- 1.5 mm.
 Bracket fixing tolerance: Not more than 1mm.
(b) The Contractor shall check at site the cumulative effect of all building
tolerances and adjust installation procedures as required.
18.20 Environmental Considerations:

(a) Design and warrant the building envelope system to be water tight,
weather proof and have the required acoustic performance.
(b) Self-Generated Noise:
 Design and install all building envelope systems (generally and all
components) to provide for noiseless movement caused by thermal
expansion and when subject to dynamic loading caused by wind as
well as live loads, Building Maintenance Unit (BMU) and cleaning
operations.
 The system shall not generate noise due to creaking, drumming or
rattle.
 All building envelope surfaces shall not whistle due to wind.
(c) Thermal Properties:
 The overall heat transfer of the building envelope shall satisfy
Overall Thermal Transfer Value (OTTV) requirements of the
Engineer in charge, and the heat transfer coefficient of the building
envelope systems shall not exceed 45W/m2.
 Spandrel glass and other non-vision areas shall have a minimum
Thermal Conductance of 0.6 W/m2K, and shall comprise of sealed
Part-B
Page 95
Aluminum foil backed insulation panel. (USG Thermafibre 50mm
thickness or equivalent subject to Acceptance by the Engineer in
charge).
 The contractors design and build curtain wall frame system
assembly including vision and spandrel area U value should not
exceed 2.1 W/m2K (0.37 Btu.hr/sqft/F)
 The insulation shall be 1.5mm thk powder coated Aluminum back
pan faced, Aluminum foiled at rear side and sealed to the
Aluminum frame to prevent condensation in the cavity between
the insulation and the glass
(d) Lightning:
 Provide electrical continuity and conductivity within the building
envelope systems.
 Include connections and provide earthing straps for connection to
the building conductors by the Electrical contractor.
(e) Smoke isolation and Fire Separation:
 Design entire system to provide smoke isolation between every
floor at all levels and elsewhere as required.
 The gap between the building envelope and the concrete slab edge
shall be filled with an insulation material with a 2-hour fire
resistant period that is accepted for use by the relevant local
Authorities and Accepted by the Engineer in charge.
(f) Air-Tightness:
 In addition to the requirements for a drained joint system, the
design and installation of the air sealing shall be carried out to high
standards (ASTM E283) to minimize air-filtration.
 Co-ordinate with installers for adjacent work to achieve the
specified maximum air filtration at junction with building envelope
systems.
 Air infiltration and exhaust limits shall be confirmed through
testing.
(g) Acoustic Performance
 The cladding systems shall be designed to meet the external noise
intrusion criteria contained in BS 8233. The Contractor shall
provide the acoustic performance specified.
Part-B
Page 96
 Reference shall be made to the Acoustic Specification for full
details of the acoustic performance criteria.
18.21 FIRE STOP AND SMOKE SEAL
(a) The fire stop for 2 hr Fire rating with smoke seal at all floor slab levels
required as per local fire authority.
(b) Fire stop shall be designed to allow for movement
(c) 100mm thk and 100 Kg/m3 density of Rockwool slab with 1.5mm GI
flashing to hold the assembly shall be fixed in compressed form
between the gap of Building RCC and Curtain wall system at soffit /
Floor level.
(d) Fire Stop Mineral Wool to be compressed by 33% in installed state
leaving no voids and assuring a tight seal.
(e) Smoke seal Intumescent of 10mm shall be applied in the gap of top side
GI flashing and curtain wall assembly.
(f) Fire rated fillers may include elastomeric sealants and rigid dry foam
fillers. Rigid fire rated fillers which may be accepted from approve
makes list.
(g) The whole assembly also to act as acoustic assembly between the
floors.
(h) The fire stop assembly shall run vertical side where there is a shear
wall condition or break in horizontal fire stop.
(i) The floor closure shall be provided continuously at floor level with
1mm thk GI flashing with USG Fire saving (or Accepted equivalent)
closing gap between transom and building line with minimum of 10mm
gap filled with smoke seal Intumescent.
(j) The complete assembly to be tested for performance at approved
laboratory as per ASTM standards.
(k) Facade contractor shall be submitted test result for all Fire rated
material.
18.22 SHIMS
(a) Provide shims where necessary up to but not exceeding the limits
specified on the drawings and designed for in the engineering
calculations.
Part-B
Page 97
(b) Shims which transfer shear forces shall be steel plates, set in a
staggered pattern and fillet welded to each other and adjacent steel
surfaces. Design shims and welds to support the applied loads.
(c) Polypropylene shims may be accepted at static connections where
shims transfer only compressive loads.
18.23 INTERNAL WALL LININGS:

(a) Internal lining shall be 12mm thick cement sheet to ISO/TC77/DP8336
and ASTM C1186-2002 (with no asbestos).
(b) The lining shall be supported off galvanized cold formed steel battens,
separated from the building envelope frame to prevent bimetallic
corrosion.
(c) The cement sheet and batten frame shall be separated from the
building envelope so that in-plane movements of the building envelope
can occur without transferring loads into the cement lining.
(d) The building envelope can, however be used to prevent in/out
movement.
18.24 INTERNAL TRIMS TO HEADS & JAMBS:

(a) Internal trims shall be provided to jambs and ceiling transoms at all
floors. These trims are to provide a uniform surface, with hairline
joints.
18.25 SPANDREL INSULATION

(a) Spandrel Insulation of 50mm thk. & 48 Kg/CUM shall be provided as
thermal insulation held GI or Zinc Anneal Plate.
(b) When fire rated an additional rear sheet of galvanized steel sheet or
Zinc anneal plate with minimum thickness 1.5mm shall be provided, it
shall be reliably isolated from the aluminum frame
18.26 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
(a) The project specific quality plan should be produced to demonstrate
the quality management system implemented from award of contract-
to-contract completion. Quality plan to include design plan, design
verification, validation procedure, inspection procedures and check list
at all stages of work.
Part-B
Page 98
(b) Qualification of manufacturers: Products used in the work shall be in
line with the preferred make list. Items shall be produced by
manufacturers regularly engaged in manufacturing of similar items
and with a history of successful production acceptable to Engineer-in-
charge.
(c) Glazing & Cladding Contractor’s qualification: The glazing contractor
who is regularly engaged and successfully performed in engineering,
fabrication and installation of similar comparable project in unitized
and point fixed suspended glazing over the last seven years.
(d) All the work shall be executed only by pre-qualified specialized
contractor under single point responsibility for suspended point fixed
glazing and cladding having experience in design & engineering,
fabrication and installation in similar kind of projects. Point fix glazing
design & installation shall be under responsibility of specialized
agency.
(e) Association of any specialized Glazing agency shall be strictly on
approval by the Engineer-in-charge.
(f) Source Quality Control: Shop and field materials and workmanship
activities shall be subject to inspection by the Engineer-in-charge or
his representative. Such inspection does not relieve the Contractor
from obligations to provide materials conforming to all requirements of
the Contract Documents and industry standards for material quality.
18.27 Water penetration

(a) The system design of the Unitized system to be based on three
barriers, and pressure equalization principle with effective drainage
system to drain out uncontrolled water entering first barrier of the
gasket. The system must provide pressure release slots in the
spandrel panel to eliminate condensation and water leakage due to
condensation and pressure built up. The system shall have proper
sealing from inside for air and vapor barrier, also effective weather
barrier at 2nd level gasket defense with effective drainage system &
pressure equalization slots thru 1st barrier gaskets to ensure that the
pressure equalization system will operate adequately even under the
most severe rain periods and also during severe wind effect expected
Part-B
Page 99
in the area. The glass joints must be limited to 15-20 mm with open
joint with no sealants exposed in the grooves.
(b) The façade contractor shall provide complete path of water drainage in
shop drawings.
(c) All exposed weather sealing gaskets shall be EPDM gaskets also when
in contact with silicone and unexposed must be of EPDM micro wave
cured to prevent deformation due to temperature effect and
weathering. The openable vents if any given in the system must be
provided with multipoint locking mechanism to keep the system sealed
under severe wind load and rainy condition. The continuous gutter
formation at each floor must be sealed properly and tested before the
upper units are installed over them.
(d) The provision of hard EPDM rubber setting blocks at every glass
bottom fixed at W/4 distance to support the dead load of the glass
(e) All movable frames like outer frames & shutter frames shall have
crimped (and sealed) corner joints to avoid failure of the corner joints
at later stage under load condition.
(f) The provision to be made for gondola restrains pins and lightning
system to pass through Curtain wall as per the project requirement.
18.28 Sealant
(a) Contractor shall review silicone seal size recommendation, surface
preparations, compatibility test of all materials and take final
recommendation from silicone supplier for DGU sealant.
(b) IGU sealant application to be carried out under controlled condition
and with two part IGU silicone as per approved make.
(c) Contractor shall conduct and record adhesion testing as recommended
by silicone supplier along with the required tests like Butterfly test,
snap time test, shore A hardness test, peel adhesion test.
(d) The weather sealant applied at the perimeter joints and inter faces
shall be of non-staining kind and able to with stand the building
movements and seismic movement without any failure. The size of the
sealant at the perimeter shall be determined based on the movements
and shall not be less than 15 mm.
Part-B
Page 100
18.29 PERFORMANCE TESTING:
(a) The necessary performance test shall be carried out as suggested by
the Engineer in charge if required. The necessary test certification of
all systems shall be submitted by contractor.
18.30 SHOP DRAWINGS & METHOD STATEMENT:

(a) The contractor shall submit shop drawing and method statement for
(b) Contractor should not commence work until approval of Engineer-in-
charge.
(c) Shop Drawings shall, without limitation, include and indicate:
 General notes indicating: (1.) relevant codes and standards, (2.)
project load conditions, acoustic requirements, and other
performance criteria, (3.) material and structural properties and
specifications for all metals, glass, silicone, etc., (4.) material
properties and specifications for all other materials, insulation,
etc., (5.) schedules of all hardware, (6.) schedules of fasteners,
bolts, fixings, and anchors etc.
 Overall elevations and plans for entire building, indicating: (1.)
Complete scope of works (2.) references to packages of details
(3.) dimensions (4.) largest critical dimensions of various
components (5.) zones of wind loading (6.) numbering system for
building envelope panels (7.) locations of Fire Access Panels (8.)
locations of operable lights, doors and direction of opening etc.
 Set-out of all work, including reference points, edge conditions and
joint pattern, indicated on plans, elevations and sections as
applicable.
 Tables showing full-size sections of all extrusions and structural
members, including descriptions of structural properties, and
specifications of materials.
 Framing, anchorage and fixings supported from base-structure,
and embedment in the base structure, if required.
 Movement joints.
 Methods of assembly at all junctions, including sealing and fixing,
indicated by three-dimensional and exploded views if requested
Part-B
Page 101
 Method of installation, including but not limited to:
 Erection tolerances.
 Machined slots, keyholes and other methods for handling and
connecting components.
 Junctions and trim to base-structure and adjoining surfaces.
 Fully dimensioned set-out drawings and templates.
 All pre-tensioning and pre-stressing stages required to meet
the design criteria. (For Frameless Glass Walls.)
 Access and materials handling equipment and requirements.
 Supporting Steelwork details including but not limited to the
following:
 Section sizes with accompanying steel grades
 Grade of bolts
 Types and positions of welds
 Weld preparation requirements
 Cambers to steel sections
 Locations and sizes of bleed holes in tubes
 Cover plates
 Temporary cleats and lifting points, with load capacities
 Glazing details, including but not limited to the following:
 Glazing materials including sealants, gaskets, tapes, setting
and spacer blocks.
 Rebate depth and edge restraint.
 Clearances and tolerances.
 Methods of in-service glass replacement.
 Hardware, fittings and accessories.
 Method of draining the assembly, including details showing:

 Pressure equalized drained joints.
 Location, number and size of weep-holes/slots.
 Mechanical baffles to drainage outlets which are not pressure
equalized.
 Methods of meeting performance criteria for thermal insulation,
fire resistance, sound transmission loss and the like.
 Method of cleaning and maintenance in service.
Part-B
Page 102
 Panel details, including all joints and junctions, and support
systems and panel stiffening.
 Connection details (including component parts, all information
relevant to fabrication surface treatment, and erection) and
provision of lightning protection.
 Shop drawings shall be in strict compliance with "prototype as
tested" drawings which forms part of the prototype testing
procedure. No alterations are permitted to the shop drawings after
Acceptance and Endorsement without written confirmation of the
change from the Engineer in charge.
 Provide a complete numbering system and schedule for all
cladding and glazing panels. Each panel shall be individually
numbered in such a way that the manufacturing and installation
history can be traced.
 Design and implement a permanent concealed marking system
showing correct location and orientation when installed.
 Submit details for review and Acceptance.
 Indicate the location of each individual panel on shop drawings.
Submit as-built elevations progressively indicating the location of
each individual panel.
 Hardware accessories details also included in the shop drawings.
 Submission of design engineering and Shop Drawings and taking
final approval from the Engineer-in-charge shall be contractor’s
responsibility.
18.31 Installation Procedures Manual: Submit a comprehensive manual
containing all installation procedures, equipment and personnel required
for acceptance prior to the commencement of installation works for review
and Acceptance.
18.32 As-Built Record Documents: Prepare as-built drawings and other
records progressively as the work proceeds.
18.33 SAMPLES:
(a) Contractor shall submit minimum 2 alternate samples of products
and materials, including finishes and representative factory-
fabrications and site-installed assemblies of the following:
Part-B
Page 103
 Metal types and finishes, including proposed finished shapes,
sections and extrusions. Provide metallurgical analysis certificates
for alloy and temper of metal components.
 Glass types and finishes indicating colour, surface pattern or
texture, finish, surface coatings, and the range of variation, if any.
 Colour samples of pre-finished production material showing the
limits of the range of variation in the selected colour.
 Check samples to confirm or match Engineer in charge's
sample.
 Preliminary finishes control samples.
 Final finishes control samples.
 Colour samples for all sealants, gaskets, and accessories.
 Joint system components, including sealants, gaskets, interlayer,
rain-screens, baffles, flashings, elastomeric sealants, backing rods,
etc., with details of compatibility with silicone and polyurethane
based sealants, and all extruded gaskets, interlayer’s, sealants,
tapes and fixings.
 Typical fabrications and assemblies, showing welds and grinding,
screwed and bolted junctions, fastenings and workmanship.
 Fixing and accessory items: Bolts, nuts, washers, screws, pins and
rivets (with all grades indicated, proprietary hardware
 Miscellaneous materials: Insulating material, Backing material,
Interlayer, Lightning protection tabs, Panel materials for spandrels
and other non-vision areas.
 Examples of repairs and making good to typical range of in-service
damage to finishes, including chips, cracks and scratching.
 Additional samples for testing sealants and finish coatings as
required.
 A range of colour samples of pre-finished materials samples
material showing the limits of the range of variation in the selected
colour.
(b) Engineer-in-charge reserves the right to ask for samples which shows
the fabrication techniques and workmanship of the component’s parts,
accessories and other exposed auxiliary items, before fabrications of
this work proceeds.
Part-B
Page 104
18.34 PROTECTION:
(a) Take all necessary means to prevent any damages (scratches, dents,
nicked edges etc.) to components during handling and erection.
(b) Replace components beyond acceptable field repair at no additional
cost to the Engineer-in-charge. Special protection tape of 70 microns
shall be applied on to the profiles. The tape glue should not get
transferred on to the profile surface or react with the finish till hand
over time. Sample of the final finish of profile and protection tape
shall be submitted for approval before production start.
(c) Remove and replace glass which is broken, chipped, cracked,
abraded or damaged in any manner as a result of construction
activities, natural cause’s accidents or vandalism. Replace with new
material at no additional cost to the Engineer-in-charge.
(d) Maintain glass in a clean condition at all times, including during
construction to prevent glass damage from corrosive action from the
elements and contributing side-effects (by wash off) to the
components and other work.
18.35 CLEANING & MAINTENANCE: Clean surfaces as required to remove
corrosive substances. At the conclusion of construction, clean all surfaces
to the satisfaction of Engineer-in-charge.
18.36 GUARANTEE/ Warranty: The general warranty for the performance of
the systems shall be provided for a period of ten (10) years after the date
of final acceptance/ virtual completion of the project (Excluding the Defect
Liability period). Contractor shall submit written warranty agreeing to
repair or replace defective façade glazing system and defect arising due
workmanship during the guarantee and defects liability period.
Stability and performance of the system shall be the responsibility of
contractor. In case of any failure/ damage, contractor shall replace whole
system without any extra cost. This Guarantee shall include the special
Guarantee from the manufacturer /suppliers also.
Part-B
Page 105
19. Ductile Iron Pipe & Fitting
19.1 The DI pipes shall be centrifugally cast (spun) for water and sewage
application and confirming to IS 8329-2000. The pipes used shall be
both gasket joints and flanged joints. The minimum class of pipe to be
used shall be class K-7 as per IS 8329. In general, pipes inside the
buildings and below structures shall be jointed as double flanged pipes
and those outside the building can either EPDM gasket as per IS 5382
or manufactured by the pipe manufacturer only.
19.2 The pipes shall be supplied in standard length of 5.5 m and 6.00 m
length with suitably rounded chamfered ends. Any change in the
stipulated length should be approved by the engineer's representative.
The flanged joint shall be as per IS 8329. The pipe supply will also
include one rubber gasket for each flange.
19.3 Special for DI pipe: The DI specials shall be manufactured and tested
as per IS 9523 or BS 4772. the mechanical test and hydrostatic test
shall be as per IS 9523. The tolerances on the dimensions shall be as
per Is 9523. The manufacturer of the pipes shall supply the fittings.
19.4 All the DI fittings shall be supplied with rubber rings for each socket.
The rubber ring shall be as per IS 12820 and IS 5328 flanged fittings
shall be supplied with one rubber gasket per flange and the required
numbers of nuts and bolts.
20. Sluice Valve
Sluice valve shall conform to IS 14846-2000 or relevant internationally

recognized standards. The valve shall be of non-rising spindle type. The
valve shall be furnished with a bushing arrangement for replacement of
packing without leakage. They shall also have renewable channel and shoe
linings. The gap between the shoe and channel shall be limited to 1.5 mm.
The gate face rings shall be securely pegged over the full circumference. All
valves, spindles and hand wheels shall be positioned to give good access for
operational personnel. All hand wheels shall be arranged to turn in a
clockwise direction to close the valve, the direction of rotation for opening
and closing being indicated on the hand wheels.
Part-B
Page 106
21. Valve Actuators for Electrically Operated (Motorized) Flow Control
Valve
21.1 All actuators will be motorized type and local controls from local panel,
panel shall be protected by a lockable cover. Each actuator will be
adequately sized to suit the application and be continuously rated to
suit the modulating control required. The gearbox shall be oil or grease
filled, and capable of installation in any position. All operating spindles,
gears and head stocks shall be provided with adequate points for
lubrication.
21.2 The valve actuator will be capable of producing not less than 1½ times
the required valve torque considering valve spindle jamming and shall
be suitable for a least 15 minutes continuous operation.
21.3 The actuator starters will be integrally housed with the actuator in
robustly constructed and totally enclosed weatherproof housing. The
motor starter shall be capable of starting the motor under the most
severe conditions.
21.4 The starter housing will be fitted with contacts and terminals for power
supply, remote control and remote positional indication, fault, over-
torque and power failure feedback and will also be fitted with internal
heaters so as to provide protection against damage due to
condensation. Heaters will be suitable for single phase operation. The
heaters will be switched “ON” when the starters are “OFF” and will be
switched “OFF” when the starters are “ON”.
21.5 Technical Parameters: Each actuator will be equipped as follows:
(a) AC electric motor with engage/disengage clutch mechanism of the
dry type.
(b) Reduction gear unit (with thrust bearing if required).
(c) Torque switch mechanism, over-torque & over travel protection for
both open & close.
(d) Limit switch mechanism for open and close feedback.
(e) Geared hand wheel for manual operation of valve.
(f) Local Valve position indicator – open/closed.
Part-B
Page 107
(g) Auto-Manual lever with suitable locking arrangement.
(h) Valve Position transmitter and Positioner for Feedback and Control
from RTU with 4-20 mA Current Signal. Partial Opening Facility to
be provided.
(i) Reversing contractor starter complete with overload relays of

suitable range and adequately rated control fuses.
(j) Actuator with integral starter complete with overload relays of

suitable range and adequately rated control fuses.
(k) Local control switch/push buttons.
(l) Inbuilt 415 V/Required Control Voltage- Control transformer.
(m) A white lamp for supervision of main supply to be provided locally.
(n) A potential free contract shall be provided to annunciate overload

trip, main supply failure, thermal overload and over torque etc. on
remote panel.
(o) Provision for local as well as remote operation from RTU with 4-20
mA Current Signal.
(p) Fail Safe condition: On Power failure and on loss of control signal
(4-20 mA) Failure as said by Engineer in charge.
21.6 Valve Actuator will have following special features:

(a) Two (2) nos. interposing relays for matching the control voltage of
remote commands.
(b) The motor will be specially designed for valve operation, combining
low inertia with a high torque and with linear characteristic
Part-B
Page 108
22. Full Bore Electromagnetic Flow Transmitter (AC Powered):
Sr. No. Particulars Description
Treated water application/ raw water

Service
application
Fluid conductivity >= 20 micro S/cm
Indoor/outdoor, below or above
Installation ground as per
Piping/site conditions.
Flow sensor/ tube/ element
Type of sensor Full bore type
CS or better as per manufacturing

Flange material
standard.
Tube material SS 316
Liner material Hard rubber/EPDM
Body material/coil CS, aluminium or better as per

housing manufacturing standard.
Electrode material SS 316 or Ha-C
Power supply From transmitter
Earthing electrode/ set of earth rings

Grounding
SS 316
Protection class IP-68
Cable length Min. 25 m, dual shielded cable
Transducer cable
Min 20 meter
length
Part-B
Page 109
Sr. No. Particulars Description
Painting Epoxy painted
Transmitter
Function Transmit and indicate
Remote type for ESR and Integral for

Type
CWS
Flow/velocity Flow meter shall be capable to

measurement measure flow with velocity up to max.
range 10m/sec
±0.5% of flow rate/ measured value

Accuracy
or better
Analogue output
Isolated 4-20 mA DC HART
signal
Pulsed Output For totalized flow
Instrument power
230V AC+- 10%, 50 Hz +- 5%
supply
Cable /conduit
½” NPT
entry
Local indicator
Backlit LCD Display
/Display
MOC Dia. Cast Al. With epoxy coating
Part-B
Page 110
23. Class SN8 Structured Wall Polyethylene piping systems:
23.1 System for non-pressure underground Sewerage & Drainage
Applications herein after called the DWC PE Piping System.
23.2 BIS codes IS 13476-1 & 3, IS-16098-1 & IS 16098-2 - 2013 shall be
followed.
23.3 Each pipe shall be coupler (on-line or off-line) and spigot type along
with rubber sealing ring
23.4 Stockpiling shall be done temporarily on a Flat Clear Area. For avoiding
collapse of Stacks, use Wooden Posts or Blocks Stacking shall not be
higher than 2.5 Meters while stacking, alternate the socket/coupler ends
at each row of stacked pipes.
23.5 Minimum Trench width is specified as per table below: -
Pipe Diameter (mm) Trench Width (m)
75-100 0.6
250 0.7
400 0.9
600 1.2
800 1.3
1000 1.8
23.6 The pipe segment between two manholes shall be laid approximately in
straight line without any vertical undulations. However, on the strength
of its flexibility, the DWC PE Piping system can be laid in very smooth
curve if found necessary. The piping system shall rest on the carefully
prepared bedding portion of the Backfill Envelope and at appropriate
jointing locations the trenches shall be excavated deeper to
accommodate the bulges of coupler-spigot joints. The piping system
shall be laid and jointed in true to gradient with the help of sight rails
and boning rods as detailed in CPHEEO, MoUD, GoI Manual on
Sewerage and sewerage treatment. The levels need be checked with
calibrated modern Levelling Instrument. Specific care shall be taken to
Part-B
Page 111
prevent entry of sand / mud /slush/ any other foreign material etc into
the system during the installation operation.
23.7 The structural property of the system suggests that a minimum cover of
300 mm adequate even for maximum quantum of superimposed (live)
load. In case of wider trenches than required (above table), the
permission of the competent authority shall be necessary.
23.8 The bedding area is an essential portion of Back fill Envelope and shall
be constructed with proper bedding material. The bedding shall be laid
to specified thickness and gradient with proper manual compaction of
the aggregate.
23.9 The moulded on-line coupler (or separate coupler integrated to the pipe
in case of lower sizes) will have a suitable internal surface for push-
fitting the said end over the spigot end of the next pipe. On first valley
of the corrugation of said spigot end (destined to receive the pushed
coupler) the sealing rubber ring of standard (EN 13476) quality shall be
placed so that the coupler end of the pipe smoothly but tightly slides
over the sealing ring for making an absolute watertight joint. Similar
system is also used for fabricated accessories or moulded fittings
required such as Tee, Bends, Elbows, Reducer end caps for the purpose
of installation of the system related to drainage/sewerage.
23.10 Jointing
(a) For quality connections following steps are to be ensured, failing
which the performance aspects are to be severely compromised: -
 The non-coupler (socket) end needs to be thoroughly cleared
and shall be free from any foreign material
 Clean and lubricate the coupler end of the pipe, if required.
Lubricate the exposed Gasket in the same manner, if required.
 Keep the non-coupler end free from dirt, backfill material, and
foreign. matter so that the joint integrity is not compromised.
 Push the coupler into non-coupler and align properly. Always
push coupler end into non-coupler end.
 For smaller diameter pipes simple manual insertion shall be
sufficient. It should be ensured that the coup -coupler end to
ensure installation and tight joining seal.
 Therefore prior to insertion always place a “Homing Park “on
Part-B
Page 112
appropriate corrugation of the Non-Coupler End”.
24. Granular Bedding
24.1 Where pipes are laid with a granular bed or surround the appropriate
bedding material shall, as soon as a section of trench has been trimmed
to grade, be placed carefully over the full trench width without
segregation. The material shall be spread and thoroughly compacted by
approved mechanical means in successive uniform layers each not
exceeding 150mm compacted thickness to produce a uniform bed to the
required gradient. Where plate vibrators are used, there shall be a
minimum of one pass for crushed stone and two passes for sands. Hand
tamping will only be permitted where insufficient space is available to
allow the use of mechanical plant. The minimum thickness of compacted
granular material shall be as follows: -
(a) 150mm (minimum 100mm under sockets) for pipes not exceeding
300mm nominal diameter, except when trench is in rock.
(b) 200mm (minimum 100mm under sockets) for pipes greater than
300mm nominal diameter, or all pipes when trench is in rock.
24.2 The pipes shall then be set evenly on the bed, great care being taken to
ensure uniform support for the entire length of the pipe.
24.3 Pockets in the bedding shall be formed at each pipe joint to permit
jointing to be carried out without the sleeve or socket of the pipe joint
bearing on the bedding material and without bedding material entering
the joint.
24.4 After the pipeline alignment and joints have been inspected and
approved by the Engineer-in-charge, the water testing of the pipeline
satisfactorily completed, and, where appropriate, the annular gap at
each pipe joint sealed, each joint pocket shall be carefully filled with
granular material and thoroughly compacted up to the same level as the
top of the bedding. Granular bedding material of the same type shall be
placed on both sides of the pipeline in successive uniform layers not
exceeding 150mm thick and compacted according to one of the
methods viz. hand rammer, vibrating plate or power hammer as per
standard prescribed procedure.
24.5 Unless otherwise detailed on the Drawings for pipes with a full granular
surround, the granular material shall extend up to a minimum height of
Part-B
Page 113
300mm over the crown of the pipes. For rigid pipes unless otherwise
detailed, the granular material shall extend up to the springing level of
the pipe. The surround shall be completed by the careful placing of
selected excavated material in layers not exceeding 150mm thick,
thoroughly compacted on both sides of the pipeline to a level at least
300mm above the crown of the pipes.
24.6 For pipelines of 600mm diameter or greater the bed should be prepared
ahead for approximately two pipe lengths whilst two pipes are being laid
and the previous two pipes are receiving side filling. For pipelines less
than 600 mm diameter the lengths of each stage shall be agreed with
the engineer-in-charge.
24.7 If the contractor wishes to use any other method of laying pipes in
granular bedding or surround, he must submit his proposals in writing
to and obtain the approval in writing from the engineer-in-charge well
in advance of the date when he wishes to perform the work.
Part-B
Page 114
PART-B
PARTICULAR SPECIFICATION
IRRIGATION WORKS
Part-B
Page 115
Particular Specifications
Irrigation works
1. General: All sizes are in metric unit, whereas equivalent imperial unit shall
be used in case of imported material.
2. Specifications as per applicable BOQ items shall govern over the following
specifications in case of any conflict/mismatch.
3. Pipeline material:
3.1. HDPE pipes: The pipes shall be designated by external diameter and shall
conform to IS: 4984 or ISO 4427. The internal and external surfaces of pipes
shall be smooth, clean, and free from grooving and other defects. The pipes
shall be of 10 kg/cm2 (or as given in the BOQ) pressure rating or as specified
in BOQ.
3.1.1. HDPE Fittings shall be of PN 16, either Electrofusion type or Compression fit
type.
3.2. uPVC Pipes and Fittings: The pipes shall be white, round and shall be
supplied in straight lengths with socket ends. The internal and external
surfaces of pipes shall be smooth, clean, and free from grooving & other
defects. The ends shall be cleanly cut and square with the axis of the pipe.
The pipes shall be designed by external diameter and shall conform to ASTM
D1785 or ASTM D 2241. The pipes shall be of equitant pressure Class as
described in BOQ.
3.2.1. Fittings: Fittings shall be injection molded and shall be solvent weld type or
threaded joint type, suitable to meet the pressure requirement of Pipes
rated pressure.
3.3. Galvanized Iron Pipes & Fittings: The pipes shall be galvanized mild steel
welded (ERW) or (HFW) screwed and socketed conforming to the
requirements of IS: 1239. The Galvanizing shall confirm to IS:4736, the zinc
coating shall be uniform, adherent reasonably smooth and free from such
imperfections as flux, ash and drop inclusions, bare patches, black spots,
Part-B
Page 116
pimples, lumpiness, runs, rust strains, bulky white deposit and blisters.
Class of GI Pipe should be C Class.
4. Laying of pipe work: Pipes will be laid in the routes and sizes as indicated
on the drawings and stated in the relevant sections of this specification. In
the case where multiple pipes or electrical conduits are laid in the same
trench, they must be located side by side, not crossing each other or stacked
one upon the other.
4.1. All pipe laying and jointing will be performed in site in the trench on the
prepared bedding; not assembled above ground and placed in the trench at
a later stage.
4.2. At the end of each day’s work, all open ends of pipe work and conduit will
be plugged and staked to prevent entry of vermin, dirt, water or moisture
and movement of the pipe.
4.3. Where pipe is required to pass over or under drainage pipe, the Contractor
is to ensure a minimum clearance of 100 mm between the irrigation pipe
and the drainage pipe.
4.4. Main Line Trench should be 600 mm + Mainline Size and Sub main should
be 450 + Sub main size or as directed by Engineer-in-charge.
4.5. Refilling trench with good soil and free from any rock/ stones.
4.6. Mainline Pipe should be Tested for system pressure for 24 hrs. or for 1.5
times of system pressure for 1 hours.
5 Crossings at Road or drainage pipe or Electrical Cables (Common to

all crossings):
5.1 High voltage cables: A separate HDPE electrical conduit will be installed for
the high voltage cables. The high voltage cables must not share a conduit
with low voltage cables.
5.2 Low voltage cables: This conduit must be separated by minimum 300 mm
from the high voltage conduit (if any).
5.3 Conduit: The size of the conduit will allow easy pulling through of cables. In
Part-B
Page 117
any case, the minimum size conduit used will be 32 mm. If the conduit is
exposed to sunlight, it will be Ultraviolet resistant.
5.4 Road crossing Pressure pipe: Where the pipe work goes under a road, the
contractor will install Ductile sleeve of enough diameter to allow easy
installation of the bell-ended PVC pipe or HDPE Pipe. The minimum depth
of the sleeve and conduits will be 750 mm measured to the top of Ground
or as per site conditions. These will be clearly marked above ground for ease
of future location and End will be closed outer dia with cap to reducer entry
of any foreign material in sleeves.
6 Trench Work: When the depth of the trench extends through different soil
structures (e.g., sand capping, topsoil, clay, and native earth), the
contractor will remove each layer and place it separately on the surfaces.
Afterwards, refill the trench to restore the original layers of soil.
6.1 Mainline Excavation: Trenching for mainlines will be performed by hand

digging only. The depth of trench for mainline shall be minimum 750 mm
including Pipe diameter from the finish ground level. The material removed
whilst digging will be placed no closer than 300 mm to the top edge of the
completed trench and there will be a minimum of loose soil left in the bottom
of the trench prior to pipe laying.
6.2 Sub-main/Lateral line Excavation: Trenching for lateral lines will be

performed by hand digging or by backhoe with a maximum bucket width of
300 mm, to minimize disturbance to the surrounding area. The depth of
trench for sub mainline shall be minimum 600 mm including Pipe diameter
from the finish ground level. These trenches will be straight with the bed
level and graded.
6.3 Back Filling: Where trench work encounters unsuitable bedding material
such as hardened clay, rock, shale, loose stones, excessive tree roots, etc.
a 100 mm bed of sand or loam will be placed below pipe in the trench prior
to pipe laying. This policy will apply to back filling of all trenches, where the
pipe will be covered with 100 mm of sand or loam to prevent similar debris
coming in contact with the pipe or control cables. Under no circumstances
will construction debris of any kind be included in any back-fill material.
Part-B
Page 118
Allowances should be made for back filling during the heat of the day to
minimize the effects of thermal expansion and contraction on pipe already
laid. Trenches will be back filled on the same day as they are excavated.
i.e., trenched will not be excavated until required. This is to prevent flooding
of trenches and floatation of pipes.
6.4 Compaction: Compaction should take place only after suitable bedding and
back filling has been completed to the satisfaction of Engineer-in-charge.
Compaction can be achieved by either plate compaction in layers not
exceeding 300 mm or wheel rolling with a suitable vehicle after 450 mm of
cover is provided. Regardless of which method is used, it will remain the
Contractor’s responsibility to ensure reinstatement of trench subsidence
during both the contract and the defects liability period.
7 Staking: The staking of the mainline, sprinklers, valve and controller will
be done by the contractor subject to approval of Engineer-in-charge.
8 Thrust Blocks: Mainline concrete thrust blocks will be placed on all fittings
that are subject to unbalanced thrust forces created by pressure and fluid
movement. That is, at all mainline bends, tees, reductions, expansion, caps,
isolation valves etc. Excavation of the thrust bearing surfaces will be at right
angles to the line of thrust and located in either solid, undisturbed soil or
soil which has been compacted specifically for that purpose. In case of
bigger pipes (80 mm dia and above), thrust blocks of cement concrete 1:2:4
(1 cement: 2 coarse sand: 4 graded stone aggregate of 20 mm nominal
size) shall be constructed on all bends. The thrust blocks must have cured
for 24 hours before pressure testing.
9 Pressure Compensating Dripper Line (In-Line): The drip line tubing

shall be extruded from virgin linear low-density polyethylene (LLDPE) tubing
with pressure compensating emitters co-extruded at the designed
intervals. The pressure compensating dripper shall consist of “dual
regulation” utilizing both turbulent flow labyrinth and EPDM diaphragm. The
dripper shall be continuously self-cleaning and should have an inlet filter
capable of being cleaned by flushing the line. Pressure compensation shall
Part-B
Page 119
be between 0.5 kg/cm2 to 4 kg/cm2. The coefficient of manufacturing
variation of the dripper must be less than 0.04 as determined by an
independent organization. The drip line must have warranty against solar
radiation damage for 7 years or more. The drip line shall be able to be
installed with the dripper in any orientation. Temperature up to 60°C
should not affect dripper flow rate. The dripper shall have a large “water
path” outlet that acts as a mechanical barrier to root intrusion. The drip line
shall have an outer diameter 16 mm and inside diameter of 13.6mm and in
dripper flow rates of 2.2 to 2.4 LPH with co extruded dripper spacing 18”.
Drip line should be brown in color and wall thickness should be minimum
1.2 mm.
9.1 Sub-surface Drip Lateral Line : 16/17mm OD the inline emitter

diaphragm shall have a pressure-regulating diaphragm with a spring action
allowing it to self-rinse if there is a plug at the outlet hole. The flexible tubing
allows for easy non-linear installations. The inline emitter shall have copper
shield technology installed to protect the emitter from root intrusion. The
inline emitter inlet shall be raised off the inside tube wall to minimize dirt
intrusion.
• Pressure range: 8.5 to 60 psi (0,58 to 4,14 bar)

• Flow rates: 0.6 and 0.9 gph (2,3 l/hr and 3,5 l/h
9.1.1 Sub Surface LLDPE pipes would have to be installed in a trench, below paver
blocks as directed in the layout / engineer in charge. Trenching & back filling
of trench is included the rates & will not be paid separately.
9.1.2 The drip line tubing shall be extruded from virgin linear low-density
polyethylene (LLDPE) tubing with pressure compensating emitters co-
extruded at the designed intervals.
9.1.3 The drip line must have warranty against solar radiation damage for 7 years
or more.
9.1.4 The drip line shall be able to be installed with the dripper in any orientation.
The drip line shall have an outer diameter 16 mm and inside diameter of
13.6mm
9.1.5 Drip line should be brown in color and wall thickness should be minimum
1.2 mm.
Part-B
Page 120
10 Pressure Compensating Dripper: The Dripper should be pressure
compensating type having barbed connectivity to fix directly on Blank Tube.
Should give discharge of 5 GPM, and should operate between pressure range
of 0.7 bar to 3.5 bar.
11 Barbed Fittings – Submain Tapping and Lateral Connection: 17mm Barbed

brown fittings to be used. The HDPE/PVC submain to be connected by fixing
a branch saddle tee of connecting Pipe size, PP material, having chromed
nut bolt and O ring gasket.
12 Lateral Hold stake: 9” Long stake made of 12 Gauge iron rod and hot deep
galvanized should be used to hold the lateral on ground.
13 Mini Root Watering System: 4” Día, 18” High made of engineering plastic
with 0.5 GPM water discharging Bubbler pre-installed. RWS units should be
installed on Trees own watering zone in order to improve irrigation efficiency
and management. Position units evenly spaced, adjacent to the root zone
and within the canopy of the tree. Consider filling canisters with pea gravel
to fill to provide better top-to-bottom water dispersion and firmness against
root compression. Soil sock should be used to prevent particle intrusion into
cylinder. The Cylinder should be 4” from Top to Bottom.
14 PP Clamp Saddles: PP Clamp Saddles should be made of high-density

Polymer having NBO-ring, Zinc Chromed Steel Nut Bolts Packed in PE Bag
individually.
15 PVC Butterfly Valves: Mainline isolation points will be achieved by

installing butterfly valves at designated locations. These valves will be
housed in valve boxes.
16 PVC Butterfly Valve for Main Line Isolation: EPDM seals, galvanized
steel stem, Torque is 25 n/M. Leak and corrosion resistant stem for easy
operation.
17 Gate Valve: The Gate Valve MOC shall be of Brass, having Non-Rising Stem,
Full Port. It shall have maximum working pressure of 200PSI / 14 Bar. The
connection of the valve shall be female thread and threads shall be BSPT
type.
Part-B
Page 121
18 PVC Flush Valve: MOC of valve shall be PVC. Threaded end with openable
cap with rubber seal. It shall be connected with compression adopter to
submain pipe. Size 40mm
19 Double Acting Air Valves 1”: 1" Double Acting Air cum Vacuum Release
Valve, Body: Glass-reinforced Nylon, Float Assembly, Polypropylene,
Elastomers: EPDM, operating pressure minimum 0.1 bar, maximum 10 bar,
Aerodynamic full-body kinetic shield, Straight flow body with large diameter
orifice size 0.787mm dia and area of 0.496 sq.mm.
20 Combination Air Valves 1” : 1" Combination Air Release Valve, Body:

Glass-reinforced Nylon, Float Assembly, polypropylene, Elastomers: EPDM,
operating pressure minimum 0.1 bar, maximum 10 bar, with advanced
aerodynamic design, double orifice, evacuating air during pipeline filling,
allows efficient release of air pockets from pressurized pipes, and enables
large volume air intake in the event of network draining with large diameter
orifice size 0.787mm dia. and area of 0.496 sq.mm.
21 Quick Coupling Valve 3/4": The valve body shall be constructed heavy
duty plastic. The cover shall be a durable, protective self-closing rubber
cover with five nos. Keys and Swivel Elbow, operating pressure range of
Pressure: 0.35 to 8.63 bar). Wherever required the Quick Coupling Valve
will be 25 mm plastic quick coupling turf valves. Each QCV will be secured
with proper stake or other method to avoid movement of it. 25 mm brass
coupler keys and swivel hose elbows shall also be provided by the contractor
to enable use of the QCV’s. Each QCV will be isolated with isolation pvc valve
and covered with Lockable Rectangular Valve Box.
22 Valve Box: 12" Rectangular Standard Commercial grade engineering plastic

valve Box with green lid and corrugated structure with unique shovel access
slot and bolt hole knockout & having Dimensions dimension as given in the
BOQ.
22.1 10" Round Valve Box with green lid and corrugated structure with unique
shovel access slot and bolt hole knockout & Having Dimensions @ Top
Opening 10" Día & Bottom Opening 12 13/16" Día, MOC – Engineering
Plastic
Part-B
Page 122
22.2 6" Round box with green lid Having Dimensions @ Top Opening: 6 1/8" Día
& Bottom Opening 8 5/8" Día, MOC – Engineering Plastic.
22.3 All valve boxes shall be made of reinforced fiberglass of similar and lid be
green in color. All valve pits will be constructed of bricks. There will be no
contact between the pipe and the valve box or valve pit. All valve pits will
have a minimum fill of 100 mm of washed pea gravel.
22.4 Solenoid valves, isolating valves, flush valves and quick couplers shall be
installed in an access box of enough size to permit ready removal of the
valve inner assemblies without removing the box from the ground. Valve
numbers and station numbers must be clearly marked inside and outside to
the box with a permanent paint or by using plastic tags.
23 Irrigation Controller 60-240 Station 230V: The controller shall be

housed in a wall-mountable, weather-resistant plastic cabinet with a key
locking cabinet door suitable for either indoor or outdoor installation. The
controller shall have the ability to be programmed and operated in any of
six languages: English, Spanish, French, German, Italian, & Portuguese. The
display shall show programming options and operating instructions in the
chosen language without altering the programming or operation
information. The controller shall have a base station capacity of 60 stations,
and the capacity of up to 240 stations. All stations shall have the capability
of independently obeying or ignoring a weather sensor as well as using or
not using master valves. Station timing shall be from 0 minutes to 96 hours.
The controller shall have a Seasonal Adjustment by program which adjusts
the station run time from 0 to 300% in 1% increments. The controller shall
also have a Monthly Seasonal Adjustment of 0 to 300% by month. Station
timing with Seasonal Adjustment shall be from 1 second to 96 hours.
Controller shall have 10 separate and independent programs which can have
different start times, start day cycles, and station run times. The Controller
should expand program count to 40. Each program shall have up to 8 start
times per day for a total of 320 possible start times per day. The programs
shall be allowed to overlap operation based on user defined settings which
control the number of simultaneous stations per program and total for the
controller. The controller shall allow up to 8 (or 16) valves to operate
simultaneously per program and total for the controller not including the
Part-B
Page 123
master valves. The controller shall have a 365-day calendar with Permanent
Day Off feature that allows a day(s) of the week to be turned off on any
user selected program day cycle. (Custom, Even, Odd, Odd31, & Cyclical).
Days set to Permanent Day Off shall override the normal repeating schedule
and not water on those specified day(s) of the week. The controller shall
also have a Calendar Day Off feature allowing the user to select up to 5
dates up to 365-days in the future when the controller shall not start
programs. The controller shall incorporate a Rain Delay feature allowing the
user to set the number of days the controller should remain off before
automatically returning to the auto mode.
23.1 The controller shall have Cycle Soak water management software which can
operate each station for a maximum cycle time and a minimum soak time
to reduce water runoff. The maximum cycle time shall not be extended by
Seasonal Adjustment. The controller shall incorporate a FloManager feature
providing real-time flow, power, and station management. FloManager shall
manage the number of stations operating at any point in time based on
water source capacity, station flow rate, number of valves per station; user
defined simultaneous stations per program and for the controller.
FloManager shall incorporate the ability to provide station priorities to
determine the order in which stations shall operate. The controller shall
ignore the station number and instead operate the highest priority stations
first and the lower priority stations last when FloManager is enabled.
FloManager shall be an option that is disabled by default and the controller
shall operate zones in order of station number, started with the lowest
numbered zone set to irrigate and ending with the highest number zone.
The controller shall offer Water Windows for each program. This function
sets the allowed start and stop time where watering is allowed. If the
watering cannot be completed by the time the Water Window closes, the
stations with remaining run time are paused and watering automatically
resumes when the Water Window opens the next time. The controller shall
include an integrated Flow Smart capability with flow sensing functionality.
The controller shall accept sensor input from 1 - 10 flow sensors with no
flow scaling device required. A FloWatch Learn Flow Utility which learns the
normal flow rate of each station shall be included. Each time a station runs
FloWatch compares the current real-time flow rate to the learned rate and
Part-B
Page 124
takes user-defined actions if high flow, low flow, or no flow is detected.
FloWatch shall automatically determine the location of the flow problem and
isolate the problem by turning off the affected station(s) or master valve(s).
Flo Watch shall be compatible with both normally closed and normally open
master valves. A Manual Master Valve Water Window shall be provided to
coordinate daytime manual watering with the flow sensing. This Water
Window shall offer programmable days of the week and manual watering
additional flow rate.
24 PE39 communication Cable: 19 AWG (0.9mm) solid annealed bare

copper. Insulation Individual conductors have specified color combinations
in accordance with standard telephone industry code. Twisted Pairs: The
insulated conductors are twisted with varying lays to minimize crosstalk with
no pair lay greater than 6" (15.24 cm.).
25 Cable Assembly: Individual conductors have specified color combinations

in accordance with standard telephone industry code. The twisted pairs are
assembled to form a substantially cylindrical core. A fill compound is applied
to fill voids and conforming to REA PE-39/PE-54/PE-89 requirements.
26 Core Covering: Polyester tape is longitudinally applied with an overlap.

Shield Electrically continuous, 0.008" (0.2mm) thick, coated, corrugated
aluminum shield, longitudinally applied with an overlap. Flooding compound
is applied under and over the shield. NOTE: Shield is imbedded within the
outer jacket on PE-54
27 Filed Device - DC Solenoid Coil with interface module: This shall be a

2-wire addresses device and shall be pre-coded to eliminate confusion
associated with user-defined addressing. This field devices shall be fully
encapsulated creating a completely waterproof seal. The device shall be one
single unit including of interface module and DC coil. Electrical input shall
be:
Nominal
Quiescent In-rush
Nominal Input Input
Current Current
Voltage Frequency
< 0.7 mA
26.5 Vrms 50 Hz < 40mA (peak)
(avg.)
Part-B
Page 125
Power Draw: 0.7mA (idle)
Dimensions: 2 inches in diameter at its greatest width and no more than 3
inches long.
Wires: Red and Black to 2-wire path
Surge protection shall be required every 500 ft. Should have a black color
with yellow label
28 DC Solenoid Valves: DC Solenoid Valve 2"/1-12”/1” The electric remote

control valve shall be a normally closed) solenoid actuated globe/angle
pattern design. The valve pressure rating shall not be less than 150 psi
(10.35 bar). The valve body and bonnet shall be constructed of high-impact,
water-resistant PVC for the body and glass-filled nylon for the bonnet with
stainless steel screws. The valve shall have manual open/close control
(internal bleed) for manual opening and closing of valve without electrically
energizing the solenoid. The valve’s internal bleed shall prevent flooding of
the valve box. The valve shall house a fully encapsulated, one-piece
solenoid. The solenoid shall have a captured plunger with a removable
retainer for easy servicing, and a leverage handle for easy turning. The valve
construction shall provide for all internal parts to be removable from the top
of the valve without disturbing the valve installation. The body shall have a
removable O-ringed plug for installation in either globe or angle
configuration.
29 Pressure Regulating devise: Pressure regulator shall regulate and

maintain constant outlet pressure between 15 and 100 psi (1.04 to 6.9 bar)
within ±3 psi (±0.21 bar). Should have adjustment knob with detents to
permit fine-tune setting in 1Ú3 psi (0.02 bar) increments.
30 Maxi Jacketed Direct Burial Cable: 14AWG Tin coated copper

conductors, insulated with PVC and having a high-density polyethylene
direct burial jacket. Conductor - Soft annealed tin coated solid copper
conforming to ASTM B-33. Insulation: Polyvinyl Chloride conforming to UL
Standard 493 for TYPE UF/TWU rated 75°C. Outer Jacket: Pressure Extruded
High Density PE conforming to ICEA S-61-402, and NEMA WC5 Jacket
Thickness 3/64" minimum jacket material to completely fill interstices
between the two insulated conductors.
Part-B
Page 126
31 Surge Protection Device: White labeled Waterproof cylinder with two
wires to connect with 2 wire path for surge protection. This shall be placed
at every 500 ft or every 15 devices which ever is lesser.
32 Copper Grounding Rod: Copper coated rods should have a heavy, uniform
coating of copper metallurgically bonded to a rigid steel core. Should UL
Listed rods and have 10-mil minimum copper plating; Should be Listed to
UL-467 specification; Size Dia 5/8”, Length – 8’
33 Copper Grounding Rod Clamp: Size 5/8”, MOC Cast Bronze, should be
suitable to fix on 5/8” Copper Clad Rod; should be UL Listed;
34 Maxi Grounding Plate: Copper Grounding plate 4” wide and 96” Long.
35 Maxi Surge Pipe: Waterproof cylinder with surge protection, 2 wired to

connect the controller and 2 wire path.
36 Wire Splice Kit: Direct bury type on wire connector with strain relief,
UL486 D certified, with waterproof silicon sealant, fits wire from 22 gauge
to 6 gauge as per specifications complete.
37 Voltage Stabilizer: 1 KV voltage stabilizer with inbuilt surge protection and

having power back up of 1 hr.
38 Flow Sensor Valve – Flow Sensor Cum 9-24 VDC Master Valve
39 Flow Sensor / Meter with accuracy + or - 1%, with LCD display, for flow
range 1 to 30 M3/Hr, for velocity 0.10 to 5.0 MPS and it should sustained
max 10 bar pressure, with pulse transmitter, Hard Rubber Liner, 150 lb Cast
Steel Flanges, Standard Lay Length, Alloy C Electrodes, 316SS Grounding
Rings, Remote Mounted Amplifier, Submersible Junction Box, 300 Ft
Standard Remote Cable 4”, ANSI 150 pressure class, Normally closed, DC
Latched with interface module to connect the 2 wire path with (closing speed
control), Surge Protection during closure. The Flow Sensor & 9-24DC Master
Valve should be in one Single unit (incapsulated in one body)
40 Central Control System / Software with PC: Central Control System -

Desktop CPU as per software requirement and all accessories (Like 24''
monitor, Keyboard, Mouse, 1 KVA UPS). Note 1. Central control systems,
Part-B
Page 127
which will allow the operation of the irrigation system via a smart phone or
tablet. The irrigation central control system shall be fully programmable,
providing the operator with absolute and full control of the entire control
system. The system shall provide a degree of flexibility such that, in effect,
anything that could be done at the satellite controller shall be capable of
being done at the remote device.
40.1 Administrative: • Virtual log-on passwords to administer access privileges

to multiple users • Languages: English
40.2 Preferences: User defined date/time, and unit formats • Grouping: Based
on site, landscape and sprinkler type
40.3 Hardware Support: • For interface with software: –3G network

Communication Cartridge (NCC) Cartridge –Ethernet Cartridge –RS 232
Cartridge • Configuration: Direct, Server and Client • Up to 149 Client
Controllers with sharing of weather sensors and master valves
40.4 Software Capabilities: • Detect Modules • Cartridge firmware upgrade •

Upload programs to Controller (Synchronize) • Retrieve Controller Programs
(Reverse Synchronize) • Automatic contact to upload programs to controller
after 1 hour of inactivity and retrieve logs from controller outside watering
window (Auto-Synchronize) • Software shall be cloud based • Manual
Functions: –Start program, test program, Auto On/Off, Turn Master Valves
On/Off for manual watering, turn Flow manager On/Off and Rain Delay
40.5 Adjustments: Program Adjust and ET adjust • ET/Rain weather resources:

–CIMIS Internet –WSPROLT and WSPRO2 Weather Stations
40.6 Global Weather • Group Edit: –Site Level, Controller Level, Program Level
and Station Level –Additional grouping based on landscape type and
sprinkler type • Define Valve Types and Sensor Types • Flow Watch based
on learned flow –Diagnose and shut off the source • User defined Station
Priority • Commencement of watering in next watering window • User
defined Simulstations • FloManager to reduce overall watering time •
Automatic reporting through emails • Minute-by-minute flow logs in a graph
comparing actual flow and projected flow • PIN based user access: –Two
way programing –User Access level –Complete and partial Lockout –5 PINs
Part-B
Page 128
per controller • Flow Logs –Minute-by-minute graphical comparing of actual
flow and projected flow –Actual flow totals in the automated email reports
41 Network Cartridge : Communication cartridge works on 3G GSM / WIFI –

Lan Ethernet connection, to connect the controller to Central Control. Pre-
programmed by OEM.
42 Sensor Module: Weather proof cylinder with two wire addressed device to
connect the sensor out put of Weather station, Master Valve, Flow Sensor,
Pump interface or any other device to communicate the Irrigation system 2
wire path.
43 Filter Station: The filter should be ideal for remote installation sites with
water driven self-cleaning mechanism that does not require external power
source to operate. filter should start the self-cleaning process when the
pressure differential across the screen reaches a preset value or
predetermined lapse of time. Cleaning of the filter elements is to be carried
out by suction scanners with its spiral rotational movement while removing
the filtration cake from the screen and expels it out through the exhaust
valve. No back-wash pumps shall be used for cleaning purpose. Filter unit
should be designed and installed with specification.
43.1 Filtration Degree absolute - The filter screen design shall be 100-130
microns based on weave wire screen.
43.2 Minimum water used for flushing - The water used for flushing shall not
exceed 1% of the rated flow and the filter shall always deliver at the outlet
of 99% of the rated flow.
43.3 Material of Construction - Reinforced Polymer like polypropylene/polyamide

or Stainless Steel 304, Screen should be SS 316L.
43.4 Cleaning Mechanism - DP based @ 0.5 Bar, DP Switch Input, secondary

should be time based.
43.5 Screen Type – Moulded weave wire cylinder
43.6 Flush Valve – Integral valve. No external valve allowed.
Part-B
Page 129
43.7 Control Panel – 6/12 VDC with latch relay solenoid. Operation should be
Bluetooth control
43.8 Approved Make – Rainbird / Yardney / Smartflow / Filternox / Filtaworks
44 DI Pipes: Ductile Iron Pipes as per IS K9 Class IS 8329
45 Pumping System: Comprising of Verticle Multistage Pump having system

flow of 16 m3/Hr @ 45 Mtr Head (2 Working + 1 SB) with All Header,
Pressure Tank, Pressure switch, NRV and Butter Fly Valve with VFD Control
Panel with all GI C Class Pipes and Fittings (Jindal/TATA/Surya) etc.
complete as directed by engineer in charge.
45.1 The contractor shall supply the required / specified pump station of reputed
make conforming given specifications. The pump body must be of SS/CI &
the rotor is to be copper.
45.2 It should be a VFD Based Pump Station mounted on a Power Coated / Hot
Deep Galvanized Skid / Header giving flow of 45m3/Hr. at 50 m head
complete Set (2 working + 1 stand by) with Suitable Pressure Tank, Inlet &
Outlet Valve, Check Valves. Pressure Gauge, VFD Panel having individual
Pump Control from outside of the panel & all required accessories.
45.3 All necessary / required accessories & fittings required for the connection /
installation / erection of moonset pump set are included in the supply rates.
45.4 The moonset pumps are to be installed in the Underground pump rooms
specified in the layout / directed by CLIENT’S’s representative.
46 Surge Anticipation Cum Quick Pressure Relief Valves: The Surge

Anticipating Valve shall open in response to the pressure drop associated
with abrupt pump stoppage to dissipate the returning high pressure wave,
eliminating the surge. It shall smoothly close drip tight as quickly as the
relief feature allows, while preventing closing surge. The valve shall also
relieve excessive system pressure.
47 Main Valve: The main valve shall be a centre guided, diaphragm actuated
globe valve of either oblique (Y) or angle pattern design. The body shall
have a replaceable, raised, stainless steel seat ring. The valve shall have an
Part-B
Page 130
unobstructed flow path, with no stem guides, bearings, or supporting ribs.
The body and cover shall be ductile iron. All external bolts, nuts and studs
shall be Stainless Steel. All valve components shall be accessible and
serviceable without removing the valve from the pipeline.
48 Actuator: The actuator assembly shall be double chambered with an

inherent separating partition between the lower surface of the diaphragm
and the main valve. The entire actuator assembly (seal disk to top cover)
shall be removable from the valve as an integral unit. The stainless-steel
valve shaft shall be centre guided by a bearing in the separating partition.
The replaceable radial seal disk shall include a resilient seal and shall be
capable of accepting a V-Port Throttling Plug by bolting.
49 Quality Assurance: The valve manufacturer shall be certified according to

the ISO 9001 Quality Assurance Standard. The main valve shall be certified
as a complete drinking water valve according to NSF, WRAS, and other
recognized standards.
50 Size 2”, Double Chamber, Standard Materials: Body & Actuator: Ductile Iron
Internals: Stainless Steel, Bronze & coated Steel Diaphragm: NBR Nylon
fabric-reinforced Seals: NBR, PN 10/16.
51 OEM supervision & PMC Services: Contractor to quote charges / cost for
OEM supervision and PMC services for quality installation and
commissioning. OEM to appoint a full-time engineer / executive during the
project execution to ensure the desired quality work. The person must have
at-least 5 years of work experience of irrigation central control system
installation and commissioning and should have OEM’s certification to carry
out such job.
52 Operation & Maintenance of the system: Contractor to quote charges /

cost for operation and maintenance of the system. Contractor would require
to appoint, Operation Manager 1 person having minimum 5 years if
experience who can handled central control system, additionally 1 technician
cum helper for daily operation and maintenance of the system.
53 Sprinklers & Swing Joints : Pop up Sprinkler 3/4" & 1”: The sprinkler shall
have a minimum 4-inch pop-up stroke. The pop-up sprinkler shall be
Part-B
Page 131
available with a drain check valve (SAM) to prevent low head drainage and
be capable of checking up to 10 feet of elevation change. The body and riser
of the sprinkler shall be constructed of non-corrosive, heavy-duty A.B.S.
plastic. Rotor shall have mechanism to turn it on/off from the top for easier
maintenance. Rotor shall have inbuilt Pressure regulating device which
ensures no misting of jets and uniform distribution of water.
53.1 3/4" - 9-14 Meter Radius
• Precipitation rate: .20 to 1.04 inches per hour (5 to 27 mm/h)

• Design Radius: (10,0 to 12 m)
• Radius may be reduced up to 25% with radius reduction screw
• Design Pressure – 2.5 Bar
• Flow Rate: 0.22 LPS
• 3Ú4" (20/27) NPT/BSP female bottom threaded inlet
53.2 1” - 18 Meter Radius
•Precipitation Rate: 0.37 to 1.14 inches per hour (9 to 29 mm/h)

• Design Radius: (15m)
• Design Pressure – 3 Bar
• Flow: 0.43 LPS
• 1" (26/34) female NPT or BSP threaded inlet
• SAM check device holds up to 10 feet (3,1 m) of head
• Nozzle outlet trajectory is 25°
• Overall height: 8-1Ú2" (21,6 cm)
• Pop-up height: 4" (10,2 cm)
• Exposed surface diameter: 2" (5,1 cm)
Note: Pop-up height is measured from cover to center of nozzle.
53.3 The flow at desired throw (design radius) should not increase as given
above for different pop us used in design. The Gear Driven Pop-up should
have Engineering Plastic body. It should have 3/4” or 1” female Inlet
connection for connecting it to sub-main pipeline via Swing Joint. Radius of
throw can vary from 8.5 to 18 mtr and varying flow by using different
Part-B
Page 132
nozzles. The sprinkler should be provided with set of nozzle so that
different nozzles can be used as per the requirement. Cost of nozzles if
any should be added to the cost of Sprinkler. The sprinkler should be
provided with SAM arrangement of minimum 10 ft to avoid puddling near
the sprinkler base after system is shut off.
53.4 Pop up Sprinkler Spray Body with Spray Nozzle :
a) Working Pressure range of Spray Pop up shall be 1 to 7 Bar.

b) The spray Pop up Sprinkler shall have Check valve at bottom and
inlet size of 15 mm.
c) The Spray Pop Sprinkler shall have inbuilt Pressure regulation which
d) Provides low flow vertical water jet visible from +200’ line of sight
when a nozzle has been removed/damaged. Height and low flow of
vertical water jet causes water to dissipate during descent, reducing
puddles and run-off
e) Nozzle should have option in different radius of throw like 6’, 8’, 10’,
12’, 15’, 18’
53.5 Pop up Sprinkler Spray Body with Rotary Spray Nozzle:
a) Working Pressure range of Spray Pop up shall be 1 to 7 Bar.

b) The spray Pop up Sprinkler shall have Check valve at bottom and inlet
size of 15 mm.
c) The Spray Pop Sprinkler shall have inbuilt Pressure regulation which
d) Provides low flow vertical water jet visible from +200’ line of sight when
a nozzle has been removed/damaged. Height and low flow of vertical
water jet causes water to dissipate during descent, reducing puddles
and run-off
e) Nozzle capable of covering 4.0-7.3m at 1.4 - 3.8 Bars pressure, and
the environment. Rotary nozzles shall have hand adjustable (without
tools) radius and arc-45 to 270 degree or full circle, true flushing
mechanism, Thick streams and large water droplet & Low precipitation
rate
Part-B
Page 133
53.6 3/4” Swing Joint with Saddle: 3/4" Pop up Connecting Swing joint
Assembly. The tubing shall be made of polyethylene having wall thickness
of 2.3mm, a working pressure of 5.5 kg/cm2 at 43oC and a surge pressure
of 16.6 kg/cm2. Flex pipe textured for wet conditions. The fittings shall be
made of UV resistant thermo plastic with PP Clamp Saddle Chromed Nut Bolt
& Nitrile Rubber Gasket.
53.7 1” Swing Joint with Saddle: 1" X 18" LONG Pop up Connecting Swing
joint Assembly. The swing joint shall be molded from rigid PVC, Type 1,
cell classification 12454-B, conforming to ASTM D1784, with a pressure
rating of 315 psi (21,6 bar) at 73° F (22° C) when tested in accordance with
ASTM D3139, including 60 minutes at 790 psi (54,1 bar), and short term
exposure of1000 psi (68,5 bar) without leakage. All NPT threads, sockets,
and spigots shall be Schedule 80 per ASTM D2464 and D2467. All
components shall be factory preassembled, available with 1" (2,5 cm),
inlet/outlet and in lengths of 18" (45,7 cm). Spigot inlets shall be available
for 1" (2,5 cm) swing joints. All rotating joints shall be modified stub ACME
threads. All rotating joints shall have two EPDM rubber O-rings for positive
sealing and thread protection. The swing joint shall have oversized threaded
inlets with large grips and visible thread stops to make hand tightening and
blind (underwater) installations easier with with PP Clamp Saddle Chromed
Nut Bolt & Nitrile Rubber Gasket.
54 General remark on product specifications: All products must be as per

specified in Tender documents and its annexure. It should be of repute make
and must be as per given approved make. Contractor will be responsible for
all cost if found to replace the products other than the specified without
written consent of CLIENT’S or its consultant.
55 Testing Procedures; Adjustment of the system: The contractor will

adjust the various components of the irrigation system to ensure the overall
operation of the system is efficient. This includes the programming of the
irrigation control system and adjustment of part circles sprinkler heads.
a) A static test of two hours at 1.5 times the working pressure of the
mainline above 110 mm (but no higher than the pressure rating of
the pipe) will be performed if required at the completion of the tapping
Part-B
Page 134
band installation stage of each section of the mainline.
b) During the period of the static test, the pressure will not drop by more
than 0.25 kg/sq.cm
c) All isolation valves and thrust blocks must be in place and cured for
the mandatory period.
d) Air valves, quick coupling and lateral valve assemblies must be
completed and the lines thoroughly flushed and primed prior to
testing.
e) There will be no permissible leaks at any point in the system.
f) All tests will be carried out by the contractor and approved by
Engineer-in-charge.
System Installation & Commissioning:
a) The contractor shall submit the method statement for execution of

various items of irrigation work for approval by Engineer-in-charge,
before commencement of any activity.
b) The commissioning of irrigation controller system will be carried out
by the OEM’s representative in conjunction with and approved by the
Engineer-in-charge.
c) The commissioning will include, at the time of hand over, a
demonstration of all sections and individual elements pertaining to
the operation of the irrigation system.
d) System installation should be carried out under supervision of OEM.
OEM to appoint his full time person at site during the execution of
work.
57.0 Hand Over: Before hand over, the Contractor shall ensure the following.
a) In addition to the static pressure test or commissioning, the

completed system must be operated without fault for at least fifteen
days prior to hand over.
b) Should any major leaks occur during this period; the static pressure
test procedure will be repeated once the problem has been rectified?
c) If the system is repaired, then it must operate for at least fifteen days
without fault prior to hand over being accepted.
d) In lieu of an official hand over, any works properly tested,
commissioned (if applicable) and used by Engineer-in-charge for at
Part-B
Page 135
least fifteen days without fault will be deemed as handed over.
58.0 Documentation: As Constructed Drawings shall be submitted, scaled at

1:1000and shall include the location of Point of Connection, All mainline and
lateral piping (including sizes), Sprinklers heads, All valves, Main isolation,
Quick coupling, Section isolation. Electrical Drawings will include the location
of Point of connection, Mainline and sub-main pipe, Sectional Valve, Power
sources, Route of Cable any Junction Box, Cable Joint.
59.0 Manuals : Three sets of instruction manuals to be provided, a draft copy

having been previously submitted for prior approval by Engineer-in-charge.
These manuals are to be comprehensive and fully descriptive to enable
proper operation and maintenance of the system. They are to include
a trouble-shooting guide of the problems likely to occur during the lifetime
of the system. They must cover details of the irrigation control system
operation and maintenance, all irrigation components installed including
Trade literature, Local supplier details, name of company & contact person,
phone number, local technical support, Email id.
60.0 Defects Rectification and Warranty obligations: The Defect

Rectification and warranty obligations are applicable for the Irrigation
System Works. In addition to that, the Contractor shall warrant the water
meter, Fully atomized Screen Filter, Pipes, Drip line, Sprinklers, Solenoid
Valves, Cables and Irrigation Controller, if any, specified in this document.
Upon receipt of written notice from the Engineer-in-charge of rejection of
any irrigation material during the Establishment Period and / or the Defects
Rectification Period due to its malfunctioning, the materials shall be
promptly replaced with the same technical specification & make as originally
installed.
Part-B
Page 136
Mansingh Road, New Delhi including Operation & Maintenance for 5
years.
PART-B
Particular Specifications
PHE WORKS
Part-B
Page 137
SANITARY INSTALLATIONS
1. SCOPE OF WORK
Work under this contract shall consist of furnishing all labour, materials,
equipment, and appliances necessary and required to completely furnish all
the plumbing and other specialized services as described hereinafter and as
specified in the schedule of quantities and/or shown on the plumbing
drawings.
Scope of Work generally shall include the area shown in the drawings
attached.
Over &above Clause, the plumbing installation may include but not limited to
the following:
1.1 Sanitary & CP Fixtures with all accessories.

1.2 Internal & External Water supply & Distribution
1.3 Internal & External Sewerage Collection & Disposal Network
1.4 Electro-mechanical equipment/accessories required for Plumbing
Installation
1.5 All hardware, supports, hangers required for complete installation
1.6 Civil work related to Plumbing Installation
1.7 Instruments, meters, gauges, required for the installation and testing.
1.8 The scope of work also includes all minor details of construction which
are obviously and fairly intended, and which may not have been referred
to in these documents but are essential for the entire completion in
accordance with standard Engineering practice.
2. SPECIFICATIONS
The detailed specifications given hereinafter are for the items of works
described in the schedule of quantities/BOQ attached herein and shall be
guidance for proper execution of work to the required standards. It may also
be noted that the specifications are of generalized nature and these shall be
read in conjunction with the description of item in schedule of quantities/BOQ
and drawings.
2.1 Work under this contract shall be carried out strictly in accordance with
specifications attached with tender & CPWD specifications.
Part-B
Page 138
2.2 Detail specification for Sanitary & CP fittings like model/ makes shall be
selected by Engineer and the same shall be binding for execution.
2.3 All faucets shall be in conformity to the flow rates mentioned in the
GRIHA norms and standards and shall be supported with the necessary
documents to prove the standards are achieved
3. DRAWINGS:
3.1 The drawings provided to the bidder with the tender documents give a
general scheme of the system and are not meant to be the working
drawings.
3.2 The contractor shall furnish the shop drawings to the Engineer in charge,
of all the equipment/ layouts and the same shall be approved by
Engineer in charge.
3.3 Tender Drawings

The drawings appended with the tender documents are intended to
show, space allotted for various equipment, tentative cable and pipe
routes. The equipment offered shall be suitable for installation in the
spaces shown in these drawings.
3.4 Shop Drawings
(a) The contractor shall prepare & required set of following shop
drawings and get them approved from the Engineer-in-charge
before the start of the work. The approval of drawings however
does not absolve the contractor not to supply the equipment/
materials as per agreement, if there is any contradiction between
the approved drawings and agreement.
 Layout drawings of the equipment to be installed in various
rooms such as plant room and other equipment.
 Drawings including section, showing the details of erection of
entire equipment including their foundations, etc.
 Plumbing drawings and equipment’s showing the layout of
entire piping, dia & length of pipes, valves and isometric
drawings showing connections to various equipment.
Part-B
Page 139
 Electrical wiring diagrams for all electrical equipment and
controls including the sizes and capacities of the various cables
and equipment,
 Dimensioned drawings of all electrical and control panels,
 Drawings showing the details of all insulations and vapour
barrier works,
 Drawings showing details of supports for pipes, cable trays etc.
 Any other drawings relevant to the work.
4. LIST OF APPLICABLE CODES AND STANDARDS:
4.1 Plumbing system design shall conform to National Building Code– 2016
Part 9: Plumbing Services Section 1 Water Supply & Section 2 Drainage
and Sanitation, and CPHEEO Manuals.
4.2 The flow rates of various faucets and cisterns in compliance with GRIHA
Building codes.
4.3 All equipment and material being supplied, erected, installed, tested,
and commissioned at site shall meet the requirements of Bureau of
Indian Standards and other relevant standard and codes.
IS CODE SUBJECT
Code of practice for Plain &

IS: 456
Reinforced concrete.
IS: 458 Specifications for Concrete Pipes.
Dimensions for pipe thread where

IS: 554
pressure tight joints are required.
Specifications for Salt glazed

IS: 651
stoneware pipes & fittings.
Flushing cistern for water closet and

IS: 774
urinals.
Part-B
Page 140
Cast iron brackets and supports for
IS: 775
wash basin and sink.
Specifications for copper alloy Gate,

IS: 778
Globe & Check valves for water works
IS: 779 Water meters (domestic type)
Specifications for cast copper alloy

IS: 781 screw down bib taps & stop cocks for
water services
Code of practice for laying concrete

IS: 783
pipes.
IS: 784 Pre-stressed concrete pipes.
Code of basic requirements for water

IS: 1172
supply, drainage and sanitation
Method of measurements for Laying

IS: 1200 (Pt. 16) of water and sewer lines including
appurtenant items.
Method of measurements for Water

IS: 1200 (Pt. 19)
supply, plumbing and drains.
IS: 1230 Specifications for CI Rain Water pipes
IS: 1239 (Pt I) Specifications for Mild steel tubes
Specifications for Mild Steel Tubular &

IS: 1239 (Pt. II)
other wrought steel pipe fittings
Specifications for Centrifugally cast

IS: 1536 iron (spun) pressure pipes for water,
gas and sewage
Specifications for Vertically cast-iron

IS: 1537 pressure pipes for water, gas and
sewage
Part-B
Page 141
Cast iron fittings for pressure pipes
IS: 1538
for water, gas and sewage
IS: 1701 Combination valve, mixing valves
IS: 1711 Self-closing taps.
Cast iron manhole covers and

IS: 1726
Frames.
Cast /ductile iron drainage pipes &

IS: 1729 fittings for over ground NP pipeline
S/S series.
IS: 1742 Code of practice for building drainage
IS: 1795 Pillar taps for water supply purposes
Code of practice for water supply in

IS: 2065
buildings.
Specification for Stationary Storage

IS: 2082
Type Electric Water Heaters.
IS: 2104 Water meter boxes (domestic type)
IS: 2326 Automatic flushing cistern for urinals
Specification for Water Meter (Bulk

IS: 2373
type)
Colour code for identification of pipe

IS: 2379
lines.
Code of practice for selection,

IS: 2401 installation & maintenance of
domestic water meters
Code of practice for fixing rain water

IS: 2527 gutters and down pipes for roof
drainage.
IS: 2548(Pt. I) Plastic water closet seats and covers.
IS: 2548(Pt. II) Plastic water closet seats and covers.
Part-B
Page 142
IS: 2556(Pt.1) General requirements
Specific requirements of wash down

IS: 2556(Pt.2)
water-closets
Specific requirements of squatting

IS: 2556(Pt.3)
pans
IS: 2556(Pt. 4) Specific requirements of wash basins
Specific requirements of laboratory

IS: 2556(Pt.5)
sinks
Specific requirements of urinals &

IS: 2556(Pt.6)
partition plate
Specific requirements of accessories

IS: 2556(Pt.7)
for sanitary appliances
Specific requirements of pedestal

IS: 2556(Pt.8) close coupled & wash down anti
siphon water closets
IS: 2951 (Pt. I to Recommendation for estimate of flow

II) of liquids in closed conduits.
Head loss in straight pipes due to

IS: 2951 (Pt. I)
frictional resistance
IS: 2951(Pt. II) Head loss in valves & fittings.
Specification for Chemically resistant

IS: 3006
glazed S.W. pipes and Fitting
Waste plug & its accessories for sinks

IS: 3311
& wash basins.
Urea formaldehyde moulding

IS: 3389
materials
Specification for Cast iron spigot and

IS: 3486
socket drain pipes
IS: 3597 Method of test for concrete pipes.
Part-B
Page 143
Specification for Surface boxes for
IS: 3950
sluice valve.
IS: 4038 Foot valves for water works purposes.
IS: 4111 (Pt. I to Code of practice for ancillary

V) structures in sewage system.
IS: 4111(Pt. I) Manholes
IS: 4120 Tubs and baths.
Code of practice of laying of glazed

IS: 4127
stone ware pipes.
Specification for concrete porous

IS: 4350
pipes for under drainage.
IS: 4854 (Pt. I to Glossary terms for valves and their

III) parts
Screw down stop, check & gate

IS: 4854(Pt. I)
valves & their parts
IS: 4854 (Pt. II) Plug valves & cocks & their parts
IS: 4854 (Pt. III) Butterfly valves
Specifications for un plasticized PVC

IS: 4985
pipes for potable water supplies
IS: 5290 Specifications for Landing valves.
Swing check type reflux (non-return)

IS: 5312 (Pt. I)
valves – single door pattern
Swing check type reflux (non-return)

IS: 5312 (Pt. II)
valves – multi door pattern
Code of Practice for sanitary pipe

IS: 5329
work above ground for building
IS: 5455 Cast iron steps for manholes
Specifications for Sewage and

IS: 5600
drainage pumps
Part-B
Page 144
Specifications for CI grating for
IS: 5961
drainage purposes
IS: 6279 Equipment for grit removal
Specifications for gel coated glass

IS: 6411 fibre reinforced polyester resin bath
tubs
Cast Iron & malleable flanges for

IS: 6418
general engineering purpose
IS: 6587 Specifications for Spun hemp yarn
Horizontally Cast Iron Double Flanged

IS: 7181
pipe for water, gas & sewage.
Specifications for Plastic Flushing

IS: 7231
Cisterns for water closet & urinals
Code of Practice for domestic hot

IS: 7558
water installations
IS: 7634 (Pt. I to Code of Practice for Plastic pipe work

III) for potable water supplies
Choice of materials & general

IS: 7634 (Pt. I)
recommendations
Laying & jointing polyethylene (PE)

IS: 7634 (Pt. II)
pipes
Laying & jointing un plasticized PVC

IS: 7634 (Pt. III)
pipes
IS: 7740 Code of Practice for road gullies
Injection moulded PVC socket fittings

IS: 7834 (Pt. I to
with solvent cement joints for water
VIII)
supplies
IS: 7834(Pt. I) General requirements
Part-B
Page 145
Specific requirements for 45 0
IS: 7834 (Pt. II)
elbows
Specific requirements for 90 0

IS: 7834 (Pt. III)
elbows
IS: 7834 (Pt. IV) Specific requirements for 90 0 tees
IS: 7834(Pt. V) Specific requirements for 45 0 tees
IS: 7834 (Pt. VI) Specific requirements for sockets
IS: 7834(Pt. VII) Specific requirements for unions
IS: 7834 (Pt. VIII) Specific requirements for caps
Guideline for planning and design of

IS: 8835
surface drains.
Specifications for copper alloys Fancy

IS: 8931 single taps, combination tap assembly
& stop valves for water services
Method of sampling of vitreous & fire

IS: 9140
clay sanitary appliances
Specifications for Cast Iron screw

IS: 9338 down stop valves and stop & check
valves for water works purposes
Specifications for Pressure reducing

IS: 9739 valves for Domestic water supply
system.
Specification for Flush valves and

IS: 9758
Fittings for water closets and urinals
Specifications for Plastic Bib taps,

IS: 9763 pillar taps, angle valves and stop
valves for hot & cold-water service.
IS: 10500 Specification of Drinking water
Part-B
Page 146
Specification for Industrial Emergency
IS: 10592 Showers, Eye and Face Fountains and
Combination units
Method for sampling of cast iron pipes

IS: 11606
and fittings.
Code of practice for Plumbing in

IS: 12183 (Pt. I) multi-storied buildings (for water
supply)
UPVC pipes for section & delivery

IS: 12231 lines of agricultural pumps–
Specification.
Method of test for UPVC pipe for

IS: 12235
potable water supply
Code of practice for use and laying of

IS: 12288
Ductile Iron pipes.
IS: 12469 Specifications for pumps
Precast concrete frame & cover (SFRC

IS: 12592
frame & cover)
Dimensional Req. of Rubber Gaskets

for Mechanical Joints & push in joints
IS: 12820
for use with Cast Iron Pipes & fittings
for carrying water, Gas & sewage.
IS: 13095 Butterfly valves for general purposes
Specification for forged brass gate,

IS: 13114 globe & check valves for water works
purposes
Cast Iron specials for mechanical &

IS: 13382 push-on flexible joints for pressure
pipelines for water, gas & sewage
Part-B
Page 147
Specifications for PVC soil, waste &
IS: 13592 rain water (SWR) including ventilation
pipes
Specifications for stainless-steel

IS: 13983 kitchen sinks & drain boards for
domestic purpose
UPVC injection moulded fittings for

IS: 14735
UPVC – SWR pipes – Specifications.
Resilient seated cast iron air relief

IS: 14845 valves for water works purposes –
Specifications
UPVC non-pressure pipes for use in

IS:15328 underground drainage and sewerage
system – Specifications.
Specifications for Structured Wall PVC

IS: 16098 (Part 1)
Pipes for Drain & Sewer
Specifications for Structured Wall

IS: 16098 (Part 2) Pipes & Fittings for Non-smooth
surface
5. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
5.1 Sanitary fixtures shall be of the best quality confirming to specification
and subject to the approval of the Engineer. Wherever particular
makes and models are mentioned, the choice of selection shall remain
with the Engineer.
5.2 All appliances, fixtures and fittings shall be provided with all such
accessories as are required to complete the item in working condition
whether specifically mentioned or not in the Schedule of Quantities,
specifications, and drawings. Accessories shall include proper fixing
arrangement, brackets, nuts, bolts, screws and required connection
pieces.
Part-B
Page 148
5.3 Fixing screws shall be half round head chromium plated brass screws
with C.P. washers where necessary.
5.4 Porcelain sanitary ware shall be glazed vitreous china of first quality
free from warps, cracks and glazing defects confirming to I.S. 2556.
5.5 Chromium plated fittings shall be cast brass chromium plated of the
best quality approved by the Engineer. Fixture Finishes like
mirror/mat/or any other shall be as directed by Engineer.
5.6 All faucets and cisterns shall have a discharge rate as made mandatory
by GRIHA. The contractor shall comply GRIHA Norms given in
specifications & BOQ prior to final purchase of the items.
5.7 All materials shall be rust proof; materials in direct/ indirect contact
shall be compatible to prevent electrolytic or chemical (bimetallic)
corrosion.
5.8 Sanitary appliances, subject to the type of appliance and specific
requirements, shall be fixed in accordance with the relevant standards/
best practices by skilled labours.
5.9 All Appliances, fittings and fixtures shall be fixed in a neat workmanlike
manner true to level and heights shown on the drawings and in
accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations. Care shall be
taken to fix all inlet and outlet pipes at correct positions. Faulty
locations shall be made good and any damage to the finished floor,
Filing Plaster, Paint, insulation or terrace shall be made good by the
Contractor at his own cost.
5.10 CP Wall flanges shall be provided on walls, floors, etc. wherever
supply/discharge pipes pierce through them. These flanges/fittings
shall be large enough to cover punctures properly.
5.11 Contractor shall, during the entire period of installation and afterwards
protect the appliances by providing suitable cover or any other
protection to absolutely prevent any damage to the appliances until
handing over. (The original protective wrapping shall be left in position
for as long as possible).
5.12 The appliance shall be fixed in a manner such that it will facilitate
subsequent removal if necessary.
5.13 All appliances shall be securely fixed. Manufacturers’ brackets and
fixing methods shall be used wherever possible. Compatible rust-
Part-B
Page 149
proofed fixings shall be used. Fixing shall be done in a manner that
minimizes noise transmission.
5.14 Pipe connections shall be made with demountable unions. Pipe work
shall not be fixed in a manner that it supports or partially supports an
appliance.
5.15 Appliances shall be fixed so that water falls to the outlet.
5.16 Appliances shall be fixed true to level firmly fixed to anchor or supports
provided by the manufacturer and additional anchors or supports
where necessary.
5.17 Fixtures shall be generally installed at following heights or as directed
by Engineer.
(a) Water Closet : 390 mm to top of bowl rim
(b) Bidet : 390 mm to top of bowl rim
(c) Urinal : 650 mm to top of bowl rim
(d) Wash basin/ Sink : 750-800 mm to top of bowl rim
5.18 Joints/ gaps between all sanitary appliances/fixtures & the floor/wall
shall be caulked with an approved quality sealant, having antifungal
properties, colour &shade to match that of the appliances/fixture &
floor/wall to the extent possible.
5.19 Care shall be taken in fixing all approved CP fixtures & accessories so
as not to leave any tool marks or damage on the finish. All fixtures
shall be tightened with fixed spanner.
5.20 All PHE items shall be installed as per GFC drawings and approved shop
drawings.
5.21 If an item is damaged during handling or fixing, it shall be replaced
by the contractor at his own cost.
5.22 All fixtures shall be thoroughly tested after connecting the drainage &
water supply system. All fixtures shall be thoroughly finished & any
leakage in piping/valves/ waste fittings shall be corrected to the
complete satisfaction of Engineer.
5.23 Upon completion of work, all labels, stickers, plaster, etc. shall be
removed from the fixtures & all fixtures shall be cleaned with soap &
water to present a neat & clean toilet.
Part-B
Page 150
5.24 RATES: The tendered rates for PHE related BOQ items shall
include following cost, unless otherwise mentioned in the BOQ
item:
(a) Bracket, screws, hardware, incidental accessories/fixtures/fittings
(b) Jointing & fixing material.
(c) Cutting slab/ beam etc. wherever required. And making all
damages good to original condition after completion of work.
(d) Painting all the metallic parts with two coats of flat oil paint over a
coat of primer.
(e) Testing the entire system and rectification of defect if any.
(f) All necessary labour, material and use of tools.
6. DATA TO BE FURNISHED BY THE CONTRACTOR BEFORE

INSTALLATION: Following data/drawings, as applicable and as directed by
Engineer-in-charge, shall be submitted by the contractor before
commencement of relevant item of work:
6.1 Schedule of drawings and documents to be submitted for review,
approval and information with submission dates.
6.2 Quality Assurance Plan (QAP).
6.3 Detailed P & I diagram showing clearly the scope of supply of equipment,
piping with line sizes and material specifications, valves, specialties,
instrumentation and control and all accessories.
6.4 Sample Materials such as sanitary wares and CP fittings for approval.
6.5 Test Certificates for the materials.
6.6 Manufacturer’s printed catalogue of items.
6.7 Storing and Handling Practices and Procedures for materials.
6.8 Erection, Start-up, Operation and maintenance manual
7. HANDING OVER DOCUMENTS

7.1 On completion of work, contractor shall submit one complete set of as
built drawings in editable soft copy and two hard prints of 'as built'
Part-B
Page 151
drawings to the Engineer. These drawings shall have the following
information, as applicable:
(a) Ground and invert levels of all drainage pipes together with location
of all manhole and connections up to outfall.
(b) Location of all mechanical equipment with layout and piping
connections & location of electrical panel for the same.
7.2 Contractor shall provide catalogues, performance data and list of spare
parts together with the name and address of the manufacturer for all
items provided by him.
7.3 All 'warranty cards' given by the manufacturers of different items
installed shall be handed over to the Engineer.
7.4 All test certificates of materials shall be submitted in one set of hard
copy.
7.5 All site performance test certificates approved by Engineer shall be
submitted in one set of hard copy.
8. WATER SUPPLY
8.1 SCOPE OF WORK
Work under this section consists of furnishing all labour, materials
equipment and appliances necessary and required to completely install
for water supply system (Cold Water Supply + Hot Water Supply) as
required by the drawings, specified hereinafter and given in the
Schedule of Quantities.
Without restricting to the generality of the foregoing, the water supply
system shall include the following:
(a) Domestic Water Main Distribution System from Main Water
Treatment Plant to Underground tank (U.G.T).
(b) Flushing Water Main Distribution System from S.T.P. to U.G.T.
(c) Domestic Water Distribution System from U.G.T. to various units

in the entire campus.
(d) Flushing Water Distribution System from U.G.T. to O.H.T of

individual towers.
Part-B
Page 152
(e) All water supply lines to various parts of the building including
connection to vertical stack/ main source line.
(f) Pipe protection and painting.
(g) Providing hot water system & insulation of hot & cold-water
pipelines wherever required.
(h) Connections to all plumbing fixtures, kitchen /laundry equipment,

tanks, appliances, irrigation features, water bodies.
(i) Ball valve/butterfly valve/Non-Return valve/Float valve/Pressure

relief valve/Air valve, masonry chambers & other appurtenances.
(j) Supports/ Clamps, Excavation& refilling of pipe trenches, required

civil work.
(k) Water meters, gauges, etc. required.
8.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

(a) All materials shall be new and of the best quality conforming to
specifications. All works executed shall be to the satisfaction of the
Engineer
(b) Pipes and fittings shall be of fresh material & shall be fixed truly
vertical, horizontal or in slopes as required in a neat workmanlike
manner.
(c) Short or long bends shall be used on all main pipe lines as far as
possible. Use of elbows shall be restricted for short connections. As
far as possible all bend shall be formed by means of a hydraulic
pipe bending machine for pipe up to 65 mm diameter.
(d) Pipes shall be laid in a manner that provides easy accessibility for
repair and maintenance and shall not cause obstruction in shafts,
passage etc.
(e) Valves and other appurtenances shall be located to provide easy
accessibility for operations, maintenance and repairs.
(f) Pipe shall be securely fixed to wall and ceiling by suitable clamps
at intervals specified.
Part-B
Page 153
(g) Tender drawings indicate schematically the size and location of
pipes. The contractor on the award of the work shall prepare
detailed working drawings, showing the cross-section, longitudinal
sections, details of fittings, locations of isolating and control valves,
drain valves and all pipe support, structural supports. He must
keep in view the specific openings in buildings and other structures
through which pipes are designed to pass.
(h) Pipe sleeves, 50 mm larger diameter than pipes, shall be provided
wherever pipes pass through walls and slabs, and annular space
filled with fibreglass and finished with retainer rings.
(i) All pipe work shall be carried out in a workman like manner,
causing minimum disturbance to the existing services, buildings,
roads and structure. The entire piping work shall be organized in
consultation with other agencies work so that the area work shall
be carried out in one trench.
(j) Cut outs in the floor slab for installing the various pipes are
indicated in the drawings. Contractor shall carefully examine the
cut outs provided and clearly point out wherever the cut outs
shown in the drawings, do not meet with the requirements.
(k) The contractor shall make sure that the clamps, steel structural
supports brackets, clamp saddles and hangers provided for pipe
supports are adequate.
8.3 SYSTEM TESTING

All pipes, fittings & valves shall be tested by hydrostatic pressure of 10
kg/cm2 or 1.5 times working pressure whichever is higher. Pressure
shall be maintained for at least 2 hrs. A test register shall be maintained
& all entries shall be signed & dated by contractor &Engineer.
In case of sectional testing carried out during construction, contractor
shall test the entire installation after connections to the overhead tanks
or pumping system or mains. He shall rectify all leakages & shall replace
defective materials in the system. Any damage done due to
carelessness, open or burst pipes or failure of fittings to the building,
furniture& fixtures shall be made good during defect liability period
Part-B
Page 154
without any extra cost. All hot water supply & return piping shall be
checked for proper insulation.
After completion the water supply system, contractor shall test each
valve by closing & opening it many times to observe it’s working. Valves
which do not effectively operate shall be replaced by new ones at no
extra cost & same shall be tested as above.
8.4 FERRULE
The ferules for connection with main shall generally conform to IS 2692.
It shall be of non- ferrous materials with a bell mouth cover && shall be
of nominal bore as specified. The ferrule shall be fitted with a screw &
plug or valve capable of completely shutting of the water supply to the
communication pipe as & when required.
For fixing, the empty mains shall be drilled & tapped at 45 degree to the
vertical & ferrule screwed in. The ferrule must be so fitted that no
portion of the shank shall be left projecting within mains into which it is
fitted.
8.5 DISNFECTION/ STERILISATION OF PIPING & TANK
Before commissioning of water supply system, the contractor shall

arrange to disinfect the entire system.
Water storage tanks & pipes shall first be filled with water & thoroughly
flushed out. The storage tanks shall then be filled with water again &
disinfecting chemical containing chlorine shall be added gradually while
tanks are being filled to ensure thorough mixing. Sufficient chemical
shall be used to give water a dose of 50 parts of chlorine to one million
parts of water.
If ordinary bleaching powder is to be used, the proportion shall be 150

gm of powder in 1000 litre of water. The powder shall be mixed with
water in storage tank. For any other chemical, the proportion shall be
as recommended by the manufacturer. When the storage tank is full,
the supply shall be stopped; all tapes on distributing lines shall be
opened successively. Each tap shall be closed when water discharged
Part-B
Page 155
shall begin to smell chlorine. The storage tank shall then be filled with
supply pipe with more disinfecting chemicals in recommended
proportion. The storage tank & pipe shall remain charged for at least 3
hours. Finally, tank & piping shall be thoroughly flushed out before water
is to be used for domestic application.
8.6 PRE-COMMISSIONING
(a) Ensure that all pipes are free from debris & obstructions.
(b) Check all valves for effective on-off operation.
(c) Ensure that all connections to branches are made.
(d) Ensure connection of mains to UG tank, Pumps & OH tank as per
requirement.
(e) Water supply shall be available at underground tank.
(f) Ensure that all line valves shall be closed.
8.7 TESTING & COMMISSIONING

(a) Disinfect Storage tanks & piping.
(b) In case of borewell supply, start pump & fill underground water
tank. Water shall first enter fire compartment & then fill domestic
compartment.
(c) Start domestic pump to fill OH tank. After filling the OH tank, drain
the tank to its ¼ the capacity by opening the drain valve. This is
to ensure removal of silt, mud, debris, etc. Again, fill OH tank to
full.
(d) Release water in each line by opening the line valves, flush out
whole piping system & ensure clear water is now coming out of the
system.
(e) Observe valves for any leakage. Check the pressure at pump & at
farthest utility points.
Part-B
Page 156
8.8 PRESSURISED PIPE TESTING
(a) The Contractor shall notify the Architect three days in advance of
any test so that the Architect can witness the tests if he so
wishes.
(b) All water supply system shall be tested to hydrostatic pressure
test of at least one and a half (1.5) times the maximum pressure
but not less than 10Kg/Sq.cm for a period of not less than 8
hours. All leaks and defects in joints revealed during the testing
shall be rectified and got approved at site by retest. Piping
required subsequent to the above pressure test shall be retested
in the same manner.
(c) System may be tested in sections and such sections shall be
entirely retested on completion.
(d) The Contractor shall make sure that proper noiseless circulation
of fluid is achieved through the entire piping network of the
system concerned. In case of improper circulation, the contractor
shall rectify the defective connections. He shall bear all expenses
for carrying out the above rectifications including the tearing up
and refinishing of floors and walls as required.
(e) In addition to the sectional testing carried out during the
construction, contractor shall test the entire installation after
connections to the overhead tanks or pumping system or mains.
He shall rectify all leakages and shall replace all defective
materials in the system. Any damage done due to carelessness,
open or burst pipes or failure of fittings, to the building, furniture
and fixtures shall be made good by the contractor during the
defects liability period without any cost.
(f) After commissioning of the water supply system, contractor shall
test each valve by closing and opening it a number of times to
observe if it is working efficiently. Valves which do not effectively
operate shall be replaced by new ones at no extra cost and the
same shall be tested as above.
(g) A test register shall be maintained and all entries shall be signed
and dated by Contractor(s) and Owner’s site representative.
Part-B
Page 157
9. GI PIPES IS 1239
9.1 SCOPE
The item includes supplying of G.I. pipes with fittings including laying,
fixing, cutting, joining, painting etc.
9.2 MATERIAL
(a) Galvanised steel pipe shall conform to IS: 1239 /3589 of size &
class as specified in bill of quantities. When Class is not specified
they shall be Heavy Class. Hot dip galvanising shall be as per IS
4759.
(b) Fittings shall be of malleable cast iron galvanized of approved
make. Each fitting shall have manufacturer’s trade mark stamped
on it. Fittings for G.I pipes shall include couplings, bends, tees,
reducers, nipples, unions, bushes etc. Fittings etc. shall conform to
IS: 1879. (Part I to X) with latest edition.
9.3 JOINTING & FIXING

(a) Pipes and fittings shall be jointed with screwed joints using Teflon
tape suitable for water pipes. Care shall be taken to remove burr
from the end of the pipe after cutting by a round file. All pipes shall
be fixed in accordance with layout and alignment shown on the
drawings. Care shall be taken to avoid air pockets. Necessary vents
and drains shall be provided at all high and low points respectively.
G.I pipes inside toilets shall be fixed in wall chases well above the
floor. No pipes shall be run inside a sunken floor as far as possible.
Pipes may be run under the ceiling or floors and other areas as
shown on drawings.
(b) Piping shall be properly supported on or suspended from clamps,
hangers as specified and as required. The contractor shall
adequately design all the brackets, saddles, anchors, clamps and
hangers and be responsible for their structural sufficiency.
(c) All pipe clamps, supports, hangers, pipe support shall be factory
made galvanized MS steel or alternatively galvanized/ anti rust
Part-B
Page 158
coating after fabrication to suit site requirement pipe supports.
Pipe supports shall be adjustable for height where pipe and clamps
are of dissimilar materials a gasket shall be provided in between.
Spacing of pipe supports shall not exceed the following:
Spacing between
Sr. No. Pipe Size
Supports
1 Up to 12 mm 1500 mm (1.5m)
2 15 to 150 mm 2000 mm (2.0 m)
3 150 mm & over 2500 mm (2.5m)
(d) G.I pipes in shafts and other locations shall be supported by clamps
of design approved by the Engineer. Pipes in wall chases shall be
anchored by iron hooks. Pipe sat ceiling level shall be supported on
structural clamps fabricated from MS structural steel. Pipes in
shafts shall be supported on slotted angles/ channels as specified/
as directed.
(e) Vertical risers shall be parallel to walls and column lines and shall
be straight and plumb. Risers passing from floor to floor shall be
supported at each floor by clamps or collars steel structural
supports attached to pipe and with a 15-mm thick rubber pad or
any resilient material. Where pipes pass through the terrace floor,
suitable flashing shall be provided to prevent water leakage. Risers
shall have a suitable clean out at the lowest point and air vent at
the highest point.
(f) Anchor Fasteners:
All pipe supports, hangers and clamps to fixed on RCC walls,
beams, columns, slabs and masonry walls 230 mm thick and above
by means of galvanised expandable anchor fasteners in drilled
holes of correct size and model to carry the weight of pipes. Drilling
shall be made only by approved type of power drill as
recommended and approved by manufacturer of the anchor
fasteners. Failure of any fastening devices shall be the entire
responsibility and contractor shall redo or provide additional
Part-B
Page 159
supports at his own cost. He shall also compensate the owner for
any damage that may be caused by such failures.
(g) Unions:
Contractor shall provide adequate number of unions on all pipes to
enable easy dismantling later when required. Unions shall be
provided near each gunmetal valve, stop cock or check valve and
on straight runs as necessary at appropriate locations as required
for easy dismantling and/or as directed by Engineer.
(h) Flanges:
Flanged connections shall be provided on pipes as required for
maintenance/ease in dismantling or where shown on the drawings,
all equipment connections as necessary and required or as directed
by the Engineer. Connections shall be made by the correct number
and size of the GI nuts/ bolts as per relevant IS Standards and
made with 3mm thick insertion rubber washer/gasket. Where hot
water or steam connections are made insertion, gasket shall be of
suitable high-temperature grade and quality approved by the
Engineer. The diameter of the hole for bolt in flanges shall conform
to match the specification for CI sluice valve as per relevant IS
Gaskets shall conform to IS: 639.
(i) Expansion joints shall be provided wherever necessary to take due

care for expansion and contraction in the pipe
(j) Trenches for Underground installation:
All G.I pipes below ground shall be laid in trenches with a minimum
cover of600mm. The width and depth of the trenches shall be as
follows:
Depth of
Sr. No. Dia of pipe Width of trench
trench
1 15mm to 50mm 300mm 750mm
2 65mm to 100mm 450mm 1000mm
3 150mm and above 600mm 1200mm
Part-B
Page 160
(k) Sand Filling: GI Pipes in trenches shall be protected with fine sand
150mm all around before filling in the trenches.
(l) Thrust Blocks:
In case of bigger pipes (80 mm diameter and above), thrust blocks

of cement concrete 1:2:4 (1 cement: 2 coarse sand: 4 graded
stone aggregates of 20 mm nominal size) shall be constructed on
all bends as directed by the Owner’s Representative.
9.4 PAINTING
All pipes above ground shall be painted with one coat of red oxide and
two coats of synthetic enamel paint of approved shade and quality. Pipes
shall be painted to standard colour code IS:2379:1990 as specified by
the Engineer.
9.5 PIPE PROTECTION

Where specified in the schedule of quantities all pipes in chase below
ground shall be protected against corrosion by applying two coats of
bitumen paint wrapping with polythene tape and finishing with one more
coat of bitumen paint.
9.6 TESTING
(a) The openings of the pipes shall be sealed for the section to be
tested. All control valves shall be positioned open for the duration
of the test and open end closed with water tight fittings. The
testing pressure on completion of the work shall not be less than
1.5 times the working pressure of the pipes or 7.5 Kg/Sq.cm
whichever more is.
(b) Pressure shall be applied either by hand pump or power-driven
pump. Pressure gauges shall be calibrated, correctly positioned
and closely observed to ensure that at no time are the test pressure
exceeded. The systems shall be slowly and carefully filled with
water to avoid surge pressure or water hammer. Air vents hall be
Part-B
Page 161
open at all high points so that air may be expelled from the system
during filling.
(c) When the system has been fully charged with water and air
displaced from the line air vent shall be closed and the line initially
inspected for seepage at joints and firmness of supports under
load. Pressure is reached. Without any additional requirement of
make-up-water the test pressure should not fall more than 0.02
MPa (0.2 kg. /sq.cm) at the end of one-hour test duration.
(d) The water pressure shall be maintained for minimum of two hour
with accurate pressure gauge. The engineer shall examine carefully
all the joints for leakage. Any joint found leaking shall be redone,
and all leaking pipes removed and replaced without extra cost.
10. STAINLESS STEEL PIPES AND FITTINGS

10.1 SCOPE
Stainless steel 304 pipes are used in chilled water supply system and
potable and non potable water supply system (concealed and exposed)
inside toilets. Pipes sizes will vary from 15 mm to 100 mm diameter
10.2 MATERIAL:
(a) Stainless steel pipe shall confirming to JIS G3448, JWWA G 116 as
specified in bill of quantities.
(b) All fittings shall be press type fittings.
(c) All fittings upto 50 mm dia shall be crippling type.
10.3 JOINTING & FIXING

Template shall be used for laying out headers, laterals and other
irregular details to ensure accurate cutting and proper fit up. However,
edges bevelled with a file of grinder followed by stainless steel wire
brushing are acceptable in these sections. Press type fittings shall be
installed with pressed type machine.
10.4 PIPE PROTECTION

Where specified in the schedule of quantities all pipes in chase below
ground shall be protected against corrosion by applying two coats of
Part-B
Page 162
bitumen paint wrapping with polythene tape and finishing with one more
coat of bitumen paint.
10.5 TESTING:
The pressure shall be maintained for a sufficient length of time to permit
thorough inspection of all the joints for leakage or sign of failure. The
duration shall in no case be less than four (4) hours. Instrument take-
off piping up to the first block valves shall be tested with the connected
piping. Lines which open directly to atmosphere such as vents, drains,
safety valve discharges etc. shall be leak tested and all the joints shall
be visually inspected.
10.6 Maximum allowable valve test pressure:

Test pressure applied to valves under closed position shall not be greater
than the manufacturer’s recommendations nor less than required by API
STD 598 latest edition. Where the required test pressure is greater than
the allowable seat pressure, test shall be made through the open valve.
10.7 Hydraulic Test:

(a) All piping shall be hydrostatically tested for the test pressure given
in the manufacturer’s data sheet or as per engineer-in-charge.
(b) In no case shall the test pressure be less than 1.5 times the design
pressure.
(c) Hydrostatic Test Fluid: Fresh potable water shall be used as the
testing medium for hydrostatic testing of piping.
(d) For Stainless Steel, Water with pH-value not over 7 pH and
chlorides less than 500 PPM shall only be used for hydrostatic
testing. Just after the successful completion of testing the lines
shall be completely drained and dried by air.
(e) A strainer shall be installed in the fill line to minimize the possibility
of foreign matter being introduced in to the system during the
pressure test and flushing operations.
Part-B
Page 163
11. COPPER PIPES CONCEALED & EXPOSED:
11.1 Copper tubes conforming to EN:1057 in ft. length and thickness as per
Table ‘X’. Dimension shall be strictly as per EN:1057 & Chemical
Composition of copper pipes to be as follows:
Copper % - 99.9%
Phosphorus % - 0.015% to 0.040%
11.2 For sizes 15mm and above, hard drawn tubes will be used. The tubes
shall be totally cylindrical and of uniform thickness free from flaw, pin
holes, cracks and other skin defects. The maximum working and bust
pressure of tubes shall be as EN:1057. All tubes shall be eddy current
tested to ensure the tubes are free from any internal blow holes / flaw
or eccentricity. Tubes from manufacturers who do not have eddy current
testing facility shall not be accepted. The buyer / user reserves the right
to inspect the facility of the manufacturer to ensure that eddy current
testing facility is prevalent and being done. Carbon film or Carbon
content test must be conducted on Copper Tubes as per EN:1057.
The sizes and dimensions for Table “X” are as follows:
TABLE ‘X’
Tube Outer Thickness Inner Calculated Maximum

Size Diameters dia Burst Working
Max. Min. pressure11 Pressure
(mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (bar) (PSI) (bar) (PSI)
15 15.045 14.965 0.7 13.6 240 3480 58 841
22 22.055 21.975 0.9 20.2 215 3117.5 51 739.5
28 28.055 27.975 0.9 26.2 165 2392.5 40 580
35 35.07 34.99 1.2 32.6 175 2537.5 42 609
42 42.07 41.99 1.2 39.6 145 2102.5 35 507.5
54 54.07 53.99 1.2 51.6 110 1595 27 391.5
67 66.75 66.60 1.2 64.6 105 1522.5 20 290
76.1 76.30 76.15 1.5 73.1 100 1450 24 348
108 108.25 108.00 1.5 105 70 1015 17 246.5
Part-B
Page 164
133 133.50 133.25 1.5 130 14 203
159 159.50 159.25 2.0 155 15 217.5
12. CAPILLARY FITTINGS:

12.1 SCOPE
Fitting made of Dezincification Resistance materials i.e. Copper, DZR
Brass (Alloy CZ 132) or Gun Metal conforming to BS:864 / EN:1254.
Ordinary or Duplex Brass fittings are not allowed to be used. Dimensions
of fittings shall conform to EN:1254 Part II and EN:1057 to ensure
proper jointing. The distance between the socket and neck of the fitting
shall be sufficient to allow proper capillary action and flow of lead free
solder. Threads on all fittings must be BSP threads and all male threads
must be tapered and female ends parallel. Fittings must have BS:864
or EN:1254 imprinted on the fitting itself.
All fittings shall be embossed with the BS symbol mentioning the
specification BS:864 or with EN:1254.
(a) 15mm to 28mm sizes Integral Solder Ring Fittings shall be used
for all internal services.
(b) Sizes 35mm & above, End feed fittings shall be used for all external
services.
(c) Fittings of sizes 15mm to 28mm shall be joined with copper pipes
by the use of soft lead free solder wire as per the specification
mentioned below.
(d) For fitting for sizes 35mm & above, the process of jointing shall be
by brazing as per details given below. Under no circumstances
fittings below 35mm shall be brazed and under no circumstances
fittings of 35mm & above shall be soft soldered.
12.2 End Feed Fittings:

The fittings must be capable of End feeding. Solder Wire shall be used
with these fittings must be soft solder capable of melting at approx.
230°C & must confirm to BS:219 / EN BS 29453. Solder Wire shall be
absolutely lead-free. Only Copper Tin and Silver Tin Solder shall be
Part-B
Page 165
acceptable. All fittings of 35mm and above shall be of End Feed
Type.
12.3 Solder Ring Fittings:

All plain end of fittings shall be provided with enough amount of lead-
free solder in the neck of the fitting itself to ensure proper capillary
action. The solder shall be soft solder and lead-free with melting
temperature of approx. 230°C and shall be capable of melting with an
ordinary blow lamp and on melting shall be sufficient to form a complete
leak proof joint to cover the annular space in between the tube and
fitting from the socket of the fitting to the outside of the fittings. Solder
must conform to BS:219 / BS EN:29453 specification. All fittings of
15mm to 28mm shall be of integral Solder Ring Type.
12.4 SOLDER WIRE:
All integral solder ring fittings strictly shall be lead-free solder. In the
case of End Feed Fittings lead-free, Tin-Copper or Tin Silver solder, as
specified in BS:EN:29453 (Formerly BS:219) shall be used in potable
water installations.
12.5 FLUX:
(a) Flux shall be Non-Acidic, Lead-free.
(b) The Flux shall be supplied in paste form packed in small Tin
container of 500 gms or small packaging and shall have
compatibility to use with Solder wire (Lead-free & as per BS:219
or equivalent).
(c) The Flux shall be water soluble and shall be used in recommended
quantity. Excess use of Flux not recommended
12.6 MATERIAL
(a) Copper pipe shall conform to EN 1057 of size & class as specified
in bill of quantities.
(b) End Feed Type Capillary Fittings (with KITE Mark/ WRAS approvals)
in accordance with EN 1254-1 such as sockets, bends, elbows,
tees, reducers, unions. All threaded adaptors shall be of DZR Brass
material.
Part-B
Page 166
12.7 JOINTING & FIXING:
(a) The copper pipes and fittings shall run in wall chase or ceiling or as
specified. The fixing shall be done by means of standard pattern
holder bat clamps keeping the pipes about 1.5 cm clear of the wall
where to be laid on surface. Where it is specified to conceal the
pipes, chasing may be adopted. For pipes fixed in the shafts, ducts,
etc., there shall be sufficient space to work on the pipes with the
usual tools. As far as possible, pipes may be buried for shot
distances provided adequate protection is given against damage
and where so required special care shall be taken at joints. Where
directed by the Owner’s Site Representative / Engineer in charge,
pipe sleeves shall be fixed at a place the pipe is passing through a
wall or floor for reception of the pipe and allow freedom for
expansion and contraction and other movements. In case pipe is
embedded in walls or floors, it shall be covered with a protective
tape wrapped around the pipes & fittings.
(b) Copper pipe shall be joined with approved above mentioned fittings
confirming to BS:864 Part II and EN:1254. Care shall be taken to
remove any bulk from the end of the pipes after cutting. Only
fittings of the size suitable to the pipe shall be used. The ends of
the tube shall be cut to the correct size using a tube cutter or a
line bladed hacksaw. Care shall be taken to ensure that the ends
of the tubes are cut perpendicular to the axis of the tube and that
the ends remain undamaged and free of burrs. Any burrs remaining
shall be removed with a smooth file. The external surface of the
tube that shall go into the fitting shall be cleaned.
(c) Flux shall be applied on the pipe surface ensuring even and uniform
application. Insert the tube into the fitting and push home until the
stop is reached. Wipe off excess flux with a soft cloth. Now the
assembled joint shall be heated with a blow. Torch or any similar
appliance that emits a clean, blue, soot free flame. The heat shall
be turned off once complete ring of solder has appeared on the
mouth of the fitting.
Part-B
Page 167
(d) Concealed pipe work shall include chipping walls, fixing with clamps
including wraping with ploythene sheet tape and making good the
walls complete as specified by engineer.
12.8 PAINTING
All pipes above ground shall be painted with one coat of red oxide and
two coats of synthetic enamel paint of approved shade and quality. Pipes
shall be painted to standard colour code IS:2379:1990 as specified by
the Engineer.
12.9 TESTING
of the test and open end closed with watertight fittings. The testing
pressure on completion of the work shall not be less than 1.5 times
the working pressure of the pipes.
during filling.
Part-B
Page 168
13. INSULATION FOR CHILLED WATER PIPES
13.1 SCOPE
This specification covers the requirements for manufacture, supplying,

applying, jointing, testing and commissioning of pipe insulation with
coating for Chilled water conveyance & distribution system.
13.2 MATERIAL & INSTALLATION

(a) Insulation material for Pipe insulation shall be Closed Cell
Elastomeric Nitrile Rubber or closed cell cross linked polyethylene
foam.
(b) Thermal conductivity of elastomeric nitrile rubber shall not exceed
0.038 W/m°K or 0.0313 Kcal/m hr C° or 0.212 BTU/ (Hr-ft2-
°F/inch) at an average temperature of 30C°. The product shall
have temperature range of –40 C° to 105C°.
(c) Density of material shall not be less than 0.06 gm/cm3.
(d) The insulation shall have fire performance such that it passes
minimum CLASS 1 as per BS476 part 7 for surface spread of flame.
Water vapour permeability shall not exceed 0.024 per inch (3 x 10-
14 kgs/m. sec. Pa).
(e) Thickness of the insulation shall be as specified for the individual
application.
(f) Each lot of insulation material delivered at site shall be
accompanied with manufacturer test certificate for thermal
conductivity values. Samples of insulation material from each lot
delivered at site may be selected by Owner’s site representative
and gotten tested for thermal conductivity and density at
Contractor’s cost.
(g) All joints shall be sealed properly with adhesive, which shall provide
similar vapour barrier as the original insulating material.
(h) All chilled water piping shall be insulated in the manner specified
herein. Before applying insulation, all pipes shall be brushed and
cleaned. Thermal insulation shall be applied as follows or as
specified in drawings or schedule of quantity.
Part-B
Page 169
Pipe size (mm) Thickness
15 mm to 25 mm 9 mm
32 mm to 50 mm 13 mm
65 mm 19 mm
80 mm 25 mm
(i) Insulation for pipes in wall chase and for pipes in shaft / plant
room.
(j) Insulating material in tube form shall be sleeved on the pipes. On
existing piping, slit opened tube from insulating material shall be
placed over the pipe and adhesive (as recommended by the
manufacturer) shall be applied as suggested by the manufacturer.
Adhesive must be allowed to tack dry and then press surface firmly
together starting from butt end and working towards centre.
(k) Wherever flat sheets shall be used it shall be cut out in correct
dimension. All longitudinal and transverse joints shall be sealed as
per manufacturers’ recommendations. The insulation shall be
continuous over the entire run of piping, fittings and valves.
(l) All valves, fittings, joints, strainers etc. in chilled water piping shall
be insulated to the same thickness as specified for the main run of
piping and application shall be same as above. Valves bonnet,
yokes and spindles shall be insulated in such a manner as not to
cause damage to insulation when the valve is used or serviced.
(m) All insulation work shall be carried out by skilled workmen
specially trained in this kind of work. All insulated pipes shall be
labelled (HWS/ HWR/ HWRR) and provided with 300 mm wide band
of paint along circumference at every 1200 mm for colour coding.
Direction of fluid shall also be marked. All painting shall be as per
relevant BIS codes.
(n) Installation shall be including 22 SWG GI sheet cladding over
nitrile rubber insulation on chilled water pipe work all complete as
per directions of the Engineer
Part-B
Page 170
13.3 TESTING
of the test and open end closed with water tight fittings. The
testing pressure on completion of the work shall not be less than
1.5 times the working pressure of the pipes or 7.5 Kg/Sq.cm
whichever more is.
during filling.
14. PRESSURE REDUCING VALVE:
14.1 MATERIAL
(a) PRV shall be of brass housing, spring bonnet with adjustable
opening having adjustable knob for pressure adjustment. Valve
shall be vertical flow type, conforming to IS: 9739-1981.
(b) Each PRV shall contain loading neoprene diaphragm & a full
floating, self-aligning, ignition resistant seat. Valve shall be of
singe stage pressure reduction type. Strainer provided at the inlet
shall be of replaceable porous sintered metal type.
Each pressure relief valve shall be of the fully enclosed type and
Part-B
Page 171
fitted with hand easing gear. Each pressure relief valve in a
pressure reducing station shall have a flow capacity equal to that
of the pressure reducing valve. Pressure relief valves in locations
other than reducing stations shall have flow capacities equal to that
of the associated equipment.
14.2 FIXING
(a) The screwed or flanged joint shall be made to obtain complete
water tight joint.
(b) The force of the diaphragm shall operate against the force of an
adjustable spring. The inlet pressure shall have no influence in
either the opening or closing the valve, hence, the outlet pressure
shall remain constant always.
(c) Valves shall be either screwed ends or flanged ends with all
required jointing/fixing accessories like tail piece, hardware, Teflon
tape, gaskets, etc.
14.3 TESTING
The joints shall be tested to a hydraulic pressure of 1MPa (10 kg/cm2)

or 1.5 times working pressure whichever is higher along with testing of
pipe line for a minimum duration of 2 hrs.
15. WATER METERS
15.1 Water meter shall be BMS compatible with RS 485 port. The water
meters shall meet with the approval of local supply authorities.
15.2 The meters shall conform to Indian Standard IS: 779 and IS: 2373.
Calibration certificate shall be obtained and submitted for each water
meter.
15.3 Provision shall also be made to lock the water meter. The provision shall
be such that the lock is conveniently operated from the top. Where the
provision is designed for use in conjunction with padlocks, the hole
provided for padlocks shall be a diameter not less than 4mm.
15.4 Installation Of Water Meters And Stop Cock
The G.I. lines shall be cut to the required lengths at the position where
the meter and stop cock are required to be fixed. Suitable fittings shall
be attached to the pipes. The meter and stop cock shall be fixed in a
Part-B
Page 172
position by means of connecting pipes, jam nut and socket etc. The stop
cock shall be fixed near the inlet of the water meter. The paper disc
inserted in the ripples of the meter shall be removed. And the meter
installed exactly horizontal or vertical in the flow line in the direction
shown by the arrow cast on the body of the meter. Care shall be taken
that the factory seal of the meter is not disturbed. Wherever the meter
shall be fixed to a newly fitted pipe line, the pipe line shall have to be
completely washed before fitting the meter.
15.5 Testing
(a) All pipes, fittings and valves shall be tested in accordance with IS:
2065 except as may be modified herein under. All pipes, fittings
and valves, after fixing at site, shall be tested to a hydrostatic
pressure of 1.5 times the shut off head of the pump.
(b) The test pressure shall be maintained for a period of at least thirty
minutes without any drop in pressure.
(c) A test register shall be maintained and all entries shall be signed
and dated by Contractor(s) and the Engineer.
16. EXPANSION JOINTS

16.1 SCOPE
Rubber expansion joints provide a proven and flexible solution to
accommodate many types of movements and requirements of
equipment.
These include:
(a) Accommodating for pressure loads
(b) Neutralizing axial, lateral and angular stress
(c) Reducing noise
(d) Isolating sources of vibration
(e) Prolonging the life of motive equipment
(f) They are used in all systems transporting fluids, slurries or gases
under pressure, at ambient pressure or under vacuum over a wide
range of temperatures.
(g) Low spring rates.
(h) Greater movement per arch.
(i) Manufactured in single or multiple arches.
Part-B
Page 173
(j) Choice of eight liner elastomer
(k) Choice of cover to match liner materials or different materials for
better resistance to external conditions.
(l) Filled or unfilled arches.
(m) Galvanized carbon steel or stainless-steel split backup rings.
(n) Can be built with permanent offset to compensate for existing or
designed piping misalignment.
17. Y STRAINERS
17.1 SCOPE
(a) Strainers shall incorporate removable stainless-steel screen with
3.175 mm (1/8”) perforations and permanent magnet.
(b) Stainers shall be provided with flanges at both inlet and outlet.
(c) Strainers shall be designed to enable blowing out of accumulated
dirt and replacement of the screen without disconnection of the
main pipe.
(d) Strainers shall be provided with equal size isolating butterfly valves
of approved brands as shown in drawings so that the strainer may
be cleaned without draining the system.
18. PRESSURE GAUGE
18.1 SCOPE
(a) Pressure gauge shall be provided as shown in drawings. Pressure
gauge shall be 100 mm dia gunmetal bourdon type with gunmetal
isolation ball valve, tapping and connecting pipe and nipple. The
gauge shall be installed at appropriate height for easy readability.
(b) Pressure gauges fitted in the installations shall comply with IS
4224.The scale subdivision shall not exceed
(c) 0.2 bar for a maximum scale value up to and including 20 bars
(d) 0.5 bar for a maximum scale value of more than 20 bar
(e) 1.0 bar for a maximum scale value more than 20 bar.
19. GATE VALVE
Gate valves, where specified shall be screwed/flange gate valves of gun metal
body. The spindle, valve seat and wedge nuts shall be gunmetal. They shall
Part-B
Page 174
generally have non-rising spindle and shall be of the particular duty and
design as specified. The valves shall be supplied with suitable
threaded/flanges, non-corrosive bolts and asbestos fibre gaskets. Gate
valves shall conform to Indian standard IS:13144 & IS:554 .
20. FORGED BRASS BALL VALVES (For cold/Hot Water)

20.1 SCOPE
(a) Ball valve shall conform to IS: 9890 or BS: 1868.
(b) Full way lever operated forged brass ball of brass body with forged
brass hard chrome plated steel ball tested to a pressure not less
than 15 kg/cm2 with threaded or flanged joints. The weight of the
full way valve shall be as per the table given below with a tolerance
of 5 percent. For Hot water the same shall be suitable for
temperature upto 85° C.
Diameter in Flanged Screwed

mm arch (Kg) arch (Kg)
15 1.021 0.567
20 1.503 0.680
25 2.495 1.077
32 3.232 1.559
40 4.082 2.268
50 6.691 3.232
65 10.149 6.804
80 13.381 8.845
(c) The valves shall have either screwed ends or flanged ends.
20.2 TESTING
(a) The valves shall be body & seat tested at manufacturer’s works as
per the relevant standard & duly stamped. Test certificate shall be
submitted for material & hydraulic testing.
(b) After fixing in the pipelines, the system shall be hydraulically tested
for 1.5 times working pressure or 22.5 kg/cm2 whichever is higher
Part-B
Page 175
for minimum 4 hrs without any pressure drop. In case of leakage,
contractor shall rectify/replace valves at his own cost
(c) Valves shall also be tested for its hand wheel / lever function by
frequent on-off operation.
21. GLOBE VALVE: (for Cold/Hot Water)

21.1 SCOPE
Globe valves shall be union bonnet with stem/disc and body seat ring of
SS. For Hot water the same shall be suitable for temperature upto 85°C.
Globe valves shall be suitable for the working pressure involved.
22. C.I. BUTTERFLY VALVE (For cold/Hot Water)

22.1 MATERIAL
(a) Valve shall be either wafer type design or flanged ends.
(b) C.I. butterfly valves water end type class PN 16 as per I.S:13095
or BS:5155 with integrally moulded linear of nitrile or EPDM, SS
Disc and wheel / lever operated. For Hot water the same shall be
suitable for temperature upto 85° C.
22.2 Valves shall also be tested for its hand wheel / lever function by frequent
on-off operation.
23. SLUICE VALVE

23.1 SCOPE
The spindle, valve seat and wedge nuts shall be gunmetal. They shall
generally have non-rising spindle and shall be of the particular duty and
design as specified. The valves shall be supplied with suitable flanges,
non-corrosive bolts and asbestos fibre gaskets. Sluice valves shall
conform to Indian standard IS: 780 and IS: 2906
24. AIR RELEASE VALVE:

24.1 SCOPE
The item includes supplying of single, double action or kinetic air Valve
Part-B
Page 176
of specified diameter as mentioned in the schedule including fixing.
24.2 MATERIAL
(a) Single air valve shall have single small or large orifice for releasing
air during pipe filling and ventilating the pipe during emptying. Air
valves up to 50 mm diameter directly shall be screwed on the main.
(b) Double air valve shall have two ball chambers, on outlet of large
capacity shall be provided for admission and release of bulk volume
of air during emptying and filling of the main, another of small
outlet type for the escape of smaller quantities of air accumulating
under pressure. They shall be of flanged type.
(c) Air valve body, bonnet, glands, caps, joints support rings shall be
best grey iron of selected grade, 200 of IS-210-1978 specification
for grey iron castings.
(d) Ball guides of small orifice units and outlet bushes of large orifice
valves shall be of gunmetal.
(e) Nipples, spindles shall be machined from rolled, extruded or forged
high tensile brass or aluminium bronze.
(f) The balls shall be of rubber covered and vulcanite covered. The
rubber shall have a smooth and solid surface. It shall be as per I.S.
638-1965 specification for rubber and insertion jointing.
24.3 Air valve shall be provided with isolation valve with IS certification mark
and isolation valve.
25. DRAINAGE
25.1 SCOPE OF WORK
Work under this section consists of furnishing all labour, materials
equipment and appliances necessary and required to completely install
for Drainage system (Sewage & Storm water) as required by the
drawings, specified hereinafter and given in the Schedule of Quantities.
25.2 Without restricting to the generality of the foregoing, the drainage
system shall include the following: -
(a) All soil/ waste water & rain water lines to various parts of the
building including connection to vertical stack & to final disposal
Part-B
Page 177
point which maybe city sewer / storm manhole / Nalla / Sewage
or Effluent Treatment Plant.
(b) Pipe slopes/ gradient to achieve self-cleansing velocity.
(c) Drain Connections to all plumbing fixtures, Floor drains,
kitchen/laundry equipment, tanks, appliances, irrigation features,
water bodies.
(d) Supports/ Clamps, Excavation& refilling of pipe trenches, required
civil work.
25.3 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
(a) All material shall be new & quality conforming to specifications &
subject to the approval of Engineer.
(b) All material shall be rust proof. The material in direct/ indirect
contact shall compatible to prevent electrolytic/chemical
(bimetallic) corrosion.
(c) Drainage lines shall be truly vertical, horizontal or in slopes in a
neat workmanship like manner.
(d) Pipe shall be securely fixed to the wall or ceiling by providing
clamps at regular intervals.
(e) Access doors & clean out plugs shall be provided at regular
intervals as per code & plumbing good practices unless otherwise
shown in the drawing.
(f) Access door & clean out plugs shall be so located that, they can be
easily accessible for maintenance.
(g) All drainage work shall be done in accordance with local
municipal/authority bye laws.
(h) Location of manholes catch pts shall be got approved from
Engineer before execution.
(i) The contractor shall install a drainage system to efficiently collect;
drain &dispose all soil & waste water from various parts of building,
appurtenances & equipment. The piping shall finally terminate &
discharge into final disposal point which may be municipal (or any
other authority’s) sewer manhole, STP or any other disposal
point as shown/indicated in drawing. The system shall also include
rain/storm water collection from various parts of buildings as well
as from the ground surface, roads, open areas, etc. The piping shall
Part-B
Page 178
finally terminate & discharge into final disposal point which may be
municipal (or any other authority’s) drain, percolation/recharging
wells or any other disposal point as indicated in the drawing.
(j) All drainage piping shall be installed at depth greater than 80 cm
below finished ground level.
(k) All sewage piping network shall include gully tarps, inspection &
manhole chambers, drop manholes, intercepting chambers, etc. All
storms piping network shall include gully tarps, catch pits, de
silting chambers, etc. Storm network shall be either though piping
or channel with openable gratings.
(l) All sewage piping network shall be vented at start of all branching
drains, main drain, lowest & highest points & at interval as
indicated in the drawing. All venting arrangements shall be
concealed &unconstructive. Work shall be strictly in accordance
with IS: 1742.
(m) Wherever the drainage piping run above water supply pipes, it shall
be encased completely in cement concrete 1:2:4 all round with
prior approval from Engineer.
(n) All drainage piping shall be subject to hydraulic test & smoke test
for its soundness. A test register shall be maintained at site & all
performance test data shall be recorded & duly signed by
contractor &Engineer.
26. GALVANISED IRON PIPES & FITTINGS

26.1 The pipes shall be galvanized mild steel welded (ERW) or (HFW) screwed
and socketed conforming to the requirements of IS:1239 of heavy class
(C) and Medium class (B).
26.2 The pipes under this standard are designated by their nominal bore and
are further classified as Light, Medium and Heavy depending upon their
wall thickness and shall be used as per required suitable pressure.
Sockets of these pipes are designated by respective nominal bore of the
pipe.
26.3 Joints: The threads of all screwed and socket pipes shall conform to IS-
554. The minimum length of thread in ‘Light’ pipe shall be 80 percent of
specified in IS-554. Each tube shall be supplied with one socket.
Part-B
Page 179
26.4 Length:
The tubes shall be supplied in random lengths of 3 to 6 m.
26.5 Galvanizing:
When tubes are required to be galvanized, the Zinc coating shall
conform to IS 4736. (Hot dip zinc coatings on steel tubes).
26.6 Manufacturing Process:
Tubes are made from tested quality of steel manufactured by any
approved process Electric Resistance Welded (ERW),
(a) The Galvanizing shall conform to IS:4736, the hot dip zinc coating
shall be uniform, adherent reasonably smooth and free from such
imperfections as flux, ash and drop inclusions, bare patches, black
spots, pimples, lumpiness, runs, rust strains, bulky white deposits
and blisters. The pipes and sockets shall be cleanly finished, well
galvanized in and out and free from cracks, surface flaws
laminations and other defects. All screw threads shall be clean and
well cut. The ends shall be cut cleanly and square with the axis of
the pipe.
(b) The fittings shall be malleable iron and comply with all the
requirements of the pipes. The sizes of pipes and fitting is specified
in the schedule of quantities.
(c) Hydraulic test: Each pipe shall be hydraulically tested at
manufacturer’s work to withstand a test of Pressure of 5 Mpa.
(d) Marking: The different classes of pipes shall have 75mm colour
bands when arrived on site.
(e) The following colour bands shall be provided.
 Light -------------Yellow
 Medium -------------Blue
 Heavy-------------Red
(f) Fittings: The fittings shall be malleable iron screwed fittings and
shall conform to IS:1879.
(g) The fittings are classified as Light, Medium and Heavy. The sizes of
pipes and fitting is specified in the schedule of quantities.
Part-B
Page 180
26.7 Hydraulic Test:
Each tube shall be hydraulically tested at manufacturer’s works to
withstand a test pressure of 5 Mpa.
26.8 Marking:
The different classes of tubes shall have 75 mm colour bands before
leaving the manufacture’s works.
 Light tube ……………………… Yellow
 Medium tube …………………. Blue
 Heavy tune …………………….Red
26.9 Dimensions and Nominal Weight of Black Steel Tubes (HEAVY) shall be
as per IS 1239
26.10 Permissible Working Pressure for Mild Steel Tubes
N.B. Working Pressure
of Light Medium Heavy
Pipe Ibs/sq.in Kg.cm2 Ibs/sq.in Kg.cm2 Lbs/sq.in Kg.cm2
mm
15 150 10.55 300 21.09 350 24.61
20 150 10.55 300 21.09 350 24.61
25 150 10.55 300 21.09 350 24.61
32 125 8.80 250 17.58 300 21.09
40 125 8.80 250 17.58 300 21.09
50 100 7.03 200 14.06 250 17.58
65 100 7.03 200 14.06 250 17.58
80 100 7.03 200 14.06 250 17.58
100 100 7.03 171 12.02 228 16.03
125 - - 171 12.02 213 14.79
150 - - 142 9.98 171 12.02
Part-B
Page 181
26.11 MECHANICAL COUPLING / ADAPTOR
Mechanical coupling is required for pipe jointing. Coupling is required
at location where two different type of pipe material connection is
required.
26.12 PAINTING
All pipes above ground shall be painted with one coat of red oxide
and two coats of synthetic enamel paint of approved shade and
quality. Pipes shall be painted to standard colour code IS:2379:1990
as specified by the Engineer
26.13 TESTING
tested. All control valves shall be positioned open for the
duration of the test and open end closed with water tight fittings.
The testing pressure on completion of the work shall not be less
than 1.5 times the working pressure of the pipes or 7.5
Kg/Sq.cm whichever more is.
and closely observed to ensure that at no time are the test
pressure exceeded. The systems shall be slowly and carefully
filled with water to avoid surge pressure or water hammer. Air
vents hall be open at all high points so that air may be expelled
from the system during filling.
displaced from the line air vent shall be closed and the line
initially inspected for seepage at joints and firmness of supports
under load. Pressure is reached. Without any additional
requirement of make-up-water the test pressure should not fall
more than 0.02 MPa (0.2 kg. /sq.cm) at the end of one-hour test
duration.
with accurate pressure gauge. The engineer shall examine
carefully all the joints for leakage. Any joint found leaking shall
Part-B
Page 182
be redone, and all leaking pipes removed and replaced without
extra cost.
27. PREFABRICATED GREASE INTERSEPTER
27.1 SCOPE
Prefabricated Grease separator shall be of HDPE / Polyethylene
conforming to EN 1825 / DIN 4040 / 100 suitable for
underground/above ground installation with integrated sludge trap,
sloped interior base improves cleaning and reduces disposal time, inlet
flow calming system and outlet flow regulation device, inlet and outlet
interchangeable, slanted twin access covers with quick release odour
tight snap closures, inspection window with interior cleaning arm. The
contractor shall refer drawings for selection.
28. SCUPPER DRAIN OUTLET / RAINWATER OUTLET
28.1 MATERIAL
(a) The Scupper drain shall be of SS 304 Stainless Steel material with
perforation or solid top, depending on the application.
(b) A perforated top grating shall be used for floor drains expected to
receive surface water. The perforated top grating shall be free of
any defects and shall have a uniform thickness.
(c) A solid top grating shall be used for such applications where in the
content of the waste water contains such foul elements which
would affect the local environment. The solid cover shall have a
complete sealing
(d) The solid top grating shall be free of any defects and shall have a
uniform thickness.
28.2 FIXING
SS 304 Stainless Steel grating shall be fixed in position with appropriate

and durable sealant and screw and nuts.
Part-B
Page 183
PHE Works-Sanitary Items Make and Model
Name of Project: Construction of CCS-13
Document Name: Plumbing Fixture Model Matrix
Selection 1 Selection 2 Selection 3
Name Name Name

BOQ Item No. Item Description
Intent Image Cat. No. Intent Image Cat. No. Intent Image Cat. No.
NOTE: Various plumbing fixture items will be installed in clusters/group. Therefore, same manufacturer is preffered for all plumbing fixture items in the same cluster/group.
Providing, fixing, testing and commissioning of White Vitreous China coupled type Wall
Mounted Water Closet of approved shape with C.P. bolts, nuts, C.I. chair or other hanging KOHLER JAQUAR ROCA
arrangements, C.P. brass screw, washer with all accessories. including providing and fixing
exposed cistern of approved material with dual flush fitting of minimum Flushing capacity PRODUCT RANGE: ODEON PRODUCT CODE: FLS- PRODUCT CODE:
2 Liter and 4.5 Liter including brass / SS screws and washer complete. PVC WC connector PRODUCT CODE: K-17661K-S-0 WHT-5353PPZ RS342617000
(straight or bend type) with rubber lip ring. Including 110 mm dia PVC pipe / bend of
required length, flexible hose with angle valve and proper connection complete as
17.1
required. Including cutting & making good the walls, floors, slab wherever required
including all necessary accessories and consumables, including seat cover and cistern
fittings, nuts bolts and gasket etc. complete as per specification/drawings and as directed
by Engineer In Charge.
Providing, fixing, testing and commissioning of ABS Chrome plated Brass Hand Shower
(Health Faucet) of approved make and quality and as approved by Engineer - In - Charge, KOHLER JAQUAR ROCA
including 8 mm dia, 1 to 1.5 Meter long Flexible tube & wall hook including cutting and
making good the walls wherever required complete with necessary accessories as per PRODUCT RANGE: CUFF PRODUCT SERIES: ALLIED Health faucet
directions of Engineer in charge With tube & hook
PRODUCT CODE: K-12925IN-CP PRODUCT CODE: ALD-577
17.2 PRODUCT CODE
:RF9060A1
Providing, fixing, testing and commissioning of 15 mm dia. CP brass two way bib cock
(flow rate of 5 lpm) with wall flange and ceramic disc cartridge complete, making all KOHLER JAQUAR ROCA
necessary connections etc. All complete as per directions of the Engineer in charge.
PRODUCT SERIES : JULY PRODUCT SERIES : KUBIX PRODUCT SERIES :
PRIME ESCUADRA
17.3
PRODUCT CODE: K-16094IN-4-CP
PRODUCT CODE: KUP- PRODUCT CODE :
35041PM RT5A9325CA1;
Providing, fixing, testing & Commissioning of approved make wall hung half pedestal wash
basin including making water and drain connections, CP wall and sleeve flanges, etc., KOHLER JAQUAR ROCA
complete with all respect. The wash basin shall consist of the following and shall be with
hot water supply. PRODUCT RANGE: TRACE PRODUCT SERIES : OPAL
Heavy type concealed M.S.wall brackets with 3 hole fixity and SS screws to support the PRODUCT CODE :
PRODUCT CODE: K-30520IN-0 PRODUCT CODE : OPS- 'RS325463460 +
17.4 basin or hitech supports, 32 mm dia. CP waste Coupling, 32 mm dia.CP bottle trap with
K-20746IN-CP WHT-15803 RS337460460
extention pipe, 1 nos 15 mm Angle Cock with 450 mm long CP inlet connection pipe. The
ALD-705L130 RF5054018A1
rate includes wash basin, pedestal, brackets, waste coupling, bottle trap, angle cock, inlet
connection pipes, and all incidental fixtures, fasteners all complete as directed by the
Engineer In Charge.
Part-B
Page 184
basin including making water and drain connections, CP wall and sleeve flanges, etc.,
complete with all respect. The wash basin shall consist of the following and shall be with
hot water supply.
Heavy type concealed M.S.wall brackets with 3 hole fixity and SS screws to support the
17.4 basin or hitech supports, 32 mm dia. CP waste Coupling, 32 mm dia.CP bottle trap with
extention pipe, 1 nos 15 mm Angle Cock with 450 mm long CP inlet connection pipe. The Name Name Name
BOQ Item No. rate includes wash basin, pedestal, brackets,
Item Description
waste coupling, bottle trap, angle cock, inlet Intent Image Cat. No. Intent Image Cat. No. Intent Image Cat. No.
Engineer In Charge.
Providing, fixing, testing and commissioning of C.P Brass pillar cock (Flowrate as 5.0 Lit per
min AT 3.0 bar) for Wash Basin of approved make and quality, and as approved and KOHLER JAQUAR ROCA
directed by the Engineer In Charge, including CP wall flanges, CP extension nipple and all
necessary materials required for fixing and making good as required. PRODUCT RANGE: PARALLEL
PRODUCT CODE: DRC-
17.5 PRODUCT CODE: K-23482IN-4-CP 37011B PRODUCT CODE:
RT5A4220CA1
Providing, fixing, testing and commissioning of Liquid Soap Dispenser with SS 304 bottle of
minimum 0.4 ltrs capacity of approved make and quality, including all necessary materials EURONICS UTEC DOLPHY
required for fixing. All complete as per directions of the Engineer in charge.
Liquid Soap Dispenser Liquid Soap Dispenser Liquid Soap Dispenser
17.6 PRODUCT CODE:ES09 PRODUCT CODE:TVB- PRODUCT CODE:

3500 DSDR0132
Providing, fixing of chrome finish Double Robe Hook of approved make, fixed to PVC cleats
with matching screws etc.all necessary accessories complete as per directions of the KOHLER JAQUAR ROCA
Engineer in charge.
PRODUCT RANGE: Bottle Trap Bottle Trap
COMPLEMENTARY
17.7 PRODUCT CODE: AKP- PRODUCT CODE:
PRODUCT CODE: K-25073IN-CP 35761P RA815491001
Providing and fixing chrome finish Toilet paper holder with flap and shelf along with all
necessary accessories complete as per directions of the Engineer in charge KOHLER JAQUAR ROCA
PRODUCT RANGE:
Complementary PRODUCT CODE: ACN-
1153S PRODUCT
17.8 PRODUCT CODE : K-5633IN-CP CODE: RA816070159
Providing, fixing, testing and commissioning of SS 304 grade floor drain and Should consist
of cockroach trap of suitable size with all necessary fittings and accessories complete in all CHILLY KICH RUHE
respect as per specification/drawings and as directed by Engineer In Charge.
17.9
Part-B
Page 185
Name Name Name

Providing, fixing, testing and commissioning of SS 304 grade floor drain and Should consist Intent Image Cat. No. Intent Image Cat. No. Intent Image Cat. No.
of cockroach trap of suitable size with all necessary fittings and accessories complete in all
respect as per specification/drawings and as directed by Engineer In Charge.
PRODUCT SERIES: LIFESTYLE
PRODUCT CODE: FD225
PRODUCT CODE: CCTL-SMHC-150 PRODUCT CODE: 16-
17.9 0307-06
Providing, fixing, testing and commissioning of Hand towel/tissue paper dispenser with all
necessary fittings and accessories complete in all respect as per specification/drawings and EURONICS DOLPHY UTEC
as per direction of Engineer-incharge.
PRODUCT CODE:EP23 PRODUCT PRODUCT CODE:TVB-

CODE:DPDR0001 4050
17.10
Providing and fixing CP brass Swivel towel holder along with all necessary accessories
complete as per directions of the Engineer in charge . JAQUAR KOHLER ROCA
PRODUCT SERIES: Lure
PRODUCT CODE: Towel Rail
17.11 PRODUCT CODE: AKP-35715PS K-25067IN-CP
PRODUCT CODE:
RA816070165
Providing, fixing, testing and commissioning of battery operated polycarbonate ABS

deodorizer with all necessary fittings and accessories complete in all respect as per EURONICS DOLPHY UTEC
specification/drawings and as directed by Engineer In Charge.
PRODUCT CODE : EA24 Digital PRODUCT CODE : PRODUCT CODE : UT-

LED DAPD0006 650
17.12 Perfume Dispenser
Providing, fixing, testing and commissioning of White Vitreous China Wall Mounted
Water Closet of approved shape with C.P. bolts, nuts, C.I. chair or other hanging JAQUAR HINDWARE CERA
with dual flush valve having Flushing capacity minimum 2 Liter and 4.5 Liter including brass
/ SS screws and washer complete. PVC WC connector (straight or bend type) with rubber
lip ring. Including 110 mm dia PVC pipe / bend of required length and proper connection
17.13 complete as required. Including cutting & making good the walls, floors, slab wherever
required including all necessary accessories and consumables, including seat cover and Part-B
cister fittings, nuts bolts and gasket etc. complete as per specification/drawings and as
directed by Engineer In Charge. Page 186
Name Name Name

Providing, fixing, testing and commissioning of White Vitreous China Wall Mounted Intent Image Cat. No. Intent Image Cat. No. Intent Image Cat. No.
Water Closet of approved shape with C.P. bolts, nuts, C.I. chair or other hanging
with dual flush valve having Flushing capacity minimum 2 Liter and 4.5 Liter including brass
/ SS screws and washer complete. PVC WC connector (straight or bend type) with rubber PRODUCT CODE:Cat. No.:
PRODUCT CNS-WHT-963UFSM 20109 (P-22.5) PRODUCT Cat. No.
lip ring. Including 110 mm dia PVC pipe / bend of required length and proper connection
17.13 S1043144
complete as required. Including cutting & making good the walls, floors, slab wherever
required including all necessary accessories and consumables, including seat cover and
cister fittings, nuts bolts and gasket etc. complete as per specification/drawings and as
directed by Engineer In Charge.
Providing, fixing, testing & Commissioning of approved make under counter wash basin
including making water and drain connections, CP wall and sleeve flanges, etc., complete JAQUAR HINDWARE CERA
with all respect. The wash basin shall consist of the following:
Heavy type concealed M.S.wall brackets with 3 hole fixity and SS screws to support the
basin or hitech supports, 32 mm dia. CP waste Coupling, 32 mm dia.CP bottle trap with PRODUCT CODE:
extention pipe, with 450 mm long CP inlet connection pipe. The rate includes wash basin, PRODUCT CODE: FNS-WHT-40701 PRODUCT CODE : Cat. S2030105
17.14 ALD-705L130 No.: 10080 F8050301
waste coupling, bottle trap, angle cock, inlet connection pipes, and all incidental fixtures,
Cat. No.: F860032
fasteners all complete as directed by the Engineer In Charge.
Providing, fixing, testing and commissioning of wall mounted sensor based C.P Brass faucet
(Flowrate as 5.0 Lit per min AT 3.0 bar) with 1 no. 15 mm Angle Cock for for Wash Basin of JAQUAR HINDWARE CERA
approved make and quality, and as approved and directed by the Engineer In Charge,
including CP wall flanges and all necessary materials required for fixing and making good as
required.
17.15 PRODUCT CODE : SNR-51443 PRODUCT CODE : Cat. PRODUCT CODE
No.: F240007 :F6010106
Providing, fixing, testing and commissioning of Wall Mounted Single Lever Basin Mixer
(Flowrate as 5.0 Lit per min AT 3.0 bar) Consisting of Operating Lever, Cartridge Sleeve, JAQUAR HINDWARE CERA
Nipple, Spout & Two Wall Flanges with 2 no. 15 mm Angle Cock and Flexible Hoses
complete required for Wash Basin of approved make and quality, and as approved and PRODUCT CODE : Cat.
directed by the Engineer In Charge, including all necessary materials required for fixing and PRODUCT CODE : FUS-29231NK No.: F280029 PRODUCT CODE:
17.16 F1020473
making good as required
F4065101
Providing and fixing white vitreous china battery based infrared sensor operated urinal of
approx. size 610 x 390 x 370 mm having pre & post flushing with water (250 ml & 500 ml JAQUAR HINDWARE CERA
consumption), having water inlet from back side, including fixing to wall with suitable
brackets all as per manufacturers specification and direction of Engineer in charge.
17.17
Part-B
Page 187
Name Name Name

Providing and fixing white vitreous china battery based infrared sensor operated urinal of Intent Image Cat. No. Intent Image Cat. No. Intent Image Cat. No.
approx. size 610 x 390 x 370 mm having pre & post flushing with water (250 ml & 500 ml
consumption), having water inlet from back side, including fixing to wall with suitable
brackets all as per manufacturers specification and direction of Engineer in charge.
PRODUCT CODE: URS-WHT- PRODUCT CODE: Cat. PRODUCT CODE: Cat.

13253N No.: 96014 No. S4020113
SNR-STL-51083 500963 Cat. No. B2050108
17.17
Providing, fixing, testing and commissioning of SS 304 grade battery operated automatic
Liquid Soap Dispenser with 1 litre capacity of approved make and quality, and as approved EURONICS UTEC DOLPHY
by the Engineer in charge, including all necessary materials required for fixing. All complete
as per directions of the Engineer in charge.
PRODUCT CODE : ES80A (Wall
Mount) PRODUCT CODE : UT-325 PRODUCT CODE :
17.18 DSDR0117
Providing, fixing, testing and commissioning of tissue dispenser in SS 304 grade with waste
reciptable including all necessary fittings and accessories complete in all respect as per EURONICS DOLPHY UTEC
specification/drawings and as per direction of Engineer-incharge.
17.19 PRODUCT CODE: Kinox KPDN PRODUCT CODE: PRODUCT CODE: UT-TVB-
RECESS DWCB0007 4110
Providing, fixing, testing and commissioning of solid state, touch free infra-Red activated,
fully hygienic Wall Mounted Hand Dryer of SS 304 casing with single blower, with time EURONICS DOLPHY UTEC
delay, including providing necessary brackets, cable from drier to Plug, Plug top key and
lock etc, complete as required with all necessary accessories, as per specification/drawings PRODUCT RANGE:
and as directed by Engineer In Charge. HS Code - 85163300
17.20 PRODUCT PRODUCT RANGE:
PRODUCT CODE: CODE: DAHD0056 MAHNUM
EH26NW
PRODUCT CODE: UT-502
Providing, fixing, testing and commissioning of Divyang toilet set with European Closet (P
Trap) with soft closing lid & Pneumatic Single Piece Slim Concealed Cistern with Floor JAQUAR + KOHLER TOTO+RAK+CERA+AMERICAN STANDARD AMERICAN STANDARD
Mounting Frame, Installation Kit and Drain Pipe Connection Set for Wall Hung WC having
Flushing capacity minimum 2 Liter and 4.5 Liter and Pneumatic control plate & under
counter wash basin & all divyang requirements including brass / SS screws and washer
complete with PVC W.C connector, seat & lead (heavy duty) including C.I. Brackets, brass
hinges, M.S. / C.I. painted brackets, 32mm CP brass waste Coupling, 32mm size CP brass
bottle trap, wall mounted CP Brass faucet with basin mixer (Hot and cold inlets) (Flowrate
as 5.0 Lit per min AT 3.0 bar), etc. all Internal fittings complete with one no Hinged rail, 1
numbers of staright S.S grab rails,1 number of L shaped grab rail and 2 number of U shaped
Part-B
grab rail with floor support , with back support for Water closet etc. rubber buffers, C.P Page 188
nuts, bolts etc making holes in walls & floors, & finishing for ready to use.The rate includes
Name Name Name

Providing, fixing, testing and commissioning of Divyang toilet set with European Closet (P
Trap) with soft closing lid & Pneumatic Single Piece Slim Concealed Cistern with Floor
Mounting Frame, Installation Kit and Drain Pipe Connection Set for Wall Hung WC having
Flushing capacity minimum 2 Liter and 4.5 Liter and Pneumatic control plate & under
counter wash basin & all divyang requirements including brass / SS screws and washer PRODUCT CODE: PRODUCT CODE: PRODUCT CODE:
complete with PVC W.C connector, seat & lead (heavy duty) including C.I. Brackets, brass K-1381T-S-0 CW923RUCT+TC281SJ+T5 * CCAS2025-111A410C0
hinges, M.S. / C.I. painted brackets, 32mm CP brass waste Coupling, 32mm size CP brass FLV-1085NSQ 3P100 *CCAS1140-1010410C0
bottle trap, wall mounted CP Brass faucet with basin mixer (Hot and cold inlets) (Flowrate DIS-WHT-93801 BELLA 61 CM *FFAS8506-D00500BF0
WAC-WHT-BR0600 RF5054018A1 *F54400-CHACT
as 5.0 Lit per min AT 3.0 bar), etc. all Internal fittings complete with one no Hinged rail, 1
WAC-WHT-BG0800 B2210106 *F78006-CHADYN
numbers of staright S.S grab rails,1 number of L shaped grab rail and 2 number of U shaped
FLV-CHR-1085N FFAS9401 *F78104-CHADYN
grab rail with floor support , with back support for Water closet etc. rubber buffers, C.P
SNR-15019PMPK RT5A5609C00 *CLTP405-CHZZ
nuts, bolts etc making holes in walls & floors, & finishing for ready to use.The rate includes *FFAST703-601500BF0
all items to be provided in the divyang toilet as per the nomenclature of this item, including *FFAS9405-000040BC0
17.21 necessary accessories and connection charges as per product detail to the satisfaction and *FFAS9401-000040BC0
as directed by the Engineer In Charge. Note: All materials specified above shall form part of
the Divyang toilet set and shall be as per from Divyang range of approved make.
Providing, fixing, testing and commissioning of White Vitreous China coupled type Wall
Mounted Water Closet of of approx. size 500 x 275 x 580 mm of approved shape with C.P. CERA ROCA
bolts, nuts, C.I. chair or other hanging arrangements, C.P. brass screw, washer with all
accessories. including providing and fixing exposed cistern of approved material with dual
flush fitting of Flushing capacity minimum 2 Liter and 4.5 Liter including brass / SS screws PRODUCT CODE: Cat. No. PRODUCT CODE:
S1013221 RS347115000
17.22 and washer complete. PVC WC connector (straight or bend type) with rubber lip ring.
Including 110 mm dia PVC pipe / bend of required length, flexible hose with angle valve
and proper connection complete as required. Including cutting & making good the walls,
floors, slab wherever required including all necessary accessories and consumables,
including seat cover and cistern fittings, nuts bolts and gasket etc. complete as per
specification/drawings and as directed by Engineer In Charge.
basin including making water and drain connections, CP wall and sleeve flanges, etc., CERA ROCA
complete with all respect. The wash basin shall consist of the following and shall be with or
without hot water supply.
17.23 Heavy type concealed M.S.wall brackets with 3 hole fixity and SS screws to support the
basin or hitech supports, 32 mm dia. CP waste Coupling, 32 mm dia.CP bottle trap with PRODUCT CODE: Cat. No. PRODUCT CODE:
S2040139 RS337460460
extention pipe, 1 nos 15 mm Angle Cock with 450 mm long CP inlet connection pipe. The
rate includes wash basin, pedestal, brackets, waste coupling, bottle trap, angle cock, inlet
Engineer In Charge.
Providing, fixing, testing and commissioning of C.P. Brass Over Head Shower rose with C.P.
brass Shower arm of approved make and quality, and as approved by the Engineer in JAQUAR HINDWARE CERA
charge.
17.24
Part-B
Page 189
Name Name Name

Providing, fixing, testing and commissioning of C.P. Brass Over Head Shower rose with C.P. Intent Image Cat. No. Intent Image Cat. No. Intent Image Cat. No.
brass Shower arm of approved make and quality, and as approved by the Engineer in
charge.
17.24 PRODUCT CODE : OHS-35495 + PRODUCT CODE : PRODUCT CODE :

SHA 477 F160142 F7010110SS + F7040106
Providing, fixing, testing and commissioning of C.P. brass Single lever shower mixer /
Divertor with Hot and cold inlets and outlets for spout and overhead shower with cast JAQUAR HINDWARE CERA
brass concealed part for the divertor unit of approved quality with CP wall flanges
conforming to Manufacturers standards. Work to be completed as approved and directed Single Lever Diverter Consisting single lever concealed
by the Engineer in charge. of Operating Lever, PRODUCT CODE: diverter
Wall Flange F570049
17.25 PRODUCT
PRODUCT CODE: LYR-38065NK CODE: F1019711
Providing, fixing, testing and commissioning of C.P. Bath Spout with CP wall flanges and
washer conforming to Manufacturers Standards. Work to be completed as per of
JAQUAR HINDWARE CERA
approved Quality and as directed by the Engineer in charge.
PRODUCT CODE:
17.26 PRODUCT CODE :SPJ-37429 PRODUCT CODE: Cat. G1017661
No.: F410009
Providing, fixing, testing and commissioning of single S.S soap dish, including chasing in the
wall, fixing the soap dish and finishing in the wall and at levels as directed by the Engineer JAQUAR HINDWARE CERA
in charge.
Wide Square
17.27 PRODUCT CODE : ACN-1131N PRODUCT CODE : PRODUCT CODE

F880011 :F5014116CH
Providing, fixing, testing and commissioning of SS 304 Shower drain finished in brass finish
with provision for tile insert & Should consist of cockroach trap of suitable size with all CHILLI KICH RUHE
necessary fittings and accessories complete in all respect as per specification/drawings
and as directed by Engineer In Charge.
17.28
Part-B
Page 190
Name Name Name

Providing, fixing, testing and commissioning of SS 304 Shower drain finished in brass finish Intent Image Cat. No. Intent Image Cat. No. Intent Image Cat. No.
with provision for tile insert & Should consist of cockroach trap of suitable size with all
necessary fittings and accessories complete in all respect as per specification/drawings
and as directed by Engineer In Charge. Shower channel Marbella
Reflecta Product code: 16-0203-
PRODUCT CODE : 10
PRODUCT CODE : SC-MR-300125 SFD1412S
17.28
Providing, fixing, testing and commissioning of S.S. towel rail golden finish of size 600mm
long with 20 mm dia of approved make and quality, and as approved by the Engineer, JAQUAR HINDWARE CERA
fixed with cleats with CP brass Screws and wall flanges etc all complete as per directions of
the Engineer in charge.
17.29 PRODUCT CODE: ACN-1111BNM PRODUCT CODE: PRODUCT CODE :

F580012 F5013103CH
Providing and fixing Stainless Steel A ISI 304 (18/8) kitchen sink of anti-scratch finish as per
IS:13983 with C.I. brackets and stainless steel plug 40 mm, including waste coupling, NIRALI DALLAS HAFELE
painting of fittings and brackets, cutting and making good the walls wherever required
Kitchen sink with drain board
Minimum 510 x 460 mm bowl size and minimum depth 230 mm
17.30
Single Bowl without Drainboard Single Bowl without Drainboard Single Bowl without Drainboard
Product code: Silent Square Product code: SIGNLE BOWL SINK Product code:577.00.04
Providing, fixing, testing and commissioning of Kitchen Sink Mixer faucet (Flowrate as 5.0
Lit per min AT 3.0 bar) of approved make and quality, and as approved and directed by the JAQUAR HINDWARE KOHLER
Engineer, including all necessary materials required for fixing and making good as required.
17.31 PRODUCT CODE: ARI-39165 PRODUCT CODE: F340027 PRODUCT CODE: K-

99483IN-A4-CP
Providing and fixing CP Brass Angle valve of approved quality & make and as per the
direction of Engineer-in-charge.
Part-B
17.32 Page 191
Name Name Name

Providing and fixing CP Brass Angle valve of approved quality & make and as per the
direction of Engineer-in-charge. JAQUAR HINDWARE KOHLER
PRODUCT CODE: KUP-35053PM PRODUCT CODE: F340006

PRODUCT CODE: K-
25431IN-4-CP
17.32
Providing and fixing CP Brass 32mm size Bottle Trap of approved quality & make and as per
the direction of Engineer-in-charge. JAQUAR HINDWARE KOHLER
PRODUCT CODE: ALD- PRODUCT CODE: F850004 PRODUCT CODE : K-

17.33 769L300x190 7314IN-CP
Providing and fixing Stainless Steel A ISI 304 (18/8) Janitor sink as per IS:13983 with C.I.
brackets and stainless steel plug 40 mm, including painting of fittings and brackets, cutting RUBY STEEL FABRINOX POTNIS JINDAL POLYMERS
and making good the walls wherever required :
Square sink without drain board for Janitor sink SS Floor Mounted Mop Sink SS Mop Sink PRODUCT RANGE :
510x510 mm bowl depth 200 mm Square Sink
PRODUCT CODE :
17.35 SE2424FM PRODUCT CODE :
SE2424FM, JP-707
Providing and fixing C.P. brass bib cock (flow rate of 5 lpm) for Janitor sink of approved
quality & make and as per the direction of Engineer-in-charge.
Zurn DuraSteel
Zurn JP1996 SF Chrome Double Wall mounted faucet for
Handle Service sink
Service Sink Faucet
17.36
Part-B
Page 192
Name Name Name

Supply, installation, testing and commissioning of wall hanging / floor mounted Double
level drinking water fountain one upper level, other at lower level fountain along with WAE CORPORATION OASIS
One/Two Filling Station (Minimum 2 Taps of Cold and Ambient Water Nozzles along with
sensors), Approx. W 1150 MM X H 1650 MM X D 475 MM. It Shall include four
antimicrobial copper push pads and recessed frame for mounting in the wall. Basin shall be PRODUCT CODE :
PRODUCT CODE : NTD1.D P8EBFSLY + Retrofit Kit
17.37 designed to eliminate splashing and standing water. Water saver ss bubbler reduce waste
B.BF.HA PWEBFY Bottle Filler
water by 50% and shall operate between 20 and 100 PSI with UV and sediment filtration.
Cabinet finish shall be brushed stainless steel. TUV, GRIHA, IGBC certified with all necessary
accessories, as per specification/drawings and as directed Engineer In Charge.
Providing, fixing, testing and commissioning of 15 mm dia. CP brass bib cock (flow rate of 5
lpm) with wall flange and ceramic disc cartridge complete, making all necessary Jaquar Kohler ROCA
connections etc. All complete as per directions of the Engineer in charge.
PRODUCT CODE:JAQUAR KUP- PRODUCT CODE: Kohler K- PRODUCT CODE: Roca -
35037PM 16093IN-4-CP RT5A7825CA1
17.38
Part-B
Page 193
PART-B
PREFERRED MAKE LIST
CIVIL & HORTICULTURE COMPONENT
Part-B
Page 194
PREFERRED MAKE LISTS
S.
Material / Item Make
No.
EXCAVATION
1 Anti-Termite Pesticides Bayer, FMC India, Hindustan Insecticides
PPC & RCC WORK
2 Cement (OPC/ PPC) UltraTech, ACC, Ambuja, JK Super cement, Wonder

Cement
3 Cement - White J.K. White, Birla White
4 Admixture for Concrete Master Builder, Sika, Fosroc, Mapei, MC Bauchemie,

(Plasticizers & Super-Plasticizers, MYK , Alccofine (Ambuja)
VMA, Mineral Additive)
5 Reinforcement Steel TATA (TISCO), SAIL, RINL, JSPL, JSW
6 Mechanical Couplers for Sanfield, Halfen, Dextra India, TATA

reinforcement
7 Ready Mix Cement Concrete Ultratech, ACC, NUVOCO, RMC India, NDCON and/or
by setting the Fully Automatic batching plant of minimum
capacity 60 cum/hr by contractor and/or any other
manufacturer as approved by the Engineer-in-charge
8 Expansion Filler board-Premoulded Supreme, STP
compressible (non-Bituminous)
9 Concrete Curing Compound Master Builder , Sika, Fosroc, Mapei, MYK Arment, MC
Bauchemie, Pidilite
10 Expanded polystyrene sheet (EPS) Penguin, Kiwi, E-pack, Supreme, STP
and Extruded Polystyrene Sheet
(XPS)
11 Core cutting machine Hilti, Fischer, Wuerth
12 Soil Anchor for diaphragm wall Tata, Usha Martin
13 PVC water stop Jyoti rubber, Maruti rubber, Fosroc, Sika, Master
Builder, Kantaflex
14 Polysulphide Sealant/ PU sealant Sika, Fosroc, Pidilite, Master Builder, MYK,
Ferrouscrete
MASONRY WORK
15 Ready mix polymer cement mortar UltraTech, MYK Arment, Saint Gobain (Weber), Sika,
Fosroc, Ferrouscrete,
STONE WORK
Part-B
Page 195
S.
No.
16 Dry stone cladding system including Hilti, Fischer, Blick
undercut anchors and clamps
17 Stone sealer and Water & Stain MYK, Ferrouscrete, Saint Gobain-Weber, Wacker, Dow
repellent coatings Corning, Ardex Endura, Kerakoll
DOORS & WINDOWS WORK
18 Flush door shutter (With pine block Greenply (Green), Century (PRO), Duroply (TOWER),
board infill) (All flush doors shall be Merino, Archidply, Green panel
procured from fully owned factory of
the manufacturer and not from JV /
outsourced)
19 Air transfer grill Ruskin Titus, System Air, Trox
20(a) System Aluminium Window Schuco, AluK, Technal, Reynaers, Axsys Solutions
20(b) Curtain Wall System Schuco, AluK, Technal, Reynaers, Axsys Solutions
21 Aluminium glass partition system Dormakaba, Lindner, Kubik, Otic, Deko, Red Plus,
Axsys Solutions
23 Glass Saint Gobain, AIS, Modiguard, Sisecam, Pilkington
24 Silicone Sealant Wacker, Dow Corning, GE momentive, Tremco, Mapei,

MC Bauchemie (I), Pidilite
25 Floor spring, door closer & door Dormakaba, Assa Abloy (except Enox), Hafele, IR
automation Briton, Yale or as specified in BOQ item
26 All type of Door lock including Dormakaba, Assa Abloy (except Enox), Geze, Hafele,
Mortice locks IR Briton, Yale, Kich, Godrej or as specified in BOQ
item
27 SS 304 Door Hardware (other than Dormakaba, Assa Abloy (except Enox), Geze, Hafele,
Floor spring, Closer, Locks) IR Briton, Yale, Kich or as specified in BOQ item
28 Double Action Hinge Dormakaba, Assa Abloy (except Enox), Hafele,
Magnum, IR Briton, Yale or as specified in BOQ item
29 Concealed automatic drop-down Raven, Athmer, Dormakaba, Lorient, Kilargo, Hafele,
seal/ Acoustic Seal / or any other Hormann, 3M, IR Briton or as specified in BOQ item
type of Door seal
30 Wooden Fire rated Doors Promat, Navair, Narsi Interior, Ardor
31 Metal Fire rated Doors & Vision Shakti Hörmann, Navair, Tata Pravesh, IHMS
Panel
32 Fire Rated Hardware & System Dormakaba, Assa Abloy (except Enox), Hafele, Geze,
Hormann
33 Fire seal, Fire smoke seal 3M, Hilti, Promat, Fischer, Dormakaba, Lorient, Kilargo,
Raven, Athmer, STI
Part-B
Page 196
S.
No.
34 Fire rated rolling shutter Shakti Hormann, Gandhi Automation, iHMS, Avian,
Ferco, Toshi Automation
35 Fire rated Glass Vetrotech (Saint-Gobain), SCHOTT, Pyroguard,
Glaverbel , AIS-Pyrobel
36 Fire rated Insulated Glazed door Saint Gobain, Shakti Horman, Navair, IHMS, Schott
(Swing, Sliding & Automatic Sliding
Door)
37 Modular Toilet Cubical Greenlam, Merino, Fundermax
38 Laminates and compact laminate Greenlam, Merino, Century, Royal Touche, Formica
sheet
39 Urinal Partition made of laminated Greenlam, Merino, Fundermax
compact sheet
40 Mirrors/ interior mirror (superior Saint Gobain, Modi Guard, Asahi India Glass Ltd.,
quality crystal clear) Sisecam, Pilkington
41 Polyester Powder coating/ PVDF Jotun, AkzoNobel, Asian PPG, Nippon
Coating
42 Structural Silicon sealant, Pre Dow Corning, Momentive (GE), Tremco, Wacker,
pigmented Weather Silicone Bostik
43 Wood Adhesive Fevicol, Araldite, kerakol, Astral, 3M
44 PVB/SGP Laminate film, Sentry Dupont, Saflex, Estman, Kuraray, XDS, LG, 3M, Saint
Film Gobin
45 Frosted film LG, 3M, Garware, Dupont, Saint Gobin
PLASTER WORK
46 Gypsum light weight Plaster Saint Gobain Gyproc (Elite-90), Ultra tech, JK Laxmi
(Sprayable) (Gypgold), USG Boral, Birla White, Ferrouscrete
47 Ready mix plaster UltraTech, Saint Gobain–Weber, SIKA, Fosroc,

Ferrouscrete, ACC
WATER PROOFING WORK
48 Crystalline Integral Waterproofing Penetron, Kryton, Xypex, SIKA, MYK, Fosroc, Pidilite
49 Water Proofing compound Fosroc, Sika, Master Builder , Mapei, Pidilite, MYK,
50 Water proofing membrane (PVC/ Fosroc, MYK, SIKA, Pidilite, Master Builder, Mapei
HDPE)/ Water proofing coating (PU/
Polyurea/ Acrylic/ Elastomeric
cementitious) / SRI coating
Part-B
Page 197
S.
No.
51 Water Stops - Hydrophilic Swellable Fosroc, MYK, SIKA, Pidilite, Master Builder, Mapei,
bar (Not bentonite type) Kryton
52 Polyurethane over deck insulation Master Builder, Bayer, Lloyd Insulations, MYK Arment,
foam Pidilite, SIKA, Mapei, Fosroc
53 Food grade epoxy coating for water Master Builder, Fosroc, Sika, MYK Arment, Weber,
tank Mapei, Pidilite
FLOORING WORK
54 Vitrified Tiles (All tiles shall be Restile, Kajaria, Somany, H&R Jhonson, Simpolo
procured from fully owned factory of
the manufacturer and not from JV
/outsourced)
55 Tiles/ Stone fixing Adhesive (Only MYK- Latricrete, Saint Gobain-Weber, Roff, Ultratech,
High performance, polymer Ferrouscrete
modified, non-slip adhesive)
56 Epoxy Grout/ Cementitious Grout Ardex Endura, MYK- Latricrete, Saint Gobain-Weber,
for Flooring Roff, Ferrouscrete
57 Polyurethane Concrete Flooring, Fosroc, Ardex Endura, Sika, MYK Arment, Saint
Epoxy flooring, Self-levelling Gobain – Weber, Hygie
Flooring
58 Engineered wood flooring and Mikasa (Greenlam), Juncker, Tarkett, Parador, Pergo,
Skirting Kahrs
59 Raised/ false access flooring Unitile, Lindner, Tankaria, Unifloor, Access floor system
system
60 Car Deck Flooring Sika, Fosroc, MYK Arment, Master Builder, Mapei,
Hygie, Cipy
61 Tile trim & Threshold Genesis, Surfaces, Genotek
62 Engineered Marble Stone HR Johnson, Kalinga stone, NITCO, Haique, AGL
63 Vinyl Flooring (Gym Flooring) Forbo, Ebaco, Armstrong, Tarkett, LG, Gerflor, Polyflor
METAL WORK
64 Stainless Steel SAIL, Jindal Stainless, TATA
65 Structure Steel & Hollow Section SAIL, TATA (TISCO), RINL, Jindal Steel & Power
(JSPL), APL Apollo tube, JSW
66 Aluminium sections and plates Hindalco, Jindal, Bhoruka, Balco,
(Other than modular/system
aluminium products for partitions,
windows and curtain wall)
Part-B
Page 198
S.
No.
Aluminium frame work for dry stone Hilti, Fischer, Hindalco, Jindal, Bhoruka, Balco,
66(a) Cladding
67 Anchor Fastener, Rebar, Chemical/ Hilti, Fischer, Wuerth, Mungo, Bosch

Mechanical fastener, Expandable
fasteners
68 SS Modular system railing and SS Kich, Q-Railing, JSL Lifestyle, Dormakaba, Technoraill
Cable railing
69 Non shrink cementious precision Fosroc, Sika, Mapei, Pidilite, MYK Arment, Ultratech
(anchoring) grout
70 ACP sheet Aludecor, Alucobond, Alstone , Alstrong, Viva
CEILING & WALL PANELLING WORK

71 Gypsum false ceiling system (plain/ Saint Gobain, USG Boral, Knauf Danoline
perforated/ Mould resistance
paperless) i/c suspension systems
73 Gypsum Panelling/Dry wall Saint Gobain, USG Boral, Knauf Danoline
partitions
75 Aluminium Metal Ceilings (Baffle, Armstrong (Knauf ceiling system), Hunter Douglas,
Open-cell, Metal Plank) Durlum
76 Plywood (All plywood shall be Greenply (green Gold), Century (Club Prime), Duroply
procured from fully owned factory of (Pumaply), Archidply (Classic 710), Merino (Super
the manufacturer and not from JV / Plywood), Green panel (Gold BWP)
outsourced)
77 Veneer Greenlam (Decowood), Century, Duroply, Greenply,

Green panel, Archidply
78 Exterior Grade – MDF Greemlam, Action Tesa, Century, Green panel
79 Acoustic panel Silence Panel, Anutone, Techno Ceiling, Saint Gobain,

Knauf Armstrong, Himalayan, Ecotone, Gyptech
80 Cement Fiber Board/ Cement Everest, NCL Industries (Bison Panel), Shera Board,
bonded particle board Visaka Industries (V- Next), Century (Zykron), Saint
Gobain
81 Access panel in False ceiling Saint Gobain, USG Boral, Knauf Danoline,
system
82 Rock wool/ Glass wool Insulation UP Twiga, Rockwool India, Roxul Rockwool India,
Lloyd, Siderise
83 Galvanized/ Galvalume Roofing TATA, Everest, JSW, INTERARCH, Lloyd
sheet and accessories
84 Soft board Jolly board, Kanpur Company (Kani Soft board)
85 Vinyl Sticker 3M, LG
Part-B
Page 199
S.
No.
PAINTING WORK
86 White cement-based putty Birla, JK, Asian paints, Berger
87 Paint - Plastic Emulsion (Internal) Asian paints, Berger Paints, Jotun, Akzo Nobel (Dulux)
88 Paint - Synthetic Enamel Asian paints, Akzo Nobel (Dulux), Berger Paints, MRF
89 Paint - Acrylic Emulsion (Exterior) Asian Paints, Akzo Nobel (Dulux), Jotun, Berger
90 Paint - PU & epoxy paint and primer Asian paints, Akzo Nobel (Dulux), Berger, Jotun,
Nippon, MRF
91 PU Polish for woodwork Akzo Nobel (Dulux), Asian paints, Berger, MRF
93 Anti-carbonation paint Fosroc, Pidilite, Sika, MYK, Master Builder, Berger,

Akzo Nobel (Dulux), Asian paints
EXTERNAL DEVELOPMENT WORK

94 Precast Concrete elements (Grass Konkrete products Co., Dalal Tiles, Vyara, KK Manholes
paver, paver block, cobbles, kerb, & Gratings, Nimco, Unistone, NTC.
car stopper etc)
95 HDPE Grass Paver Block KM Green Vision, Ovilite Industries
96 SS Tactile Stud Prosafe, Canon, Eminent Overseas, Prarthana technical

services pvt. ltd. Jindal, JB Enterprise
97 Thermoplastic Paint Asian, Nerolac, Shalimar, Berger
98 Dustbin Neelkamal, Supreme, Ultima, frontier, Prince, Sintex
BULLET PROOF OR RESISTANT ELEMENTS

99 Bullet resistant steel (Armour steel) JSL Defence, TATA, Jeet & Jeet
100 Bullet resistant Glass Saint Gobain (Vetrotech), FG Glass, Jeet & Jeet, AIS
SOFT FURNISHING WORK

101 Readymade Fabrics Atmosphere, D Décor, Pure, Response, RR Decore,
Jagdish Store, Vaya Fabrics, DEE Furnishing, Fabric
Haus, Ador by AP, The pure concept, Drape Shoppe
102 Carpet Jaipur rugs, Obettee, Cocoon carpets, Hands, Wool
Sheel Carpet Sellar, Qaleen carpet, Carpet Couture,
Zoha Floor coverings
Furniture (Except Yellow and Green Category)
103 Furniture Hardware Godrej, Hettich, Hefele, Dorma, Kich, Ebco, Grass,
Blum
Part-B
Page 200
S.
No.
104 Foam/ Rubber Geo Foam, Sleepwell, Century, Godrej
105 Glides Hettich, Hefele, Ebco, Grass, Blum
106 Castors for Chair Supo, Ebco, Flyrail
107 Buffer Hettich, Ebco, Ezee, Hafele
108 Wood Polish on Furniture Asian paints, MRF, ICA, Rubio Monocoat, Jotun,
Nerolac, Akzo Nobel (Dulux)
109 Mirror frames (Aluminium profile) Hettich, Hefele, Ebco
110 Polyester fiber Recron (Reliance)
111 Curtain/ Roller Blinds Mac, Marvel, Hunter Douglas, Vista, Deck, D D’ecor
112 System for motorised curtain Somfy, Forest, Huntrer Douglass, Tosco, Deck
113 Wall paper Asian, Good earth, Kalakari haath
PHE works
114 All types of valves Zoloto, Sant /Honeywell/Siemens

/Lehry/Leader/Kirloskar/Audco (L & T)
115 Air Admittance Valve Gebrit, Studor, Ashirvad, Astral
116 Solenoid Valve Honeywell, Johnson Control, Avcon, Aira, Danfoss,

Lehry
117 Float Valve CSA Atena, Esseti, Leader, Lehry, Sant
118 Copper Pipes/Fittings Fast well engineering, Mexflow, Flowflex - Rajco,

Viega, Sk metals, B Press, Yorkshire, Nibcop
119 Stainless Steel Pipe Jindal, Viega, J Press
120 Stainless Steel Pipe Fittings Jindal, Viega, J Press
121 G.I Pipes SAIL/Tata/Jindal/APL-Apollo
122 G.I fittings Kirti,Cresent, Unik, KS, ICS, Zoloto, Jainson, Bhart
Forge
123 Cast Iron/Ductile Iron pipe & Fitting Electrosteel - Lanco, Neco, Kapilansh, Kartar valve &
fitting, SKF
Part-B
Page 201
S.
No.
124 uPVC & cPVC -water supply pipes Astral, Ashirwad, Supreme, Finolex
and fittings
125 Hot/Cold Water Pipe Insulation Armacell / K- Flex/ A-Flex/ ALP aeroflex/ Thermaflex
126 Level controller & Indicator Auto Pump, Cirrus, Engineering, Technika, Pumptrol,
Pune Techtrol, Lehry
127 Water flow switch Honeywell, Johnson Control, Seimens, Viking-Potter
128 Actuators Rexroth, Avcon, Honeywell, Billimo, Lehry
129 Pressure Gauge Feibig/ H.Guru/ Emerald/ Waaree/ Wika/ Zoloto/ Castle
130 Grease Trap ACO, Kessel, Wade, MIFAB
131 Y – Strainer Zoloto/ Honeywell/ Emerald/ Sant / VTM/ Castle
132 Dismantling Joint Viking Johnson, Anant Engg., Victaulic
133 Flexible Joint/ Rubber Bellows Resistoflex/ Kanwal(Easyflex)/ Cori / Flexionics/ Vimpa
134 Anti Vibrating Mounting Resistoflex/ Kanwal(Easyflex)/ Cori / Flexionics/ Vimpa
135 G.I/ MS pipe protection wrapping IWL- Pypkote, Rustech-Coatek, Neotape, STP Ltd.
and coating
136 C.I pipe Joint Acqua Bond, Drip Seal, Mega Seal
137 G.I pipe sealent Henkel-Loctite 55, Holdtite
138 Drinking water fountain (with bottle As per data sheet in tender document
filler)
139 Water Meters Deshmesh, Aquamet Zenner, Rockwin, Kranti, Capstan
140 Rain Water Outlet/ Scupper drain ACO, Neer, GMGR, Kessel, MIFAB, Chilly
141 C.I /D.I Manhole Frame & cover Neco, BIW, RIF, Crescent Foundary
142 Polymer concrete drain channel ACO, Kessel, MEA, MIFAB

(SS grating, slotted grating)
FRP Gratings Dudhi, R.X., Crescent Foundry
142(a)
143 Floor Clean out plug/ clean out Chilly, ACO, Neer, GMGR, Kessel, MEA, Geberit,
plug/ Floor Trap/Floor drain/ MIFAB, Kich
Cockroach Trap
Part-B
Page 202
S.
No.
144 UV System Alfa, Sukrut, Xylem
145 Online RO purifier Oinwar, Aquafresh, Aquaguard, kent, Hi-Tech
146 Grease separator ACO, Kessel, Wade, MIFAB
147 Lifting pump for Oil separator Kessel, ACO, Kirloskar, Grundfos, KSB, MIFAB, WAD
148 Over Head Tanks Sintex, , Plasto, Vectus
149 PVC/ SWR/Agri- Drainage pipes Finolex/Supreme/Ashirwad/Astral
150 Gully trap (stone ware)-IS 651 Perfect/ Rajura/TACEL/Mysore Stoneware pipe OR I.
S. I. MARKED
151 Foot rest (PVC incapsulated) OM plastic, KGM
152 Sanitary wares & C.P fittings As per data sheet in the tender document
Misc Items
153 Glass Bricks Mulia, KIG, SEVES
All other Electrical items, panel & accessories for Plumbing, Hot water system,
Chilled Drinking Water system and R-WTP shall be as per preferred make list for E & M
Component
Note:
1. The grouping of various items in above table is only for convenience purpose
2. Preferred makes for items shall be applicable anywhere in the contract work.
3. All materials and products shall conform to the relevant standards (IS, EN, BS,
ASTM, ISO, AS/NZS) and shall be of approved make and design.
4. The Engineer-in-charge shall give the approval of a make of material to be
used for the work only after review of the sample/ mock-up. In case the same
is not available in the market or in case of change in trade name or renaming
of manufacturer then an equivalent approved make shall be used with the
5. Engineer-in-charge reserves the right to select any of the preferred make from
the above list.
6. Only “First” class quality materials shall be used.
Part-B
Page 203
7. Specification of manufacturer’s item shall be checked against BOQ item and
specifications before selecting any product or brand name. In case of any
discrepancy, BOQ item/ specifications shall prevail.
8. In case of any item/ product neither covered in this list nor having a BIS
specification, the contractor shall submit the proposed item/ product along-
with technical details/ specifications (as per bid), test certificates etc. and
other credentials of the manufacturer for approval by Engineer-in-charge.
Part-B
Page 204
PART-B
SPECIAL CONDITIONS FOR FURNITURE WORKS
Part-B
Page 205
Special Conditions for Furniture Works
1 General
1.1 The main contractor shall establish a team to manage the execution of furniture
works including preparation of shop drawings, samples/prototypes and mock-ups.
The team leader should good experience in furniture production and interior designs.
1.2 All furniture items shall be as per the BOQ item and Design Intent i.e. Intent image,
Intent drawings and Data sheets, as applicable.
1.3 The tendered rates shall be inclusive of all cost of preparation,

production/procurement and approval of shop drawings, samples/prototypes,
mockup spaces, material, labour, wastage, packing, transportation, loading,
unloading, safe storage, installation at site, maintenance in good condition till
handing over, fixing in position at all heights, at all places / floors as per drawings
and/or as directed by the Engineer-in-Charge, all taxes, insurances and incidental
works.
1.4 All customized products shall have 10-year warranty by the Contractor. No extra
payment shall be made for the same.
2.0 Preferred Makes for Furniture work
2.1 Purple category Furniture:
2.1.1 Furniture under Purple category shall be Bespoke furniture for the Central Secretariat
Buildings.
2.1.2 This is an exclusive collection for selected areas. The design has been specially
developed for the Central Secretariat Project.
2.1.3 Prototypes in parts and full pieces will be necessary as directed by Engineer-in-
charge.
2.1.4 Embellishment through lacquer work & inlay may be necessary.
2.1.5 Furniture in Purple category shall come under Customized furniture. For
associate agencies for execution of this furniture, please refer “Special
Conditions for Eligibility criteria for Specialized Works”
Part-B
Page 206
2.2 Green Category Furniture:
2.2.1 Furniture in Green category covers “Storage and wall panels” which shall be
manufactured to fit site dimensions.
2.2.2 It will have repeat items on site against partition walls, in alcoves or to create
partitions.
2.2.3 This furniture will be Modular, easy to install with minimum assembly time.
2.2.4 Residues will be handled with filler panels if required.
2.2.5 Paneling and wall storages will have a support system to anchor, hang and fit.
2.2.6 Furniture manufacturer shall produce items under Green category, tailored to site
dimensions, systems, modules and specifications as per design intent.
2.2.7 Samples / Prototypes in parts and full pieces will be necessary as directed by
Engineer-in-charge
2.2.8 Preferred Make for Green Category Furniture:
a. Godrej
b. HOF
c. Spacewood
2.3 Orange category:
2.3.1 Orange category covers furniture products that incorporate certain specific
requirements and flexibility.
2.3.2 Datasheets describe and illustrate the Design Intent.
2.3.3 Furniture manufacturer, (except in modular systems), shall take up the responsibility
of design development, shop drawings, virtual prototypes and/or off site prototypes.
2.3.4 In this category, different furniture items will installed in clusters/group. Therefore,
same manufacturer for different items in a cluster/group shall be preferred. These
clusters are defined for specific functions and specifications.
2.3.5 This requires furniture manufacturers who produce furniture items by systems,
modules and ease of installation.
Part-B
Page 207
2.3.6 Preferred Makes for Orange Category Furniture under C1 & C2 group of BOQ
- furniture in work hall, all work stations & small Storage units/spaces:
a. Steelcase
b. Herman Miller
c. HOF
d. Godrej
2.3.7 Preferred Makes for Orange Category Furniture under C3a group of BOQ -
For Main Desks, Conference tables, Reception:
a. Steelcase
b. Herman Miller
c. HOF
d. Godrej
e. Narsi
2.3.8 Preferred Makes for Orange Category Furniture under C3b group of BOQ -
For Reception, Information Desks, dining tables & chairs (metal base):
a. Godrej
b. Anantaya Decor
c. HOF
2.3.9 Preferred Makes for Orange Category Furniture under C4 group of BOQ -
For side tables & indoor seating furniture: Sofas, Armchairs, Benches,
chairs: Furniture in C4 category shall come under Customized furniture. For
associate agencies for execution of this furniture, please refer “Special Conditions
for Eligibility criteria for Specialized Works”
For Small furniture accessories: Furniture in C5 category shall come under
Customized furniture. For associate agencies for execution of this furniture, please
refer “Special Conditions for Eligibility criteria for Specialized Works”
For Compact Storage:
a. Godrej
b. Kompress India
c. HOF
Part-B
Page 208
2.4 Yellow category Furniture: (As per make and model given in the BOQ
item)
2.4.1 Furniture in Yellow category shall be Bought Out Furniture, selected from standard
furniture items available in catalogue of manufacturers.
2.4.2 However, bought out furniture may have changes in size, finish, color and material
to suite the Project.
2.4.3 The furniture selection will be done with approval of the Engineer-in-charge to
maintain the design harmony and detailed language of the particular space where
the furniture is to be placed.
2.4.4 Preferred make for furniture in yellow category shall be as specified in respective
BOQ item.
2.4.5 For each furniture item in Yellow Category, contractor shall submit samples from
minimum 2 makes/brands as mentioned in the BOQ item for approval from
Engineer-in-charge. Approval from Engineer-in-charge shall be final and binding
on the contractor and no claim whatsoever in this regard shall be entertained. The
contractor shall quote his rates considering the same. The samples shall be
property of contractor. However, approved sample shall be retained at site by the
contractor, in safe custody, till final installation of furniture item at site. Approved
sample shall be demobilized from the site with prior approval of Engineer-in-
charge.
3.0 Shop Drawings, Samples & Prototypes:
3.1 Approved Furniture Manufacturer/ agency shall have to prepare shop drawings
based on BOQ item, design intent image & drawings and data sheet for furniture
and necessary provisions in for ELE/ IT/AV and any other MEP services in
furniture items as required.
3.2 Contractor shall examine and finalize shop drawings submitted by furniture
manufacturer. The Contractor and his associate agencies shall ensure long term
durability and stability of the furniture, easy replacement of parts/ components/
upholstery/ glass or any features of the furniture that are likely to deteriorate with
normal wear and tear and may need periodic replacement during the estimated
life of the furniture. Contractor shall also examine mechanism for transportation
and installation at site of furniture item. Contractor shall submit a copy of final
shop drawings of furniture item for information of Engineer-in-charge.
Part-B
Page 209
3.3 Contractor shall make necessary provisions and integrations in furniture units for
ELE/ IT/AV and any other MEP services required as per service drawings and
details. He will also check clashes between MEP services and furniture elements. If
any clash is observed, shop drawings for furniture items shall be incorporate clash
free design of furniture items, in accordance to design intent, with the approval of
Engineer-in-charge.
3.4 Contractor shall also prepare and submit General arrangement drawings for
different spaces like office rooms, work halls, conference rooms etc. which will
include all interior elements like furniture, soft furnishing, wall paneling, MEP
related fixtures/items, switch boards, junction points, access points etc. based on
relevant furniture and MEP drawings.
3.5 Samples of all raw materials to be used in furniture like veneer, plywood, fabrics,
leather, polish, hardware, accessories etc, as per the BOQ items, preferred make
list and directions of Engineer-in-charge shall be submitted by the Contractor to
Engineer-in-charge for approval. Cost of samples, including its transportation and
other incidental costs shall be borne by the contractor and nothing extra shall be
payable for the same. Raw material samples approved by the Engineer-in-charge
shall be used in the manufacture of sample/prototype of furniture. However,
Engineer-in-charge shall give final approval on materials to be used in furniture
based on review of prototype of furniture and/or mock up thereafter.
3.6 Contractor shall arrange production of prototype of furniture based on shop

drawing finalised by him and samples of raw material approved by Engineer-in-
charge.
3.7 Engineer-in-charge and/or his authorized representative will review the prototype
of furniture including material samples used in prototype & share his comments
for improvements and modifications which shall be complied by the contractor and
his associate agencies/manufacturer. Modification/Remake of prototype, as
required, shall be done by the contractor and his associated agencies for which
nothing extra shall be payable.
3.8 The place for review and approval of loose or fabricated samples/ prototypes shall
be the site office of Engineer-in-charge unless otherwise approved by Engineer-in-
charge, depending on logistics requirements.
Part-B
Page 210
3.9 Production of furniture shall be carried out only as per approved
samples/prototypes and specifications.
3.10 Contactor shall submit “As Built” shop drawing for furniture items for record
purpose.
3.11 Samples/ prototypes shall remain property of Contractor. However, approved

sample/prototype shall be retained at site by the contractor, in safe custody, till
final installation of furniture item at site. Approved sample shall be demobilized
from the site with prior approval of Engineer-in-charge.
3.12 Contractor shall be allowed to use approved sample/prototype of furniture in

mockup of space/area for approval of Engineer-in-charge.
3.13 Engineer-in-charge may exempt preparation of prototype of any furniture item, if

approval of furniture item is feasible without prototype/sample. However, no
payment/cost shall be deducted/recovered for such exemption.
3.14 Engineer-in-charge may also grant approval to convert approved prototype into
final furniture item to be provided, if feasible, particularly for custom made non
repetitive furniture items.
4.0 Mock-Up of Different Spaces:
4.1 After approval of samples/prototypes of furniture & furnishing, the Contractor

shall prepare mock-up of different spaces (like office room, work halls, toilets
etc.), as stipulated in contract agreement.
4.2 Mock up space shall include all furniture, interior work, accessories and all services
proposed for the location, as directed by the Engineer-in-charge.
4.3 After reviewing the mock-up, any modifications/ alterations suggested by the
Engineer in charge shall be incorporated by the contractor. This process shall
continue until final approval of the mock-up is given by the Engineer in charge.
No additional charges shall be paid for the above-mentioned process.
4.4 During review and after completion of the mock-ups, all items in mockup including
the furniture & furnishing elements shall be well protected by the contractor. In
Part-B
Page 211
case of any damage to any piece of furniture, the Contractor shall repair it without
any additional charge.
4.5 After approval of mock-up, the production of furniture shall be started by the
Contractor based on the approved sample/prototypes and mock-up.
5.0 Production, Installation & Handover
5.1 The Contractor shall be responsible for the stability and strength of each and
every furniture unit. For increasing the stability of furniture, MS/ SS/ Aluminium/
Wooden members may be incorporated in the furniture without changing the look
and aesthetics of the furniture, as approved / directed by the Engineer in charge.
No extra charges shall be paid for the same. The structural frame/base of the
furniture shall be designed by the Contractor accordingly.
5.2 The Engineer in charge and his authorized representatives will periodically inspect
the workshop of the Contractor and his associate agencies, to monitor and
evaluate the quality of furniture being produced. The Engineer in charge shall
approve the quality of finish/workmanship for all furniture elements.
5.3 The Contactor shall transport the furniture products from manufacturing unit to
site with proper packaging and shall be responsible for all logistics including
packing, insurance, loading, unloading, unpacking and arrangement on site or
installing of all the products.
5.4 The Contractor shall install all furniture at specified/designated locations at site
with adequate protection.
5.5 In case the location for the furniture installation is not ready and clean, the
Contractor shall temporarily store the furniture at a safe place with full security
and safety arrangements. The Contractor shall store all furniture products at a
safe place at his own cost.
5.6 The Contractor shall be solely responsible for the safety of all furniture and
accessories until handing over of the Project to the Engineer-in-charge.
5.7 While handing over, the Contractor shall provide a list of all the furniture and
furnishing elements – room wise, along with all warranties and copyright/ patents
documents, in favour of Engineer-in-charge or his authorized representative.
Part-B
Page 212
6.0 Copy rights, Patents and Intellectual Property Rights:
6.1 The Contractor shall fully indemnify the Engineer in charge against any claims,
actions/ proceedings relating to infringement or use of any patented/copy right
design/item/process. Contractor shall pay any royalties or other charges which
may be payable in respect of any article or material or part thereof, to be provided
by him under this contract.
6.2 In the event of any claims is made under or action brought against the Engineer
in charge in respect of copy right, patents or intellectual property rights, the
Contractor shall be notified about the same and he shall, at his own expense,
settle the dispute or handle any litigation that may arise there from. The
Contractor, however, shall not be liable to indemnify the Engineer in charge if the
infringement of the patent or design copyright is a direct result of an order passed
by the Engineer-in-Charge.
6.3 The copyright of all customized design for furniture, furnishing elements, specially
designed fabric patterns, carpet designs, final products, accessories and hardware
shall remain with the Engineer in charge. No additional charges shall be paid for
the same.
6.4 Any copyright/patented product shall not be used for the Central Secretariat
Project by the Contractor/ associated agency unless approved by Engineer-in-
charge and only after obtaining legally valid permissions/approvals.
6.5 Contractor shall submit following Declaration to Engineer-in-charge:
“All products and accessories shown in the shop drawings have been checked for
copyright and patent compliance by the Contractor/ associated agency. Any
violation of the said compliance will be the sole responsibility of the Contractor
and associated agency who has prepared this drawing. If the product or
accessories installed at site deviates from the ones shown in the drawing, the
Contractor will have to take prior approval for the same from the Engineer-in-
charge. In case of any dispute arising from copyright, patents or intellectual
property rights violation in the products installed on site, the Contractor/
associated agency shall be solely responsible for all legal compliance that arises
from the said violation. Engineer-in-charge and Consultants shall not be liable
and shall not be made party to any consequences arising out of such violation”.
Part-B
Page 213
7.0 Fabric: Specialist agency for furniture works shall associate approved specialized
textile manufacturer having indigenous and in-house expertise in design &
production of high-performance fabrics using various combinations of silk, velvet,
cotton, linen, acrylic, polyester, nylon etc. to create fabrics with optimal abrasion
resistance, fire retardant properties and acoustic performance. The textile
producer(s) should have expertise in hand and machine embroidery, hand block
printing, weaving and crocheting. The agency should be equipped with latest
CAD/CAM technology and digitization for all processes from design to sampling
to final production. The fabric/textile producer should be well equipped with
computerized embroidery units as well as advanced weaving machines.
Part-B
Page 214
Construction of Central Vista at New Delhi
GENERIC DATASHEETS – COMMON CENTRAL SECRETARIAT

9th SEPTEMBER 2023
DOCUMENT DESIGN PROJECT RUDRAKSH INTERIOR DRAWN

DATE: 09.09.2023 NIMMI M.
NAME: MANAGER: MANAGER: DADHEECH ARCHITECT: BY:
FOR HARDIK PROJECT RAJPUT PATEL CHECKED

CPWD-CS-ID-1800 STATUS: VYAS BHAGYASHREE H. PRIYANKA P.
INFORMATION DETAILER: ALPHESH PATEL BY:
Submitted to
Central Public Works Department
Report created by
HCP Design, Planning and Management Pvt. Ltd, India

HCP Interior Design Pvt. Ltd, India
Part-B
Page 215
GENERAL NOTES :
CONTEXT:
1. This document is an annexure to the furniture package and to be read alongside with individual
datasheets, furniture presentation, drawings, layouts etc.
2. All furniture will be modular and should be assembled or dismantled for change in requirement.
3. Requires fine tuned understanding between designers and furniture makers. This can be judged based
on past work experience.
4. These furniture shall be durable, sturdy, ergonomic & comfortable.
5. The contents of this documents are for design intent reference purpose only.
6. Specifications given in this document shall be read in conjecture specifications in Furniture datasheet,
GFC drawings, BOQ items and particular specifications of furniture work.
7. This document is to be read in conjunction with all relevant services & facility planning image.
8. Any colored image are indicative only.
INSTRUCTION
1. The unit shall be manufactured in parts at factory outlet and these parts shall be assembled at site.
2. Measurements of spaces/location where furniture is to be installed should be checked and verified by
the contractor prior to execution of the work.
3. Contractor shall be responsible for the stability, ergonomic & comfort of all furniture items.
4. All power outlets to be coordinated with Electrical drawings & implemented in prototype development.
5. All electric equipment / ELV requirements to be coordinated with respective drawings.
Part-B
Page 216
MATERIAL & HARDWARE NOTES/REFERENCE
1. All veneer & Laminate shall be fixed with adhesive on Hot press machine only.
2. Veneer slice thickness shall be minimum 0.30 mm thick.
3. The lipping shall be fixed with adhesive on hot press machine only.
4. For storages the carcass & internal support shall be made of minimum 19mm thick IS 710 Grade ply
and shelves and backing of carcass shall be minimum 12 mm thick IS 710 Grade ply. However, for
members of large span/height, higher thickness of ply shall be provided for structural stability &
functional comfort for which nothing extra shall be payable over the quoted price.
5. The MDF/HDF shall be use only wherever surface is PU paint. The thickness of MDF/HDF in shutter
shall be minimum 19mm thick of exterior grade quality. The thickness of MDF/HDF in shelves shall be
minimum 25mm thick of exterior grade quality.
6. Every shutter shall have at least one hinge for every 20 inches in height.
7. Enlisted are the Lock typology for the furniture
-Espagnolette Lock (rod Lock) for the Full height cabinetry system with cover profile.
-Automatic door bolt Catches and locks “Right angle receiver Plate” shall be used with al regular
locks for the small cabinetry storage system.
-Pedestal Lock for multiple drawer systems.
-Multipurpose lock for the single shutter and drawer unit.
-All lock shall have a “master key per cabin/office”
-All Channel shall be premium quality under mount/ Quadro silent soft close “full extension/with
Push to open” for the drawer as per the approved make.
-Furniture door/Shutter Silent System, Push to open system & Hinges premium quality soft close
Auto Hinges shall be used as per the approved make
-All Material & Hardware shall be got approved prior to procurement and shall be from the
approved make list only.
Part-B
Page 217
TABLE OF CONTENTS
(Page number referred are at the right corner)
1. Furniture Tag 5
2. Sofa 7
3. Chair 15
4. Side Table 21
5. Bed, Daybed 26
6. Bed side table 32
7. Furniture Upholstery 38
8. TV Unit 47
9. Centre Table 51
10. Console 56
11. Conference 60
12. Reception Table 66
13. Work Desk 70
14. Tack board 76
15. Storage 78
16. Wardrobe 87
17. Pantry 96
18. Vanity Unit 102
19. Lectern 108
20. Security 113
21. Framing for Commissioned Art 116
22. Hardware 127
23. Window Treatments & General Notes 133
24. Flooring 142
25. Granite 150
26. Marble 153
27. Veneer 156
28. Veneer Inlay & Polish Specification 161
29. Area Rug 166
30. Ceiling 174
31. Wallpaper application 190
32. Fabric wall paneling 194
33. Wainscoting Part-B 198
Page 218
FURNTIURE TAG
DATASHEET
Part-B
Page 219
GENERIC DATASHEET: FURNITURE TAG CENTRAL VISTA – COMMON CENTRAL SECRETARIAT 13
FURNITURE TAG: Alternative 1:

Item Name: Tag with variables
FURNITURE TAG
Sample Images:
Alternative 2:
Tag with barcode or QR code
Finish and Colour:
Tag shall be made of stainless steel

304 grade, minimum 19 gauge
thickness in Satin Matt Finish.
Product Specifications:
• Built to withstand Exceptional resistance to
weather, UV, extreme temperatures,
chemicals, abrasion and corrosion. Alternative 3:
• The custom engraving or printing stage Tag with variables and barcode
where each tag shall endowed with the
information designed to display.
• The custom made tag shall be made in
Stainless Steel material.
• The shorter ends shall be rounded with
20mm diameter.
• The variables (alphabets or letters) shall
be engraved with minimum depth of
~0.3 mm by using CNC Machine
Engraving technique.
• Font style shall be Arial fonts.
• Barcode or QR code shall be digitally
engraved on the tag.
• The tag shall be flushed to the wooden
members of the furniture.
• Fixing shall be screw-less.
General Notes:
• All furniture shop drawings to show the
location of tag and shall be further
implemented in the prototype.
• Alternatives for design are as per general
understanding. The numbers / codes /
identification system to be provided and
approved by the client.
FOR INFORMATION & REFERENCE HCP Design, Planning and Management Pvt. Ltd, India
6
Part-B
Page 220
SOFA
DATASHEET
Part-B
Page 221
GENERIC DATASHEET: SOFA CENTRAL VISTA – COMMON CENTRAL SECRETARIAT 13
Type of Furniture: Sample Furniture Images:
Sofa - Type 1
• Fully upholstered sofa with solidwood

base
Product dimensions:
Overall dimensions as per Furniture layout
Arm Height 660mm | 25.9”
Seat Height 430mm | 16.9”
Back Height 890mm | 35”
Finish / Colour:
WOOD: Superior class teak wood with
polish.
FABRIC / LEATHER: As per Selection
Product Details: Details:
• Base of the sofa with superior class teak • Upholstery Gaadi-kaam details to be
wood of 2” height on all sides. referred from General Upholstery detail
document.
• All Edges chamfered to be minimum of
1/16”.
• Polish: All wooden and veneer surface
shall be finished with exterior grade
water base PU polish of approved make
& shade.
• Fully upholstered Seat cushions, arms • Teak wood of best quality, seasoned,
and back, Seat & Back frame structure to treated for anti-termite, selected and
be made from IS 710 Grade ply. sorted for uniform veins as approved by
Architect.
• Glides as per the floor finish.
SW
Base
Frame
• The seat cushions are fixed, and will be

made with Re-upholstery method to be
thought through for easy maintenance.
• The back cushions are Loose, and will
have piping of approved diameter on all
edges as per reference image.
• The sofas seat shall have extra cushions.
• The seat base frame to be in Solid teak
wood as per the Reference Image.
8
Part-B
Page 222
Sofa - Type 2
• Fully upholstered high back sofas with

solidwood legs
Product dimensions:
Overall dimensions as per Furniture
Back Height 1100mm | 43.3”
Finish / Colour:
polish.
Product Details:
• Fully upholstered Seat cushions, arms
and back, Seat & Back frame structure to
be made from IS 710 Grade ply.
• Legs will be made of solid wood of
approved design.
• Upholstery Gaadi-kaam details to be
referred from General Upholstery detail
document.
1/16”.
9
Part-B
Page 223
Arm and Backrest Button/ Piping :

1. Reference Image for piping, tufting and
1. Fully upholstered seat and back. The
shape of armrest.
seat to have a set of 2 gaddi, the
Lower being fixed and the Upper being
loose .
2. The armrests to have extra cushion
padding as better comfort and usage.
Hardware:
• Glides: High quality glides of approved
make shall be used.
SW Leg
Recessed Buffer
Reference for Buffers

Legs:
1. All side & turned wood / Carved Leg of
the chairs shall be made of the solid
teak wood as per reference intent
image.
2. The four legs will have both square
sections and circular sections of varied
diameters and lengths as per approved
design, from reference image.
Reference Image for SW Molded Legs

10
Part-B
Page 224
Sofa - Type 3
• Fully upholstered sofas with wooden

trim on back with solidwood frame and
legs
Product dimensions:
Back Height 813-940mm | 32-37”
Finish / Colour:
polish.
Product Details:
• Fully upholstered Seat cushions, arms
and back, Seat & Back frame structure to
be made from IS 710 Grade ply.
• The arms shall be wooden on the outside
and upholstered on the inside of the seat.
approved design.
document.
1/16”.
• Glides as per floor finish.
11
Part-B
Page 225

1. Fully upholstered seat and back. The
shape of armrest.
seat to have a set of 2 Gaddi, the
loose .
2. Continuous SW armrest with polish as
per the approved .
3. The Back to have fully cushioned.
Refer Upholstery Document for details.
Seat Angle:
1. Reference Image for ergonomically and
comfortable seat and back.

Legs: Hardware:
1. All side & turned wood / Carved Leg of • Glides: High quality glides of approved
the chairs shall be made of the solid make shall be used.
image.
sections and circular sections of varied SW Leg
design, from reference image. Recessed Buffer

12
Part-B
Page 226
Sofa - Type 4
• Upholstered sofas & Sofa chairs with

wooden support in the back and
exposed solidwood frame and legs
Product dimensions:
L 660-750, 1800, 2100 mm|
26-29.5, 71, 82.6”
W 600-780 mm | 23.5-35.03”
H 813 – 910 mm|32-35.5”
Finish / Colour:
polish.
Product Details:
• Fully upholstered Seat cushions, Back
and shall have removable covers.
• Welt / trim detail all along the wood
frame.
• Small textured upholstery.
• The seat base structure to be made from
IS 710 Grade ply.
approved design.
document.
1/16”.
• Glides as per floor finish.
Part-B
Page 227

1. Fully upholstered seat and back. Refer
shape of armrest.
Upholstery Document for details.
2. The seat to have a set of 2 Gaddi, the
loose .
3. Overall wooden frame structure
Continuous SW armrest with polish as
per the approved.
Seat Angle:
1. Reference Image for ergonomically and

Legs: Hardware:
1. All side & turned wood / Carved Leg of • Glides: High quality glides of approved
the chairs shall be made of the solid make shall be used.
image.
sections and circular sections of varied SW Leg
design, from reference image. Recessed Buffer

14
Part-B
Page 228
CHAIR
DATASHEET
Part-B
Page 229
GENERIC DATASHEET: CHAIRS CENTRAL VISTA – COMMON CENTRAL SECRETARIAT 13
Chair - Type 1
• Decorative upholstered / wooden back

chairs with curved armrests and turned
legs as per reference image
Product dimensions:
Arm Height 635mm | 25”
Seat Height 457mm | 18”
Finish / Colour:
polish.
Product Details:
• Solid teak wood legs , arms and back that visually tie
with the framed look of the chair.
• Upholstered seat and back . Fixed cushions seat and
back .
• Polish: Exterior Grade water Base PU polish on Backrest:
surfaces of wood Type 1 – Wooden Carving
• Glides: High quality glides suitable per floor finish The back to have wooden carving design in SW as per
• Welt / trim detail all along the wood frame. the reference images. • The back of the chair shall be
• Decorative nail heads along the seat edge solid wood and handcrafted natural rattan/cane woven
• Stiffener or tie member need to place without pattern as per the reference image.
compromising the original design and ensure the
stability & strength of the same.
• Antique/natural brass riveting shall be fixed on the
upholstery as per the approved design and pattern.
• Upholstery document to be referred for internal
details.
• All Edges chamfered to a minimum of 1/16”.
• Solid Wood: Superior class teak wood of best quality,
seasoned, treated for anti-termite, selected and sorted
for uniform veins as approved by Architect. Type 2 – Chesterfield Upholstery
• Small textured upholstery. Fully upholstered front & back. The seat & back frame
structure to be made from IS 710 Grade ply and finished
with button tufted pattern. Upholstery technique on back
will be button tufted with folds as per reference image.
Fold size to be approved in sample. Button will be of
approved diameter, samples to be provided.
16
Part-B
Page 230
Armrest:
Type 1 – Carved SW Armrest
The armrest to be in SW extending from the seat
frame to the backrest and design to be as per the
reference image.
Type 2 –Armrest with padding

The armrest to have cushion padding as per the
reference image.
Button/ Piping :
1. Reference Image for quality and design style of
continuous buttons shown on front of arm.
2. Reference Image for piping, tufting and shape of
armrest.
Legs:
1. All side & turned wood / Carved Leg of
the chairs shall be made of the solid
image.
17
Part-B
Page 231
Chair - Type 2
• Armchair with solid teak wood exposed

frame structure
Product dimensions:
Arm Height 635mm | 25”
Seat Height 457mm | 18”
Finish / Colour:
polish.
Product Details:
• Continuous curved wood frame arm, seat base and
back frame.
• Cushioned seat & back as shown in the reference
image.
• Fixed upholstery on seat and back.
• Base shall be made of solid teak wood.
• Polishing: Exterior grade water-based PU polish on all
wooden surfaces.
details.
• Chair stiffener or tie member need to placed without
Seat Angle:
seasoned, treated for anti-termite, selected and sorted Reference Image for ergonomically and
for uniform veins as approved by Architect. comfortable seat and back.
• All Wooden joinery and detailing shall be as per the
reference images or approved design pattern.
• Chair shall have welt/ piping along the wood frame.
• Small textured fabric.
• Glides: High quality glides of approved make shall be
used.
18
Part-B
Page 232
Chair - Type 3
• Chair with Solid teak wood exposed frame

structure with no armrest.
Product dimensions:
Finish / Colour:
polish.
Product Details:
• Continuous curved wood frame arm, seat base and

back frame.
• Cushioned seat & back as shown in the reference
image.
• Fixed upholstery on seat and back.
• Base shall be made of solid teak wood.
• Polishing: Exterior grade water-based PU polish on all
wooden surfaces. Seat Angle:
Reference Image for ergonomically and
details.
• Chair stiffener or tie member need to placed without
used.
for uniform veins as approved by Architect.
• Chair shall have welt/ piping along the wood frame.
• Small textured fabric.
19
Part-B
Page 233
Chair - Type 4
• Swivel chair with fully upholstered seat

and back, and Solidwood arms
Product dimensions:
Seat Height 445-495mm | 17.5-19.5”
Back Height 1050-1100mm | 41.33-43.3”
Finish / Colour:
polish.
Product Details:
• High Back Chair Synchro tilt mechanism
with Any position locking arrangement.
• Curved Arms in solid wood. Upholstered
cushion on arms.
• Seat welt/ piping at edges of seat as • Upholstery technique on back will be
shown in reference image. button tufted with folds as per reference
• High back chair with wooden frame with image. Fold size to be approved in sample.
carving element on top gilded with antique Button will be of approved diameter,
gold as shown in the reference image. samples to be provided.
• Anti-topple base, Class - 3 Gas lift for seat
height adjustment Mechanism • Chair shall have button tufted back.
• Heavy duty 5 star caster wheel swivel
• Swivels 360° and the seat height is
rubber protecting hardwood/Carpet Rolls adjustable, as is the oscillation and
Smoothly & Quietly. inclination of the backrest with
• Base shall be made of aluminum alloy intermediate setting
metal pedestal leg covered with the solid
teak wood.
• Polishing: Exterior grade water-based PU
polish on wooden surfaces.
• Gold Gilded look: It will have an antique
rubbed look along edges as indicated.
• Upholstery document to be referred for - Metal Swivel Base To be cladded in Solid
internal details. teak wood and finished in Polish. The
• All Edges chamfered to a minimum of inside to have black powder coating with
1/16”. wooden cladding on top.
• Chair stiffener or tie member need to
• The chair frame structure shall be made of
placed without compromising the original in solid wood with brass inlay and
design and ensure the stability & strength of Embossed brass motif on top as per
the same. approved design and pattern.
• Solid Wood: Superior class teak wood of
best quality, seasoned, treated for anti-
termite, selected and sorted for uniform
veins as approved by Architect.
20
Part-B
Page 234
CENTRAL VISTA – COMMON CENTRAL SECRETARIAT 13
SIDE TABLE
DATASHEET
Part-B
Page 235
GENERIC DATASHEET: SIDE TABLE CENTRAL VISTA – COMMON CENTRAL SECRETARIAT 13
Ideal situation of a side table Types of Side Table:
Type 1
Typically for Sofa Side tables, the height of

the unit to be considered with respect to the
arm height of the chair.
As per the standards the table top to be

2”(50mm) lower than the arm-height.
Type 2
Typical Dimensions and Shapes
X Y
The side tables to be either Circular, square

and rectangular in form.
The Typical standards for dimensions to be
as per the following- Type 3
D- 400-500mm
X- 450mm
Y- 450-600mm
Type 4
22
Part-B
Page 236
Ideal situation of a side table Types of Side Table:
Type 5
Typically for Sofa Side tables, the height of

the unit to be considered with respect to the
arm height of the chair.
As per the standards the table top to be

2”(50mm) lower than the arm-height.
Type 6
Typical Dimensions and Shapes
X Y
The side tables to be either Circular, square

and rectangular in form.
as per the following- Type 7
D- 400-500mm
X- 450mm
Y- 450-600mm
Type 8
23
Part-B
Page 237
Form : Table Top:

Type -1
• The side table made out of superior
class teak wood or metal frame work as Typical Top detail with Veneer Finish and
per the reference image. Multiple SW Beading along the edges.
storage, shelf, drawers if required could
be added.
Materials & Finishes:
• Veneer: Premium natural wood veneers
with consistent color and grain
structure as per sample approved by Type -2
the Architect. Typical Top detail with Stone top.
• Solid Wood: Superior class teak wood
of best quality, selected and sorted for
uniform veins as approved by Architect.
• Ply: IS 710 grade marine Ply shall be
used.
• Stainless steel legs with Brush finish of
the approved section and size to be
used as per the reference image.
• STONE: 19 mm Stone top as per
selection.
• Glass top could be frosted or smoked to
a thickness of 8 mm as per reference Type -3
image. Typical Top detail with Glass top.
Finish/Color :
Polish: All wooden and veneer surface shall
be finished with exterior grade water base
PU polish of approved make & shade. Types of Legs :
Structure : Type 1 – With Legs and Tie members.
• Side table shall be made out of superior

class teak wood + Veneer/Glass/Stone
top.
• The Side table top shall be made of ply
+ veneer with SW Edge lipping.
• Lipping: 2 mm thick lipping of teak
wood on all edges of ply
• Supporting Vertical legs shall be fully
Supporting frame & the leg of the table shall
wooden or partly wooden and
be in teak wood or SS frame structure.
fabricated at base which is fixed to the
SS circular base plate in nano powder Type 2 –Single post leg .
coating of approved make, shade and
quality.
• The legs to have a tie member,
wherever approved as per design.
• Tie member or shelf, Supporting frame
& legs of the table shall be in teak wood
frame structure.
• Drawer or shelf all sides shall be made SW Leg
of in solid wood + engraving motif as
Recessed Buffer
per the approved design.
• Base of the drawer or shelf shall be in IS
710 Grade ply + Laminate finish. Reference for Buffers
24
Part-B
Page 238
Shelf & Aprons: Shelf & Aprons:
Type 1 – Varying Heights
• Frame work and tie members to be

made in solid wood.
Top
X
Apron
Tie Members/Shelf
Schematic diagram showing heights for

references.
• The standard height of the side table to

be in reference to the sofa arm (635-
660 mm | 25-26”)
• The standard heights for aprons and tie
members to be considered as the
following-
X – 65 mm | 2.5”
Tie Member Variation
Y –175mm | 7”
Apron design :
Carving pattern on SW front and side
fascia to be of approved design and sample
as per detail provided. Solid tie member of Teak wood
connected with the SW legs.
B C D A
A - Ribs
B – Carving
C – Motif
D – Rassi Pattern Solid wood battens of Teak wood
connected with the SW legs.
Finish:
Polish: All wooden and veneer surface
shall be finished with exterior grade water
base PU polish of approved make &
shade.
Tie member with different geometry as per
reference image.
25
Part-B
Page 239
BED & DAY BED

DATASHEET
Part-B
Page 240
GENERIC DATASHEET: BED & DAY BED CENTRAL VISTA – COMMON CENTRAL SECRETARIAT 13
Type of Furniture:
Variation of Headboard
GENERAL BED 1. Fabric Based
Components of a Bed
1. Headboard
2. Internal Structure
3. Under Bed Storage
4. Legs
Sample Furniture Image:
2. Tufted in Fabric
Reference
Image 3. Wooden Carved
Drawing
4. Wooden Base
• Headboard–The bed back design to be as

per the reference image/approved
sample. Refer line drawings for details.
• Upholstery and lining shall be as per
respective datasheets with all details and
specifications.
• The headboard to be composed of Base
+ Foam+ Memory foam+covered with
madarpat and upholstery as per detail.
• Edge Beading with brass or molding
wooden trim.
• The Headboard height to be in the range
of 900-1200mm as per design.
• The standard mattress height to be
considered as 482mm(19”) and mattress
thickness to be 5-6”.
27
Part-B
Page 241

Internal Structure
Details & Notes :
Internal Structure & Top -: 40 x 50 mm

Teak wood framing
Surface under Mattress -: 19mm thick Finish / Color:

plywood + laminate finish lipping with
WOOD: Superior class teak wood with polish to
Teak wood Beading+ polish
match Walnut.
Sides - 19 mm Thick Teak wood
frame structure
Under bed Storage

Two Drawer on each side of bed total 4
drawer made of Ply and Veneer finish. All
internal shall be Laminate finish as per Product Data:
approved shade.
Form
• Solid Wood King size Bed with Carved /
Upholstered Head board & Integrated turned Wood
leg support as per the reference image.
Structure
• Solid wood frame of the bed that continues along
the sides and back.
Hardware
• The bed back to have carving pattern /
• Soft close Channel of premium quality for
upholstered back & embellishment on top as per
drawers 300 to 600 mm silent with Catch
the reference image.
as approved by Architect/EIC.
• Handle as per the approved design and • The bed to have mattress to be fixed on top of
pattern. the S.W framework and ply.
• Square & turning carved solid teak wood legs as
shown in detail reference image .
•frame structure to be made from solid wood.
Legs Material
• Teak Wood / Solid Wood: Superior class teak
wood of best quality, seasoned, treated for anti-
termite, selected and sorted for uniform veins as
approved by Architect for legs and frame
structure.
• Ply: IS 710 grade marine Ply shall be used.
• Lining/upholstery work: - Optional Based on
actual design during construction.
• The bed will have two pillow with extra cover
• Mattress :Refer to interior accessories Package &
Leg: The S.W leg to have 4” x 4”square with BOQ Specifications for Mattress.
turned S.W. At bottom the legs as per the Hardware
reference image. • Glides: High quality glides of approved make
shall be used.
Finish
• Polish: Exterior Grade water Base PU polish on
all surfaces of wood & Veneer.
28
Part-B
Page 242
Type of Furniture: Sample Furniture Image:
GENERAL BED BENCH BED END
Details & Notes :
Finish / Color:
WOOD: Superior class teak wood with polish to match

Walnut.
FABRIC: As per selection
The Round SW tapering legs will have

moulding rings of 38mm diameter as
per reference image /approved
sample.
The S.W turned legs to have varying cross
section from top to bottom as per the
Product Data:
reference image.
Form
• The Bed Bench With Upholstered Seat & Bolster
with both sides & solid wood turned legs. As shown in
Reference Image.
Structure
Product Data:
• Solid wood turned legs will have two molding rings
Hardware as shown in reference image.
• Glides: High quality glides of approved • Upholstered Seat base. Fixed seat cushion with
make shall be used. removable cover.
Finish • Seat frame structure to be made from solid wood &
• Polish: Exterior Grade water Base PU IS 710 Grade ply+ upholstered.
polish on all surfaces of wood & Veneer.
• Two cylindrical bolsters with cover.
• Self small-textured fabric.
Material
Notes / Remarks:
• Teak Wood / Solid Wood: Superior class teak wood
• The contents of this document are for design of best quality, seasoned, treated for anti-termite,
intent reference purposes only. selected and sorted for uniform veins as approved by
• This document to be read along with technical Architect for legs and frame structure.
specifications and furniture coding plan.
• This locations, quantities, sizes of all items to
be cross checked on relevant supporting • Veneer: Teak Veneer. Finish, make and in pattern
drawings. as shown in reference image.
• Any colored images are indicative only. • Lining/upholstery work: The stitching work shall be
• Proposed items should be similar or equal to as per the approved design and pattern. Ergonomic
the item specified.
required Density Latex foam & polyurethane foam
• Contractor has to prepare the shop drawing
based on provided document.
shall be used in Back and seat of the unit. Top layer
• After approval of shop drawing, they shall shall be of polyester fibre 130 GSM to 150 GSM or as
prepare the mockup of furniture for review and per required comfort level. The whole assembly to be
approval before mass procurement and mass covered “Madarpat” and on it tapestry of approved
production. make and shade to be fixed.
29
Part-B
Page 243
GENERAL BED BENCH
Details & Notes :
Finish / Color:

Walnut.
The square solid wood tapering legs

will have 42 mm at top and 30mm at
bottom size as per reference image
/approved sample.
Product Data:
Form
• The Bed Bench With Upholstered Seat without
Bolster & solid wood square legs. As shown in
Reference Image.
Structure
Product Data:
• Solid wood square legs tie with frame as shown in
Hardware reference image.
• Glides: High quality glides of approved • Upholstered Seat base. Fixed seat cushion with
make shall be used. removable cover.
Finish • Seat frame structure to be made from solid wood &
• Polish: Exterior Grade water Base PU IS 710 Grade ply+ upholstered.
polish on all surfaces of wood & Veneer. • Self small-textured fabric.
Material
Notes / Remarks: of best quality, seasoned, treated for anti-termite,
selected and sorted for uniform veins as approved by
• The contents of this document are for design
intent reference purposes only.
Architect for legs and frame structure.
• This document to be read along with technical • Ply: IS 710 grade marine Ply shall be used.
specifications and furniture coding plan. • Veneer: Teak Veneer. Finish, make and in pattern
• This locations, quantities, sizes of all items to as shown in reference image.
be cross checked on relevant supporting
drawings. • Lining/upholstery work: The stitching work shall be
• Any colored images are indicative only. as per the approved design and pattern. Ergonomic
• Proposed items should be similar or equal to required Density Latex foam & polyurethane foam
the item specified. shall be used in Back and seat of the unit. Top layer
• Contractor has to prepare the shop drawing shall be of polyester fibre 130 GSM to 150 GSM or as
based on provided document. per required comfort level. The whole assembly to be
• After approval of shop drawing, they shall covered “Madarpat” and on it tapestry of approved
prepare the mockup of furniture for review and
make and shade to be fixed.
approval before mass procurement and mass
production.
30
Part-B
Page 244
GENERAL DAY BED
Details & Notes :
Finish / Color:

Walnut.
The square solid wood tapering legs

will have 42 mm at top and 30mm at
bottom size as per reference image
/approved sample.
Product Data:
Form
• The day Bed with back fully Upholstered & solid
wood square legs. As per Reference Image.
Structure
• Solid wood square/turned legs as shown in
Product Data:
reference image.
Hardware • Fully Upholstered Seat & back shall be Fixed to seat
• Glides: High quality glides of approved cushion with removable cover.
make shall be used. • Seat frame structure to be made from solid wood &
Finish IS 710 Grade ply.
• Polish: Exterior Grade water Base PU • Self small-textured fabric.
polish on all surfaces of wood & Veneer. Material
of best quality, seasoned, treated for anti-termite,
Notes / Remarks: selected and sorted for uniform veins as approved by
Architect for legs and frame structure.
• This document to be read along with technical • Veneer: Teak Veneer. Finish, make and in pattern
specifications and furniture coding plan. as shown in reference image.
• This locations, quantities, sizes of all items to • Lining/upholstery work: The stitching work shall be
as per the approved design and pattern. Ergonomic
drawings.
• Any colored images are indicative only.
required Density Latex foam & polyurethane foam
• Proposed items should be similar or equal to shall be used in Back and seat of the unit. Top layer
the item specified. shall be of polyester fibre 130 GSM to 150 GSM or as
• Contractor has to prepare the shop drawing per required comfort level. The whole assembly to be
based on provided document. covered “Madarpat” and on it tapestry of approved
• After approval of shop drawing, they shall make and shade to be fixed.
production.
31
Part-B
Page 245
BED SIDE TABLE

DATASHEET
Part-B
Page 246
GENERIC DATASHEET: BED SIDE TABLE CENTRAL VISTA – COMMON CENTRAL SECRETARIAT 13
GENERAL BED SIDE TABLE
Details & Notes :
Finish / Color:
All bedside table tops will have Marble /Glass
/Engineered stone finishes.
Walnut.
STONE: 19mm thick White Indian polish Marble
Top Marble to be rounded on edges as per Product Data:

reference image, top marble will be inset on
Form
the ply base with SW frame on all four sides.
• The Bed Side Table With Indian polished marble
The unit to have 4 drawer sections with with solid Wood Turned leg with molding design,
22MM thk. groove inside for opening/closing. Drawers in Solid wood with Brass Knob and Golden
The groove should cater for better ergonomic Engraving design on it As shown in Reference Image.
handling and comfort while opening/closing. Structure
• The Bed Side Table Top shall be Indian Marble
Product Data: Stone finish, Marble table top shall be 15mm recessed
Material Polished Marble stone top, shall be fixed on the top of
• Teak Wood / Solid Wood: Superior class the unit with Adhesive as per the reference images.
teak wood of best quality, seasoned, treated • The unit shall have multiple Drawer in solid wood as
for anti-termite, selected and sorted for per reference images.
uniform veins as approved by Architect for • The Box work shall be made from IS 710 Grade ply
legs and frame structure. • Lipping: 6 mm thick lipping of teak wood on all
• Ply: IS 710 grade marine Ply shall be used. edges of ply.
• Veneer: Teak Veneer. Finish, make and in • All external box shall be veneer finish of approved
pattern as shown in reference image. make and shade.
Hardware • The drawer shall be made from the solid wood with
• Glides: High quality glides of approved make wood inlay (engraving) as per the approved design
shall be used. and pattern base of the drawer shall be IS 710 Grade
• Knob/Handle Drawer shall have brass knob ply + laminate finish.
and brass handles as per the approved design • All Wooden joinery and detailing shall be as per the
and pattern. reference images or approved design pattern.
• Soft close Telescopic Channel of premium Finish
quality for drawers 300 to 600 mm Silent with • Polish: Exterior Grade water Base PU polish on all
Catch or equivalent as approved by surfaces of wood & Veneer.
Architect/EIC
• One multipurpose lock per active drawer of
approved make
33
Part-B
Page 247
GENERAL BED SIDE TABLE
Details & Notes :
Drawing :
A A’
The Round SW tapering Turned S.W. legs
will have two moulding rings of 38mm
diameter as per reference image /approved
sample.
The S.W turned legs to have varying cross
section from top to bottom as per the
reference image.
Notes / Remarks:
• This document to be read along with technical
• This locations, quantities, sizes of all items to
drawings.
• Proposed items should be similar or equal to
the item specified.
• Contractor has to prepare the shop drawing
based on provided document.
• After approval of shop drawing, they shall
production.
34
Part-B
Page 248
Sample Furniture Image: Structure :

• Bed side unit made out of superior class
teak wood +Veneer top.
• Multiple drawer , Supporting frame &
turned leg of the table shall be in teak
wood frame structure.
• Turned wood leg as per reference
images.
• Drawer all sides shall be made of in solid
wood + engraving motif as per the
approved design.
• Base of the drawer shall be in IS 710
Grade ply + Laminate finish.
Reference Image
Form :
• The bed side table made out of superior

class teak wood with Multiple storage
drawers as per the reference images.
Materials: Types of Side Table:

• Veneer: Premium natural wood veneers Type 1 – Bedside Table
structure as per sample approved by Y
the Architect.
of best quality, selected and sorted for X
used.
Finish / Colour:
WOOD: Superior class teak wood with polish
as per approved make or shade.
VENEER : As per approved
STONE: 19 mm Stone top as per selection.
The following standard dimensions for

bedside table-
Y- As per layout (between 400-600mm)
X- 425mm | 17”
H- 482mm | 19” (in reference to bed ht.)
Finish :
PU polish of approved make & shade.
35
Part-B
Page 249
Table Top: Drawers:

Type -1 Type 1 – Varying Drawer Heights
Typical Top detail with Veneer Finish and • Drawer all sides shall be made of in
SW Beading along the edges. solid wood + engraving motif as per
the approved design.
• Base of the drawer shall be in IS 710
Grade ply + Laminate finish.
Type -2 Top
Typical Top detail with Stone top. X Drawer 1
Y Drawer 2
Z Drawer 3
Legs

references.

be in reference to the bed (482mm |
Drawers: 19”)
• The standard heights for drawers to be
considered as the following-
X – 125mm | 5”
Y – 125mm | 5”
Z – 175mm | 7”
Type 2 – Equal Drawer Heights
Top
X Drawer 1
X Drawer 2
Legs

references.
• The Drawer units to be in Number 2-3
of equal heights as per the schematic
diagram.
36
Part-B
Page 250
Types of Legs :
Type 1 – With Legs.
• Supporting frame & turned leg of the
table shall be in teak wood structure.
SW Leg
• The legs to have a height within the
range of 2-3”. Recessed Buffer
Type 2 – No Legs.
Table Top Detail :

Type -1
Typical Top detail with Veneer Finish and
SW Beading along the edges.
Type -2
Typical Top detail with Stone top.
Handles /Knobs :
• Handle as per the approved design,
pattern and finish.
• Knobs as per the approved design, pattern
and finish.
• The groove for handle to be 25mm as per
• The handles/knobs must be
ergonomically checked for smooth
functioning (opening/closing).
Hardware:
drawers 300 to 600 mm silent with Catch
make shall be used.
37
Part-B
Page 251
FURNITURE UPHOLSTERY
DATASHEET
Part-B
Page 252
GENERIC DATASHEET: FURNITURE UPHOLSTERY CENTRAL VISTA – COMMON CENTRAL SECRETARIAT 13
Chair
- Task chair
- Dining chair
- Visitor chair
- Security chair
Material Notes:
- Jalebi Spring
- Gunny Hessian / Jute

burlap / DWD canvas of 45” Layer notes:
width
Seat Cushion:
- Seat: Jalebi Spring equally distanced
fixed on the seat frame with screws.
Springs to be tied with Rassi to hold the
- Jute Niwar patti of 2” springs perpendicular movement as
width having 3mm shown in diagram. Rassi to be stapled to
thickness , 50 GSM the seat frame.
- Various thickness of
rubber latex foam with
pinholes
- 37mm 50 Density
- 19mm 50 Density
- 62mm 50 Density
- Various thickness of foam

- 18mm, 32 Density
- 6mm, soft foam
- Assembly to be covered with jute burlap /
gunny and stapled to the seat frame.
- 18mm 32D foam packing
- 150 GSM 6mm, 12mm - Seat: 1.5” Natural Latex Rubber + ¾”
thick Fibre Packing / Recron Rubber Walling on the sides + 6mm foam
on the 3 sides
- Mill madarpaat /
manjarpat lining fabric of
panna size 60”, of 150
GSM. Plain and off-white
* Density as per comfort to

be reviewed case by case
39
Part-B
Page 253
Type of Furniture: Back Cushion:

- Back: Jute Niwar webbing. Edges
Chair stapled to the back frame. Gap of 1”x1”
to be provided between the horizontal
- Task chair and vertical pattis.
- Dining chair - Gunny (Jute Burlap) stapled to the
- Visitor chair frame
- Security chair - 1 layer of 150 GSM fiber packing
- Back: 1 ½” 50 Density Foam
- Side of the Back: 6mm foam
Layer notes:
- Top of the Back: ½” Foam Walling
Back Cushion:
32D

Typical Section:
PLY
32D
32D
PLY
The layer of 150 GSM Fiber and Madarpat to be The layer of 150 GSM Fiber and
added between layer 5 and 6 (Before the Madarpat to be added between
application of final fabric) layer 3 and 4 (Before the
application of final fabric)
40
Part-B
Page 254
Office Chair
- Task chair
- Conference chair
Material Notes:
- Jalebi Spring

width
Seat Cushion:
fixed on the seat frame with screws..
springs perpendicular movement as
- 150 GSM 6mm, 12mm thick
shown in diagram. Rassi to be stapled to
Fibre Packing / Recron
the seat frame.
- Jute Niwar patti of 2”

width having 3mm
thickness , 50 GSM
- Mill madarpaat /
GSM. Plain and off-white - Assembly to be covered with jute burlap
/ gunny and stapled to the seat frame.
1. 18mm packing foam
2. 1 ½” Rubber
- Various thickness of rubber latex foam 3. ¾” Rubber Walling + 6mm Foam on 3
with pinholes sides (Front + 2 Sides)
- 37mm 50 Density 4. 18mm Foam on zero point
- 19mm 50 Density
- 62mm 50 Density

- 18mm, 50 Density
- 6mm, soft foam
41
Part-B
Page 255

- Back: Jute Niwar webbing. Edges
Office Chair stapled to the back frame. Gap of 1”x1”
to be provided between the horizontal
- Task chair and vertical pattis.
- Conference chair - Gunny (Jute Burlap) stapled to the
frame
1. 1 layer 300 GSM fiber packing

2. 1 ½” 50 Density Foam on zero point
Layer notes:
3. 5. 18mm foam on zero point
Back Cushion: 4. Backside finished with 4mm hardboard
and 6mm foam
Typical Section:
42
Part-B
Page 256
Sofa
- Single Seater sofa

- Two / Three Seater sofa
- Sofa chair / Arm chair
Material Notes:
width having 3mm
thickness , 50 GSM
- Zig zag Spring - 9

gauge
Layer notes:
Seat Cushion:
- Seat: zig zag Spring equally distanced
- Gunny Hessian / Jute fixed on the seat frame with screws with
burlap / DWD canvas of 45” leather piece below. Frame is slightly
width chamfered for movement of spring
- Springs to be tied with jute Rassi to

hold the springs perpendicular movement
as shown in diagram. Rassi to be stapled
- Various thickness of to the seat frame.
pinholes
- 37mm 50 Density
- 19mm 50 Density
- 62mm 50 Density

- 18mm, 50 Density
- 6mm, soft foam

- 5” 50D foam (regular) tapered to get

- Mill madarpaat / desired slope
manjarpat lining fabric of - 3” pinhole natural latex rubber
panna size 60”, of 150 - 1” super soft foam (24D)
GSM. Plain and off-white - 1 layer of 150 GSM fiber walling on
front and back
- Entire assembly covered with manjarpat

43
Part-B
Page 257
Type of Furniture:
Upholstery Craftsmanship
Sofa - The upholstery for a good quality sofa
should be expertly tailored. That means
- Single Seater sofa that patterns should be centred and
- Two / Three Seater sofa patterns, stripes and other details should
- Sofa chair / Arm chair match up at the seams.
- The seams themselves should also line

up. Welting and seams that are uneven,
Layer notes:
or pulled to one side, or buttons that are
Back Cushion: not securely sewn on, are indicative of
poor workmanship.
- 45D high resistant foam tapered on top
to get desired slope - Fabric which is pulled tight over sharp
- 1” thick supersoft on zero point (24D) corners or upholstered to hard wood
- 1 layer of 150 GSM fiber (rather than soft foam or down) will wear
- 15mm 32D foam (regular) on all four very quickly. As such, a good quality sofa
sides will be well padded. You should not be
able to feel the frame or corners of the
sofa under the upholstery.

Typical Section:
32D
The layer of Madarpat to be added The layer of Madarpat to be added

between layer 6 and 7 (Before the between layer 3 and 4 (Before the
application of final fabric) application of final fabric)
44
Part-B
Page 258
Sofa framework:
- The internal construction of a sofa is

crucial to its overall quality.
- Sofas that are secured together solely

with glue, staples or nails. These will not
stand the test of time. Wooden joinery
is critical for stability of furniture.
- A good quality sofa will have a frame that

has been reinforced properly by wooden
corner blocks - often supplemented with
staples and glue.
- The joints should be dowelled and

screwed together - and corner blocks
held together with wooden dowels or
double wooden dowels are best. (A
dowel is a small wooden cylinder that is
inserted into a round hole. This is then
drilled into two pieces of wood to hold
them together. A double dowel has two
dowels at each joint).
- Hardwood that will retain its shape and

strength for many years to be used as
per tender specifications.
- The tree to have long, unbending trunk

with few side branches, producing a hard
timber with a straight grain. This type
of grain allows the wood to keep its
shape over the years, as there’s no
variation in the grain that could
encourage warping or twisting. The lack
of side branches on the beech tree also
means the timber has consistent
strength throughout its length, as knots
can be weak points.
- Sofas frames should not be entirely

made of MDF, plywood, particle
board or metal, as well as softer woods
such as pine (that can bend and buckle
over time).
- Plywood to be used as part of a sofa or

chair frame, in order to achieve a curved
shape. However, the plywood should
supplement and be used with the
hardwood frame - not form the basis of
the frame itself.
- The legs to be either be integral parts of

the frame or connected using screws or
dowels. Glued-on legs to be avoided.
45
Part-B
Page 259
Tufting methods: Arm rest - finishing:

- The buttoning process to begin with - Arm rest finishing to be of good quality
marking out and preparing the base. The craftsmanship of one of the below types
outer buttons on all sides of the pattern as per reference image.
should not be placed too close to the - Tufts patterns to be followed as per
edges. General rule 2.5” to 3” is reference image on furniture datasheets.
average spacing.
- Pleated/ folded tufting methods to be

used and high quality craftsmanship
methods to be followed for all button
tufting items.
- Tufts patterns to be followed as per

reference image on furniture datasheets.
Finishing of base:
- Base lining finishing near legs as per

illustration below
46
Part-B
Page 260
TV UNIT
DATASHEET
Part-B
Page 261
GENERIC DATASHEET: TV UNIT CENTRAL VISTA – COMMON CENTRAL SECRETARIAT 13
Type of Furniture:
Design Type :
TV Unit
Type 1- TV Unit next to bed
Product dimensions:
L As per Furniture Datasheet The Typical standards for dimensions to be
W 300-450mm | 47.24” – 94.48” as per the following-
H- 482mm | 19”
Material:
structure as per sample approved by
the Architect.
of best quality, selected and sorted for H
used.
Finish / Colour:
VENEER/Laminate : As per approved make
or shade.
STONE : 19mm thk. Stone top as per
selection.
Reference Image
FORM
• TV unit with lower storage unit in
position with multiple veneer drawer as
Finish : per reference. Images.
Polish: All wooden and veneer surface shall STRUCTURE
be finished with exterior grade water base • Veneer paneling on wall shall be made
PU polish of approved make & shade. of IS 710 grade ply + veneer finish.
Typical Dimensions
• The box work & shutter shall be made
from 19 mm thick IS 710 Grade ply +
veneer finish.
• The unit shall fixed to the wall as per
X the reference images.
• All external shall be veneer finish &
internal shall be laminate finish as per
Y the sample approved.
• The unit shall have Free flap Smoked
Glass shutter as per reference images.
as per the following-
X- 350-400mm | 13.78 – 15.78”
• Teak wood - 2 mm thick lipping on all
ply edges as per reference images.
Y- As per Layout
• All Drawer shall be made of solid wood
+ based shall be Laminate.
• Solid wood 75 mm thick base as per the
reference images.
• All power outlets to be coordinated with
Electrical drawings.
• Paper Veneer at selective places.
• All electric equipment requirements to
be coordinated with Electrical drawing.
48
Part-B
Page 262
Type 1- TV Unit next to Tables Type 2- TV Unit next to Tables

The Typical standards for dimensions to be The Typical standards for dimensions to be
as per the following matching the table top as per the following-
heights- H- 457 mm | 18”
H- 735 mm | 29”
H
H
Reference Image Reference Image
FORM FORM
• TV unit ledge with multiple drawer unit • TV unit ledge with multiple
in veneer finish as per reference images. drawer/shutter units & and Partly open
box shelves in veneer finish as per
STRUCTURE reference images.
STRUCTURE
• Veneer paneling on wall shall be made
of IS 710 grade ply + veneer finish. • The box work open box shelves &
• The box work shall be made from 19 drawer unit shall be made from 19 mm
mm thick IS 710 Grade ply + veneer thick IS 710 Grade ply + veneer finish.
finish. • The unit shall fixed to the wall as per
• The unit shall fixed to the wall as per the reference images.
the reference images. • All external shall be veneer finish.
• All external shall be veneer finish & • Internal shall be laminate finish as per
internal shall be laminate finish as per the sample approved.
the sample approved. • The unit shall have Free flap Smoked
• The unit shall have Free flap Smoked Glass shutter as per reference images.
Glass shutter as per reference images. • Teak wood - 2 mm thick lipping on all
• Teak wood - 2 mm thick lipping on all ply edges as per reference images.
ply edges as per reference images. • All Drawer shall be made of solid wood
• All Drawer shall be made of solid wood + based shall be Laminate.
+ based shall be Laminate. • All power outlets to be coordinated with
• All power outlets to be coordinated with Electrical drawings.
Electrical drawings. • All electric equipment requirements to
• Paper Veneer at selective places. be coordinated with Electrical drawing.
49
Part-B
Page 263
Details:
Typical arrangement for TV Unit.

Provision for Plug points and master switch
to be behind the TV Unit and SB to be
housed inside for Set-top box.
Drawer/Shutter:
The drawer and shutters to have details as

per the following typology-
Type 1 – Shutter with glazing design

The Tv unit to have openable shutters with
SW Frame and 6mm Thick glass as per
selection.
Type 2 – Solid Shutter
The Tv unit to have openable shutters with

SW + plywood + Veneer for shutters.
TV
Set-Top Box inside Set-Top Box inside

SB
SB
SB
The TV-Unit to have housing for set-top box

with provision for Switchboard.
50
Part-B
Page 264
CENTER TABLE
DATASHEET
Part-B
Page 265
GENERIC DATASHEET: CENTRE TABLE CENTRAL VISTA – COMMON CENTRAL SECRETARIAT 13
Sample Furniture Image: The center tables to be either Circular,

square and rectangular in form with curved
edges.
as per the following-
D- 900-1200mm | 35.43-47.24”
X- 900-1200mm | 35.43-47.24”
Y- 450-750mm | 17.71-29.52”
Z– 900-1200mm | 35.43-47.24”
Material 15-16” 18”

structure as per sample approved by
the Architect. -Heights in references to Sofas /chairs
• Solid Wood: Superior class teak wood positioned next to it.
of best quality, selected and sorted for The center table heights to be within the
uniform veins as approved by Architect. range of 15-16” for better anthropometric
• Ply: IS 710 grade marine Ply shall be usage.
used.
Finish / Colour: Design Types
WOOD: Superior class teak wood with polish Type 1- Stone top with Solid Base (Ply
as per approved make or shade. box)
VENEER : As per the approved make and
shade.
STONE : 19mm thick Stone top as per the
approved selection.
Reference Image
Typical Product dimensions and Shape: FORM

Table made of solid wood + marble top as
per the approved design and pattern.
D Y STRUCTURE
• The top shall have High quality Indian
marble stone inlay top as per the
approved design and pattern.
X • Stone top shall be fixed on the wooden
frame with the adhesive.
• The box work shall be made of IS 710
Z Y Grade ply + solid wood batten as per
reference images
• Supporting frame & based shall be in solid
wood as per the reference image.
X
52
Part-B
Page 266
Design Types
Type 2- Stone top with solid-wood • The frame structure shall be made of solid
Carved legs wood with motif pattern & sculpture
crafted leg as per reference intent /
image.
• Supporting tie member & leg of the table
shall be in teak wood.
• Tie shelves shall be solid wood frame
structure with motif pattern + Veneer
finish with shelves.
Type 3- Glass top with solid-wood legs
Reference Image
FORM
Table made of solid wood + marble top as
STRUCTURE
• Solid wood supporting frame & engraved
leg crafted in solid wood as per the
reference image.
• Polished Marble stone top shall be fixed Type 4- Veneer top with Stainless steel
on the wooded frame work. legs
• Solid wood lipping of teak wood on all
edges of ply.
Type 3- Stone/Veneer top with SW

Carved/ Tapered legs and tie-member.
Materials & Finishes:

• Stainless steel legs with Brush finish of
the approved section and size to be
used as per the reference image.
• Glass top could be frosted or smoked to
a thickness of 8 mm as per reference
image.
Structure :
Reference Image • Side table shall be made out of superior
class teak wood + Veneer/Glass/Stone
FORM top.
• Circular table / coffee table unit made out • The Side table top shall be made of ply
of superior class teak wood having Veneer + veneer with SW Edge lipping.
top. • Lipping: 2 mm thick lipping of teak
STRUCTURE • Supporting Vertical legs shall be fully
• Supporting circular frame & leg of the wooden or partly wooden and
table shall be in teak wood as per fabricated at base which is fixed to the
reference images. SS circular base plate in nano powder
• Shelves shall be solid wood frame coating of approved make, shade and
structure with motif pattern + sculpture quality.
crafted leg as per reference Images. • The legs to have a tie member,
• Lipping: 2 mm thick lipping of teak wood wherever approved as per design.
on all edges of ply. • Tie member or shelf, Supporting frame
• Top shall have a solid wood frame as per & legs of the table shall be in teak wood
reference images. frame structure.
53
Part-B
Page 267
Shelf & Aprons: Shelf & Aprons:
Type 1 – Varying Heights
• Frame work and tie members to be

made in solid wood.
Top
X
Apron
Tie Members/Shelf
Y
Tie Member Variation

references.

be in reference to the sofa arm (635- Solid tie member of Teak wood
660 mm | 25-26”) connected with the SW legs.
• The standard heights for aprons and tie
members to be considered as the
following-
X – 65 mm | 2.5”
Y –175mm | 7”
Apron design :
Solid wood battens of Teak wood
Carving pattern on SW front and side connected with the SW legs.
as per detail provided.
B C D A
Tie member with different geometry as per
reference image.
A - Ribs
B – Carving
C – Motif
D – Rassi Pattern
Finish:
shade.
Tie member with motif design and glass
overlay or inlay as per reference image.
54
Part-B
Page 268
Apron design : Leg:

Carving pattern on SW front and side • All side & turned wood / Carved Leg of
fascia to be of approved design and sample the center table shall be made of the solid
teak wood as per reference intent /image.
• The four legs will have both square
B C D A diameters and lengths as per approved
• Single post tripod legs shall be used.
A - Ribs
B – Carving
C – Motif
D – Rassi Pattern
Finish:
shade.
Table Top Edge detail: Hardware:
Type -1 • Glides: High quality glides of approved

make shall be used.
Typical Top detail with Veneer Finish and
SW Beading along the edges.
SW Leg
Recessed Buffer
Type -2
Typical Top detail with Stone top.
Type -3
Typical Top detail with Glass top.
55
Part-B
Page 269
CONSOLE
DATASHEET
Part-B
Page 270
GENERIC DATASHEET: CONSOLE CENTRAL VISTA – COMMON CENTRAL SECRETARIAT 13
Generic Datasheets: Console Sample Furniture Image:
Product dimensions:
L As per plan
W 457mm | 18”
H 735mm | 29” (With Sofa)
and 840mm | 33” (Against the wall)
Finish / Colour:
polish.
VENEER: As per Selection
STONE: 19mm thick Stone top as per
approved selection
Top Details:
Type 1-
• The Rectangular Console top to have
rounded corners as per reference image
and will be inset on the ply base with SW
beading frame on all four sides.
• It shall be fixed on top of the unit with
adhesive.
Type 3-
• The Console top to have rounded corners
as per reference image and will be inset
on the ply base with SW beading frame
on all four sides.
Type 2-
• Marble stone top with natural stone inlay
• The Console top to have plywood work shall be fixed on the top of the unit
+veneer finish as per approved selection. with Adhesive
• The top to have inlay in darkwood as per
design intent.
• The console top to have SW beading
along the edge.
57
Part-B
Page 271
Typical Sizes and Shapes: Tie Member:

Type 1-
Y
• Extra Shelve at the bottom at the edge
X of the shelves supported with the legs shall
R
have motif pattern in solid wood +
toughen Glass shelves.
Y
The Typical standard for consoles to be
X- 457mm | 18”
R- 450-500mm| 17.71-19.68”
Y- As per Layout
Polish:
Polish: Exterior Grade water Base PU polish Type 2-
on all surfaces of veneer and wood.
• Tie Member to have 5 parts. 4 parts of
Body: curved SW members connecting to each
leg of the console. 1 part of circular shape
• The console shall be made up in solid
tying the 4 members in the centre.
wood +ply box work +veneer finish.
• The supporting frame shall have the
engraving /carving pattern as per the
reference images.
best quality, seasoned, treated for anti-
veins as approved by Architect for legs and
frame structure.
• Veneer: 4.00 mm thick Teak Veneer (0.6
MM Core layer on gurjen ply base), finish,
make and in pattern as shown in the image.
Veneer carefully selected range of premium Type 3-
natural wood veneers with consistent color • Extra Shelve at the base supported with
and grain structure. the Demilune based leg as per reference
• Lipping: 2 mm thick lipping of teak wood intent / image.
on all edges of ply.
• All Wooden joinery and detailing shall be
as per the reference images or approved
design pattern.
• The unit shall have ribbed solid wood
pattern and carving as per the reference
image.
Legs: Apron design :

• All side & turned wood / Carved Leg of Type 1- Without Drawers
the console shall be made of the solid teak
• Carving pattern on SW front and side
wood as per reference intent /image.
• The four legs of the console will have
both square sections and circular sections
of varied diameters and lengths as per
approved design, from reference image.
B C D A
A - Ribs
B – Carving
C – Motif
D – Rassi Pattern
58
Part-B
Page 272
Apron design :
Type 2- With Drawers
• Handle as per the approved design and
• The console unit to be composed of pattern.
multiple drawers as per the design intent.
The size of the drawers to be checked as
per standard heights/utility.
Reference for Apron design with drawers
Hardware:
Type 1-
• Drawers to have knobs with finish and
design as per reference image/ approved
sample.
Type 2-
• The drawers to have 25mm groove on
top of for opening/closing and must be
checked for accessibility and better
ergonomics.
• Soft close under mount Channel of

premium quality for drawers 300 to
600mm silent with Catch as approved by
Architect/EIC.
• One multipurpose lock per active drawer
of approved make.
make shall be used.
59
Part-B
Page 273
CONFERENCE TABLE
DATASHEET
Part-B
Page 274
GENERIC DATASHEET: CONFERENCE TABLE CENTRAL VISTA – COMMON CENTRAL SECRETARIAT 13
Type of Furniture:
Top Details:
Conference Table
Category A-
Product dimensions: • The top of the table to be finished in
L As per Furniture Datasheet veneer as per the design intent/reference
W 1200-2400mm | 47.24” – 94.48” image.
H 735mm | 29”
Finish / Colour:
polish
Walnut Burl veneer White ash

veneer
Category B- Category C-
• The top of the table to be finished in
veneer as per the design intent/reference
image.
Teak veneer Eucalyptus pommele
veneer
Category A
Category D- Category E-
Category B
• The top of the table to be finished in
veneer/laminate as per the design
intent/reference image.
Category C
Category D
Category E
61
Part-B
Page 275
Table Edge Detail: Product data:

Category A- Form: The table top shall be approximate
• The edge to have variations in SW 75 mm thick comprising of 4mm Veneer at
moulding as per the design top + IS 710 Grade ply at top of sandwich
intent/reference image. table + ALUMINIUM framing fabricated of
required size SHS/RHS metal box + IS 710
Grade ply sandwich table bottom.
• Table top: The table top edges shall be
moulded in solid wood + High quality wood
inlay on edges and top veneer/laminate as
• Vertical support shall be made of Solid
wood frames, IS 710 Grade ply and Veneer
finish with multiple shutter.
Category B- best quality, seasoned, treated for anti-
• The edge to have variations in SW
veins as approved by Architect.
moulding as per the design
• All Wooden joinery and detailing shall be
as per the reference images or approved
design pattern
• Veneer: 4.00 mm thick Veneer (0.6 MM
Core layer on gurjan ply base) carefully
selected range & group matched of
premium natural wood veneers with
consistent color and grain structure as per
sample approved by the Architect.
Hardware: Hinges premium quality soft

Category C- close Auto Hinges for open able shutters.
- The shutter shall have magnet push to
• The edge to have variations in SW
open hardware
moulding as per the design
- Cable organizer / cable tray below table
top as per the approved make
Polish: Exterior Grade water Base PU polish

on all surfaces of veneer and wood.
Cable Management : The streamlined

design cord-free surfaces and easy access
to outlets and ports. Cable organizer on top.
• Provision for connectivity Multimedia to
AV, internet, laptop power, extra power,
Category D- microphone in table top.
• The edge to have variations in SW • Extra Support for the Pop-up box &
moulding as per the design Provision shall be made for the electrical
intent/reference image. /data wiring below table top.
•Base legs will be fixed on floor junction box
and have a continuous raceway connecting
all the bases for cables.
• Openable Shutter system for maintenance
of cables to be present on leg.
Category E- • Recess on bottom of table top that fix on
• The edge to have variations in Laminate to the base legs, with provision of location
& moulding as per the design pins as required.
62
Part-B
Page 276
Conference Table Leg detail: Cable and wire Management – Vertical

• Reference showing bottom of leg with
Base leg to be as per detail image made
junction box.
of solid wood framing, ply box and veneer
• Metal casings inside tied to cables for
paneling with open shutters on one side
management. Bottom of leg will have
for cable management. The size of legs in
junction box.
drawing are indicative and suggested. In
case the table requires a different
structure for better stability, shop
drawing to provide such legs.
• Reference showing horizontal and

vertical cables management.
Cable and wire Management – Horizontal
• Reference Images from EBCO
• Reference for zip tie used to manage

cables
63
Part-B
Page 277
Typical Plan and Sectional Plan
1. Top plan showing table top in various modules

2. Equipment to be indicated in the top plan with another colour. It helps to indicate the
chairs in plan, to show capacity and to coordinate the distance between the av
equipment.
3. Sectional plan showing the cross section of base legs @ joints and the shutters
opening
4. Wire / cables to be indicated as well in another colour to show the movement.
64
Part-B
Page 278
65
Part-B
Page 279
RECEPTION TABLE
DATASHEET
Part-B
Page 280
GENERIC DATASHEET: RECEPTION TABLE CENTRAL VISTA – COMMON CENTRAL SECRETARIAT 13
Sample Furniture Image: The reception table to have typical shape of

with rounded corners.
The typical standards for dimensions to be
followed as –
X : 600-900 | 23.62– 35.43”
Y : As per Layout
The typical standards for heights to be

followed as –
H : 900-1100mm | 35.43-43.30”
Material : Design Type :
• Veneer: Premium natural wood Type 1-

veneers with consistent color and
grain structure as per sample FORM
approved by the Architect. • The reception desk made out of superior
• Solid Wood: Superior class teak wood class teak wood having all sides, carved
of best quality, selected and sorted pattern with Multiple storage drawer and
for uniform veins as approved by shutter as per the approved design..
Architect. STRUCTURE
• Ply: IS 710 grade marine Ply shall be • The top shall be of Mirror finish marble
used. stone.
• All External shall be solid with high
Finish / Colour: amount of molding & engraving/ carving
pattern as per the reference images.
• The box work shall be made from IS 710
Grade Marine ply.
VENEER : As per approved make or shade.
• The panel shutters shall be made of
The table tops will have Marble solid wood + exterior grade Ply +
/Engineered stone finishes. Veneer finish as per approved make and
shade.
• Inside the storage unit: Adjustable
shelves finish made of Ply + Laminate of
approved make and shade.
• All internal surfaces shall be laminate
finish of approved make and shade.
Polish: All wooden and veneer surface shall • All external & internal shutter shall have
be finished with exterior grade water base 2mm solid wood lipping on all edges.
PU polish of approved make & shade. • Solid wood 75 mm thick base as per the
reference images.
Typical Dimensions and Shapes:
• Paper Veneer at selective places.
X
67
Part-B
Page 281
Design Type:
Type 1 Type 3
FORM
• The reception back side storage unit
shall have Marble/Veneer top & Veneer
finish shutter as per the reference
images.
STRUCTURE
• The box work shall be made of Ply +
laminate (inside) + solid teak wood
lipping on all ply edges.
• Polished Marble stone/Veneer shall be
fixed on the Ply with the Adhesive. No
joints shall be visible.
• The Shutters shall be Veneer finish as
per reference images.
Type 2
• 2mm thick solid wood lipping on all
FORM edges.
• The reception desk made out of superior • Solid wood 75 mm thick base as per the
class teak wood having all sides with reference images.
Multiple drawer and shutter as per the • All Internal surfaces shall be laminate
approved design. finish of approved make and shade.
STRUCTURE Electrical drawings.
• The top shall be of Mirror finish marble
stone.
• All External shall be veneer finish as per
the reference images.
• The box work shall be made from IS 710
Grade Marine ply.
• All internal surfaces shall be laminate
finish of approved make and shade.
• All external & internal shutter shall have
2mm solid wood lipping on all edges.
• Modesty panel as per the reference
images.
• All power outlets to be coordinated with Reference Image
• All electric equipment requirements to Type 4
FORM
• The reception desk made out of superior
class teak wood having all sides with
Multiple drawer and shutter as per the
approved design.
STRUCTURE
• Reception Table shall be made of IS 710
Grade ply + Laminate finish + Solid
wood top bend as per the reference
images.
• - The Reception Table shall be made of
IS 710 Grade ply + Veneer as per the
reference drawing.
• - Multiple shutters shall be made from
IS 710 Grade ply + laminate finish as
per the reference image.
68
Part-B
Page 282
Design Type: Hardware:

Type 4
• - Drawer all sides shall be made of in • Hardware: Hardware of approved make

solid wood as per the approved design. and finish shall be provided as specified in
Base of the drawer shall be in IS 710 datasheet/drawing.
Grade ply + Laminate finish. • - Soft close Channel of premium quality
• - All external & internal surfaces shall be for drawers 300 to 600mm silent with
laminate finish of approved make and Catch or equivalent as approved by
shade. Architect/EIC.
• - The front facia of the unit shall be • - Auto Close hinges minimum 3 hinges per
laminate finish Paneling. active shutter.
• - Teak wood /Solid Wood: - 4 mm thick • - One lock per active shutter and drawer
lipping on all ply edges. Solid wood shall of approved make.
be Superior class teak wood of best • - Magnet Catcher / Shutter Silent System/
quality selected and sorted for uniform Push to open system - of approved make
veins wood. • - Aluminum profile Handle as per the
reference images.
• - Cable organizer on top as per the
• - Provision for connectivity Multimedia to
AV, Internet, laptop power, extra power,
microphone in table top.
69
Part-B
Page 283
WORK DESKS
DATASHEET
Part-B
Page 284
GENERIC DATASHEET: WORK DESKS CENTRAL VISTA – COMMON CENTRAL SECRETARIAT 13
Type of Furniture:
Types of Modules
Work desks & Executive tables Category - 1
Type - 1
Product dimensions:
L As per Furniture Datasheet 4
W 600-900, 1200mm |
23.62”-35.43”, 47.24” 5
H 685, 735mm | 27”, 29” 1
Finish / Color:
3
WOOD: Superior class teak wood with 2
polish as per approved make or shade.
The table tops will have laminate/Veneer
finish as per approved make or shade .
Type - 2
LEGS: Powder coated MS legs at base.
5 1
6 2 3
Elements of the Work desk

1. Table top - Solid Wood with Laminate top.
(Thickness of -) grommet. Type - 3
2. Legs - CRS legs powder coated (sizes and
buffers) 1
3. Modesty panel or panel for vertical wire
management.
4. 12 mm thick compact sheet or 12 mm 3
thick extra clear back painted glass finish
divider.
5. Work desk Accessories.
6. Solid wood drawer or open shelf for printer
7. Side facia of the return. 2
Type - 4
Category - 2
4
1 5
1 5
7 6 3
3
2 7
Type – 5b Type – 5a
5
1
5
1
7 3 7 3
2 2
71
Part-B
Page 285
Category - 1
FORM ACCESORIES
• The work desks are individual entity and • Each desk should have desk organizer +
work stations are designed as back to back divider screen, monitor arm, Desk pad for
desk in one cluster. the work stations as shown in reference
• The table shall be divided into two parts, image.
first the main table & second side unit • The work desks should have Ergo edge and
(pedestal) with multiple drawers, shutters Monitor bridge.
or a over shelf for printer as per the • Bag Holder/Mobile Candy to be provided to
reference images. desks were return unit is not provided.
• The table shall have Flip top panel detail as • CPU trolley to be provided to each
per the reference image. workstations and desks.
• Accessories to be paid separately in
STRUCTURE relevant tender item.
• Main Table top shall be made of IS 710
Grade ply + laminate with thickness of MATERIAL
35mm or Veneer on top with 40mm • Solid Wood: Superior class teak wood of
thickness. best quality, selected and sorted for
• Supporting framing for table & Vertical legs • Veneer: Premium natural wood veneers
shall be Fabricated in CRS polished powder with consistent color and grain structure as
coated of approved make, shade and per sample approved by the Architect.
quality as per the reference drawing. • All external surfaces shall be veneer finish
& internal surfaces shall be laminate finish
• The Modesty panel for work desk shall of approved make and shade.
have solid wood edges in High gloss • Ply: IS 710 grade marine Ply shall be used.
laminate finish/Compact sheet/ + Metallic
laminate – satin finish of approved make FINISH
& shade fixed to the table. Polish: All wooden and veneer surface shall be
• Additional metal support to be provided finished with exterior grade water base PU
polish of approved make & shade.
fixed to the table Wherever required
subjected to the stability.
HARDWARE
• The modesty panel for the work station
• All electric equipment requirements to be
with Cable Tray shall be made up of
coordinated with Electrical drawing.
1.5mm thick metal & shall be supported
and fixed to metal structure and cover with
• Cable management to be incorporated within
the furniture to conceal all cables starting
Vertical riser to uptake wiring. The metal
from floor to all desks.
work shall be finish consists of epoxy • All power outlets to be coordinated with
polyester powder coating of approved Electrical drawings.
color & shade. • Hinges premium quality soft close Auto
Hinges for openable shutters.
• The unit shall have table divider fixed on • Soft close Channel of premium quality for
the top of the table as per the reference drawers 300 to 600mm silent with Catch or
images shall be made of 12 mm thick equivalent as approved by Architect/EIC.
compact sheet or 12 mm thick extra clear • One lock per active shutter/drawer of
back painted glass finish. approved make.
• Aluminum anodized profile handles as per
• Shutter and Drawer all sides shall be made the approved design and pattern.
of in solid wood as per the approved • Magnet Catcher / Shutter Silent System/
design. Base of the drawer shall be in IS Push to open system - of approved make.
710 Grade ply + Laminate finish. • Cable organizer on top as per the approved
• Teak wood /Solid Wood: - 4 mm thick design and pattern.
lipping on all ply edges. Solid wood shall be • Provision for connectivity Multimedia to AV,
Superior class teak wood of best quality Internet, laptop power, extra power,
selected and sorted for uniform veins microphone in table top.
wood. • Leveler : Adjustable leg leveler of approved
• 2mm thick solid wood lipping on all edges. make shall be used.
• All wooden joinery and detailing shall be as
per the reference images or approved design
pattern.
• Buffer/Glides: Heavy duty Pvc buffer or
glides suitable to floor finish of approved
make shall be used.
72
Part-B
Page 286
Category - 1 Product dimensions for one module:

Work Desk Return
LENGTH As per furniture LENGTH 1500-

layout 1800mm
WIDTH 1200 mm WIDTH 600 mm
HEIGHT 735 mm HEIGHT 635 mm
MATERIAL
•Teak wood /Solid Wood: - 4 mm thick lipping on all ply
edges. Solid wood shall be Superior class teak wood of
best quality selected and sorted for uniform veins wood.
•Veneer: Teak Veneer, finish, make and in pattern as
shown in the image.
•All external surfaces shall be veneer finish & internal
FORM
surfaces shall be Veneer finish of approved make and
•The main desk table shall be made of ply + veneer
shade.
finish with solid wood edge lipping.
•Ply: IS 710 grade marine Ply shall be used.
•The table shall be divided into two parts, first the
main table & second side unit with multiple drawers
HARDWARE
as per reference intent/images.
•Hinges premium quality soft close Auto Hinges for
•The table shall have Flip top panel detail as per the
openable shutters.
reference image.
•Soft close Channel of premium quality for drawers 300
•Monitor arm provision to be done while designing
to 600mm silent with Catch or equivalent as approved by
table. Monitor arm to be paid separately in relevant
Architect/EIC.
tender item.
•One lock per active drawer /shutter of approved make.
•Aluminum anodized profile handles as per the approved
STRUCTURE
design and pattern.
•Main Table top shall be made of IS 710 Grade ply +
•Magnet Catcher / Shutter Silent System/ Push to open
veneer on top & bottom + partial Leather insert on
system - of approved make.
table top flushed with the adjacent veneer top.
•Cable organizer on top as per the approved design and
•The side storage unit shall have multiple drawers
pattern.
made of IS 710 Grade ply+ veneer as per the
•Provision for connectivity Multimedia to AV, Internet,
approved pattern & design.
laptop power, extra power, microphone in table top.
•The Box work shall be made from IS 710 Grade ply.
•Leveler : Adjustable leg leveler of approved make shall
•Sandwich table both side shall be approximate 50
be used.
mm thick comprising of Veneer on top + BWP - IS
•All wooden joinery and detailing shall be as per the
710 Grade ply at top of sandwich table + metal
framing fabricated as per the requirement + BWP - IS
•Buffer/Glides: Heavy duty Pvc buffer or glides suitable
710 Grade ply sandwich table bottom with veneer
to floor finish of approved make shall be used.
finish.
•The Modesty panel shall be IS 710 grade ply +
FINISH
laminate – satin finish (of approved make & shade)
Polish: All wooden and veneer surface shall be finished
with solid wood frame around the modesty panel fixed
with exterior grade water base PU polish of approved
to the table.
make & shade.
•Additional metal support to be provided fixed to the
table Wherever required subjected to the stability.
CABLE MANAGEMENT
•Drawer all side shall be made of solid wood & Base of
•All power outlets to be coordinated with Electrical
the drawer shall be made of IS 710 Grade ply +
drawings.
Laminate finish.
•All electric equipment requirements to be coordinated
with Electrical drawing.
CABLE MANAGEMENT
•Cable management to be incorporated within the
•All power outlets to be coordinated with Electrical
furniture to conceal all cables starting from floor to all
drawings.
desks.
•All electric equipment requirements to be
•Cable management to be incorporated within the
furniture to conceal all cables starting from floor to all
desks. 2 power and 2 data outlets to be provided per
desk - to be checked in electrical drawing.
73
Part-B
Page 287
DESK LOOSE ACCESSORIES
Monitor bridge:
- Monitor bridge supports monitor or multiple monitors
(depending on size)
and one- over-one screen application for use with your
laptop.
- Anti-skid pads are standard to help prevent devices from
slipping.
BAG/OTHERS HOLDER – MOBILE CADDY: - Monitor Bridge is plastic with fabric covered pad standard
- Mobile caddy provides a place to stow personal items and in dark grey felt.
work bag off the floor for quick and easy - The distance between work surface top and underside of
packing/unpacking. bridge is 3½”.
- Upper shelf houses a fabric pad to hold mobile devices in - The distance between work surface top and underside of
a soft open environment allowing users not to leave items shelf is 1″. The distance
behind between top of shelf and underside of bridge is 2½”.
- Casters provide ease of use when pulling out or stowing - Monitor bridge can hold a maximum of 50 lb.
under the work surface. - Monitor bridge shelf can support up to three personal
- Provides a sense of boundary when at a shared bench. boxes and provide additional storage space for objects or a
- Size (WXDXH): 9 ½” x 21” x 23 ¾” keyboard.
- Size (WXDXH) : 29⅖″ x 9” x 4 ½”
BAG HOLDER – HOOKS: CPU Trolley:

-Personal hook is designed to hold lightweight bags, - Universal & adjustable design to fit all sizes of
keys, headsets and other small items. CPUs.
- Easily grips to most work surfaces, personal hook - Length Adjustment mechanism & sturdy and easy
helps keep your smaller items off of the floor. locking.
- Holding up to 10 lbs., personal hook is a sturdy - Metal Body, Wheels With Locking System, Easy to
solution to hold bags, keys or an umbrella. Assemble, Easy to handle and transport.
- Product Dimensions: 75″W x 2″D x 2″H - Adjustable up to 9"
- Rubber grippers for reducing Impact and Holding
CPU in Place About Size.
74
Part-B
Page 288
DESK LOOSE ACCESSORIES
Desk pad: Monitor Arm:

- The Antibacterial, Moulded in 5mm thick, heavy gauge - Monitor Arm can be used to support a single or dual
black polyurethane. monitor screen and functions effortlessly as a tablet
- Desk pad front lip extends ½" down front edge of work stand/iPad mount.
surface. - Smooth movement to easily change distance, angle or
- Size (WxDxH): 27” x 16” x ¾” rotation
- Stabilize gas spring effortless movement
- Elevates the monitor above the work surface
- Quick-release connection for easy monitor relocation or
upgrade
- Arm conceals behind the monitor and hides cables
- Meets mounting standards for all monitor.
- 3-in-1 mount system; clamp, bolt-thru or grommet mounts
- Load bearing capacity : 2 - 7 kg
- Material: Body made of Aluminum metal
- Pins: Stainless steel
- Swiveling range 180°
- Colour powder coated black or silver as per the sample
approved.
ERGO EDGE:
Support your wrists and forearms while also
creating a personal boundary.
The Antimicrobial Ergo edge.
Ergo edge front lip extends ½" down front
edge of worksurface.
Size (WXDXH): 27” x 2½” x 7/10”
75
Part-B
Page 289
TACK BOARD
DATASHEET
Part-B
Page 290
GENERIC DATASHEET: TACK BOARD CENTRAL VISTA – COMMON CENTRAL SECRETARIAT 13
Sample Furniture Image: Product dimensions:
LENGTH As per Layout mm
THICKNESS 38 mm
HEIGHT 1200 mm
Finish / Colour:

VENEER: As per approved make or shade.
FABRIC: As per approved selection.
Product Data:
FORM MATERIAL
• The wall hung Tack board shall be made • Veneer: Teak Veneer, finish, make and in
of IS 710 GRADE Ply + soft board with pattern as shown in the drawing.
fabric + Gripper as per reference • Teak wood /Solid Wood: - 2 mm thick
intent/images. lipping on all ply edges.
• Solid wood shall be Superior class teak
STRUCTURE wood of best quality selected and sorted
• Solid wood frame work + 12mm ply for uniform veins wood.
back side.
• Bottom of a tack board shall made of IS HARDWARE
710 GRADE Ply + Veneer finish. • Hanging tack board with heavy duty
• Soft board shall be 12 mm thick + fabric “Hanger Z Bar/French Cleat.
on top with gripper. • Floating Hanging System” fixed at backing
• Fabric edges shall be in straight line and of the tack board.
undulation/wrinkle/ripple free surfaces.
• The soft board shall be Indian Standard FINISH
3348: 'Fibre Insulation Boards’ grade Polish: Exterior Grade water Base PU polish.
material.
• Teak wood /Solid Wood: - 2 mm thick
lipping on all ply edges.
Typical Elevation detail for Tackboard Typical Sectional detail for Tackboard on Two sides
77
Part-B
Page 291
STORAGES
DATASHEET
Part-B
Page 292
GENERIC DATASHEET: STORAGES CENTRAL VISTA – COMMON CENTRAL SECRETARIAT 13
Wardrobe
Type A1
Product dimensions:
L As per Furniture Layout
W 450 & 600 mm | 17.71” & 23.62”
H 1500, 2400 & 3300 mm |
59”,94.48 “ & 130”
Type A2

polish to match Walnut.
VENEER : As per the approved selection.

Finish / Colour:
Teak veneer Superior class AP N 0964-0504 M

as per teak wood to Laminate Color to
approved match Walnut be matched with
sample as per approved NCS Shades, as
sample per approved
shade.
Type B1
NCS Shade
AP N 2885-0444 M
Laminate Color to be
matched with NCS
Shades, as per approved
shade.
Fabric as per
approved
Type B2
sample
79
Part-B
Page 293
Wardrobe Type CA
• Cabinet Secretary
• NSCS
• PMO
Product dimensions:
W 450 & 600 mm | 17.71” & 23.62”
H 1500, 2400 & 3600 mm |
59”,94.48 “ & 141.73”
Finish / Colour:
Type CB
Teak veneer Superior class AP N 0964-0504 M

as per teak wood to Laminate Color to
approved match Walnut be matched with
sample as per approved NCS Shades, as
sample per approved
shade.
Type D
NCS Shade
AP N 2885-0444 M
Laminate Color to be
matched with NCS
Shades, as per approved
shade.
Type E
80
Part-B
Page 294
Storage in Open Condition Product data:

FORM
Type A1
• The storage unit shall have multiple shutters with
minimum six equal vertical divisions in the upper
level and two division in the lower level with
adjustable shelves inside the unit.
• The partly open space provided for the printer.
• The partly open repro unit is designed in two parts.
The upper unit has multiple shutters with two equal
vertical divisions with adjustable shelves inside the
Type A2
unit.
• the lower unit accommodates to repro units at both
the ends and a storage unit in the center with is
divided into two parts.
• Each part of the repro unit is divided into four
sections drawers and open shelves.
STRUCTURE
• The full height storage unit shall have laminate

finish shutter with partly open space for the printer &
Soft board with fixed shelves.
• The Box work shall be made from ply + Veneer on
top.
• The entire Unit has multiple shutters at top and
bottom. The shutter shall be made from ply +
laminate finish on shutter as per the reference
image.
Type B1
• The soft board on wall shall be made of ply + Soft
board + fabric + Grippers, including fixing of
framework on walls.
• The shelves shall be made of ply + laminate finish
of approved shade.
• All external sides shall be veneer finish & internal
surfaces shall be laminate finish of approved make
and shade.
reference image or approved design pattern.
• The unit shall have multiple drawers made of ply +
laminate finish.
MOBILE TROLLEY:
• Mobile trolley top shall be made of ply + veneer

finish.
Type B2 • The trolley unit shall have multiple shelves made of
ply + laminate finish as per the reference image with
heavy duty caster wheel swivel rubber protecting
hardwood/Carpet Rolls Smoothly & Quietly.
MATERIAL
• Veneer: 4.00 mm thick Teak Veneer , finish, make

and in pattern as shown in the reference image.
• Teak wood /Solid Wood: 4 mm thick lipping on all
ply edges. 75 mm thick solid wood base as per
reference image. Solid wood shall be Superior class
teak wood of best quality selected and sorted for
uniform veins wood.
• Heavy duty Caster for the mobile planter storage.
81
Part-B
Page 295
Storage in Open Condition Product data:
LADDER CUM STOOL :
• The ladder cum stool shall be made up of solid

teak wood with the provision of three steps,
foldable as per the reference images.
• The foldable stool shall be on
hinges/Pivot/Mechanical plate as per the reference
image.
• The steps shall have mechanical safety hook
fixed to the frame structure.
• Glides as per the approved make.
HARDWARE
• Hardware: Hinges premium soft close Auto Hinges

for openable shutters.
• Soft close undermount Channel of premium quality
Type D for drawers 300 to 600 mm silent with Catch as
approved by Architect/EIC.
• One lock per active shutter and drawer of approved
make.
• The shutter shall have profile handles as per the
• The profile handles will have cap at both the ends
of the same make and finish.
• Magnet Catcher / Shutter Silent System/ Push to
open system - of approved make
• Laminate finish Adjustable shelves as per standard
file height.
• Provision for recessed profile light in open void
area.
FINISH
• Polish: Exterior Grade water Base PU polish.
Note:
Type E
• Provision for electrical switch board.
• All storage shall have sufficient gap at back/side for
the electrical /data wire for switch board and light as
required.
• Power & data along with socket outlet to be
coordinated with equipment and electrical layouts
• Printer is ‘by others’.
82
Part-B
Page 296
Back Storage Paneling Product data:

Type Ca FORM
•The wall storage unit shall have multiple shutters

with equal standard file ht. vertical divisions in the
upper level and single division in the lower level with
adjustable shelves inside the unit + drawers as per
reference images.
•Partly open space in Veneer & Laminate finish.
STRUCTURE
•The unit shall be Veneer / Laminate finish shutter

and veneer/Laminate paneling on wall with fixed
shelves as per the given design .
•The open boxing unit at the center shall be made
from ply + veneer finish all around as per the
reference image.
•The shutters shall be made from ply + laminate
finish with solid wood beading all around as per the
reference image & dimensions on shutter as per the
reference image.
• Drawer all sides shall be made of in solid wood as
per the approved design. Base of the drawer shall be
in IS 710 Grade ply + Laminate finish.
•All external surfaces shall be veneer finish & internal
surfaces shall be laminate finish of approved make
and shade.
•The paneling on wall shall be made of ply +
Veneer/Laminate finish including fixing of framework
on walls.
•25mm thick Corian solid acrylic shelve of approved
shade and finish shall be fixed on the paneling.
MATERIAL
Type Cb
•Veneer : Premium natural wood veneers with
consistent color and grain structure as per sample
approved by the Architect.
•Teak wood /Solid Wood: 4mm thick lipping on all ply
edges. 75 mm thick solid wood base as per reference
image. Solid wood shall be Superior class teak wood
of best quality selected and sorted for uniform veins
wood.
• Lettering on the panel to be in SS metal + Brass
PVD coated Finish as per the sample approved.
HARDWARE
•Soft close Channel undercount of premium quality

for drawers 300 to 600mm silent with Catch as
approved by Architect/EIC.
•Hinges premium quality soft close Auto Hinges for
openable shutters.
•One lock per active shutter and drawer of approved
make.
•Magnet Catcher / Shutter Silent System/ Push to
•The shutter shall have Aluminum anodized profile
handle as per the approved design and pattern.
FINISH
•Polish: Exterior Grade water Based PU polish.
83
Part-B
Page 297
Ladder cum stool detail:
25 mm thick mirror polish

Corian solid acrylic shelve
• The ladder cum stool shall be made up of solid and photo frames with
teak wood with the provision of three steps, National Emblem with solid
foldable as per the reference images. wood frame.
• The foldable stool is on
hinges/Pivot/Mechanical plate as per the
reference image.
• The steps shall have mechanical safety hook Dark Solid wood carving
fixed to the frame structure. as per approved design
Reference images Accessories

260
Existing file stacking system

Clear height for internal shelving shall be
370mm - 380 mm
File size & stacking system Provision for adjustable shelves to be
provided. Shelves to be supported by
metal clamps
Option 1 Lock Detail : 22 mm Option—2 Dial lock with

Rim lock with 2 keys , Nickel sliding bolt and fix code.
plated.
Part-B
Page 298
Reference images
Type 1 - Overhead Shutter—Aluminium Profle cabinet edge with bumper
Type 2 - Bottom Shutter—Aluminium Profile handle detail
Wooden Lipping
Grommet with power and data

outlet detail Quadro soft close channel for Drawers
Note: Wire Management detail to
be provided.
Part-B
Page 299
Detail images
600 mm
The open boxing unit at the centre shall be 600 mm in Height The Storage unit exceeding the length of 2400
made from ply + laminate finish with SW Lipping all around as mm shall have Vertical support member in the
per the reference image. centre of open boxing unit made of ply +
laminate finish with SW lipping as shown in the
reference image.
Dummy unit
Provision for Tack board to be provided in open shelf as The shutter shall have fixed skirting as shown in
shown in the reference image or approved design intent. reference image allowing clear space for foldable
The unit shall have provision for drawers adjacent to the stool.
dummy unit.
Part-B
Page 300
WARDROBE
DATASHEET
Part-B
Page 301
GENERIC DATASHEET: WARDROBE CENTRAL VISTA – COMMON CENTRAL SECRETARIAT 13
Wardrobe Type A
Product dimensions:
W 600 -650 mm | 23.62” – 25.6”
H 2400 mm | 94.48”
Finish / Colour:
Type B
Teak veneer Superior class NCS Shade

as per teak wood to AP N 0964-0504 M
approved match Walnut Laminate Color to
sample as per approved be matched with
sample NCS Shades
Type C
88
Part-B
Page 302
Wadrobe Image Product data:
FORM
Type A
• The wall unit shall be divided in multiple parts
partly open and partly with shutter & drawer.
• The unit shall have open space to place wall art.
• PU finish shutters & Lower unit shall have a drawers
and shutters.
STRUCTURE
• The unit shall have a P.U. finish shutter and veneer

finish jamb/Paneling at the opening of the wall.
• Low height Storage unit shall be made of ply + P.U.
finish as per the reference image.
• The box work shall be made from IS 710 Grade
Marine ply + Veneer finish.
• The shutters shall be made of exterior grade MDF +
P.U. polish as per approved make and shade.
• Inside the storage unit: Adjustable shelves (as per
standard file height) finish made of Ply + Laminate of
• All external side of the box work shall be veneer
finish & internal surfaces shall be laminate finish of
• All Drawers shall be made of ply + solid wood +
smoked glass front of the drawer.
edges. 75 mm thick solid wood base as per reference
image.
• All power outlets to be coordinated with Electrical
drawings.
• All electric equipment requirements to be
• All white goods are excluded.
MATERIAL
• Veneer : Premium natural wood veneers with

• Solid Wood: Superior class teak wood of best
quality, selected and sorted for uniform veins as
approved by Architect.
HARDWARE
• Hinges premium quality soft close Auto Hinges for
openable shutters.
make.
• Soft close Channel of premium quality for drawers
300 to 600 mm silent with Catch as approved by
Architect/EIC.
• Magnet Catcher / Shutter Silent System/ Push to
• PVD coated brass Handle as per the approved
design and pattern.
FINISH
• Polish: Exterior Grade water Based PU polish.
89
Part-B
Page 303
Wadrobe Image Product data:
FORM
Type B
• The shutter shall be made up of wooden frame +
Veneer + solid wood Panel in between.
• The unit shall have a Dark wood Inlay pattern as per
the reference images.
• Solid wood molding at top of the Storage.
STRUCTURE
• The box work shall be made from IS 710 Grade Marine

ply + Veneer finish.
• Backing of storage shall be made from IS 710 Grade
ply + Veneer finish.
• All external side & internal surfaces of the box work
shall be veneer finish of approved make and shade.
edges.
• Solid wood base 19mm x 75 mm thick + Crafted
wooden leg as per reference intent / image.
• The shutter shall have brass handles as per the
• The top shall have wooden molding frame (edges)+
veneer finish.
• All power outlets to be coordinated with Electrical
drawings.
• All electric equipment requirements to be coordinated
with Electrical drawing.
• All white goods are excluded.
MATERIAL
• Veneer: 4.00 mm thick Veneer (0.6 MM Core layer on

gurjan ply base) carefully selected range & group
matched of premium natural wood veneers with
• Solid Wood: - 4 mm thick lipping on all ply edges. The
solid wood shall be Superior class teak wood of best
quality selected and sorted for uniform veins wood.
HARDWARE
• Hardware: Hinges premium soft close Auto Hinges for
open able shutters.
• Adjustable Shelves as per standard height.
make.
• Soft close Channel of premium quality for drawers 300
to 600 mm silent with Catch as approved by
Architect/EIC.
• Magnet Catcher / Shutter Silent System/ Push to open
system - of approved make
• PVD coated brass Handle as per the approved design
and pattern.
FINISH
• Polish: Exterior Grade water Based PU polish.
90
Part-B
Page 304
Conference Table Leg detail:
The storage unit top to have a SW moulding SW moulding legs of Dia. 4” at bottom with 3 ring
design as per the reference image. sections and on top the SW leg 4”x4” continues to
The ply + veneer sliding shutters to have 6mm the top becoming the part of the framework.
thk. Groove on all sides of the panelling design
as per the above image. 6mm thk. SW Lipping
on all edges of ply. Refer line drawings for all
details.
The shutters to have

handle & finish and
design as per
reference image /
approved sample.
Handle to be
ergonomically
designed for
comfortable opening Dark Solid wood inlay
and closing of as per approved
shutters. design
Reference images for Hardware and Accessories
Hinge for Shutters Double Shutter Rod lock Pull Out Wardrobe Rail - Steel
Runner as per reference image
Under mount Quadro soft close

channel for Drawers
Profile lights inside Wardrobes
Part-B
Page 305
92
Part-B
Page 306
93
Part-B
Page 307
Wardrobe Image Product data:
FORM
Type C
•The wardrobe with sliding shutters and
multiple drawers made of solid wood.
STRUCTURE
•The box work shall be made from IS 710

Grade Marine ply + The shutters shall be mirror
finish + solid wood frame as per approved
make and shade.
•Inside the storage unit: Adjustable shelves
finish made of Ply + Laminate of approved
make and shade.
•All external side of the box work shall be
veneer finish & internal surfaces shall be
laminate finish of approved make and shade.
•All Drawer & tray sides shall be made of solid
wood + based shall be veneer finish (Exclusive
category in terms of material and finish).
•All external shutter shall have 2mm/solid
wood lipping on all edges. Partly carving and
partly wood inlay pattern on shutter as per the
sample approved.
•Solid wood 75 mm thick base as per the
reference images.
•All internal shall have 4mm thick solid teak
wood lipping.
MATERIAL
•Veneer: Premium natural wood veneers with

•Solid Wood: Superior class teak wood of best
quality, selected and sorted for uniform veins as
approved by Architect.
HARDWARE
•Inbuilt biometric safe shall be fixed to the unit.
•Heavy duty soft close premium Sliding channel as
per the approved make for the shutter.
•Internal Door Sensor Switch Modular fixed to the
unit, Soft On/Off Switching door open = light on,
door closed = light off, including Profile led light
embedded to the unit
•One lock per active shutter and drawer of approved
make.
•Soft close Channel of premium quality for drawers
300 to 600 mm silent with Catch as approved by
Architect/EIC.
•Multiple Hanging rod’s as per reference images.
•Magnet Catcher / Shutter Silent System/ Push to
FINISH
•Polish: Exterior Grade water Based PU polish.
94
Part-B
Page 308
GENERIC DATASHEETS : WARDROBE CENTRAL VISTA – COMMON CENTRAL SECRETARIAT 13
Detail Images:
Mirror Mirror
Mirror attached to the shutters at equal distance

Unit shall have sliding shutter with
as per design intent and reference images
25 mm groove on both the sides .
75mm skirting 25mm recess as per

reference image
Heavy duty soft close premium Sliding

channel as per the approved make for the
shutter.
95
Part-B
Page 309
PANTRY
DATASHEET
Part-B
Page 310
GENERIC DATASHEET: PANTRY CENTRAL VISTA – COMMON CENTRAL SECRETARIAT 13
STONE :Granite/ Quartz a s per selection.

GENERIC DATASHEET: PANTRY/KITCHEN LAMINATE : As per the approved selection.
PRODUCT DATA:
SAMPLE PRODUCT IMAGES: FORM
• Provision of pantry induction cook plate with
minimum two burners and microwave/ other
electrical equipment to be provided as per
requirement.
STRUCTURE
• The storage unit shall be made in two parts
Lower unit + overhead unit.
• The B o x work & built in appliances space shall
be made from ply laminate finish.
• All external shall be high gloss acrylic
Finish + internal shall be laminate finish a s
per the sample approved.
• The shutters of the upper level shall be
made of frosted glass with an Aluminum
frame.
• The platform top & vertical sides shall be
stone/granite finish as per the sample
approved.
• The lower unit shall have multiple drawer
and shutters made of ply + high gloss
acrylic Finish on shutter a s per the
reference image.
• All ply edges shall have teak wood/solid wood
lipping.
• Laminate finish Adjustable shelves. The unit
shall have PVC legs as base and front/visible
area shall have 75mm high SS skirting fixed on
12mm IS 710 Grade ply.
• Sink liner under the sink unit. Sink shall be fixed
to the unit under the stone top and edges shall
be sealed with silicon adhesive to prevent water
leakage.
M AT E R I A L
* Reference images for Pantry unit • Solid Wood: Superior cl ass teak wood of
best quality, selected and sorted for
PRODUCT DIMENSIONS: • High gloss acrylic finish as per approved shade
• Ply: I S 710 grade Ply shall be used.
H AR D W AR E
LOWER UNIT DEPTH 600 • Hinges premium soft close Auto Hinges for open
able shutters.
UPPER UNIT DEPTH 380
• Premium quality undermount/ Quadro silent
LOWER UNIT HEIGHT 915 soft close “full extension/with Push to open”
heavy duty Channel for drawers: tandem
UPPER UNIT HEIGHT 725 channel 300 to 600 mm Silent with Catch,
railing drawer systems having Load Bearing
Capacity of 30 to 45 kg as approved by
FINISHES / COLOUR: Architect/EIC.
• Push to open Silent opening Tandem drawer box
system as per the above specification.
• For over head hardware: Flap fittings ,folding flap
fitting, Flap lift fitting, Lift up flap fitting, top box
stay shall be used for shutter minimum 15 kg
weight capacity as per the approved make.
• Shutter shall have Aluminum anodized profile
handle as per the approved design and pattern.
WOOD : Superior cl ass teak wood with • Magnet Catcher / Shutter Silent System/ Push to
polish to match Walnut open system - of approved make.
97
Part-B
Page 311
GENERIC DATASHEET: PANTRY/KITCHEN
SAMPLE PRODUCT IMAGES: PRODUCT DIMENSIONS:
LENGTH As shown in plan

WIDTH As shown in plan
LOWER UNIT HEIGHT 915
UPPER UNIT HEIGHT 725
MATERIAL FINISHES / COLOUR:
WOOD : Superior cl ass teak wood with

polish to match Walnut
STONE :Granite/ Quartz a s per selection.
LAMINATE : As per the approved selection.
• Solid W ood: Superior class teak wood
of best quality, selected and sorted for
uniform veins as approved by
Architect.
• High gloss acrylic finish as per approved
shade
• Ply: I S 710 grade Ply shall be used.
98
Part-B
Page 312
STORAGE UNITS KITCHEN

ACCESSORIES/HARDWARE/DETAILS
Dish Cloth Rod
Led Profile Under the overhead

storage
Tendem
* Reference Images for Under counter

storage units for varied usage
requirements. The images are indicative
of the design intent and should refer to
actual datasheets at the time of
execution. “Gola” Profile Handle
99
Part-B
Page 313
KITCHEN
ACCESSORIES/HARDWARE/DETAILS
Cutlery Organizer Water Receptacle Tray
Overhead Unit top hung unit with

frosted glass and aluminium frame.
Bottle Tray Detergent Tambour Storage Kitchen

Pull out tray for Unit C Trolley
S.S Basket and Pull Tendem Drawer Internal Aluminum profile In built Onion
out trays Organizer glass shutters for and potato
storage unit storage Basket
Pull Out for Snacks Full Height Pull Out Island Kitchen Platform
100
Part-B
Page 314
Product Specifications: REFERENCE IMAGES FOR ELECTRONIC

WHITE GOODS
• Magnet Catcher / Shutter Silent
System/ Push to open system - of
approved make.
• Aluminum anodized profile handle as
• All storage shall have sufficient gap at
back/side for the electrical /data wire
for switch board and light as required.
• light fixture under the counter &
overhead storage of approved lighting
colour temperature.
Note: The pantry/kitchen unit to be

coordinated with kitchen consultant. Pantry
white goods are excluded. In Built and Microwave
Shop Drawings prepared specifically for Unite
this; show dimensions and interface with
other products/appliances.
Items to be included :
Drawer internal tray accessories of various
size of SS 304 grade as per the approved
sample.
• Cutlery organisers
• Stainless steel basket & Pull-out trays
• Bottle pull-outs In Built Dish Washer
• Three pull out tray
• Light
• Detergent pull-out tray
• Waste receptacle tray, basket paper tray
Accessories:
5 Burner HOB
In Built Refrigerator
• Herbs shelves on dado (shelves length
range: 300 to 600 mm depends on size
of the pantry)
• 6 nos hooks to be provided on dado
• Dish cloth rod
• Refrigerator pull-out stand.
Finish
• Polish: Exterior Grade Water Base
• PU polish. In Built Food Warmer R.O Unit
In Built Coffee
maker Chimney
101
Part-B
Page 315
VANITY UNIT
DATASHEET
Part-B
Page 316
GENERIC DATASHEET: VANITY UNIT CENTRAL VISTA – COMMON CENTRAL SECRETARIAT 13
SAMPLE PRODUCT IMAGES: FINISHES / COLOUR:

polish.
TILE : 12mm Thick Standard beige 60 for
wall dado.
MARBLE : 19mm thick Rain forest golden
marble for Counter Top.
CORIAN: Solid Surface Corian counter top.
CATEGORY BY TYPES :
Type 1: Over Counter Vanity Units
PRODUCT DIMENSIONS:
LENGTH – As per Layout
WIDTH – 560-610 MM (22-24”) * Reference for Counter Top Unit
HEIGHT – 838 MM (33”) Type 2: Under Counter Vanity Units

* For both Over Counter and Under Counter
types the height shall remain the same.
FINISHES / COLOUR:
* Reference for Under Counter Unit
103
Part-B
Page 317
SPECIFICATIONS:
• Workmanship: Supply and installation of 2. Under Counter unit
vanity counter in stone as per the
reference images.
• The internal frame work shall be metal
section, fixed to the wall and covered with
the cement sheet.
• Polished marble shall be fixed on the top
as per the reference images.
• The unit shall have a multiple drawer
made of solid wood , drawer base shall be
Laminate finish of approved make and
838MM(33”)
shade. - The Box work shall be made from
IS 710 Grade ply.
• All external shall be veneer finished of
approved make and shade and all wooden
surface shall be finished with Hardware.
drawers 300 to 600 mm silent with Catch *All heights considered from FFL
• Polish: All wooden and veneer surface The height of the unit in both types to be in
shall be finished with exterior grade water constant i.e. 838mm from FFL. The
base PU polish of approved make & shade. Platform height varies in both typologies.
APRON DETAIL:
Type 1 : SW Facia with Carving/ Motif
STANDARD HEIGHTS:
1. Counter Top unit
The facia to have high qaulity carving motif
as per the approved design and pattern.
138MM(5.5”)
838MM(33”)
*All heights considered from FFL *Reference Image for Carving design
104
Part-B
Page 318
APRON DETAIL: Type 4 : SW Facia with Moldings

CARVING PATTERN
- Carving pattern on SW front and side
fascia to be of approved design and
sample as per detail provided.
- Carving pattern to be enhanced with
variations in techniques and samples to
be provided for approval.
- All carving patterns are representative,
form and depth of carving to be
improved.
Type 2 : SW Facia with Inlay
The apron unit shall have SW moldings &

mother of pearl inlay work on front fascia
as shown in the reference image. as
shown in the reference image.
Type 5 : Stone Facia with Ribs
The facia to have 6mm thick high quality

inlay in darkwood as per the approved design
and pattern.
Type 3 : SW Facia with Moldings
Stone ribbing on front fascia as shown in

SW stained apron with SW moldings as per

reference image.
105
Part-B
Page 319
Type 6 : SW Facia without Inlay

STONE DETAIL:
The stone edge detail to be as per the

above reference image. The Platform and
Facia to have 19mm thick marble and fixed
with SS support internally.
The SW carving facia to be 38mm recessed
and have high quality carving/inlay as per
the approved or shared intent.
The facia to have simple design with Also detail to include a Drip groove as per
rounded corners as per the approved the reference image.
polish.
ACCESSORIES:
NAPKIN HOLDER
SS Chrome finish napkin/towel holder to be

fixed on the lower part of SW Fascia as per
The unit to have a cutout in SW as shown

in the reference image. The edges t to have
a slightly rounded by at least 1/16” for
better ergonomic usage.
106
Part-B
Page 320
TOILET CABINET:
SAMPLE PRODUCT IMAGES:
HARDWARE
• One lock per active shutter and drawer
of approved make.
• Hinges premium quality soft close Auto
Hinges for openable shutters.
• Soft close Channel of premium quality
for drawers 300 to 600 mm silent with
Catch as approved by Architect/EIC.
• Magnet Catcher / Shutter Silent System/
Push to open system - of approved make
• Handle as per the approved design and
pattern.
• Horizontal and vertical cable manager.
FINISH
PRODUCT DATA:
• The wall cabinet unit is composed of open
shelves, shutters and integrated with Mirror
• The Box work & shutter shall be made of
PRODUCT DIMENSIONS: Marine ply and finished with veneer as per
approved selection with first class solid
LENGTH – As per Layout
wood beading.
• The inner shelves of the shutter to be
WIDTH – 230MM (9”)
also made of Marine ply with veneer finish
on both sides.
HEIGHT – 1200 MM (48”)
• The open shelves will be of clear glass on
metal clamps as per approved selection.
FINISHES / COLOUR:
• The full cabinet is divided into two halves
comprising of the storage and mirror unit.
WOOD: Superior class teak wood with polish.

GLASS : 8mm Thk. Frosted glass as per
Selection.
MIRROR : As per the approved selection.
MATERIAL
with consistent color and grain structure
as per sample approved by the
Architect.
used.
107
Part-B
Page 321
LECTERN
DATASHEET
Part-B
Page 322
GENERIC DATASHEET: LECTERN CENTRAL VISTA – COMMON CENTRAL SECRETARIAT 13
LENGTH 650 mm
WIDTH 450 mm
HEIGHT 1100 mm
Finish / Colour:

VENEER: As per approved make or shade.
MATERIAL
Product Data:
as per sample approved by the
FORM Architect.
• The podium shall be made of IS 710 • Solid Wood: Superior class teak wood of
GRADE Ply+ veneer finish as per best quality, selected and sorted for
reference intent/images. uniform veins as approved by Architect.
• Provision of multiple drawer, shutter & • Ply: IS 710 grade marine Ply shall be
to accommodate multimedia used.
equipment.
HARDWARE
STRUCTURE • Hinges premium quality soft close Auto
• The Podium shall be made of IS 710 Hinges for openable shutters.
Grade ply + Veneer as per the • Soft close Channel of premium quality for
reference images. The box work, drawers 300 to 600mm silent with Catch
shutter & drawer shall be made from IS or equivalent as approved by
710 Grade ply + Veneer as per the Architect/EIC.
intent images. • One lock per active drawer/shutter of
• Curving pattern as per the approved approved make.
design. • Handles as per the approved design and
• All external surfaces shall be veneer pattern.
finish & internal surfaces shall be • Magnet Catcher / Shutter Silent System/
laminate finish of approved make and Push to open system - of approved make.
shade. • Cable organizer on top as per the
• 75 mm thick solid wood base as per approved design and pattern.
reference image. • Provision for connectivity Multimedia to
• All power outlets to be coordinated with AV, Internet, laptop power, extra power,
Electrical drawings. microphone in table top.
• Teak wood /Solid Wood: - 2 mm thick • Leveler : Adjustable leg leveler of
lipping on all ply edges. approved make shall be used.
FINISH
• Polish: Exterior Grade water Base polish
on all visible surfaces of wood and lacquer
polish on all invisible surfaces of veneer
and wood.
109
Part-B
Page 323
LENGTH 1200 mm
WIDTH 635 mm
HEIGHT 1150 mm
MATERIAL
• Veneer: Premium natural wood veneers with
consistent color and grain structure as per
sample approved by the Architect.
• Solid Wood: Superior class teak wood of best
quality, selected and sorted for uniform veins
as approved by Architect.
HARDWARE
• Hinges premium quality soft close Auto Hinges
for open-able shutters.
drawers 300 to 600mm silent with Catch or
equivalent as approved by Architect/EIC.
• One lock per active shutter/drawer of approved
make.
• Aluminum anodized profile handles as per the
• Magnet Catcher / Shutter Silent System/ Push
Product Data: to open system - of approved make.
• Cable organizer on top as per the approved
FORM design and pattern.
• The podium shall be made of ply + • Provision for connectivity Multimedia to AV,
veneer, with a provision of multiple Internet, laptop power, extra power,
drawer, shutter & microphone in table top.
to accommodate multimedia equipment as • Leveler : Adjustable leg leveler of approved
per the reference images. make shall be used.
• All wooden joinery and detailing shall be as per
STRUCTURE the refer-ence images or approved design
• The Podium shall be made of IS 710 pattern.
Grade ply + Veneer as per the reference • Buffer/Glides: Heavy duty Pvc buffer or glides
image. suitable to floor finish of approved make shall
• The box work, shutter & drawer shall be be used.
made from IS 710 Grade ply + Veneer as
per the reference image. CABLE MANAGEMENT
• All external surfaces shall be veneer • All power outlets to be coordinated with
finish & internal surfaces shall be laminate Electrical drawings.
finish of approved make and shade. • All electric equipment requirements to be
• All Wooden joinery and detailing shall be coordinated with Electrical drawing.
as per the reference images or approved • Cable management to be incorporated within
design pattern. the furniture to conceal all cables starting from
floor to all desks.
FINISH
• Polish: All wooden and veneer surface shall be
finished with exterior grade water base PU
polish of approved make & shade.
110
Part-B
Page 324
Detail Images:
The Unit to the

national emblem in
the niche provided
at the front.
The Unit to have 1

1/4” recessed
skirting as shown
in the above
image.
The Internal
shelfing divisions
to be as per the
reference image.
- Carving pattern on SW front and side

fascia to be of approved design and
sample as per detail provided.
- Carving pattern to be enhanced with

variations in techniques and samples to
be provided for approval.
- All carving patterns are representative,

form and depth of carving to be
improved.
Flip top panel:

• The Charging station can charge
multiple devices with USB cables in one
of three outlets.
• It should be secured with adhesive
strips.
• Power and Data Module is a frameless,
‘perfectly-flush’, through-desk access
port.
• Finished in anodized natural aluminum.
111
Part-B
Page 325
Reference Image
The lectern to have slightly angled top as
The boxwork to be in Plywood +veneer finish
with provision for inside shelves and openable
shutter.
Provision for Gooseneck Microphone

system to be on the lectern top along
with LED strip lights as per the reference
image/ approved sample.
Typical Section indicating heights
Reference Image
Neat cable /wire
management system. Also
the top to be slightly
angular as per the reference
image.
Reference Images
Provision of Grommet for cable and
wire entry to be provided on top and
bottom part of the lectern.
Reference Image
The lectern to have
provision for Integrated
sound system and all
input and output points
as per requirements.
112
Part-B
Page 326
SECURITY
DATASHEET
Part-B
Page 327
GENERIC DATASHEET: SECURITY CENTRAL VISTA – COMMON CENTRAL SECRETARIAT 13
Frisking Booth
Product dimensions:
L 1400mm | 55.11”
W 1600mm | 63”
H 2400 mm | 94.48”
Finish / Colour:
SS BOX SECTION : Stainless steel RHS
frame structure 304 grade in brush finish
as per the approved selection.
Acrylic Sheet : Minimum 6mm thick
Acrylic sheet as per the approved
selection.
or
GLASS : 8MM thick toughened frosted
glass as per the approved selection.
Teak veneer Superior class Polished Indian

as per teak wood to stone
approved match Walnut
sample as per approved
sample
Stainless Frosted
Steel Glass
MATERIAL
as per sample approved by the Architect.
used.
• 6mm thick Acrylic sheet / 8mm thick
Toughened Glass
Product Data:
FORM
• Frisking booth shall be made of Stainless
steel RHS frame structure 304 grade + SS
brush finish + 8 mm thick toughened Green
Frosted glass or 6mm thick Acrylic glass as
per reference intent/images.
• Stone top Storage unit with drawers shall
be made of Ply + veneer finish + solid wood
beading as per reference images.
• The shutter shall be made of Ply + Veneer
finish.
114
Part-B
Page 328
GENERIC DATASHEET: SECURITY CENTRAL VISTA – COMMON CENTRAL SECRETARIAT 13
Type of Furniture:
Frisking Booth
Product data:
STRUCTURE
• The Frame structure shall be made of Heavy
duty Stainless steel RHS frame structure 304
grade and Green Frosted glass/ 6mm Acrylic in
between as per reference intent / image. To
strengthen additional MS section as required.
• The granite stone top shall be fixed on the
unit with Adhesive.
MATERIAL
• Curtain should be stitched with eyelet
hanging system .
• 6mm thick Acrylic sheet / 8mm thick
Toughened Glass
HARDWARE
• Premium quality curtain rod of stainless steel
with Chrome finish
FINISH Storage unit with stone top with beveled edges.

• Stainless steel RHS frame structure 304 Veneer cladding on inner and outer sides with SW
grade: SS brush finish leaping on all edges. 4mm Groove between stone and
• Storage Polish: Exterior Grade water Based veneer casing.
PU polish.
HARDWARE
• One lock per active shutter and drawer
of approved make.
• Hinges premium quality soft close Auto
Hinges for openable shutters. Stone cladded
• Soft close Channel of premium quality step with bevelled
for drawers 300 to 600 mm silent with edges
Catch as approved by Architect/EIC.
• Magnet Catcher / Shutter Silent System/
Push to open system - of approved make Reference images for Hardware and
• Handle as per the approved design and Accessories
pattern.
FINISH
Frisking booth detail: Hinge for Shutters Double Shutter Rod

lock
Eyelet hanging system for curtain. SS

Holder and rod in chrome finish attached
at both ends.
115
Part-B
Page 329
FRAMING FOR COMMISSIONED ART

DATASHEET
Part-B
Page 330
GENERIC DATASHEET: FRAMING FOR COMMISSIONED ART CENTRAL VISTA – COMMON CENTRAL SECRETARIAT 13
Reference from Framed Art package: Frame Sizes:

Framing sizes are mentioned in categories
Indicative lines marked on each room layout
as listed below:
– to be referred to in the framed art
package separately.
1. Small frames
2. Medium frames
Sample location marking: 3. Large frames
4. Extra large frames
1. Small Frames
FRAME SIZE
FRAME CODE NO.
(W x H)
A 14" X 14"
B 16" X 20"
C 16" X 16"
D 20" X 30"
E 24" X 24"
2. Medium Frames
FRAME SIZE
FRAME CODE NO.
(W x H)
F 24" X 30"
G 26" X 16"
H 26" X 36"
I 30" X 30"
J 30" X 36"
K 30" X 48"
L 36" X 30"
M 36'' X 36''
N 36" X 48"
Key/Legends:
3. Large Frames
Secretary Office
FRAME SIZE
1 FR1-A 6” x 8” FRAME CODE NO.
(W x H)
2 FR2 16” x 20” O 3' X 7'
3 FR6 24” x 30” P 4' X 18"
4 FR7 26” x 16” Q 4' X 2'
5 FR18 48” x 36” R 4' X 3'
Frame Section – Typologies: S 4' X 4'
T 4' X 5'
Frame sections to be used will be one of the U 4' X 6'
below material types:
V 5' X 4'
A. Wooden Frame section – Molded 4. Extra-Large Frames

wooden frame section to be of approved
FRAME SIZE
hardwood and polished with exterior FRAME CODE NO.
(W x H)
grade water based PU / approved W 5' X 5'
sample.
X 5' X 5'
Y 5' X 15'
Z 6' X 4'
B. Synthetic Frame section – Molded
AA 9' X 6'
synthetic ready-made polyester frames
to be of approved design and high AB 24' X 6'
quality. Sample to be approved by
interior stylist before mass production.
117
Part-B
Page 331
Wooden Frame Section – Details:

L-01 LARGE FRAME SM-04 SMALL & MEDIUM FRAME
M-02 MEDIUM FRAME SM-05 SMALL & MEDIUM FRAME
SM-03 SMALL & MEDIUM FRAME ML-06 MEDIUM & LARGE FRAME
118
Part-B
Page 332

SM-07 SMALL & MEDIUM FRAME S-10 SMALL FRAME
ML-08 MEDIUM & LARGE FRAME S-11 SMALL FRAME
M-09 MEDIUM FRAME S-12 SMALL FRAME
119
Part-B
Page 333

SM-13 SMALL & MEDIUM FRAME XL-16 EXTRA LARGE FRAME
FR-ML-14 MEDIUM & LARGE FRAME XL-17 EXTRA LARGE FRAME
FR-M-15 MEDIUM FRAME XL-18 EXTRA LARGE FRAME
120
Part-B
Page 334
Synthetic Frame Section – Details:

S-19 SMALL FRAME M-22 MEDIUM FRAME
S-20 SMALL FRAME M-23 MEDIUM FRAME
M-21 MEDIUM FRAME M-24 MEDIUM FRAME
121
Part-B
Page 335
Synthetic Frame Section – Details:

L-25 LARGE FRAME XL-28 EXTRA LARGE FRAME
L-26 LARGE FRAME
XL-27 EXTRA LARGE FRAME
122
Part-B
Page 336
Frame Embellishments - Typologies:
Frame embellishments to be one of the

below material types:
1. Mother of Pearl Inlay on Wooden 3. Hand painted pattern on Wooden

frame frame
2. Carving on Wooden frame 4. Hand Gilding of gold leaf on wooden

frame
123
Part-B
Page 337
CORNER MITRE JOINTS FOR WOODEN HANGING SYSTEMS:

FRAME SECTIONS – Details:
Hanging Wall Frames with heavy duty
Wooden Frames of larger sizes to be “Hanger Z Bar/French Cleat - Floating
secured by one of the below mitre joints. Hanging System” fixed at backing of the
frame.
Frame to be tested for stability and
durability before use.
Type 1: SPLINED MITRE JOINT
Type 2: KEYED MITRE JOINT
Type 3: HALF-LAP MITRE JOINT
124
Part-B
Page 338
Parts of a Frame - Details:
SLIP - 2 to 4 mm wide and 2 mm

thick. To enhance the mount around
the paintings and/or to create a
space between glass and painting
HARDBOARD/PLYWOOD
ART
BACKING FOR ART

MOUNT – Cardboard / Fabric /
Painted or veneer finish
GLASS – Regular glass / Non-reflective glass of
thickness 4mm (S, M) 6mm or 8mm (L, XL)
FRAME – Wooden / Synthetic

material as per approved sizes
and sample. With or without
embellishments.
Types of Mount and Slip combinations:
1. Acid-free White mount board of 350-700 GSM with 3. Acid-free White mount board of 350-700 GSM with
wooden frame synthetic frame
2. Various Textiles wrapped on layers of mount boards 4. Acid-free White mount board of 5mm thickness, cut
of 100GSM and glued with adhesive diagonally with clean edges and corners
125
Part-B
Page 339
Types of Mount and Slip combinations: 7. Veneer on mount board, cut diagonally with
clean edges and corners
5. Mount board of 3mm thickness with digital
printed pattern in various layers, cut diagonally
with clean edges and corners
8. Various layers of 3mm thick white mount board,

cut diagonally with clean edges and corners
6. Solid colour Mount board layers of 1mm
thickness, cut diagonally with golden colour slip in
between
Packaging and Installing:
• Strong and clean cardboard boxes of

appropriate sizes to be used for
transporting the frames.
• The frames to be wrapped in bubble
wrap/equivalent with high quality
packaging material.
• Cardboard corner protectors for all 4
corners to be provided.
• High quality packing tape and
painter’s tape.
• Each framed art to be checked on site

by out to out (covered area) size with
masking tape before making the
frame. (as per elevation drawing
proved) The same to be approved by
interior stylist prior to framing.
• Structural stability needs to be
checked.
126
Part-B
Page 340
HARDWARE
DATASHEET
Part-B
Page 341
GENERIC DATASHEET: HARDWARE CENTRAL VISTA – COMMON CENTRAL SECRETARIAT 13
GENERIC DATASHEETS-HARDWARE Instructions for Hinges:
HINGES:
Instructions for Hinges:
Instructions for Hinges:
Types of Hinges:
Concealed Hinge:
• Full/half/inset Overlay
• Slide-on Mounting
• Material: Mild Steel/ Stainless Steel 304
(body)
• Finish: Nickel Plated
128
Part-B
Page 342
GENERIC DATASHEETS-HARDWARE
HINGES:
Types of Hinges:
Special Hinges:
Furniture and Butt Hinges :
CASTORS:
• Polyurethane caster wheels, ideal

and safe for all floor types; These
rubber caster wheels are made for
hardwood floors, carpet, tile,
laminate, linoleum, and even
concrete floors
129
Part-B
Page 343
CASTORS: CHANNEL:
Under mount soft close channel Silent with

Catch /Push To Open with Catch
•Silent System - the integrated Silent System

closes the drawer quietly and gently
•Full Extension , Minimum Loading Capacity
30 Kg
LOCKING SYSTEM:
Type of lock for furniture: Dial Lock / With

espagnolette lock and Fix code
Recessed ball castor, Free running
PUSH TO OPEN SYSTEM:
• Push to open opening system for

handle less furniture fronts
130
Part-B
Page 344
LOCKING SYSTEM: AUTOMATIC DOOR BOLT:
• Locks double doors in combination

with one case lock without additional
LOCKING KEYS: bolt
Specific requirement for Keys • The casing of the automatic door bolt
is screw-mounted under the centre of
the top panel, each of the catch hooks
to the top of both doors
• As the catch hooks enter the automatic
casing, the left-hand door is held in
place and locked with the right hand
door
• Unlocks by pressing on right hand door
• Nickel plated
GLIDES /LEVELLERS :
Furniture Felt Pad Round Heavy Duty Nail-on

Slider Glide Pad Floor Protector for Wooden
Furniture Chair Tables Leg Feet
131
Part-B
Page 345
GLIDES/LEVELLERS :
132
Part-B
Page 346
WINDOW TREATMENT & GENERAL NOTES

DATASHEET
Part-B
Page 347
CURTAIN PELMET CURTAIN INSTRUCTION:

STITCHING INSTRUCTION
• Stitching & Pattern of fabric shall be as per
design/drawing or either floral or geometry to
match with overall pattern at the joint of the
fabric.
• Color of the edge binding to be similar to the
adjacent fabric color.
• Interlocking for fabric edge to be compulsory.
• Standard spacing between 2 curtain pleats to be
maintained.
• Tracks shall have side end caps of matching color.
CURTAIN TRACKS
• The tracks shall be of Heavy duty Forest brand or
Somfy brand and have runners at required
SECTION: distance on which the fabric can be hooked with
all necessary connecting parts etc. required as per
manufacturer's specifications.
• The track shall have minimum 15 kg per meter
fabric weight bearing capacity.
• Minimum 10 pc of sliding with ball bearing carriers
per each running meter track.
• The motor to be installed at the gathering end
behind the curtain. In case of middle opening
curtains, the motor shall be placed on one of the
either gathering side.
CARE FOR INSTALLATION

• Mockup of each style / type of curtains in
Automation and manual shall be done for review
and approval.
• If required all Pleated / Arabian curtain shall be
cleaned and steam iron at site via a professional
vendor upto the satisfaction of the Architects.
• Motorized or manual curtain Operational action
shall be smooth and up to the satisfaction of the
Architects.
Notes / Remarks: • The fabric / black out material must be PVC Free
• Dimensions shall be coordinated with the and flame / Fire Retardant, must comply NFPA-
onsite team. 701 & all safety standard.
• Dimension shall be taken strictly as per the • All curtain shall be coated / treated with the
onsite opening. water & dust repellant protective coating on
the fabric.
• Crease for the pleats by using ironing
method should not be done. • Provision for the Weight chain Painted lead
50g each as per the requirement. Curtain lead
• Curtain shall be fixed in treated wooden
chain weight shall be used in the base of curtain’s
pelmet complete in all respects.
to ensure that they hang correctly & remains
SITE CONDITION: evenly distributed.
• This work shall be attended with utmost care at
• Review and check the curtain opening site via highly trained professional vendor and
(center opening / side opening) ,curtain should be carried out up to the satisfaction of the
gathering & power input requirement client /Architect.
before starting the work in reference to • Curtain shall be installed post wooden pelmet is
the site condition & ease of operation. complete in all respect and finishes.
134
Part-B
Page 348
Type of Curtain: Sample Curtain Image:

ARABIAN PLEATED /
RIPPLED FOLD
MOTORISED/MANUAL CURTAINS
Details & Notes :
Fabric:
Curtain styling—section for door for placing

curtain Product Data:
•Pleated curtains: Ripple type
• Installation curtain /drapes in pleated style
•Tracks: Ripple fold tracks, Brand: Rufflette
stitched from solid/Blackout fabric of approved
•Tapes: RIPPLE or TEMPO tape by Rufflette, shade, design, color, approved make and
Color: Translucent, Weight: Medium to heavy, height to run on tracks which shall be
Size: 90mm motorized as per manufacturer's specifications.
•Lining: Black out with Flame Retardant, • The tracks should have runners at required
Brand: Rufflette distance on which the fabric can be hooked
Color: to match curtain fabric with the fabric with all necessary connecting
parts, etc. required as per manufacturer's
•Weight: Painted lead 50g each (4 no.- 1 for
specifications.
each corner) ,
• Curtain motor shall be ultra quiet as per
Brand: Rufflette architect selection
•Hooks and rollers : Wave Hooks + Wave • Tracks: Ripple fold track
Rollers (Wave • Tapes: RIPPLE or TEMPO tape ,
Rollers swivel as a curtain is drawn) • Color: Translucent,
Brand: Rufflette • Weight: Medium to heavy, Size: 90mm
• Lining: Black out with Flame Retardant,
•Remote control: Brand: Somfy
• Weight: Painted lead 50g each (4 no.- 1 for
Drapery pull rod to be provided for curtains each corner)
longer than more than 10ft. • Hooks and rollers : Wave Hooks + Wave
Rollers (Wave Rollers swivel),
Notes / Remarks: • Remote control
• The contents of this document are for • Tieback - Shall be of approved design, size,
design intent reference purposed only. shade & finish.
• This document to be read along with • The rates shall be inclusive of installation,
technical specifications. material cost, labor, wastage, operating
• This locations, quantities, sizes of all items system all tools tackles, scaffoldings, hardware
to be cross checked on relevant supporting at all floors, necessary edge binding with
drawings. approved fabric and thread of color similar to
• Any colored images are indicative only. the color of the blinds, etc. complete as per
• Proposed items should be similar or the requirement of Engineer-in charge.
approved equal to the item specified. • Actual elevation area of curtains in closed
• Final detailed design may vary and shall be condition shall be measured.
issued at later. • The contractor shall get the sample approved
• Contractor has to prepare the shop by the Engineer-in-charge before execution.
drawing based on provided document.
prepare the mockup of furniture for review
and approval before mass procurement and
mass production.
135
Part-B
Page 349
Type of Curtain: Sample Curtain Image:

ROMAN CURTAINS
Details & Notes :
Fabric:
Product Data:
Roman Faustina - Manual
• Roman Blinds must come with Backing Bar(s)
extruded by nonrusting Aluminum alloy, with 2mm
thickness. The backing bar must be designed with
support beam to keep it straight and shall have a
pocket for holding the fabrics in position.
• Fiber Rod must be there inside the Backing Bar to
keep the fabric straight and to hold the fabrics in
position. It must come in 4mm and/or 5mm
thickness. The mounting brackets must be universal
and must be capable of mounting ceiling or wall
with the clutch on either the right or left end of the
tube. The Brackets must be made of Mild Steel with
the grade (DD) and must be powder coated for
superior finish. Brackets must be accommodating
overhead or side mounting with clutch assembly on
either end of the blind.
• The Bottom Channel of Roman Blind must be of
matching shade with fabric and in Pentagon shape,
made of non rusting Aluminum, powder coated with
1.50 mm thickness.
• The fabric must be enclosed in the suitably
created pocket along with tube. The channel shall
be closed from sides with the end caps to give a
neat look. Operational action shall be smooth and
up to the satisfaction of the Architects.
Notes / Remarks:
The location of ball chain for operation of the curtain
• The contents of this document are for will be indicated in drawing and it must be followed
design intent reference purposed only. as specified in drawing.
• This document to be read along with • The blind must be able to be stopped at any
technical specifications. desired position with the help of a stop lock. Chain
• This locations, quantities, sizes of all items jointer must be used to secure the chain.
to be cross checked on relevant supporting • The Roman tube must be extruded by non rusting
drawings. aluminum alloy, with grade (6063T) with 1.25 mm
• Any colored images are indicative only. thickness.
• Proposed items should be similar or • The Channel must be designed with support beam
approved equal to the item specified. to keep it straight and must have a pocket for
• Final detailed design may vary and shall be holding the fabrics in position. It must be available
issued at later. in 32, 38 & 45mm diameters for small and big sized
• Contractor has to prepare the shop blinds respectively.
drawing based on provided document.
prepare the mockup of furniture for review
and approval before mass procurement and
mass production.
136
Part-B
Page 350
GENERIC DATASHEET: WINDOW TREATMENT CENTRAL VISTA – COMMON CENTRAL SECRETARIAT 13
1. Styling & Special effects - Roman blinds
• Roman Blinds
• Borders
137
Part-B
Page 351
1. Styling & Special effects - Drapery
• Ripple fold curtains
• Embordered borders
• Layered curtains
138
Part-B
Page 352
2. Curtain Styling – Ornamentation Of Curtain :

• Tassel : A tassel is a finishing feature in fabric and
clothing decoration.
• Length of tassel would be approximately 60 cm
• Material: of tassels: cotton, viscose, Silk & acetate.
Or mix of any material mentioned here
• Different Styling of Tassel and Tie backs
• Magnetic, Metal Brass & wood /Silk/viscos tiebacks
• Different Styling of Tie back holders fixed on the wall/partition
139
Part-B
Page 353
3. Curtain Weight
• Sewing weights into the hems of curtains

helps them hang correctly.
• Keeps corners and seams to hang straight.
• Weighted drapery chains makes drapes and
curtains hang evenly and minimizes flaring.
• It’s particularly helpful for lightweight
curtains to make them hang straight.
• Weight chain and cloth/vinyl covered
drapery weights must minimum 50g
shall be used as per the requirement. Sew
into the bottom hem of the drapery. Material Lead
Color White
Shape Round
Thickness 3 mm
lead weights for corners
Traditional lead
weights
140
Part-B
Page 354
Checklist:
1. First observe the curtains from distance for over all look.
2. Check if all hardware, tapes, motors, strings, channels, tracks

are used of standard brands as per specified in the
tender/drawings.
3. Check if the openings, location of the motors (incase of

motorized curtains) location of operational strings (incase of
manual operation curtains), length and width of the curtains
are as per drawing and datasheets submitted.
4. Review and check the curtain opening by remote (incase of

motorized curtains) or by pulling string (incase of manual
operation curtains). The opening and closing of the curtain
must be smooth without any stop in-between operation.
5. Curtains pleats must be even folds should be of proper shape

in case of Arabian pleats type. This can be achieved only by
sewing of nylon strings at the bottom and at the back of the
curtain’s in the folded part. Corners of the curtains should fall
straight and not folded inner or outer side.
6. Make sure that Fiber Rods are at equal distance inside the
Backing Bar to keep the fabric straight and to hold the fabrics
in position. This is applicable for roman types blind/curtain.
7. Make sure that the motor is installed at the gathering of

the curtains at the end and behind the curtain. In case
of middle opening curtains, the motor shall be placed on one
of the either gathering side at the end/wall side.
8. Drapery pull rod to be provided for curtains (incase of manual

operation curtains) longer than 10ft.
9. Check if the Weight chain is used continuously and

painted lead weights of 50g each are used in both corners.
Curtain lead chain weight must be used in the base of
curtain’s to ensure that they hang correctly & remains evenly
distributed.
141
Part-B
Page 355
FLOORING
DATASHEET
Part-B
Page 356
GENERIC DATASHEET: FLOORING CENTRAL VISTA – COMMON CENTRAL SECRETARIAT 13
MATERIAL REMARK/REFERENCE :
BASE MATERIAL
Makrana White Marble
INLAY MATERIAL
Abu Black Kesariya ji Green Jaisalmer Yellow Katani Green Katani Pink
MATERIAL INSTRUCTIONS:
MARBLE FLOORING
1. All Flooring material shall be approved by Architect and Engineer in charge.
2. All natural stones shall be selected and sorted for uniform color, texture and thickness before
fixing.
3. Providing and laying minimum 20mm thick texture/river finish or polished, first quality stone of
required size, shape, finish of approved type and shade for flooring/ flooring with bend/ strip or
any other shape and pattern as per design/drawing.
4. Marble shall be laid over 20 mm (average) thick base of white cement mortar 1:5 (1 cement: 5
coarse sand), fixed with stone fixing adhesive and other jointing compound of approved make.
5. Stone inlay shall be as per the approved design and pattern, the thickness of inlay material shall
be of 3mm to 5mm inserting in the flooring material and grouting with the epoxy grout of approved
make and shade.
6. The Marble flooring shall be mirror Polish as per the sample approved.
WOODEN FLOORING
1. Providing and fixing minimum 15mm thick Engineer wooden flooring with pattern of approved
type and shade as given by the Architect of approved make.
2. Top layer of plank shall be made of minimum 3mm thick natural Veneer of any shade.
3. Surface of Top layer shall be pre finished with several layer of UV hardened Acrylic lacquer,
which shall be free from Formaldehyde and solvents.
4. Flooring plank shall be interlocked using lock and fold system in glue less floating manner.
143
Part-B
Page 357
CATEGORY A – CORRIDORS
Plan
Type 1
Type 2
Notes / Remarks: Specifications:
• Dimensions shall be coordinated with the onsite

team.
• The contents of this document are for design intent
reference purposes only.
• This locations, quantities, sizes of all items to be
cross checked on relevant supporting drawings.
• Proposed items should be similar or equal to the
item specified.
144
Part-B
Page 358
CATEGORY B –ENTRANCE AND FOYER
Type 1 Type 3
Type 2

team.
item specified.
145
Part-B
Page 359
CATEGORY C –ENTRANCE AND FOYER

(PRIME AREAS)
Type 1 Type 3
Type 2 Type 4

team.
item specified.
146
Part-B
Page 360
CATEGORY C –ENTRANCE AND FOYER

(PRIME AREAS)
Type 5

team.
item specified.
147
Part-B
Page 361
CATEGORY D –STAIRCASE AND LIFT

FOYER
Type 1 Type 3
Type 2

team.
item specified.
148
Part-B
Page 362
CATEGORY E – WOODEN FLOORING
Type 1 Type 3
Type 2

team.
item specified.
149
Part-B
Page 363
GRANITE
DATASHEET
Part-B
Page 364
GENERIC DATASHEET: GRANITE CENTRAL VISTA – COMMON CENTRAL SECRETARIAT 13
Image: 6mm Black

Grain
Black Grains Larger than
6mm.
Black Grains
Larger than
6mm.
Grain Size
J.D. Brown Granite
10 mm
Finish: Black Grains should not be larger than 4-6 mm.
River wash
Polished Finish Leather
Finish
Specification:
Grains:
• Black Grains should not be larger than 4-6 mm.
• Their should be a proper balance of light and Dark colored grains Cracks, Chip holes , Cavity should be avoided.
while selection the granite slab.
• Crystals which are 10mm or bigger than 10mm should not be
repeated more than 3 times in 1’ x 1’ of a slab. 1’
• Large variation in grains on granite slab should be
avoided
• The uniformity and smoothness on the granite slab
top must be inspected properly.
• Cracks, chip holes , cavity must be checked as it may impact the
functionality of the granite slab.
Porosity 1’
• Granite slab must be treated with proper steps to make the
surface smooth and less chemicals/water absorbent.
The project demands high quality/ grade material and not entry
level material.
Flooring Instruction:
• Back side of stone and all edges (any type of stone for all Crystals larger than 10mm should not be repeated
application) shall be treated with stone impregnator coating/ stone more than 3 times in 1’ x 1’ slab
sealer of approved make and as per manufacture's specifications.
Rate shall be
inclusive in particular item.
• All stone shall be cut to size with help of water jet cutting/ lacer
cut/CNC machine according to the design and shape for best Size 3
workmanship and chipping of edges joints etc. for composite
designer pattern /inlays flooring as per shop drawing.
• Base mortar thickness shall be as per drawing. Additional
thickness of base mortar more than mentioned in item description Size 2
shall be paid in relevant tender item.
Flooring General Notes:

• This document shall not be used for any site works, procurement Size 1
of materials or for any other activity on site, unless stamped and
signed good for construction by all agencies concerned.
• Contractor shall prepare shop drawing based on drawing and
intent image in 1:1 scale for approval. Large Variations in grain size/directions should be
• Contractor shall prepare prototype one sample/mockup for avoided.
approval.
• Contractor shall submit flooring pattern/design based on concept
design/pattern/drawing according to approved sample/mock-up
and available size of stone in drawing and get approved by
Architect and Engineer in charge before procurement and
execution of work
151
Part-B
Page 365
GENERIC DATASHEET: GRANITE CENTRAL VISTA – COMMON CENTRAL SECRETARIAT 13
Image:
10 mm thick marble with Inlay.
Granite as a backing material to

provide Strength to marble with
inlay.
Granite as a backing material to

provide Strength to marble with
10 mm inlay.
20
mm
Granite to be laid o floor instead of placing it vertically to check the overall effect of a laid flooring material.
152
Part-B
Page 366
MARBLE
DATASHEET
Part-B
Page 367
GENERIC DATASHEET: MARBLE CENTRAL VISTA – COMMON CENTRAL SECRETARIAT 13
Indian Marble:
Inlay pattern shall be cut with CNC cutting

machine/water jet cutting.
Abu Black Kesariyaji
Marble Green
Pure white marble shall be of first quality

without grain.
Jaisalmer Katani Green

Yellow Marble
1x
3x
Katani Pink Makrana

Marble White The thickness of inlay material shall be as
per BOQ specifications.
Without With Primer

Primer
Ambaji White Agaria White

Marble Marble
Polish: Without
Primer
With
Primer
Honed Marble Polished Stone Impregnation Primer coat on all

Marble edges
154
Part-B
Page 368
GENERIC DATASHEET: MARBLE CENTRAL VISTA – COMMON CENTRAL SECRETARIAT 13
Specification
•: Contractor shall apply Stone Impregnation primer/
sealer coat on back side and all edges (after cutting
the stone as per size) of stones as per manufacturer's
specification.
• Stones shall be free from cracks, lines, stains, white
spots of efflorescence and even in shade for all kind Hairline crack
of stone work.
• Pure white marble Flooring: Providing and laying
minimum 30mm thick texture finish or polished pure
white, first quality Ambaji marble (stone of required
size, shape, finish of approved type and shade) for
flooring/ flooring with bend/ strip or any other shape
Selected marble should not have hairline cracks.
and pattern as per design/ drawing. Marble shall be
laid over 20 mm (average) thick base of cement
mortar 1:5 (1 cement: 5 coarse sand), fixed with
stone fixing adhesive of approved make. Stone shall
be fixed with provision of 3mm to 5mm groove and
grouting the same with epoxy grout of approved
make and shade
• The thickness of inlay material shall be as per BOQ
specifications. While applying the adhesive for
marble or other stone inlay, color of marble or other
stone shall not get varied.
• Pure white marble shall be of first quality without
grain and as per approved sample. Selected marble should be free from Stains.
• Inlay pattern shall be done with CNC cutting
machine/ laser cutting/ manual or by any means as
per concept image or drawing.
Efflorescence
Selected marble should be free from white spots of

Efflorescence.
Marble to be laid o floor instead of placing it Selected marble should have even tone of colour
vertically to check the overall effect of a laid flooring throughout the marble.
material.
155
Part-B
Page 369
VENEER
DATASHEET
Part-B
Page 370
GENERIC DATASHEET: VENEER CENTRAL VISTA – COMMON CENTRAL SECRETARIAT 13
Veneer sheet should not have blisters,

Specification Notes: cracks/holes which can result into
delamination.
•All veneer for furniture and interior work
shall be Natural (American Walnut,
Mahogany, Rosewood)/ Teak Veneer
having flitch/ slice thickness of 0.50 mm
and base substrate/ backing on which the
veneer is glued should be 3.5mm.
•The Grain direction can be Quarter cut or
Crown cut.
•Direction of grains should be tight with
reasonably straight.
•Base substrate should only be high grade
Gurjan Plywood. Glue used should be of
Low VOC, Urea Free and Water based. The Veneer should have reasonably tight and
type of veneer i.e. the species should be straight grains.
Premium Quality and Group A (matching
group, straight line veneer) only.
•Selection of veneer should be of uniform Veneer with uniform
color throughout the sheet with no dead and closer grains.
knots, cracks, holes , blisters and
sapwood.
Preferred Selection
•The veneer extracted from the logs should
be straight with no twisting or bending and
minimal taper or fluting.
Veneer with uniform

and wider grains.
Acceptable
Veneer with non –

uniform grains
Non-Acceptable
Veneer Thickness
0.5mm Thick Veneer

Flitch (glued on Base
Substrate)
3.5 mm thick Gurjan
Plywood as
Base substrate.
157
Part-B
Page 371
Veneer Assessment:
Cracks and split at the edge
Change in colour
Shakes and split at the

edges
Bulged Edges
Shakes at the edge
158
Part-B
Page 372
Veneer Assessment:
106 –15 176A –10 181A –40
Break in Uniform vertical Non uniform Veneer color in Reasonably closed vertical
Grains by a Horizontal Line. single sheet. grains
with uniform color and no
Defects such as cracks, knots,
179– 141– etc106 –5
33 80
Reasonably closed vertical Break in Uniform close

Break in Uniform close
grains with uniform color vertical Grains by a
vertical Grains by a
and no Defects such as Horizontal Line.
Horizontal Line.
cracks, knots, etc
159
Part-B
Page 373
Veneer Assessment:
173 –29 139 A – 141A – 78

24
Change In Veneer color in Reasonably closed vertical Reasonably closed vertical

single sheet . grains with uniform color and grains with uniform color and
no no
Defects such as cracks, knots, Defects such as cracks, knots,
etc etc
140 –19
Uniform closed vertical grains

with uniform color and no
Defects such as cracks, knots,
etc
160
Part-B
Page 374
VENEER INLAY & POLISH SPECIFICATION

DATASHEET
161
Part-B
Page 375
GENERIC DATASHEET: VENEER INLAY & POLISH SPECIFICATION CENTRAL VISTA – COMMON CENTRAL SECRETARIAT 13
Fillers In the pores
After Before
Walnut-colored Fills and colors Stained and Unstained and unstained and
grain filler stains only the pores of washcoated unsealed wood washcoated Stained and
and fills the the washcoated wood. wood. washcoated
unsealed wood. wood. Wood.
French polishis a process, not a material. The main material is shellac, although there are several other shellac-
based finishes, not all of which class as French polishing. The French Polish technique is an excellent method to
accent exotic wood grain.
Pieces of veneer used for the large dark petals were cut new finish was applied over the entire top using a
from the same piece of wood. French polish technique. This technique employs hand
rubbing shellac, an alcohol-based finish.
Banding and Stringing
Stringing and Banding are sometimes Used interchangeably,

but technically, stringing implies narrower lines and banding
refers to wider and more intricate designs.
162
Part-B
Page 376
Taping a couple of pieces of veneer in a stack, use Similar technique to make perfect miter joints at
a veneer saw and an MDF straightedge. the corners, cutting both stringing and banding
at once.
Make a cutting board as shown, plus a hardwood Pull blue tape across the miter joints, and across
cutting guide the width of your desired bandings. the all the edges.
Hold the guide and the veneer firmly against the
stop on the cutting board.
Stick it down.With a strip of overhanging blue After running long pieces down the joints, burnish
tape on the show face, you flip the sheet over down all the tape with a brass-bristled brush for a
and simply stick on the stringing and banding, strong bond.
Stringing can have butt joints, but where the 2- Remove the blue tape from the show face, and
ft.-long bandings come up short, use an angled replace it with 3/4-in. veneer tape.
cut to hide the joint.
163
Part-B
Page 377
Throw the sheet under a piece of MDF to stay flat. Make slightly taller stringing, which is easier
When it’s dry, flip the sheet and remove the blue to inlay on the tablesaw, sizing it to fit the
tape on the glue face groove,
Get a first reference edge straight and flush Make a little planing jig like this one, with a low
with your banding, you can shim the panel on a stop, and add pieces of double-stick tape to keep
crosscut sled (below). the stringing from bowing as you plane it.
After the solid edging is sanded flush, rout a Mark these at the corner joints (above), using a
1/16-in.-wide groove that straddles the glue sanding block or disk sander to make the tiny
joint. miters.
Finish up the corners with a narrow chisel and the glue into the groove, press in the stringing, and
scalpel. then seat it fully using a small hammer and a wood
block .
164
Part-B
Page 378
Cross Banding Checkered Banding
Macassar ebony for crossbanding, as it the Checkered banding dark and light colors work well for
seams between the short pieces. this type of banding, in this case maple and wenge.
Cut the two long edges of the stack parallel before Cut six strips of each color, and join them in pairs
trimming one end square first by pulling blue tape across the seams.
Make a series of light passes for each cut, with a Crosscut your bandings.squaring one end of the
short reverse cut before each pass. sheet, use the banding jig again.
Installation starts at the center.Install a line of

stringing first, as before. Then mark the center points
of each edge, and start adding the crossbanding .
165
Part-B
Page 379
AREA RUG
DATASHEET
Part-B
Page 380
GENERIC DATASHEET: AREA RUG CENTRAL VISTA – COMMON CENTRAL SECRETARIAT 13
GENERAL NOTES :
CONTEXT:
1. This document is an annexure to the furniture package and to be read alongside with furniture
presentation, drawings and layouts etc.
2. This document unless stamped and signed ‘good for construction’ by all agencies concerned, shall not
be used for any site works, procurement of materials or for any other activity.
3. Personalized attention & technical contributions from the carpet/area rugs manufacture’s
and design team’s heads make a big difference in achieving the fine quality expected.
4. Requires fine tuned understanding between designers and manufacturer. This can be
judged based on past work experience.
5. These area rugs shall be durable, sturdy, long lasting.
6. The contents of this documents are for design intent reference purpose only.
7. This page to be read along with general specifications.
8. This document is to be read in conjunction with all relevant services & facility planning image.
9. The locations, quantities, sizes of all items to be cross checked on relevant supporting image.
INSTRUCTION
1. The unit shall be manufactured in parts at factory outlet.

2. Team of Kaarigar (skilled workers) for Weaving of Area rugs/Carpets must be highly skilled.
3. All measurements must be checked and verified by the contractors prior to execution of work.
4. Onsite measurement shall be taken before manufacturing any items.
5. Mock up shall be combination of as per below-
Step-1: Offsite Mock-up of loose items.
Step-2: Virtual mock-up & prototype development in parts/full with detail information.
Step-3: Virtual mock-up in combination of services routes of Electrical/ELV/HVAC etc.
Step-4: After prototype approval final mock-up shall be prepared.
167
Part-B
Page 381
FOLLOWING STAGES TO BE FOLLOWED FOR MANUFACTURING OF HIGH

QUALITY AREA RUGS.
168
Part-B
Page 382
GENERIC DATASHEETS-AREA RUGS SAMPLE PRODUCT IMAGES:

PRODUCT DIMENSIONS:
LENGTH As per Layout
WIDTH As per Layout
CATEGORY BY SPECIFICATIONS :
CATEGORY 1 : Dhurry / Flat Weaves
• Dhurry as per the approved design and
colour made out of 100% hand carded
wool of approved quality and
specification all complete as per direction
of the engineer in charge
• Type :Woolen Dhurrie
• Fibre Content - 100% Wool
• Construction Style - Punja/ Pit loom
Style
• Construction - Flat Weaves
• Pile Fibre - Wool • Quality : 11/11 RWB
• Pile Height - Flat • Knots per square Inch : 121 Knots
• Fibre Content : 42% Wool & 58%
CATEGORY 2 : Hand Knotted mix of Wool Bamboo Silk
& Silk 196 Knots per square inch • Knotting Style :Persian
• Make in India area rug/carpet as per the • Construction : Hand Knotted
approved design and colour made out • Pile Fibre: Wool & Bamboo Silk
pure wool (Newzeland wool or Indian • Quality Details : 11/11 Wool & Bamboo
wool, hand carded/hand spun wool) and Silk
mix of silk of approved quality and • Pile Height : Minimum 8mm
specification, having minimum pile • Base : Cotton
height of 8mm & 196 knots as per CATEGORY 4: Hand Knotted 100% Wool
mentioned, hand knotted 121 Knots per square inch
construction/weaving technique, as per • Hand Knotted 100% Wool 121 Knots per
the specified shape and size all complete square inch Supply and stacking of Make In
as per direction of the Engineer in India area rug/carpet as per the approved
charge. design and color made out pure wool
• Quality : 14/14 HS WS (Newzeland wool or Indian wool, hand
• Knots per square Inch : 196 Knots carded/hand spun wool) of approved quality
• Fibre Content : 30% Wool 70% Silk and specification, having pile height of
• Knotting Style :Persian minimum 8mm having 121 knots, hand
• Construction : Hand Knotted knotted construction/weaving technique, as
• Pile Fibre: Wool & Silk per the specified shape and size, Installation,
• Quality Details : 14/14 Wool Silk transportation and carriage all complete as
• Pile Height : Minimum 8mm per direction of the Engineer in charge.
• Base : Cotton • Quality: 11/11 RWB
CATEGORY 3: Hand Knotted Mix of Wool
• Knots per square Inch: 121 Knots
& bamboo Silk 121 Knots per square inch
• Fibre Content: 100% Wool
• Knotting Style: Persian
• Make In India area rug/carpet as per the • Construction: Hand Knotted
approved design and color made out • Pile Fibre: Wool
pure wool (Newzeland wool or Indian • Quality Details: 11/11 Wool
wool, hand carded/hand spun wool) and • Pile Height: Minimum 8mm
mix of bamboo silk of approved quality • Base: Cotton
and specification, having pile height of
minimum 8mm having 121 knots , hand • Note: Item shall be fabricated as per provided
knotted construction/weaving technique, intent image and specification. The rate shall be
as per the specified shape and size, for complete item inclusive of all material, labour,
Installation, transportation and carriage wastages, necessary tools & tackles of approved
all complete as per direction of the make for all floors, all heights, all levels and all
Engineer in charge. places within campus. The rate shall be sq.mtr.
169
Part-B
Page 383
DATASHEETS-AREA RUGS PREFERRED DESIGNS: PRODUCT IMAGES

CATEGORY BY SPECIFICATIONS:
CATEGORY 5 : Hand Knotted mix of Wool
& Silk 220 Knots per square inch
• Make in India area rug/carpet as per the
approved design and colour made out
pure wool (Newzeland wool or Indian
wool, hand carded/hand spun wool) and
mix of silk of approved quality and
specification, having minimum pile height
of 8mm & 220 knots as per mentioned,
hand knotted construction/weaving
technique, as per the specified shape and
size all complete as per direction of the
Engineer in charge.
• Quality : 14/14 HS WS
• Knots per square Inch : 220 Knots
• Fibre Content : 30% Wool 70% Silk
• Knotting Style :Persian
• Construction : Hand Knotted
• Pile Fibre: Wool & Silk
• Quality Details : 14/14 Wool Silk
• Pile Height : Minimum 8mm
• Base : Cotton
CATEGORY 6: Hand tufted mix of wool

and bamboo silk / Hand tufted 100%
wool
• Area rug as per the approved design and
colour made from mix of wool and bamboo
silk. Or 100% wool, Hand carded wool of
approved quality and specifications all
complete as per direction of the engineer
in charge
• 38% Wool And 62% Bamboo silk or 100%
wool as per the typology
• modern
• hand tufted
• Indoor use onlyColour: Ashwood / Honey
• Make In India area rug/carpet as per the
approved design and color made out pure
wool (Newzeland wool or Indian wool,
hand carded/hand spun wool) & bamboo
silk of approved quality and specification,
having pile height of minimum 12mm
having 32 to 54 Tuf Per sq. Inch, hand
tufted construction technique, as per the
specified shape and size, Installation,
transportation and carriage all complete
as per direction of the Engineer in charge.
• -Quality :wool & bamboo silk Tufted
• -Tuft per square inch :Minimum 12 Pick
fabric to 16 Pick Fabric & 32 to 54 Tuf Per
sq. Inch NOTE: Item shall be manufactured as per
• -Fibre Content :Mix of wool & bamboo silk provided intent image and specification.
• -Construction : Hand Tufted The rate shall be for complete item
• -Pile Fibre: wool & bamboo silk or !00% inclusive of all material, labour, wastages,
Wool As per the Typology necessary tools & tackles of approved
• -Pile Height : Minimum 12mm make for all floors, all heights, all levels
• -Base : Cotton and all places within campus.
170
Part-B
Page 384
CATEGORY BY DESIGN TYPE :

CATEGORY 2 : With Contrasting Border
CATEGORY 1 : With Self-colour Border
• Reference Image for borders having subtle
• No contrast for border and the body of the contrast in respect to the body achieving
area rug. calming look not irritating to the eye.
• Detail in Weaving wool and silk carpets • Detail in Weaving wool and silk carpets
would have such details. would have such details.
CATEGORY 3 : Without Border
• Reference Images for rugs without

highlighting borders.
171
Part-B
Page 385
CATEGORY 3 : Without Border NOT PREFERRED DESIGNS:
Reference Images of Non preferred

designs for area rugs.
• The medallion style of design which is

dominated by a single symmetrical
centre piece, such as a star-shaped,
circular, quarter-foiled, or octagonal
figure must be avoided and the
selections should not be preferred.
• The distressed style of carpets

achieving a worn-out/faded look shall
not be preferred and must be avoided.
172
Part-B
Page 386
SCALE: EDGE:
Distance = X Units
TYPE 1 : Bound Edge
Reference Image : Bounded edge

Reference Image-Area Rug
• Carpet binding folded over the edge of
a rug and stitched on with a binding
machine. The finished width is
approximate. ¼ to 3/8 inch, or 1 1/2″
with a cotton canvas binding. The
colors are generally matched close to
Scale Of Motif/Pattern : the field color of the rug so the edge
If the size of the area rug to be is not noticeable and just finished
considered as X units, nicely.
• Preferred Motif size to be
considered in the range of 1/40 to TYPE 2 : Seared Edge
1/60 X units for most suited
proportions . • A seared edge with a continuous wrap
• Motif scale ranging more than of yarn that wraps around the edge of
1/30 X units must be avoided. a rug. The finished width is
approximate 3/8 inch.
Scale Of Border : Reference Image : Serged edge

If the size of the area rug to be
considered as X units,
• Preferred border size to be
considered in the range of 1/10 to
1/15 X Units
Distance = X Units
1/X
Units
Reference Image - Area Rug
173
Part-B
Page 387
CEILING
DATASHEET
Part-B
Page 388
GENERIC DATASHEET: CEILING CENTRAL VISTA – COMMON CENTRAL SECRETARIAT 13
DETAIL IMAGES :
CURVED CEILING SECTION
FLAT CEILING SECTION

175
Part-B
Page 389
DETAIL IMAGES :
CURVED CEILING DETAIL SECTION
176
Part-B
Page 390
CATEGORY A – CURVED CEILING + SHLOKAS/CONSTITUTION
S.W Moulding
Shlokas/Constitution
text
S.W. moulding on upper and lower edges running across curved ceiling borders + shlokas /constitution text .

• Dimensions shall be coordinated with the onsite team.
• Solid wood moulding shall be fixed on the wall as per the reference images
• The contents of this document are for design intent reference or as per the sample approved.
purposes only. • Minimum 12mm thick solid wood plank shall be fixed at the edges as per the
• This document to be read along with technical specifications and reference images.
furniture coding plan. • Solid Wood: Teak wood of best quality, seasoned, treated for anti-termite,
• This locations, quantities, sizes of all items to be cross checked on selected and sorted for uniform veins shall be used.
relevant supporting drawings. • All Wooden joinery and detailing shall be as per the reference images or
• Any colored images are indicative only. approved design pattern.
• Proposed items should be similar or equal to the item specified. • Polish: Exterior Grade water Base PU polish on all surfaces of veneer and
wood.
177
Part-B
Page 391
CATEGORY B – CURVED CEILING + POP MOULDING
POP Moulding Pattern on ceiling.

• Dimensions shall be coordinated with the onsite team. • Pre approved Pop Cornice/moulding designs shall be fixed on the
• The contents of this document are for design intent reference ceiling or wall junctions as per the reference images.
purposes only.
• This document to be read along with technical specifications and
furniture coding plan.
• This locations, quantities, sizes of all items to be cross checked on
relevant supporting drawings.
• Proposed items should be similar or equal to the item specified.
178
Part-B
Page 392
CATEGORY C – PLAIN CURVED CEILING

• The contents of this document are for design intent reference • Solid wood moulding shall be fixed on the wall as per the reference images
purposes only. or as per the sample approved.
• Minimum 12mm thick solid wood plank shall be fixed at the edges as per the
wood.
179
Part-B
Page 393
CATEGORY D – CURVED CEILING + WALL PAPER
Description Design Intent Description Description

Forms composed of lotus Source – Unknown Forms composed of lotus icons Forms composed of lotus
icons with buds and Material– Wall Paint with buds and leaves. icons with buds and
leaves. leaves.

• Solid wood moulding shall be fixed on the wall as per the reference images
• The contents of this document are for design intent reference or as per the sample approved.
purposes only. • Minimum 12mm thick solid wood plank shall be fixed at the edges as per the
wood.
• Approved wall paint on the cornice unit as per the reference images.
180
Part-B
Page 394
CATEGORY D – CURVED CEILING + HAND PAINT
Type 1
1. World map on curved ceiling.

• World map wallpaper shall be fixed on the cornice as per the reference
• The contents of this document are for design intent reference images.
purposes only.
181
Part-B
Page 395
CATEGORY E – FLAT VEENER CEILING
Type 1
Flat veneer ceiling with grooves as per reference image.

• Dimensions shall be coordinated with the onsite team. • FORM
• The contents of this document are for design intent reference • Veneer ceiling shall be as per reference images.
purposes only. • STRUCTURE
• The base shall have ply fixed on the GI or MS frame work as per the reference
• This document to be read along with technical specifications and images.
furniture coding plan. • Veneer shall be fixed on the ply with the adhesive + groove pattern as per the
• This locations, quantities, sizes of all items to be cross checked on sample approved.
relevant supporting drawings. • MATERIAL
• Any colored images are indicative only. • Veneer: Premium natural wood veneers with consistent color and grain structure as
• Proposed items should be similar or equal to the item specified. per sample approved by the Architect.
• FINISH
• Polish: Exterior Grade water Base PU polish on all surfaces of veneer and wood.
182
Part-B
Page 396
CATEGORY F – MOISURE RESISTANT GYPSUM CEILING

• Pre approved Pop Cornice/moulding designs shall be fixed on the
• The contents of this document are for design intent reference ceiling or wall junctions as per the reference images.
purposes only.
183
Part-B
Page 397
CATEGORY G – MICRO PERFORATED GYPSUM CEILING

• Dimensions shall be coordinated with the onsite team. • Providing and fixing Suspended Perforated Gypsum board (having end
• The contents of this document are for design intent reference to end perforation) false ceiling system comprising 12.5 mm gypsum
purposes only. core, with a geometric array of 3 to 8 mm perforations of any shape.
184
Part-B
Page 398
CATEGORY H – MICRO PERFORATED GYPSUM CEILING + WALLPAPER
Wallpaper on gypsum ceiling

• Dimensions shall be coordinated with the onsite team. • Wallpaper / Vinyl wall covering Providing and fixing Decorative Wall
• The contents of this document are for design intent reference Paper /Non-Woven /Solid Sheet Vinyl / Easy-Walls / Vinyl Coated Paper
purposes only. of approved make and as per approved sample on gypsum partition
• This document to be read along with technical specifications and • The wall paper adhesives used must be designed for fixing the
furniture coding plan. wallpaper coverings & stricly follow the environmental and safety
• This locations, quantities, sizes of all items to be cross checked on standards.
relevant supporting drawings. • The wall paper shall be fixed in any shape, length & size match to
• Any colored images are indicative only. pattern continued across the width of the wallpaper. This means that
• Proposed items should be similar or equal to the item specified. the pattern continues across the seam and matched to the same point
of the pattern on the next strip.
185
Part-B
Page 399
CATEGORY I – GYPSUM CEILING + HAND PAINT
Hand Painted ceiling

• The contents of this document are for design intent reference
purposes only.
186
Part-B
Page 400
CATEGORY J – MICRO PERFORATED GYPSUM CEILING + PLAIN

GYPSUM CEILING

• Dimensions shall be coordinated with the onsite team. • Providing and fixing Suspended Perforated Gypsum board (having end
• The contents of this document are for design intent reference to end perforation) false ceiling system comprising 12.5 mm gypsum
purposes only. core, with a geometric array of 3 to 8 mm perforations of any shape.
187
Part-B
Page 401
CATEGORY K – BAFFLE CEILING

• Dimensions shall be coordinated with the onsite team. • Providing & fixing suspended vertical linear baffle ceiling system
• The contents of this document are for design intent reference made out of min 0.6mm powder coated roll formed aluminum U shape
purposes only. baffle in Aluminium alloy grade AA 3105.
• This document to be read along with technical specifications and • The baffle blade shall be in size of 100/150 x 50 x minimum 3000mm
furniture coding plan. (except at openable portion and residue) in powder coated to plain
• This locations, quantities, sizes of all items to be cross checked on finish of approved shade with centre to centre spacing 150 mm.
188
Part-B
Page 402
CATEGORY L – OPEN GRID CEILING
Reference image Ceiling detail for termination of open cells

• Dimensions shall be coordinated with the onsite team. • Providing and fixing horizontal level Open cell Aluminum lay-in ceiling
• The contents of this document are for design intent reference tiles with border panels forming board edge of size 600 x 600 x 38mm
purposes only. (Nominal) having cell size of 100 x 100mm.
189
Part-B
Page 403
WALLPAPER APPLICATION
DATASHEET
Part-B
Page 404
GENERIC DATASHEET: WALLPAPER APPLICATION CENTRAL VISTA – COMMON CENTRAL SECRETARIAT 13
Types of Wallpaper:
Alignment:
In terms of Design, types of wallpaper are as • Pattern to be always aligned to the
below: centre of the Panel into consideration
- Textured pattern • Patterns need to be matched and well
- Self Coloured pattern aligned together. That requires a good
- Motif pattern deal of accuracy
• Alignment to adjacent roll to be
In terms of material: matched continuously to have seamless
Decorative Wall Paper/Non-Woven /Solid pattern with hairline joint in between.
Sheet Vinyl / Easy-Walls / Vinyl Coated
Paper/ Fabric backed Vinyl Paper wall paper
MOTIF TO MATCH
Application : CENTERLINE OF PANEL
Application directly on Levelled wall As

Mentioned Below :
A) Application wallpaper with moulding

Frame Around.
Wallpaper shall be pasted directly on

levelled wall surface.
Surface shall be well-prepared as per
standards provided in Care Instructions
As per design intent, Solid Wood decorative

moulding shall be provided as a frame on
all sides of wallpaper edges.
Ensure that the color of the moulding

matches the color of wallpaper/Wooden
polish Adjacent to the moulding.
Hairline joint
Seamless joint shall be provided between two rolls of

wallpaper.
191
Part-B
Page 405
Application Application – Corner joints:
B) Entire wall surface Without Moulding Corner joints to have seamless joints of
pattern. In order to achieve that below
Wallpaper shall be pasted directly on steps to be followed
levelled wall surface.
Surface shall be well-prepared as per 1. First sheet to have overlap of 1/8” to
standards provided in Care Instructions. the corner
2. Sheet to be put up on adjacent wall
with overlap
3. Slide taping knife behind paper until it
hits corner
4. Trim top layer of paper do it dies right
at corner. Be careful not to cur paper
underneath.
Application – Borders, Paintable

wallcoverings, decals:
• Borders are applied the same way as
wallcoverings. The glue needs to be applied to
the back of the border and then installed on to
the wall. Since borders are usually long
horizontal strips, mark out the horizontal level
on the wall before installing.
• Paintable wallcoverings should be top coated
with 1 or 2 coats of Asian Paints Royale or
Royale Glitter, using a roller.
• Decals are pre-pasted and can simply be
peeled from the packaging housing and pasted
directly.
192
Part-B
Page 406
Care Instructions:
Step I - Surface Preparation
• The surface preparation shall be as per the

below instructions
• The surface shall be free from any
undulation/ Mortar dropping and other
foreign matter.
• The wall surface should be levelled and
checked with leveler. There should be no
damp.
• The surface shall be treat with the POP
punning.
• The surface needs to be dry, clean, even,
stable, adhesive and absorbent.
• The surface shall be Even and Sandpapered
smooth ETC. With priming coat of Alkali
Resistance Primer Tobe applied on Acrylic
Putty.
• Note: The company representative shall
review and check the surface preparation.
Step II - Glue Application
1. Ensure the wall is completely dry before

application. Apply one coat of Adhesive on
the wall or on the back of the wallcovering.
If required a wet sponge may be used to
remove excess glue from the wallcovering
immediately after application.
2. Apply Glue To The Wall

Apply the glue to Glue is applied to
• The glue is applied to the wall before the wall before the back of the
installing the wallcovering. installing wallcovering
wallcoverings before
3. Apply Glue To The Wallcovering installation
• The glue is applied to the back of the

wallcovering before installation.
• The wallpaper is folded onto itself and left for
few minutes to activate glue.
Step III – Installation
• After preparing the surface, follow these

steps:
STEP 1: Hang the first strip using a plumb line

to get a perfect vertical.
STEP 2: Smoothen out all the bubbles using

Wallcovering Smoother or Smart Care Roller as
required.
STEP 3: Hang the subsequent strips relative to

the first strip, matching pattern as required.
• For better finish with thinner papers and Step 1 Step 2 Step 3
poorer quality walls of the wall can be cross-
lined (horizontally) with lining paper first. General Notes:
• Accurate room measurement along with
number door and window openings is • Ensure that Adhesive shall be used of the Asian
essential for ordering wallpaper. Paint Nilaya / Pidilite or equivalent company As per
• Large drops, or repeat, in a pattern can be the approved make list.
cut and hung more economically by working • The installation of the wallpaper is to be done by the
from alternating rolls of papers. company’s technician or As per the company
recommendation.
193
Part-B
Page 407
FABRIC WALL PANELING

DATASHEET
Part-B
Page 408
GENERIC DATASHEET: FABRIC WALL PANELING CENTRAL VISTA – COMMON CENTRAL SECRETARIAT 13
Selection of Fabric:
• The longest width of the fabric needs to
be selected .
• Minimum 20,000 Martindale fabric’s
abrasion resistance is suggested to use
for the fabric wall panelling. (Drapery
fabric should never be used for the
panelling purpose)
Types of Fabric Wall paneling:
In terms of Design, types of Fabric wall

panelling are as below: Entire fabric wall panelling without moulding
1. Entire fabric wall panelling without

moulding frame around
2. Fabric wall panelling with Heavy border

in between two panel
Two Pieces of same fabric are joined by

Artistic borders.
Alignment :
1. Entire fabric wall panelling without

moulding
• The alignment of the panelling to be

always placed according to the equal
divisions of the wall length.
Fabric Border in between the panel should have

at least 2.5” to 3.5” width maximum
The look of the wrapped panel which is limited
by the size of their substrate.
2. Fabric wall panelling with Heavy border
• The alignment of the panelling to be

placed according to the approved wall
panelling layout.
Fabric wall panelling with moulding
195
Part-B
Page 409
Application and installation:

• 12mm ply will be fixed on the wall with
the help of screw.
• Gripper framed shall be fixed on play

backing.
• The filler material shall be as per the

approved make with necessary acoustic
property and thickness shall be
8/10/12mm or as per the Approved by
the Architect (Acoustic foam, semi-rigid
polyester board or Fibre Glass.)
• The Fabric is stretched over the Filler

material and held taut by the Frame with BACKING
the help of gripper. PLY
• Note: The Fabric surface shall be free

from any ripping or sagging.
GRIPPER
Gripper Frame:
The fabric Gripper system consist of a set of
engineered profile or track that provide a frame
work between which an absorber is filled for FILLER
acoustic application. Recommended Made of MATERIAL
high-impact, crush-proof plastic (UPVC)
gripper or As per the Sample approved by the
architect.
• The fabric gripper shall Holds the Fabric in

place
• The Gripper shall be Fixed With Dry wall

screw on the Backing Ply.
• Type – A ½” gripper is recommended For

entire wall paneling
•Type – B ½” gripper is recommended For

Fabric wall paneling With Heavy border Type - A Type - B
½” Square Low leg ½” Square edge side load

This profile is preferable for This profile is preferable for Fabric
Fabric paneling without paneling with moulding
moulding
196
Part-B
Page 410
Stages For the Installation Types of Edges
Step -1
Backing Ply Preferred Edge
Step -2
Gripper frame installation
Step -3
Filler Material
Step -4
Fabric Application
197
Part-B
Page 411
WAINSCOTING
DATASHEET
198
Part-B
Page 412
GENERIC DATASHEET: WAINSCOTING CENTRAL VISTA – COMMON CENTRAL SECRETARIAT 13
TYPE A –Wooden Wainscoting with 100mm skirting
Detail A
Elevation
100 mm Skirting
Detail A
Notes / Remarks:

team.
item specified.
199
Part-B
Page 413
TYPE A –Wooden Wainscoting with 200mm skirting
Detail A
Elevation
200 mm Skirting
Detail A
Notes / Remarks:

team.
item specified.
200
Part-B
Page 414
TYPE B –Wooden Wainscoting with 100mm skirting
Detail A
Elevation
100 mm Skirting
Detail A
Notes / Remarks:

team.
item specified.
201
Part-B
Page 415
TYPE B –Wooden Wainscoting with 200mm skirting
Detail A
Elevation
200 mm Skirting
Detail A
Notes / Remarks:

team.
item specified.
202
Part-B
Page 416
Typical Wainscoting and

Window Elevation
Top rail:
TYPE 1 Exploded view 50x50mm
Solid wood ribs in a module of

80x0mm
Rib width 10mm
Mid rail:
20x10mm
Wainscoting panel: Size 450x600mm

Veneer applied on backing in module of
450x600
Solid wood beading of 40x20mm section
Backing 19mm thick plywood

throughout the height of wainscoting
Baseboard / Skirting in Solid wood
200x30mm
TYPE 2 Exploded view Top rail: 75 x

45mm
4mm thick veneer +12 mm

thick plywood base
4mm thick veneer +12 mm
thick plywood base
Solid wood beading of 50 x 16mm
section
Backing
12mm thick plywood throughout
the height of wainscoting
Baseboard / Skirting in Solid wood
200x30mm
203
Part-B
Page 417
Veneer Panel Module
Possibilities of Veneer application by changing grain

direction
Possibilities of Moulding and Veneer application

grain direction.
Ribs Module
50 Option A Option B Option C
Solid wood ribs in a module of 80 x 50mm

Width and depth of each rib 10x10mm
Option D Option E Option F
204
Part-B
Page 418
Part-B
Page 419
Construction of Common Central Secretariat (Building – 13) at New Delhi
FABRIC SELECTION PACKAGE – COMMON CENTRAL SECRETARIAT 13

9th September 2023
FABRIC SELECTION DESIGN PROJECT RUDRAKSH DRAWN

DATE: 9.09.2023 INTERIOR NIMMI M.
PACKAGE MANAGER: MANAGER: DADHEECH BY:
ARCHITECT:
HARDIK PROJECT RAKESH RAJPUT/
19052-11-00-ID-CU-I001 STATUS: FOR EXECUTION BHAGYASHREE H. CHECKED BY: PRIYANKA P.
VYAS DETAILER: ALPESH PATEL
Submitted to
Report created by

Part-B
Page 420
CCS 13
Common Central Secretariat 13
Part-B
Page 421
Ground Floor – Lift lobby
S-SF-32_LB
Sofa
Overall sofa
Selection 1 ( Preferred )
Selection 2 Selection 3
Company : Pure by Asian Paints Company : FabricHaus Company : Ador by AP

Collection : Essentials Nine – Phantom Collection : Upholstrey 4 Design : Benito
Design : Plaza Overcast Design : Venus HFR Code : CHEB004
Code : 102706 Code : 60591
Part-B
Page 422
Ground Floor – Typical Waiting Area
S-SF-31_RC
Two seater Sofa
S-SF-50_RC
Single Seater Sofa
S-SF-35_RC
Three seater Sofa
Both overall two and three seater sofas Overall single seater sofa
Selection 1 ( Preferred ) Selection 1 ( Preferred )
Selection 2 Selection 3 Selection 2 Selection 3
Company : Ador by Asian Paints Company : Drape Shoppe Company : Pure

Collection : Chelmsford II Collection : Essentials 42 Collection : Essentials 12 -
Company : Ador by Asian Paints Company : Fabric Haus Company : Pure – Yashvi Matka
Design : Amherst
Collection : Chelmsford II Collection : Upholstery 4 Collection : Essentials 9 – Design : Yashvi Spice Design : Apricot
Code : AMH0014
Design : Benito Design : Grotto Echo Phantom Code : 114001 Code : 104738
Code : CHEB002 Code : 60567 Design : Clarke Tarmac
Code : 102703
Part-B
Page 423
Ground Floor – Conference Room 40PAX
S-CH-96_CR2
Back Chair
Overall chair Wall Panel Fabric

Company : D DÉCOR Company : The pure concept Company : Drape Shoppe

Company : Pure by Asian Paints Company : Drape Shoppe Company: Fabric care by D Collection : Fabric Care Collection : Wabi Sabi Plains Collection : Essentials 42 -
Collection : Essentials Nine – Phantom Collection : Essentials 42 - Décor Design : Vivienne 35 Design : Curtis Millet Yashvi
Design : Plaza Olive Yashvi Product – Vivienne 25 Shade : 2178 Shade : 1261 Design : Yashvi Taupe
Code : 102708 Design : Yashvi Umber Shade – 2286 Shade : 114006
Code : 114034
Part-B
Page 424
S-CH-96_CR2
Back Chair
Overall chair
Wall Panel Fabric
Company : Pure by Asian Paints Company : Drape Shoppe Company - Fabric care by D
Collection : Essentials Nine – Phantom Collection : Essentials 42 - Décor
Design : Plaza Olive Yashvi Product – Vivienne 25 Company : D DÉCOR Company : The pure concept Company : Drape Shoppe
Code : 102708 Design : Yashvi Umber Shade – 2286 Collection : Fabric Care Collection : Wabi Sabi Plains Collection : Essentials 42 -
Code : 114034 Design : Vivienne 35 Design : Curtis Millet Yashvi
Shade : 2178 Shade : 1261 Design : Yashvi Taupe
Shade : 114006
Part-B
Page 425
S-CH-96_CR
Back Chair
Overall chair Wall Panel Fabric

Company : D DÉCOR Company : The pure concept Company : Drape Shoppe

Company : Pure by Asian Paints Company : Drape Shoppe Company - Fabric care by D Collection : Fabric Care Collection : Wabi Sabi Plains Collection : Essentials 42 -
Collection : Essentials Nine – Phantom Collection : Essentials 42 - Décor Design : Vivienne 35 Design : Curtis Millet Yashvi
Design : Plaza Olive Yashvi Product – Vivienne 25 Shade : 2178 Shade : 1261 Design : Yashvi Taupe
Code : 102708 Design : Yashvi Umber Shade – 2286 Shade : 114006
Code : 114034
Part-B
Page 426
Ground Floor – Director’s office
S-SF-01_DIR-OF
Single Seater Sofa
Overall single seater sofa

Company - Atmosphere: Fabric Haus Company : Pure by Asian Paints

Company : Ador by AP
Catalogue – Upholstery-IV Collection : Essentials 9 – Phantom
Design : Benito
Design– Venus HFR Design : Plaza Olive
Code : CHEB005
Code – 60588 Code : 102708
Part-B
Page 427
Ground Floor – AJS office
Overall two seater sofa

Selection 2
S-SF-11_AJS-OF
Two seater Sofa
Company – Ador Company : Pure

Product – Benito Collection : Essentials 9 - Phantom
Code – CHEB005 Design : Clarke India Ink
Code : 102736
S-SF-12_AJS-PA
S-SF-10_AJS-OF Two Seater Sofa
Single seater Sofa
Overall single seater sofa
Company - Ador Company - The Pure Concept Company - Fabric care by D Company - RR Décor Company : Drape Shoppe Company - The Pure Concept
Product – Richmond Collection – Wabi Sabi Plains Décor Catalogue - Arezzo Collection : Essentials 42 Collection – Wabi Sabi Plains
Code – RIC0008 Product – Curtis Mint Product – Vivienne 07 Design– Adaan – Yashvi Product – Curtis Seawed
Part-B Design : Yashvi Thyme
Code – 1290 Shade – 2284 Shade – New Leaf Code – 1285
Page 428 Code : 114024
Ground Floor – Workhall
S-SF-01_DIR-OF
Single Seater Sofa
Overall sofa
Company : Vaya Company : Pure Company : Ador by

Collection : Kasturi Collection : Essentials 9 Asian Paints
Design : Allure - Phantom Collection : Chelmsford II
Design : Clarke India Ink Design : Benito
Code : 102736 Code : CHEB002
Part-B
Page 429
Ground Floor – Minister’s Chamber
Overall chair S-CH-27_MI-OF

Visitor’s Chair
S-CH-27_MI-OF
Visitor’s Chair
Overall Chair
Company : Atmosphere Company : Vaya Company : Pure Concept

Selection 2 Selection 3 Product: Glimpse Design : Bel Air Collection : Wabi Sabi Plains
Book Name : Archeology Code : Natural grey Design : Curtis Sky
Code : 3028 Code : 1292
Company : Atmosphere Company : Drape Shoppe Company : Pure

Product: Equus Collection : Essentials 42 - Product: Essentials 30
Book Name : Garden Party Yashvi Category: Caledonia Graphite
Code : 3024 Design : Yashvi Ink Code : 110038
Code : 114029
Part-B
Page 430
Ground Floor – Minister’s Chamber
Overall three seater sofa

S-SF-19_MI-OF
Three Seater Sofa
Company : Atmosphere Company : Pure Company : Drape Shoppe
Product: Equus Product: Essentials 30 Collection : Essentials 42 – Yashvi
Category: Commercial Upholstery Category: Caledonia Spruce Design : Yashvi Lagoon
Code : 3025 Code : 110017 Code : 114025
S-CH-27_MI-OF
S-SF-20_MI-OF Visitor’s Chair
Single Seater Sofa Overall chair
Overall Sofa Selection 1 ( Preferred )
Company : Atmosphere Company : Vaya Company : Pure Concept

Company : Atmosphere
Product: Glimpse Design : Bel Air Collection : Wabi Sabi Plains
Product: Parti-colored Book Name : Archeology Code : Natural grey Design : Curtis Sky
Category: Domestic Upholstery Code : 3028 Code : 1292
Code : 3799 Part-B
Page 431
Ground Floor – PPS Cabin

Company : Pure by Asian Paints Company : Vaya Company : FabricHaus

Collection : Cosmo Collection : Kasturi Collection : FabricHaus
S-SF-12_AJS-PA Design : Jermyn Biscotti Design : Birch Design : Grotto Echo
Two Seater Sofa Code : 111301 Code : 60567
Both the overall chairs

S-SF-13_MI-PA
Visitor’s Chair
Company : Pure by Asian Paints Company : Fabric care by Company : Drape Shoppe
Collection : Cosmo D Décor Collection : Essentials 42
Design : Norman Grey Design : Vivienne 01 – Yashvi
Code : 111302 Shade : 2221 Design : Yashvi Gravel
Code : 114035
S-SF-13_MI-PA
Visitor’s Chair Part-B
Page 432
Ground Floor – Minister’s Office : Reception

S-SF-17_MI-RC
Two Seater Sofa
Company : Atmosphere Company - The Pure Concept Company : Vaya
Product: Vintage Touch Collection – Wabi Sabi Plains Design : Bel Air
Book Name : Urban Living Product – Curtis Fossil Code : Natural grey
Code : 3518 Code – 1301
S-SF-18_MI-RC
Four Seater Sofa
Overall four seater sofa

Company : Atmosphere Company - The Pure Concept Company : Vaya

Product: Vintage Touch Collection – Wabi Sabi Plains Design : Bel Air
Book Name : Urban Living Product – Curtis Fossil Code : Natural grey Part-B
Code : 3518 Code – 1301 Page 433
Ground Floor – MOS
Overall seater sofa

S-SF-03_SC-OF
Three Seater Sofa
Company : Atmosphere Company : Drape Shoppe Company : Pure
Product: Midstream Collection : Essentials 42 Collection : Essentials 12
Category: Domestic Upholstery : Yashvi : Matka
Code : 3993 Design : Yashvi teracotta Design : Matka carrot
Code : 114016 Code : 104732
S-CH-07_SC-OF
Visitor’s Chair
Overall Chair
Overall seater sofa S-SF-05_SC-OF, S-SF-04_SC-OF
Selection 1 ( Preferred ) Single Seater Sofa
Company : Atmosphere Company : Drape Shoppe Company : Vaya

Product: Moss Field Collection : Essentials 42 Design : Bel Air Company : Atmosphere Company : Drape Shoppe Company : Pure
Color : Mustang Product: Midstream Collection : Essentials 12
Category: Domestic : Yashvi Collection : Essentials 42
upholstery Design : Yashvi Mahogany Category: Domestic Upholstery : Yashvi : Matka
Code : 806 Code : 114010 Code : 3993 Design : Yashvi teracotta Design : Matka carrot
Part-B Code : 114016 Code : 104732
Page 434
Ground Floor – Support Staff
S-SF-02_DIR-OF
Two Seater Sofa
S-SF-01_DIR-OF
Visitor’s Chair
S-SF-09_MOS-PA
Four seater sofa
Furniture
S-SF-31_RC
Two seater sofa
Both the overall sofas Both overall chair and sofa

Company : Pure Company : Ador by Company : Pure

Collection : Amelia Asian Paints Collection : Essentials 9 Company : D DÉCOR Company : Ador by Company : Drape Shoppe
Design : Lutum Sea Collection : Chelmsford II - Phantom Collection : Fabric Care Asian Paints Collection : Essentials 42 –
Code : 103526 Design : Benito Design : Clarke India Ink Design : Vivienne 21 Collection : Chelmsford II Yashvi
Code : 102736 Code : 2183 Design : Amherst Design : Yashvi Mocha
Code : CHEB002 Part-B
Code : AMH0014 Code : 114013
Page 435
Construction of Common Central Secretariat (Building - 13) at New Delhi
PURPLE CATEGORY: FURNITURE DATASHEETS - CENTRAL SECRETARIAT

9th September 2023 (R0)
PROJECT
RUDRAKSH DRAWN
DRAWING NUMBER: DATE: 09.09.2023 DESIGN MANAGE INTERIOR NIMMI M.
DADHEECH BY:
MANAGER: R: ARCHITECT:
MAHESH PROJECT RAKESH BHAGYASHRE

STATU T: FOR CHECKED PRIYANKA
19052-11-00-ID-DS-I001 TENDER IYER DETAILER RAJPUT/ E H.
S: BY: P.
: ALPESH PATEL
Submitted to
Report created by

Part-B
Page 436
Construction of Common Central Secretariat (Building - 13)
Purple category: Furniture Datasheets - Central Secretariat
This document is part of the furniture package for preparation of Tender for
Construction of Common Central Secretariat (Building – 13) in New Delhi.
This document illustrates the details and data for all furniture for preparation of Tender purpose only.
Submitted to
Report created by

Part-B
Page 437
CENTRAL VISTA – CENTRAL SECRETARIAT
PREFIX
C – CASE GOOD
FURNITURE CODING FORMAT
S – SEATING
E
B
–
–
FURNITURE ACCESSORIES
BEDS
S-CH-01_OF
K – KITCHEN EQUIPMENTS
PREFIX FURNITURE SERIAL AREA
TYPE NO. CODE
FURNITURE TYPE AREA CODE

CH – CHAIR RC – RECEPTION
SF – SOFA PA – PA ROOM
OT – OTTOMAN ST – STAFF ROOM
TB – TABLE AR – ANTE ROOM
DK – DESK PR – PANTRY
WS – WORKSTATION WH – WORKHALL
CT – CONFERENCE TABLE DIR – DIRECTOR
CO – CONSOLE/CREDENZA OF – OFFICE
SU – STORAGE UNIT MI – MINISTER
HG – COAT HANGER SC – SECRETARY
KC – KITCHEN CABINET SM – STATE MINISTER
DI - DIWAN AJS – ADDITIONAL / JOINT SECRETARY
BH - BENCH MTS – MULTI TASKING SPACE
WB - WRITING BOARD LB1 – LIFT LOBBY 1
DT - DISCUSSION TABLE LB2 – LIFT LOBBY 2
CM - COMPACTOR WA – WORKHALL
LC - LECTERN CB – CABIN
MI - MIRROR CR2 – CONFERENCE ROOM 2
JC - JANITOR CLOSET CA – COMMON AREA
PT - PHONE TABLE CF1 – CAFÉ (FIRST FLOOR)
CP - COMPUTER TABLE IN PRINTER ROOM CF – CAFÉ (GROUND FLOOR)
WR - WASTE RECEPTACLE SW - SOUTH WING
SS - STORAG SPACE NW - NORTH WING
ST - STOOL WT – WAITING
DB - DAY BED TT – TABLE TENNIS – RECREATIONAL AREA
PL - PLATFORM CO – CORRIDOR
SI - SPECIAL ITEM RA – RECREATIONAL AREA
PB - PATIENT BED LR – LOCKER ROOM
TC - TACK BOARD YR – YOGA ROOM
TY - TOYS CR-RA – CRECHE – RECREATIONAL AREA
FR – FOOTREST MR-RA– MUSIC ROOM – RECREATIONAL AREA
DU – DUSTBIN GR-RA – GAME ROOM – RECREATIONAL AREA
MR - MAGAIZE RACK DR – DRIVER’S LOUNGE
VU – VANITY UNIT GR – GYM – RECREATIONAL AREA
TR - TROLLEY CO – COURTYARD
EB - EXERCISE BALL SB – SECURITY BLOCK
TI – TOILET / WASHROOM AREA
VW - VIP WAITING
FCC - FIRE COMMAND CENTER
MH - MULTIPURPOSE HALL
ES - EXHIBITION SPACE
LG - LOUNGE
MR - MEDICAL ROOM
MASTER FURNITURE CODING FORMAT AND NOTES

Part-B
Page 438
SPECIAL NOTES :
CONTEXT
• Longer history of hand crafted furniture & Expertise in solid wood furniture, Non modular company shall be eligible for
this category.
• These custom made items are signature furniture pieces, shall have high amount of detailing and very high quality of
craftsmanship work required.
• These furniture shall be developed and executed as per the drawing and specification issued by the Architect or up to
the satisfaction of the EIC.
• These furniture shall be durable, sturdy, ergonomic & comfortable.
• These furniture are especially designed and made for this project hence it shall not be reproduced in any
circumstances.
INSTRUCTION
• The unit shall be manufactured in parts at factory outlet and these parts shall be assembled at site.
• Contractor shall be responsible for the stability (Additional member for structural stability in wood, metal, etc.),
ergonomic & comfort of all furniture items.
• All power outlets to be coordinated with Electrical drawings & implemented in prototype development.
• All electric equipment / ELV requirements to be coordinated with respective drawings.
• All measurements must be checked and verified by the contractors prior to execution of work.
• Mortice and Tenon Joint for Joinery and Woodworking wherever required for the furniture items.
• Any colored image are indicative only.
• Artificial leather upholstery requires a details and consideration for air to escape.
MATERIAL & HARDWARE REMARK/REFERENCE

• All veneer & Laminate shall be fixed with adhesive on Hot press machine only.
• The thickness of Smoke Glass in drawer front shall be minimum 5mm thick & 12mm thick for table top, pencil polished
edges.
• The lipping shall be fixed with adhesive on hot press machine only.
• Every shutter shall have at least one hinge for every 20 inches in height.
• Enlisted are the Lock typology for the furniture
• Automatic door bolt Catches and locks
• “Right angle receiver Plate” shall be used with all Regular Locks for the small cabinetry storage system.
• Pedestal Lock for multiple drawer systems.
• Multipurpose lock for the single shutter and drawer unit.
• All lock shall have a “master key per cabin/office”
• All Channel shall be premium quality undermount / Quadro silent soft close “full extension/with Push to open” for the
drawer as per the approved make.
• Furniture door/Shutter Silent System / Push to open system & Hinges premium quality soft close Auto Hinges shall be
used as per the approved make
• All Material & Hardware shall be got approved prior to procurement and shall be from the approved make list only.
Part-B
Page 439
FURNITURE CATEGORIES
• The total furniture package has been subdivided into four subdivided packages.
• For ease of use and search they are colour coded.
Purple category: Bespoke Furniture Designed by Consultant for Secretariat Building.

• This is an exclusive collection for select prime areas. Design has been specially developed for
the Central Secretariat Project.
• Experts on solid wood Furniture will be engaged for this category.
• Prototype in parts and full pieces will be necessary.
• Embellishment through lacquer work, carving, CNC, grooving & inlay may be necessary.
• Design development by the expert will be necessary.
Orange category: Branded manufacturer with Design Intent Provided By Consultant.

• Project demanded to create furniture products that incorporate certain requirements and
flexibility.
• Datasheets define, describe and illustrate the design intent.
• We expect Furniture brands, expert in modular systems to make the design development and
shop drawings, attend Discussions, prepare virtual mock-up , prepare off site mock-ups for
this category.
• In this category furniture pieces will work in clusters to have the same brand doing objects
that works with each other.
• Sub-categories are defined to bring vendors that have expertise as with material, facility and
learned knowledge.
Green category: Case goods to fit site dimensions: Storage and wall panels.
• Repeat items on site against partition walls, in alcoves or to create a partitions.
• This furniture will be thought as modular, easy to install with least amount of assembly time.
• Residues will be handled with filler panel if required.
• Paneling will have, a system to anchor, hang and fit.
• It requires furniture brands that think in system, modules and know ease of installation.
Yellow category: Bought Out Furniture – Selection Direct From Company’s Available Catalogue
• It is bought out furniture with change in size, finish, colour of material, to suite the project.
Part-B
Page 440
SPECIAL NOTES :
Detail reference for Chair upholstery
Chair
- Task chair
- Dining chair
- Visitor chair
- Security chair
Material Notes:
- Jalebi Spring

width
Seat Cushion:
fixed on the seat frame with screws..
- Jute Niwar patti of 2” springs perpendicular movement as
width having 3mm shown in diagram. Rassi to be stapled to
thickness , 50 GSM the seat frame.
pinholes
- 37mm 50 Density
- 19mm 50 Density
- 62mm 50 Density

- 18mm, 32 Density
- 6mm, soft foam - Assembly to be covered with jute burlap /
gunny and stapled to the seat frame.
- 18mm 32D foam packing
- 150 GSM 6mm, 12mm - Seat: 1.5” Natural Latex Rubber + ¾”
thick Fibre Packing / Recron Rubber Walling on the sides + 6mm foam
on the 3 sides
- Mill madarpaat /
panna size 60”, of 150 32D

be reviewed case by case Part-B
Page 441
SPECIAL NOTES :
Detail reference for Sofa / Chair upholstery
- Back: Jute Niwar webbing. Edges stapled
Chair to the back frame. Gap of 1”x1” to be
provided between the horizontal and
- Task chair vertical pattis.
- Dining chair - Gunny (Jute Burlap) stapled to the frame
- Visitor chair - 1 layer of 150 GSM fiber packing
- Security chair - Back: 1 ½” 32 Density Foam
Layer notes: - Side of the Back: 6mm foam
- Top of the Back: ½” Foam Walling
Back Cushion:
32D

Typical Section:
PLY
32D
32D
PLY
The layer of 150 GSM Fiber and Madarpat to be The layer of 150 GSM Fiber and
added between layer 5 and 6 (Before the Madarpat to be added between
application of final fabric) layer 3 and 4 (Before the
application of final fabric)
Part-B
Page 442
SPECIAL NOTES :
Detail reference for Sofa upholstery
Sofa

Material Notes:

width having 3mm
thickness , 50 GSM
- Zig zag Spring - 9

gauge Layer notes:
Seat Cushion:
- Seat: zig zag Spring equally distanced
fixed on the seat frame with screws with
leather piece below. Frame is slightly
chamfered for movement of spring
burlap / DWD canvas of 45”
width
- Springs to be tied with jute Rassi to hold
the springs perpendicular movement as
shown in diagram. Rassi to be stapled to
the seat frame.
pinholes
- 37mm 50 Density
- 19mm 50 Density
- 62mm 50 Density

- 18mm, 50 Density
- 6mm, soft foam

- 5” 50D foam (regular) tapered to get

desired slope
- 3” pinhole natural latex rubber
- Mill madarpaat /
- 1” super soft foam (24D)
- 1 layer of 150 GSM fiber walling on front
and back
- Entire assembly covered with manjarpat

Part-B
Page 443
SPECIAL NOTES :
Detail reference for Sofa / Chair upholstery
Type of Furniture:
Sofa

Layer notes:
Back Cushion:
- 45D high resistant foam tapered on top

to get desired slope
- 1” thick supersoft on zero point (24D)
- 1 layer of 150 GSM fiber
- 25mm 32D foam (regular) on all four
sides

Typical Section:
32D
The layer of Madarpat to be added The layer of Madarpat to be added

between layer 6 and 7 (Before the between layer 3 and 4 (Before the
application of final fabric) application of final fabric)
Part-B
Page 444
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SEATING
Datasheets
CASE GOODS
Datasheets
Part-B
Page 445
DRG. NO.: 19052-11-00-ID-DS-I103-T00.1 CENTRAL VISTA | CENTRAL SECRETARIAT - 13
Code: Item: Dimension:
S-CH-36_MI-AR S-CH-07_SC-OF VISITOR CHAIR L 560mm | 22" SH 457 mm|18”
S-CH-27_MI-OF S-CH-96_CR2 W 582mm | 22.9" AH 635mm | 25"
S-CH-92_CR H 880mm | 34.64"
S-CH-53_MH-SW
Product Images:
DRG. NAME S-CH-36_MI-AR S-CH-07_SC-OF DATE 09.09.2023 Design Manager Project Manager Rudraksh Dadheech Interior Architect Drawn by Nimmi Mehta
S-CH-28_MI-OF S-CH-96_CR2
VISITOR CHAIR S-CH-06_SC-OF S-CH-92_CR STATUS E Mahesh Iyer Project Detailer Rakesh Rajput, Bhagyashree H. Checked Priyanka Parmar
Alpesh patel by
REVISION - R0.
E: FOR EXECUTION HCP Design, Planning and Management Pvt. Ltd, India
Part-B
Page 446
Finish / Color : Product Data:
WOOD: Superior class teak wood to match Walnut.

UPHOLSTERY to be as per approved make or shade.
Product Data:
• Chair in solid wood arms and legs with exposed seat

frame.
• Seat and back cushioned and upholstered.
• Seat & Back: To be made from IS 710 Grade ply as per
the approved design and pattern.
• Lining/upholstery work: - The stitching work shall be as
per the approved design and pattern. The high density
moulded (polyurethane /Latex) foam work shall be used
in chair. Top layer shall be of polyester fibre 130 GSM to
150 GSM. The whole assembly to be covered
“Madarpat” and on it tapestry of approved make and
shade to be fixed as per reference intent / image.
used.
• Polish: Exterior Grade water Base PU polish on all
surfaces of wood.
S-CH-06_SC-OF S-CH-92_CR STATUS E Mahesh Iyer Project Detailer Rakesh Rajput, Bhagyashree H. Checked Priyanka Parmar
VISITOR CHAIR
Alpesh patel by
REVISION - R0.
E: FOR EXECUTION
Part-B HCP Design, Planning and Management Pvt. Ltd, India
Page 447
Detail Images :
Back to have provision

of pull handle in SW
member, for easy
handling of armchair.
Round edges shall be of
atleast 1/16”.Member
to be smooth and
ergonomically tested for
the same.
Front horizontal SW
member joint with the
legs to be tenon-mortise
woodwork.
SW round tapering leg with varied cross

section . The rear leg is at an angle allowing
the chair to be stable.
Reference images :
Upholstery stitching to be without

welt, as per reference image
S-CH-06_SC-OF S-CH-92_CR STATUS E Mahesh Iyer Project Detailer Rakesh Rajput, Bhagyashree H. Checked Priyanka Parmar
VISITOR CHAIR
Alpesh patel by
REVISION - R0.
Part-B HCP Interior Design Pvt. Ltd, India
Page 448
S-SF-20_MI-OF, SINGLE SEATER L 890 mm | 35” AH 660 mm | 25.98”
S-SF-05_SC-OF, SOFA B 770 mm I 30.3” SH 430mm | 17"
S-SF-04_SC-OF H 815 mm | 32”
Product Images:
DRG. NAME S-SF-20_MI-OF, S-SF- DATE 09.09.2023 Design Manager Project Manager Rudraksh Dadheech Interior Architect Drawn by Nimmi Mehta
05_SC-OF, S-SF-04_SC-OF
SINGLE SEATER SOFA STATUS E Mahesh Iyer Project Detailer Rakesh Rajput, Bhagyashree H. Checked Priyanka Parmar
Alpesh patel by
REVISION - R0.
Part-B
Page 449

Product Data:
• The single seater sofa with solid teak wood exposed
frame structure.
• Arm , back & leg shall be made of Solid wood with high
quality turned wood pattern as per reference images.
• The wooden frame structure shall have “turned wood”
created by rotating a wood dowel on a “lathe” machine as
per the mentioned pattern in solid wood in both side Arms
of the seating unit.
• Seat & Back frame structure to be made from Solid
wood.
• The seat, back and sides to be cushioned with
upholstery work.
• The seat to be fixed using Velcro tape.
surfaces of wood.
per the approved design and pattern. Sofa spring or
Madras spring to be fixed on seat framing work.
Ergonomic required density latex foam and polyurethane
foam shall be used in back and seat of the unit. Top layer
shall be polyester fibre used in the seat, sides and back
130 GSM to 150 GSM or as per required comfort level. The
whole assembly to be covered "Madarpat" and on it
tapestry of approved make and shade to be fixed.
seasoned, treated for anti-termite, selected and sorted for
• Sofa Glides: High quality glides of approved make shall
be used.
Alpesh patel by
REVISION - R0.
E: FOR EXECUTION
Page 450
Detail Images :
The arm rest design to be as per

the reference image/approved
The front legs of the sofa will have circular sections of
sample. The SW turned member
varied diameters and lengths as per approved design.
are of 1 1/4” dia.
Reference images :
Seat shall have piping as per reference image.
Seat to have 1/2” slope Back angle slope shall be 10-15 degree for
better comfort and ergonomics.
Alpesh patel by
REVISION - R0.
Page 451
S-SF-19_MI-OF THREE SEATER L 2100mm | 82.68" AH 660 mm | 25.98”
S-SF-03_SC-OF SOFA B 785mm | 30.90” SH 430mm | 17"
H 810mm | 32”
Product Images:
DRG. NAME S-SF-19_MI-OF, DATE 09.09.2023 Design Manager Project Manager Rudraksh Dadheech Interior Architect Drawn by Nimmi Mehta
S-SF-03_SC-OF, THREE SEATER SOFA
STATUS E Mahesh Iyer Project Detailer Rakesh Rajput, Bhagyashree H. Checked Priyanka Parmar
Alpesh patel by
REVISION - R0.
Part-B
Page 452

Product Data:
• Three seater sofa with solid teak wood exposed frame

structure.
• Arm , back & leg shall be made of Solid wood with high
quality turned wood member as per reference images.
• The wooden frame structure shall have “turned
wood” created by rotating a wood dowel on a “lathe”
machine as per the mentioned pattern in solid wood in
both side Arms of the seating unit.
• Seat & Back frame structure to be made from Solid
wood.
• The seat, back and sides to be cushioned with
upholstery work.
• The seat to be fixed using Velcro tape.
surfaces of wood.
per the approved design and pattern. Sofa spring or
Madras spring to be fixed on seat framing work.
Ergonomic required density latex foam and
polyurethane foam shall be used in back and seat of the
unit. Top layer shall be polyester fibre used in the seat,
sides and back 130 GSM to 150 GSM or as per required
comfort level. The whole assembly to be covered
"Madarpat" and on it tapestry of approved make and
shade to be fixed.
• Sofa Glides: High quality glides of approved make shall
be used.
Alpesh patel by
REVISION - R0.
E: FOR EXECUTION
Page 453
Detail Images :
The arm rest design to be as per

the reference image/approved
The front legs of the sofa will have circular sections of sample. The SW turned member
varied diameters and lengths as per approved design. are of 1 1/4” dia.
Reference images :
Seat shall have piping as per reference image.
Seat to have 1/2” slope Back angle slope shall be 10-15 degree for
better comfort and ergonomics.
Alpesh patel by
REVISION - R0.
Page 454
C-TB-55_MI-AR DINNING TA- D 775 mm | 30.5”
BLE H 710 mm | 27.95"
Product Images:
DRG. NAME C-TB-55_MI-AR DATE 09.09.2023 Design Manager Project Manager Rudraksh Dadheech Interior Architect Drawn by Nimmi Mehta
DINNING TABLE STATUS E Mahesh Iyer Project Detailer Rakesh Rajput, Bhagyashree H. Checked Priyanka Parmar
Alpesh patel by
REVISION - R0.
Part-B
Page 455
Product Data:
FORM
• The circular table top shall be made of solid wood /
Veneer finish, sub base shall be IS 710 Grade ply + solid
wood beading as per the reference image.
• Supporting frame & leg crafted in solid wood as per the
reference image.
MATERIAL
• Veneer: 4.00 mm thick Veneer (0.6 MM Core layer on
gurjan ply base) carefully selected range & group
matched of premium natural wood veneers with
HARDWARE
• Glides: Glides of approved make shall be used.
FINISH
surfaces of wood.
DRG. NAME C-TB-55_MI-AR DATE 09.09.2023 Design Manager Project Manager Rudraksh Dadheech Interior Architect Drawn by Nimmi Mehta
DINNING TABLE STATUS E Mahesh Iyer Project Detailer Rakesh Rajput, Bhagyashree H. Checked Priyanka Parmar
Alpesh patel by
REVISION - R0.
Page 456
C-TB-26_MI-OF, SIDE TABLE L 500 mm | 19.68”
C-TB-23_MI-OF, W 500 mm | 19.68”
C-TB-14_MI-AR, H 610 mm | 24.05"
C-TB-04_SC-OF
Product Images:
DRG. NAME C-TB-26_MI-OF, DATE 09.09.2023 Design Manager Project Manager Rudraksh Dadheech Interior Architect Drawn by Nimmi Mehta
C-TB-23_MI-OF,
SIDE TABLEC-TB-14_MI-AR, STATUS E Mahesh Iyer Project Detailer Rakesh Rajput, Bhagyashree H. Checked Priyanka Parmar
C-TB-04_SC-OF, Alpesh patel by
REVISION - R0.
Part-B
Page 457

GLASS: Smoked glass of approved thickness.
Product Data:
FORM
• The Side table top shall be of toughened Smoke glass
of 8 mm thickness to be flushed with the adjacent of
wooden top or fixed on the wooden member .
STRUCTURE
• The base shelve shall be made of solid teak wood
ribbed pattern as per the reference image.
• The side Table shall be made of solid wood frame as
MATERIAL
HARDWARE
FINISH
surfaces of wood.
C-TB-23_MI-OF,
REVISION - R0.
Page 458
Detail Images :
The base shelve framework shall be of 1”x1/4” The table top shall be of 8mm thick Smoked glass of
members. SW members 1 1/2” x 1/2” thick approved make and shade. The edges to be flushed with
battern with gap of 3/4”.The members to have a the bottom SW member. The glass to be fixed with
8x8mm cutout pattern like design on both sides spacers with the SW member with 1/8” gap at the top.
to be as per the reference image/detail All the Glass corners to be rounded for safe and better
drawings. usage.
All wooden edges to be rounded by at least 1/16” as per
reference image.
Reference images :
Legs shall have Vertical grooves of 1/4” as per

the reference image/detail line drawings.
The Side table to be mounted on buffers /glides
of approved make.
C-TB-23_MI-OF,
REVISION - R0.
Page 459
C-TB-25_MI-OF CENTER TABLE L 1100 mm|43.30”"
C-TB-03_SC-OF, W 550 mm |21.65”
H 380 mm |14.96”
Product Images:
DRG. NAME C-TB-25_MI-OF, DATE 09.09.2023

26.06.2023 Design Manager Project Manager Rudraksh Dadheech Interior Architect Drawn by Nimmi Mehta
C-TB-03_SC-OF, CENTER TABLE STATUS E Mahesh Iyer Project Detailer Rakesh Rajput, Bhagyashree H. Checked Priyanka Parmar
Alpesh patel by
REVISION - R0.
Part-B
Page 460

GLASS: Smoked glass of approved thickness.
Product Data:
FORM
• The Center table top shall be of toughened Smoke
glass of thickness 8 mm, flushed with the adjacent of
wooden top or fixed on the wooden member .
STRUCTURE
• The base shelve shall be made of solid teak wood
ribbed pattern as per the reference image.
• The center Table shall be made of solid wood frame as
MATERIAL
HARDWARE
FINISH
surfaces of wood.

Alpesh patel by
REVISION - R0.
Page 461
Detail Images :
The base shelve frame will be 1”x 3/4” Solid The table top shall be of Smoked glass of 8 mm
wood with 12 mm thick solid teak wood battern thickness flushed with the adjacent of wooden
as per the line drawing. top or fixed on the wooden member .
The wooden member to have 1/8” groove at the
top.
Reference images :
Legs shall have 1/2” Groove as per the reference

image/line drawing

Alpesh patel by
REVISION - R0.
Page 462

Part+B+Civil+Component+Page+1 462 (1)

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Part+B+Civil+Component+Page+1 462 (1)

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

NameofWork:C/oCommonCentralSecretariat-13 on plot 138, Mansingh Road,

New Delhi including Operation & Maintenance for 5 years.

1. Engagement of Associates for Specialized works other than Furniture:

The value of executed works shall be brought to current costing level by

1.2. The Contractor shall submit documents in support of experience of proposed

1.3. In case Engineer-in-charge is satisfied that the Specialized Agencies with

1.8. Specialized Items of Work (Civil): Various specialized items of works

(a) Diaphragm Wall

(a) Water proofing treatment

4.1. It shall be responsibility of the Contractor to ensure correct setting out of

4.2. Permanent Benchmarks: Contractor shall provide permanent bench marks,

5.5. For self-compacting concrete, contractor shall provide shuttering system

5.6. Water stop tie rods should be used.

7. Site Office for CPWD

7.2. The contractor shall also provide 4 numbers of standalone desktops/laptops

8. Barricading of Construction site & Maintenance of adjoining areas:

8.3. The barricading shall be aesthetically maintained by regular cleaning and

9.2. Method Statement:

9.4. Sample Preparation and Mock up units at site:

9.6. Maintenance of Tests and Material Procurement Records:

(a) Maintenance of Register of Tests- All tests carried out at

9.7. Shop Drawings:

10. Measurement of existing features or ground levels:

11. Soil stabilization/protection:

11.1. Contractor shall take appropriate precautions to avoid sliding/collapsing of

12. Excavation around Heritage Structures:

12.2. Contractor shall maintain documentation and photographs of condition of

14.1. The underground/subsoil water level indicated in Geotechnical report is

14.2. Contractor shall design, install and operate an appropriate dewatering

14.8. Contractor shall arrange for disposal of water, discharged by dewatering

14.10. If contractor has to execute any work/activity in or under water and/or

15. Recesses, Holes, Openings:

16. Special Condition for Cement

17. Special Condition for Reinforcement Steel

17.1. For reinforced cement concrete or pre-stressed concrete works, the

Tolerances on Nominal Mass:

S.No. Nominal size in mm Tolerance on the Nominal Mass,

Batch Individual Individual

i) upto and including 10 ±7 -8 ±8

ii) Over 10 up to and ±5 -6 ±6

* For individual sample plus tolerance is not specified.

** For coils batch tolerance is not specified

18. Reinforcement coupler/Mechanical splice: - Reinforcement couplers that shall

18.1. Mechanical Splicing System shall be based on the following:

(a) Mechanical splicing system with Parallel threaded couplers

The test results shall be submitted to the Engineer-in-Charge for acceptance

GUARANTEE BOND TO BE EXECUTED BY THE CONTRACTOR FOR REMOVAL OF

The Agreement made this ....................... day of ....................... two thousand

That if GUARANTOR fails to execute the water proofing or commits breach

STONE WORK/ STRUCTURAL GLAZING-CURTAIN WALL/ MODULAR SYSTEM

The Agreement made this ....................... day of ....................... two thousand

FIRE CHECK DOORS ASSEMBLY

The Agreement made this ....................... day of ....................... two thousand

The Agreement made this ....................... day of ....................... two thousand

WHEREAS this agreement is supplementary to a contract (hereinafter called the

4. Controlled Low Strength Material (CLSM)

5.10 Ultrasonic Pulse Velocity Method of Test for RCC

(b) In addition, doubtful areas such as honeycombed locations, locations

Sl. Pulse velocity by Cross Probing Concrete Quality

Note: In case of “Doubtful” quality, it may be necessary to conduct

5.11 COVER BLOCKS

6.4 Dry Stone Cladding Work

(c) Under Cut Anchor: The undercut anchor / fastener shall be of

(e) Workmanship: Stone fixing system shall be with undercut anchors,